Skip to main content

Full text of "CSUF Course Catalogs 1959-2007"

See other formats


California 
State 
UniL/0fsitL/ 
FULLERTON 
1974 - 1975 





CALIFORNIA 

STATE 

UNIVERSITY 

FULLERTON 


GENERAL 
CATALOG 74-75 


FULLERTON, CALIFORNIA 92634 



2 


THIS CATALOG 

Within this catalog may be found general academic and administrative information as well as specific 
descriptions of the departments, their majors and the courses offered/in each. The first major part 
contains orienting information such as the calendar, materials on The California State University and 
Colleges, an overview of Cal State Fullerton and facts about student services and activities on the 
campus. 

The subsequent sections of the catalog are concerned with: admission, registration, records and 
regulations; academic advisement; and university courses. The next sections, organized by schools 
and divisions, describe the departments and the programs of study and courses they offer. The final 
part of the catalog contains directories: a listing of individuals and groups participating in the 
governance of the university and with information on advisory councils, auxiliary organizations, and 
the faculty and administration. An index can be found at the end to help the reader locate specific 
items he needs or wishes to know about. 

Because this catalog must be prepared well ahead of the academic year it covers, changes in some 
programs and rules occur. The Class Schedule and subsequent errata sheets are the final authority 
in regard to classes offered, instructors and revisions of regulations. This publication can be bought 
for a small fee from the Titan Bookstore. 

Through the assistance of the Department of Art, William Hartshorn has done the graphic work on 
this catalog. Kim Barbee has taken most of the photographs. The final organizing and editing was 
done by Dottle Drechsler and William Baron in the Office of Academic Services and Ruth Pecsok 
and jerry Keating in the Office of Public Affairs. 


NOTICE 


The Board of Trustees of The California State University and Colleges, in Section 43800 of Title 5 
of the California Administrative Code, has reserved the right to add, amend or repeal any of its 
regulations, rules, resolutions, standing orders, and rules of procedures, in whole or in part, at such 
time as it may choose. None shall be construed, op)erate as or have the effect of an abridgement 
or limitation of any rights, powers or privileges of the Trustees. The chancellor reserves the right to 
add, amend or repeal any of his executive orders, at such time as he may choose, and the president 
of California State University, Fullerton reserves the right to add, amend or repeal provisions of this 
catalog and rules of the university, including handbooks, at such time as he may choose. No 
executive order shall be construed, of^erate as or have the effect of an abridgement or limitation 
of any rights, powers or privileges of the president. 



All material herein is subject to change without prior notice 
Effective Date: September 3, 1974 


21—33 10 105 


3 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 


GENERAL INFORMATION— Cal State Fullerton Calendar 6, The California 
State University and Colleges 9, Cal State Fullerton: An Overview 10, Student 
Services 22. 


ADMISSION, REGISTRATION, RECORDS AND REGULATIONS— Admis- 
sion to the University 32, Registration 43, Records and Regulations 47. 

DEGREE REQUIREMENTS— Bachelor's Degree 56, Master's Degrees 59 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT— 66 
UNIVERSITY CURRICULA— 72 
SCHOOL OF THE ARTS— 80 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS— 1 18 
CROSS-DISCIPLINARY UNIVERSITY PROGRAMS— 146 
SCHOOL OF EDUCATION— 164 

DIVISION OF HEALTH EDUCATION, PHYSICAL EDUCATION, 
RECREATION AND ATHLETICS— 192 

SCHOOL OF HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES— 202 

DIVISION OF LIBRARY SCIENCE— 314 

SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS, SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING- 318 

DIRECTORIES— Trustees 376, Office of the Chancellor 377, Campuses 378, Cal 
State Fullerton 380, Auxiliary Organizations 395, Cooperating Teachers 399, 
Faculty and Administration 401, Index 430. 


19—19 12 95 








. ./■ ■ 


•■ •'-^j' ; i* ’ i > ' ' 


. " 'Vr 






r.:' 


'*5. "t/v ;} ,v :',>!A ?ojio.Hs 




■ ■■ ■' '■■: . V-, ■*' 'v' ---v’ii^/ 

' ‘ ■ ■ - ~vr'“'. vv^t', ' 


■'- " • ■ '; ■' ■ ■'. .':'‘.l'-:li^'" 

^•'-- 'Al'J >';«R!.v-3 xtij^\ 




(;C . ?T^ 5 >^ 5 HT >?( 

-■ '-<■'■{ ' ;i-"' 

. - ... ' ’■•il ,*' >tK'' ■ 


t:,--, t htaa.,^. ■ 

-g.Vrr.t ;Vi r '. ,7^1 y, 




:''■ '■.'U 


r ■'■ : 

ft -. 


, y - '-A. ( '*■ ■ 






I 


GENERAL 

INFORMATION 




CAL STATE FULLERTON CALENDAR 
FOR 1974-75 


1974 


JUNE 

JULY 

AUGUST 

SEPTEMBER 

S M T W T F S 

S M T W T F S 

S M T W T F S 

S M T W T F S 

1 

12 3 0 5 6 

1 2 3 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

7 8 9 10 fru 13 

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 

16 17 16 19 20 21 22 

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 

30 

28 29 30 31 

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 

29 30 

OCTOBER 

NOVEMBER 

DECEMBER 

JANUARY 

S M T W T F S 

S M T W T F S 

S M T W T F S 

S M T W T F S 

1 2 3 4 5 

T 2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

12 3 4 

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 
24 25 26 27128 29130 

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 

27 28 29 30 31 

29 30 31 

26 27 28 29 30 31 

FEBRUARY 

MARCH 

APRIL 

MAY 

S M T W T F S 

S M T W T F S 

S M T W T F S 

S M T W T F S 

1 

1 

1 2 3 4 5 

1 2 3 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 

16 0 18 19 20 21 22 

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

23 24 25 26 27 28 * 

23r?r7rj6l7 28l29 

27 28 29 30 

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 

lUNE 

lUlY 

AUGUST 


S M T W T F S 

S M T W T F S 

S M T W T F S 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

1 2 3 m 5 

1 2 


8 9 10 11 12 13 14 

6 7 8 9 10 IT 12 

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 


15 16 17 18 19 20 21 

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 


22 23 24 25 26 27 28 

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 


29 30 

27 28 29 30 31 

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 

31 



1975 

Classes 

Holidays 


25--33 10 125 


7 


SUMMER SESSION 1974 


June 10, Monday Twelve weeks of instruction begins. Registration and classes 

july 4, Thursday Independence Day holiday — campus closed 

August 1, Thursday FHing period opens for application to the spring semester 

1975 

August 30, Friday Summer session instruction ends; effective date of graduation 

for those completing requirements 


FALL SEMESTER 1974 


November 1973 

Initial period for filing applications for admission to the fall semester 1974 began for all 
students and former students not in attendance during the spring semester 1974. 


September 2, Monday Labor Day holiday — campus closed 

September 3, Tuesday Academic year begins. Advisement, orientation and registra- 

tion begins. See Oass Schedule for details 

September 7, Saturday Last day to register without late registration fee. Application 

deadline for baccalaureate degree candidates for graduation, 
june 1975 and August 1975, and for January 1975 master's 
degree candidates to request a graduation check 

September 9, Monday Instruction begins. Admissions Day — campus open 


September 17-18, Tuesday-Wednes- 

day (Sundown to sundown) Rosh Hashanah — campus open 

September 25-26, Wednesday-Thurs- 

day (Sundown to sundown) Yom Kippur — campus op)en 

October 14, Monday Columbus Day — campus open 

November 1, Friday Filing p)eriod opens for applications to the fall semester 1975 

November 5, Tuesday Election Day — campus open 

November 1 1 , Monday Veterans' Day — campus open 

November 28-29, Thursday-Friday ....Thanksgiving recess — campus closed 

December 17, Tuesday Last day of classes 

December 18-21, Wednesday-Satur- 

day Semester examinations for multisection courses 

.Winter recess begins 
Winter recess ends. Grade reporting 

.Semester ends; effective date of graduation for those com- 
pleting requirements. All grade reports due 


December 23, Monday 

January 6, Monday 

January 7, Tuesday 


28—33 10 140 


8 

SPRING SEMESTER 1975 


August 1, 1974 

Initial period for filing applications for the spring semester 1975 begins for all new 
students and former students not in attendance during the fall semester 1974. 


january 23, Thursday 
january 27, Monday . 
February 1, Saturday. 


February 3, Monday 

February 1 2, Wednesday 

February 17, Monday 

March 24, Monday 

March 31, Monday 

April 4, Friday 

May 23, Friday 

May 26, Monday 

May 27-30, Tuesday-Friday .... 

June 1, Sunday 

June 2, Monday 

June 3, Tuesday 

SUMMER SESSION 1975 
June 9, Monday 

July 4, Friday 

August 29, Friday 


..Semester begins. Departmental and faculty meetings through 
Friday, January 24 

..Advisement, orientation and registration begins. See Class 
Schedule for details 

..Last day to register without late registration fee. Application 
deadline for baccalaureate degree candidates for graduation 
January 1976, and for June 1975 and August 1975 master's 
degree candidates to request a graduation check. 

..Instruction begins 

..Lincoln's Birthday — campus open 

..Washington's Birthday holiday — campus closed 

...Spring recess begins 

...Instruction resumes 

...Martin Luther King, Jr., Memorial Observance Day — campus 
open 

...Last day of classes 

...Memorial Day holiday — campus closed 
...Semester examinations 
.♦.Commencement 
...Grade reporting 

...Semester ends. End of academic year. All grade reports due 


.Twelve weeks of instruction begin. Registration and classes 

.Independence Day holiday — campus closed 

Summer session instruction ends; effective date of graduation 
for those completing requirements 


30—33 10 150 


9 

THE CALIFORNIA 

STATE UNIVERSITY AND COLLEGES 


The individual California State Colleges were brought together as a system by the Donahoe Higher 
Education Act of 1960. In 1972 the system became The California State University and Colleges and 
14 of the 19 campuses received the title University. 

The oldest campus — San jose State University — was founded in 1857 and became the first institution 
of public higher education in California. The newest campus — California State College, Bakersfield — 
began instruction in 1970. 

Responsibility for The California State University and Colleges is vested in the Board of Trustees, 
whose members are appointed by the Governor. The Trustees appoint the Chancellor, who is the 
chief executive officer of the system, and the presidents, who are the chief executive officers on 
the respective campuses. 

The Trustees, the Chancellor and the presidents develop systemwide policy, with actual Implementa- 
tion at the campus level taking place through broadly based consultative procedures. The Academic 
Senate of The California State University and Colleges, made up of elected representatives of the 
faculty from each campus, recommends academic policy to the Board of Trustees through the 
Chancellor. 

Academic excellence has been achieved by The California State University and Colleges through 
a distinguished faculty, whose primary responsibility is sup)erior teaching. While each campus in the 
system has its own unique geographic and curricular character, all campuses, as multipurpose 
institutions, offer undergraduate and graduate instruction for professional and occupational goals as 
well as broad liberal education. All of the campuses require for graduation a basic program of 
"General Education — Breadth Requirements" regardless of the typo of bachelor's degree or major 
field selected by the student. A limited number of doctoral degrees is offered jointly with the 
University of California. 

Presently, under the system's "New Approach to Higher Education," the campuses are implement- 
ing a wide variety of innovative programs to meet the changing needs of students and society. 
ArrK)ng p)ilot programs under way are instructional television projects, self-paced learning plans, 
minicourses and credit-by-examination alternatives. The Consortium of The California State Univer- 
sity and Colleges fosters and spK>nsors local, regional and statewide external degree and certificate 
programs to meet the needs of individuals who find it difficult or impx)ssible to attend classes on 
campus. 

Enrollments in fall 1973 totaled 290,000 students, who were taught by a faculty of 16,000. Last year 
the system awarded over 55 p)ercent of the bachelor's degrees and 35 p>ercent of the master's degrees 
granted in California. Over 400,000 pjersons have been graduated from the 19 campuses since 1960. 


3S-33 10 175 


10 


CAL STATE FULLERTON: AN OVERVIEW 


GOVERNANCE 

Governance on the campus level at California State University. Fullerton is the responsibility of the 
president and his administrative staff. Working closely with the president are a number of faculty 
and student groups which initiate, and review and recommend for approval university programs, 
p>olicies and procedures. Although the president is vested with the final authority on all university 
activities, the traditions at Fullerton have been to encourage maximum faculty and staff participation 
in campus decision-making and governance. Increasingly, students are becoming involved and 
active, too, and student representatives are found on almost all university, school, and departmental 
committees and policy-making bodies. 

ADVISORY BOARD 

The California State University, Fullerton Advisory Board consists of community leaders interested 
in the development and welfare of the university. The board serves the president in an advisory 
capacity, particularly in matters which affect university and community relations. Members are 
nominated by the president and appKjinted by the Board of Trustees for terms of four years. 

PHILOSOPHY AND OBJECTIVES 

The main functions of an institution of higher learning are to disseminate and advance knowledge. 
The philosophy which guides an institution can limit or promote the successful achievement of these 
objectives. Therefore, from its inception, Cal State Fullerton has directed its educational program 
toward the fullest possible development of the individuals who participate in it. For both faculty and 
students this entails a commitment to high standards of scholarship, a comprehensive rather than 
a narrow approach to major areas of study, and a concern with research and other creative activity. 
The university holds to the belief that an enduring educational experience must be founded upon 
exploration of our cultural heritage, through basic studies in the liberal arts and sciences, and that 
it can and should at the same time prepare for success in a chosen occupation or profession. 
Accordingly, the required general education program has as its objective the development in each 
student of: 

1 . The effective use and interpretation of the written and spoken language. 

2. An understanding of the wide range of human endeavor and accomplishments in liberal arts 
and sciences, their interrelationships, and the various choices and values they represent. 

3. An understanding of information and principles in some areas of the liberal arts and sciences 
in sufficient depth to encourage critical and creative thought and expression. 

4. A spirit of inquiry into the past and into the future, in order to cope with conditions in the 
continually changing world. 

5. An understanding of the rights, privileges and responsibilities of citizenship in the community 
and nation, and of effective participation in today's world. 

In addition, the university requires of all students who are candidates for a degree — whatever their 
special purpose — the pnjrsuit of a subject major. 

(For sjjecific details, see page 56.) 

RETROSPECT AND PROSPECT 

Cal State Fullerton was the 12th State College in California to be authorized by the Legislature. The 
following year, 1958, resulted in the designation of a site in northeast Fullerton, and 1959 saw the 
purchase of the site, the appointment of Dr. William B. Langsdorf as the founding president, the 
selection of the first staff, and the planning for the opening of the new college in the fall. Orange 
County State College started classes for 452 full-time and part-time students in September, 1959, 
using leased quarters for its administrative offices on the Fullerton Union High School campus and 
for its classrooms at Fullerton's Sunny Hills High School. In the fall of 1960, the college opened 
classes on its own campus where it occupied 1 2 temporary buildings. The name changed to Orange 


3S— 19 12 170 


The Human and Natural Environment of the University 1 1 

Slate College in july, 1%2, to California State College at Fullerton in july, 1964, to California State 
College, Fullerton in july, 1968 and to California State University, Fullerton, in june, 1972. The first 
permanent building, the six-story Letters and Science Building, was occupied in 1963. 

Today, there are many dramatic evidences of additional, very rapid growth. Ten large and modern 
permanent buildings have been completed, and enrollment has climbed to approximately 20,000. 
Since 1963 the curriculum has expanded to include lower division work and many graduate pro- 
grams. More than $60 million already has been invested in land, buildings and equipment — a sum 
expected to increase appreciably by the t980's when the university is due to reach its projected peak 
enrollment of nearly 27,000. 

During this rapid growth, the university also has achieved a growing reputation for academic 
excellence. Cal State Fullerton began this spectacular development at a period when the citizens and 
government of California were revising and greatly expanding their commitments to quality public 
higher education. The Donahoe Higher Education Act of 1960 established the California State 
Colleges as a system under an independent Board of Trustees, redefined the functions of the State 
Colleges, and related them to both the community colleges and to the University of California 
system. In this atmosphere of public support. Cal State Fullerton was the first of the State Colleges 
to submit and secure approval for a five-year master curricular plan and one of the first three to 
secure approval of a master building plan. It also was a university that was able to think in terms 
of its ultimate enrollment objectives from the beginning. During the same period. Orange County 
also was experiencing its own unprecedented growth. 

In l%9-70, it became apparent that colleges and universities statewide and nationally were entering 
a new period of development. Growing financial problems on all levels of government, mounting 
criticisms of contemporary educational policies and practices, and a loss of much public support 
for education were symptomatic of much deeper and more widespread problems and changes in 
our society and its schools. In the context of what increasingly seemed to be the emergence of a 
new, and in many ways, different type of culture and world, the colleges and universities (like other 
major institutions) were acutely experiencing the confusions and conflicts such basic and rapid 
cultural transformations generate. 

Like other colleges and universities. Cal State Fullerton currently is reexamining and reevaluating 
even its most basic educational goals and assumptions and practices. It Is becoming increasingly 
clear how higher education can more effectively assume its central responsibilities of teaching, 
developing knowledge, and providing public service in the future that lies ahead. Higher education 
must become more aware of, more articulate about, and more scholarly regarding the learning 
experiences that occur on and outside campuses. It is clear, too, that vigorous and imaginative and 
pluralistic educational experimentation needs to be rapidly and greatly increased and that students 
as well as members of the larger community have vital and increasing roles to play in these processes. 
There are developing, too, deepening and widening convictions that: educators may have under- 
estimated the p)otentialitles and learning capacities of people; and that new teaching strategies and 
learning materials can result in higher, and an increasingly widespread attainment of, educational 
standards. 

On May 26, 1971, Dr. L. Donald Shields, who had served as acting president for seven months, was 
appointed the second president of Cal State Fullerton. Under his presidency five task forces subse- 
quently were established to plan for the formation of a school of applied and professional studies; 
to explore opp>ortunities for external degree, extension and continuing education programs; to study 
form and function for a learning r#*sources center; to develop a long-range plan for the establishment 
of university priorities and the allocation of available resources; and to analyze the university's 
academic and administrative organization in terms of its structure and processes. President Shields 
also has vigorously pursued creating more effective working relationships with the community. 
Cal State Fullerton is looking forward to increasing the contribution it may make in the work ahead. 
This institution already is rethinking and Improving the quality of its part in higher education so that 
people will have more freedom to shap)e and create the sort of future they value and that is possible 
with the resources and knowledge that man now has. 

THE HUMAN AND NATURAL ENVIRONMENT 
OF THE UNIVERSITY 

Fullerton, a city of 88,606 inhabitants, is located in northern Orange County, about 30 miles southeast 
of central Los Angeles. It Is in the center of the new Southern California population center and within 


57—33 10 285 


1 2 Campus and Buildings 

easy freeway access of all the diverse natural and cultural attractions of this region. 

Orange County, with an area of 782 square miles, is the 48th in size of California's 58 counties, but 
it is the second largest county in population (1.5 million), and in total personal income. Orange 
County has experienced during the last 20 years almost unprecedented growth of communities 
continue to encroach upon the diminishing expanses of habitable land. 

Today, there co-exists an interesting mixture of the old and new economic and life styles in Orange 
County. Underneath the soil, archeologists and bulldozers uncover traces of the hunting and gather- 
ing Indian bands which flourished at least as early as 4,000 years ago in what was a benign and 
bountiful region. More visible traces remain of the Spanish and Mexican periods and cultures: 
Mission San juan Capistrano, which began the agricultural tradition in Orange County, and subse- 
quent adobes from the great land grants and ranches that followed. Additionally, both customs and 
many names persist from this period, and so does some ranching. The architectural and other 
evidences of the subsequent pioneer period are still quite visible; farmsteads, old buildings from the 
new towns that then were established in the late 1800's, mining operations, and traces of early resort 
and other types of promotional activities. For about 100 years, farming was the main economic 
activity with products such as grap>es, walnuts, vegetables, and increasingly oranges replacing the 
older wheat and cattle ranches. Today, agriculture still is very important. Orange County ranks sixth 
among California's counties in mineral production with its oil, natural gas, sand and gravel, and clay 
mining and processing activities. 

The extensive development of the 42 miles of beaches in Orange County and the development of 
such attractions as Disneyland, Knott's Berry Farm, the Laguna Festival of Arts and Pageant of 
Masters, and the Anaheim Stadium and Convention Center continue to make tourism an increasingly 
important activity. So does the Mediterranean-type climate with: rainfall averaging 14 inches per 
year; and generally mild days (with either freezing or l(X)-degree temperatures uncommon) with 
frequent morning fogs during the summer. Both downtown Los Angeles and the Pacific Ocean can 
be reached by car in half an hour, and mountain and desert recreation areas are as close as an hour's 
drive from the campus. 

THE CAMPUS AND ITS BUILDINGS 

Once part of a vast orange grove. Cal State Fullerton's attractively landscaped campus now consists 
of 225 acres bounded on the south by Nutwood Avenue, on the west by State College Boulevard, 
on the north by Yorba Linda Boulevard and on the east by the Orange Freeway. 

The portion of Orange County immediately surrounding the campus is predominantly suburban: 
it includes housing tracts, apartment complexes, shopping centers, space-age industrial firms and still 
remaining orange groves and undeveloped hills and fields. 

Other educational institutions also are part of the immediate environment. The new campus of 
the Southern California College of Optometry, with its four modernistic buildings, opened in the 
spring of 1973. Its seven-acre, S3,330,000 campus is just north of Cal State Fullerton. To Cal State's 
immediate south is located Pacific Christian College, a liberal arts school with a Bible emphasis, 
where students started classes in the fall of 1973. The Western State University College of Law, which 
started construction on its new campus to the immediate west of Cal State, expects to occupy the 
facility in 1975. 

The Cal State Fullerton campus itself has a high density urban layout of buildings and facilities 
developed to serve a predominantly commuting public. The university's modern buildings were 
planned so that no student should need more than 10 minutes to go from one class to another. The 
campus is surrounded with landscaped parking facilities. 

Even though nrwst of the campus has been devoted to modern buildings, facilities for athletic 
activities, parking lots, or attractively landscaped areas, there still remain over 20 acres of the original 
orange grove, land of which will become an arboretum within the next few years. Several older 
buildings also remain, including one which has been converted into the attractive University Club 
and another into the Foundation headquarters. 

The first permanent building, the Letters and Science Building, was occupied in 1963. This imposing 
structure, master planned to serve ultimately as a facility for undergraduate and graduate science 
instruction and research, has been used to house other programs until they could warrant new 
facilities of their own. 

Since 1%3, growth has been rapid. The Music-Speech-Drama Building was completed in 1964, the 
Physical Education Building in 1%5, the Library Building in 1966, the Commons cafeteria facility in 
1%7, the Humanities-Social Sciences Building and Art Center in 1%9, and William B. Langsdorf Hall 


64—83 10 320 


Academic Programs 13 

(Administration-Business Administration) and the Engineering Building in 1971, and the Student 
Health Center in 1974. Langsdorf Hall and the Engineering Building reflect a commitment to pro- 
grams with high community involvement. In addition to the many undergraduate students who study 
and learn in these buildings, many professional engineers and local businessmen also use these very 
advanced facilities to continue their educations. 

New buildings are being planned to keep pace with university enrollment increases. At least one new 
academic facility and several building additions are contemplated for the 1970's. The Education- 
Classroom Building and the University Center (Student Union) are presently being constructed. 
These facilities will be available for use in 1976. 

The ample freeway and surface street accommodations that approach the main entrance to the 
university's modern campus also provide comparatively easy access to the great and diverse learning 
resources available in Southern California: many other colleges and universities; museums, libraries, 
art galleries; zoos; and the wide variety of economic, governmental, social, and cultural activities 
and experiments that may be found in this dynamic and complex region of California and the United 
States. 

STUDENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY 

Much of the distinctive character and learning atmosphere of any campus comes from the nature 
and vitality of its students. Diversity, the synthesis of academic with work and family interests, strong 
high school records and relative maturity are some of the predominant characteristics of the student 
body at Cal State Fullerton. The campus is both a large and a still rapidly growing one despite its 
comparative newness. Nearly 19,(XX) students were enrolled in 1973-74, and this year's total Is 
expected to be 20,(XX). 

The university is a commuter institution: 1 percent of the students live on campus; 24 p)ercent work 
35 hours a week or more; and yet 60 percent take 12 or more units of coursework each semester. 
Seventy-five percent come from a radius of 15 miles from the campus, but many have lived 
elsewhere before coming to Orange County. 

Twenty-four percent are lower division students, 54 percent are university juniors and seniors, and 
another 22 percent are doing graduate work. Over seven-eights of the upper-division students are 
transfers from other institutions, principally community colleges. Fifty -eight percent are men, and the 
median age is 24. Forty-two percent ane women, and the median age is 23. Thirty-seven percent are 
married. (3ne third of the students participate in both the day and evening programs during the 
regular semesters, and one tenth are involved only in the late afternoon or evening program. 
Many already have clearly defined disciplinary, professional, and artistic interests. Some still are 
searching for a meaningful vocation and are in the process of exploring different fields of knowledge 
and the work that might develop from them. Most are trying to understand themselves and their 
world better so that they can become more effective human beings and citizens. 

THE FACULTY 

Central to the effectiveness of any institution of higher learning is the quality and dedication of its 
faculty. Cal State Fullerton is proud of the high caliber of its faculty and of the commitments of its 
individual faculty members to teaching and scholarship. 

In the fall of 1973, there were 648 full-time and 401 part-time faculty members teaching on the 
campus. For the full-time faculty members the median age was 38, and almost all had had some 
previous college or university teaching experience before coming to Fullerton. Faculty members also 
have a wide variety of experiences and accomplishments in research, the arts, professional work, 
consulting, and other creative activities. Seventy-six percent of the full-time faculty have earned their 
doctorate degrees, and these have come from more than 1(X) major colleges and universities. 
Criteria for selection to the faculty include mastery of knowledge in an academic specialty, demon- 
strated skill and experience in teaching, and continuing interest in scholarly study and research. 
Retention and promotion criteria also include service to the university and to the community. 

ACADEMIC PROGRAMS 

The university offers a full four-year program of freshman through senior work as well as credential 
programs for teachers and graduate, master's level work in many disciplines and professional fields. 
The university provides a diversity of educational opportunities to satisfy the broad range of back- 


70-^ 10 350 


14 


Summer Session 


grounds and interests of its students. Over 1 ,600 courses have been developed to provide learning 
from introductory to highly specialized, in-depth and advanced, work in a wide variety and growing 
number of fields of study. 

Fullerton currently awards the baccalaureate degree in 39 fields of knowledge. More advanced work 
and the master's degree are awarded in 30 programs. Many of the baccalaureate and master's degree 
programs offer a choice of sp)ecializatiGns (or options or emphases). Additionally, at least a few 
courses are given in many fields or subject matter areas in which some other colleges and universi- 
ties offer full degree programs. Often these courses are given by a number of different departments. 
Such an interdisciplinary trend fits not only with broader, cultural integration of knowledge but also 
with the recent development of a growing number of interdisciplinary efforts, including some new 
degree programs, at Fullerton. 

Certain traditions have developed with the academic programs at Cal State Fullerton. One is that 
of relative balance in strength of the programs in the physical sciences, the social sciences, the 
humanities and the fine arts. Another is that of academic excellence in the various specializations 
offered by the university and the comparative freedom given to departments and professional 
schools to develop the depth programs for their majors. Another pattern is the great freedom given 
to most students in selecting courses to satisfy their general education or breadth requirements. Still 
other tendencies include the encouragement of: a diversity of approaches to teaching; experimenta- 
tion and innovation in courses and programs; and student participation in curricular planning and 
decision-making. 

ACCREDITATION 

Cal State Fullerton is fully accredited by the Western Association of Schools and Colleges. Specific 
programs have been accredited by the California State Board of Education, the American Assembly 
of Collegiate Schools of Business, the American Chemical Society, the American Council on Educa- 
tion for journalism, the American Sfjeech and Hearing Association, the Engineers' Council for 
Professional Development, the National Association of Schools of Art, the National Association of 
Schools of Music, the National Association of Schools of Theater and the National Council for 
Accreditation of Teacher Education. 

Cal State Fullerton is a member of the Council of Graduate Schools in the United States and the 
Western Association of Graduate Schools. 

SCHEDULE OF CLASSES 

The regular, educational program of the university is offered continuouly from 8 a.m. until 10 p.m., 
Monday through Friday. The Class Schedule, listing all classes meeting during these hours, is pre- 
pared for each semester and can be purchased at the Titan Bookstore. 

The classes held during the late afternoon and evening hours have become an established part of 
the regular university program. Students enrolling in these classes must have met all admission 
requirements of the university, including the filing of an official application for admission, the filing 
of complete official transcripts from other schools, cdlleges and universities and in the case of 
lower-division applicants, the completion of required tests for admission. 

The classes which are offered during the summer sessions and by means of Extension do not require 
admission to the university, but some courses do require specific prerequisites. Special schedules 
are provided for the summer sessions and extension programs. 

CONTINUING EDUCATION— SUMMER SESSION 

The summer session is designed to meet the needs of students who are interested in the enrichment 
of their educational background as well as completing requirements for a degree or credential. 
Summer session courses are the equivalent of university courses offered in the fall and spring 
semesters, and apply toward graduation and residence requirements as well as teaching credential 
requirements. Both day and evening classes are scheduled. Some courses have prerequisite require- 
ments which students must meet. Master's degree work is also offered. 

The dates for the 1975 summer session are june 9 through August 29. Also offered are wide varieties 
of course durations, with a number of two- and three-week workshops, intensified courses, and 


59—19 12 290 


International Programs 1 5 

expanded eight-week courses. In addition to much of the regular curriculum, summer offerings 
include many unique and innovative programs for teachers and other professional groups. 

A summer session class schedule Is usually available by February, and may be obtained by writing 
the Office of Continuing Education. This schedule contains information on matters such as costs and 
registration. 

Admission to the Summer Session 

Although the quality of the program and most of the course offerings are the same as in the regular 
session, the university does not require an advance application or transcripts from students register- 
ing for credit courses in the summer session. However, students are expected to have satisfied the 
prerequisites for the courses in which they register. Admission to summer session does not grant 
admission to the regular session. Admission to the summer sessions Is completed at registration. 

Authorized Student Load 

Title 5 of the California State Administrative Code states, "Not more than one semester unit may 
be earned for each week of attendance in summer session, except that upon approval of appropriate 
college authorities, additional semester units may be earned at the rate of one-half unit for each three 
units of credit for which a student is registered." 

This means that combinations can be arranged so that a student may earn up to 14 units during the 
1 2 weeks of the summer session. Any student who enrolls by error in more than 14 units during a 
12- week summer session will find that credit for excess units will not be counted toward a degree, 
credential or other objective. Any other exceptions must be petitioned through the Office of 
Admissions and Records. 

CONTINUING EDUCATION— EXTENSION 
PROGRAMS AND SERVICES 

The resources of Cal State Fullerton are made available through extension programs to those who 
are unable to take university work in residence but who wish to pursue university-level study for 
purposes of resuming an interrupted or incompleted education, to enhance professional or vocation- 
al abilities, or for personal growth and fulfillment. 

Extension offerings include regularly established university courses as well as courses, workshops, 
and conferences designed to meet the needs of particular groups and communities, and may be 
initiated at various times during the year. Any adult may enroll in an extension course; it is not 
necessary to be enrolled in the university. 

The maximum extension credit which will be accepted toward baccalaureate degrees is 24 semester 
units. Six serqester units of extension credit may be applied toward a master's degree with appropri- 
ate approvals. Extension credit may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence requirements for 
graduation. 

Veterans may use the educational benefits available to them under federal and state laws to enroll 
in university extension courses provided the classes are part of their prescribed and recognized 
objectives as approved by the Veterans Administration. 

For information about establishing an extension course, or for current offerings, write or telephone 
the Extension Office. 

INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS 

An overseas study program is offered by The California State University and Colleges International 
Programs, under which students may enroll for a full academic year simultaneously at their home 
campus, where they earn academic credit and maintain campus residency, and at a distinguished 
foreign university or a special program center. 

Cooperating universities abroad include the University of Provence, France; the University of Heidel- 
berg, Germany; the University of Florence, Italy; the Universidad Ibero-Americana, Mexico; the 
University of Granada and the University of Madrid, Spain; the University of Uppsala, Sweden; the 
University of Madrid and the University of Granada, Spain; and Waseda University, Japan. In the 
United Kingdom, coop>erating universities, which may vary from year to year, include Dundee, 
Leicester, London, Oxford, Liverpool, Lampeter and Sheffield. In addition, California State University 


82—33 10 410 


1 6 Instructionally Related Services 

and Colleges students may attend a special program in Taiwan, Republic of China, or an architectural 
program in Copenhagen, Denmark. 

Eligibility is limited to students who will have upper division or graduate standing during their year 
of participation, who have a (2.5) overall gradepoint average, who show ability to adapt to a new 
environment, and, who in the cases of France, Germany, Mexico and Spain, are proficient in the 
language of instruction at the foreign university. Selection Is made by a faculty committee on the 
students' home campus and by a statewide faculty committee. 

The International Programs are supported by state funds to the extent that such funds would have 
been expended had the student concerned continued to study in California. Students assume costs 
for predeparture orientation, insurance, transportation, housing and meals. Home campus registra- 
tion fees, tuition on the home campus for out-of-state students (if the student is not a California 
resident) and p)ersonal incidental exp>enses or vacation travel costs while abroad are also paid by 
the student. The Office of International Programs collects and administers funds for those Items 
which the program must arrange or can negotiate more effectively, such as home campus fees, 
orientation costs, insurance, outbound transportation, and, in some centers, housing. Students ac- 
cepted in the International Programs may apply for any financial aid available at their home campus, 
except work-study. 

Application for the 1975-76 academic year must be submitted before February 14, 1975 (except for 
United Kingdom applicants who must submit applications by january 7, 1974). Applicants are 
notified of acceptance by April 1, 1975. Detailed information may be obtained from the director of 
international education and exchange at Cal State Fullerton, or by writing to The California State 
University and Colleges International Programs, 5670 Wilshire Boulevard, Los Angeles 90036. 

INSTRUCTIONALLY RELATED SERVICES 

The university provides an extensive program of instructionally related services for its students and 
faculty. These include the universitywide services of the university Library, the Instructional Media 
Center and the Computer Center described in the following sections. Five offices. Academic Pro- 
grams, Academic Administration, Academic Services, Administrative Planning and Institutional Re- 
search, make studies on university programs and assist in coordinating, planning educational 
of>erations and sharing information on educational trends and innovations on the Fullerton campus 
with those going on elsewhere. 

The Library 

The Library Building, completed in 1966, is shared by the Instructional Media Center, which has the 
lower level; the School of Education, which is located on the second floor; and the Library, which 
utilizes the first floor and third through sixth floors. As its collection grows and the enrollment 
increases, the Library will occupy the second floor of the building. Designed presently to seat 
approximately 1,150 p)ersons and to house about 300,000 books as well as related materials, the 
building contains group study and seminar rooms, study carrels for graduate students and facilities 
for individual and group listening, for the reading of microform materials and for copying materials 
in book and microform. 

The main book collection will contain about 350,000 volumes at the beginning of the 1974-75 
academic year. During that year about 20,(X)0 volumes will be added. Besides attempting to build 
a balanced collection of basic works, the Library has corKentrated its efforts in several subject areas. 
As a result relatively strong collections are now available in such fields as World War II, international 
relations since 1870, Kant, Shakespeare, Melville, ichthyology, angling, historiography and historical 
bibliography, library science, mathematics and British, United States, California history, and the 
history of cartography. A selective depository for U.S. government documents since 1%3, the Library 
will house about 142,(XX) U.S. documents by the beginning of the 1974-75 academic year. The 
Library has, in addition, some 19,636 reels of microfilmed U.S. government documents, chiefly State 
Department Archives, but also such items as the Congressional Record and the papers of various 
presidents as well as microfiche copies of the material in Project ERIC. The Library is a depository 
for California state documents and for California curriculum materials, and includes current samples 
of state adopted texts, curriculum guides from all over the United States, and non-book instructional 
materials. 

The Library subscribes to over 4,500 periodicals. It has some 25,000 volumes of bound periodicals 
and has extensive microform holdings in backfiles of periodicals and of local, national, and interna- 
tional newspapers. Titles held exceed 5,300. 


88—33 10 440 


A cademic A dministration 1 7 


Among its major holdings are the Human Relations Area Files, the British 19th Century Parliamentary 
Papers, the Parliamentary Debates, a microfilm edition of the Published Colonial Records of the 
American Colonies, 1619-1800, and in conjunction with the Patrons of the Library, the Langsdorf 
Anniversary Collection of Crabhorn Press and Book Club of California books. 

Library hours are posted in the lobby and listed, with other key information about the Library, in 
the Library Guide, which is available at the information desk in the lobby as well as at the circulation 
and reference desks. Assistance in the use of the card catalog and other library facilities may be 
obtained at the first floor information desk. Librarians with various subject backgrounds are on duty 
at the reference desk on the third floor to aid students and faculty in further use of the library's 
resources. Library tours are available at the beginning of each semester, and a course in bibliographic 
research is conducted each semester. 

Instructional Media Center 

The Instructional Media Center, located In the lower level of the Library Building, includes both 
extensive audiovisual and Instructional television services. 

Services to the faculty and students include encouragement and use of all types of audiovisual 
equipment and materials, rental of films from major rental libraries, and for faculty: production of 
transparencies, charts, graphs, diagrams, audiotapes and cassettes, tele-lectures plus all types of still 
and motion picture photography. Instructional television services include distribution of off-the-air 
or videotaped programs from master control to selected classrooms, videotaping facilities and 
playback both in the studio or classroom and off the campus. 

The center is responsible for the coordination and development of instructional applications of 
media, and the improvement of programs and materials designed for instructional use. Liaison and 
service relations are maintained with other media learning-oriented units on the campus. Personnel 
of the center are prepared to assist the faculty in their analysis of media needs as related to the 
procurement or production of materials pertinent to instructional development. 

Computer Center 

The Computer Center, located on the second floor of Langsdorf Hall (Administration-Business 
Administration), serves as the central computing facility for all of the university. As the central 
campus computing facility, it provides support for instruction, research and administrative comput- 
ing services. 

The computing system at Fullerton is integrated into the State Distributed Computer Network which 
provides a wide range of computing services. The local campus computer is a CDC 3150 with 32,000 
words (130,(X)0 characters) of memory, card reader, card punch, printer, two tape drives and four 
disk drives. As a component of the network, the Computer Center can communicate with a large- 
scale CDC 3300 Computer located at the Division of Information Systems in Los Angeles. The 
Distributed Computer Network also provides time-sharing services on a CDC 3170 and access to 
an IBM 360/91 at UCLA. Keypunch, teletype terminals, a sorter and an interpreter for student use 
are available in an open shop area located in the Computer Center. 

A computer science degree is offered jointly by the Departments of Quantitative Methods and 
Mathematics and the Division of Engineering. Many other departments, including Sociology, Geog- 
raphy and Accounting, use the computer facility in their coursework. Students' jobs receive the 
highest priority of all work batch-processed on the CDC 3150. The Computer Center maintains a 
library of application programs for general use. Such languages offered by the system include 
FORTRAN, COBOL, ALGOL, BASIC and COMPASS (the assembly language for CDC). 

Office of Academic Administration 

The Office of Academic Administration coordinates the following instructionally related activities: 
Academic Services; Administrative Planning; Admissions and Records; Computer Services; and 
Institutional Research. In addition, the associate vice president for academic administration has 
responsibility for the Division of Health Education, Physical Education, Recreation and Athletics. 

Office of Academic Services 

The Office of Academic Services is responsible for the preparation of the Class Schedule, this catalog 
and the Faculty Handbook. In addition to the preparation of the Class Schedule, the office coordi- 
nates all changes arid adjustments to it, administers and prepares the staffing formula for the 


94—33 10 470 


18 Research Organizations 

university, and has a primary responsibility for course-section and facilities utilization reporting 
during and after registration. 

Office of Administrative Planning 

The Office of Administrative Planning has responsibility for the development of improved adminis- 
trative structures and budgeting techniques. Pursuant to Senate Bill 1239, Cal State Fullerton is 
committed to the design and implementation of a decentralized system of administrative manage- 
ment supported by a method of resource allocation which is based on program goals and objectives. 
The Office of Administrative Planning also provides analytic support to the Office of Academic 
Administration. 

Office of Institutional Research 

The Office of Institutional Research serves as an information center and a problem-solving agency 
which collects, interprets and disseminates information. These data include enrollment histories and 
projections, distributions of data classes according to selected factors (e.g. level, type of instruction, 
unit value), summaries of student characteristics, and other statistics related to student p>opulation, 
course offerings and resources. Most of the data collection and analysis is related to the reporting 
requirements of The California State University and Colleges and other agencies. However, the office 
evaulates data, provides assistance in design of specialized studies and also conducts analytic studies 
to serve the decision-making and fxjlicy-formulating needs of Cal State Fullerton. 

Office of Academic Programs 

In 1973 the Office of Academic Planning was reorganized so that the associate vice president, 
academic programs became resF)onsible: for coordinating the development of educational programs; 
for providing an all-university persp>ective on educational activities at the campus; and, for stimulat- 
ing academic innovations. The office was also made responsible for providing leadership for the 
Division of Library Science and for the cross-school programs (Computer Science, Environmental 
Studies, Human Services, Interdisciplinary Center, Latin American Studies, Liberal Studies, Russian 
Area Studies, Social Sciences, Special Major, Technological Studies). 

The office provides administrative assistance and coordination with directors of academic advise- 
ment, the university Library and the Instructional Media Center. Particular resp>onsibilities include 
leadership with the Curriculum Committee, the Committee for Educational Development and Inno- 
vation and other individuals and groups concerned with changing and improving the educational 
programs of this institution. Responsibilities relating to the Chancellor's Office include regular review 
and updating of the Academic Master Plan; Cal State Fullerton coordination of program performance 
review; and staff reports for the Chancellor's Office relating to academic planning. 

Careful liaison is maintained with the Office of Academic Services for university-level approval of 
all new courses in the programs and preparation of the university catalog. 

RESEARCH ORGANIZATIONS ANP SERVICES 
AND SPECIAL STUDY CENTERS 

Much and varied research is going on at Cal State Fullerton. Most of this is being done by individual 
faculty members and students as part of their scholarly and professional development activities. 
Research training is an important part of the education for more advanced work in most disciplines 
and professions, and many of our students are encouraged and assisted to learn and apply research 
skills in either independent or team projects. 

The Research Committee of the Faculty Council and the Contracts and Grants Office provide 
stimulus, coordination and direction to the research efforts of the university. 

A Student Research Fellowship program and a Faculty Research Grant program award "seed grants" 
to promising research projects every year. Services supporting research are given by the Cal State 
Fullerton Foundation, the university Computer Center, and the university Library. Augmenting the 
on-campus aids to research are the great and diverse resources available for study in the Southern 
California area. 

A number of special centers with specific research objectives are operating at the university. These 
include the Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Community (with its affiliated 
Center for Economic Education, the Real Estate Research Institute, the Center for Governmental 


111—33 10 555 


Research Organizations 19 

Studies, the Urban Research Institute, the Institute for Molecular Biology, the Institute for Reading, 
the Laboratory for Phonetic Research, the Sp)ecial Education Clinic, the Speech and Hearing Clinic 
and the Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary. 

Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Community 

The Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Community provides; 

1. School of Business Administration and Economics and other faculty with additional opportu- 
nity to participate in research activities in order to improve and reinforce teaching and 
professional competence; 

2. Professional research and consultation services to the local area normally considered as being 
serviced by the university, including private business, labor, agriculture, and local government 
agencies; 

3. Educational services, e.g., seminars and conferences, to improve the level of understanding 
and competence of local decision-makers in specialized areas relating to business administra- 
tion and economics; and 

4. A focus, through research, for the education of students and citizens in the business and 
economic problems of the local community, and for the involvement of faculty in such 
educational programs. 

The operations of the center are carried out by constituent institutes, programs, and projects for 
which the center provides overall leadership and coordination. The institutes are long-term, continu- 
ing organizations designed to operate in selected major problem and functional areas of strategic 
significance and concern to the school. Programs and projects within the center are organized to 
carry on work outside the institutes' area of interest, which are a smaller scale and for a shorter 
time-span. 

Currently included within the Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Community are 
the affiliated Center for Economic Education and the Real Estate Research Institute. 

Center for Economic Education 

The Center for Economic Education is one of many such centers at colleges and universities in the 
United States working with the national joint Council on Economic Education to expand economic 
understanding. Center programs include ( 1 ) services to schools and colleges, individual educators, 
and the community; (2) research and professional training; and (3) operation of an economic 
education information center. The center consists of a broadly based executive policy board; an 
administrative staff; and formally organized groups of participating users. Although operating autono- 
mously, the center is affiliated with the Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Commu- 
nity. 

Real Estate Research Institute 

The Real Estate Research Institute conducts a continuing research program, with special emphasis 
on urban development in Orange County. Studies are undertaken in cooperation with various public 
and private agencies, but primary funding is from the California State Department of Real Estate. 
Opportunities exist for student involvement. 

Center for Governmental Studies 

The Center for Governmental Studies was established and organized in 1%5 under the direction of 
the Department of Political Science. Its purpose is to promote research and scholarship among both 
faculty and students, and to assist academic, governmental, professional and civic groups in their 
goals and programs. This is accomplished by collecting and making available fugitive governmental 
and political materials, offering assistance in the study of local governmental problems, providing 
instruction and experience in research techniques and methodology, and sponsoring community 
institutes and seminars. 

Urban Research Institute 

The Urban Research Institute is a joint venture between local government and the university. The 
institute has an advisory board representing governments and academic institutions in the area. The 
research on local problems is done by teams consisting of practitioners, elected officials, community 
representatives and academicians selected for their expertise in the areas under study. It is an attempt 


116—33 10 580 


20 Research Organizations 

to fuse the experience and reality orientation of practitioners with the resources, knowledge and skills 
of the academic community in solving problems facing the residents and governments in Orange 
County. 

Institute for Molecular Biology 

The Institute for Molecular Biology was established for the purpose of promoting an atmosphere 
congenial to research and creative activity in the molecular biological sciences. It is an interdiscipli- 
nary organization comprised of certain faculty from the Departments of Biological Science, Chemis- 
try and Physics. The institute is dedicated to the pursuit of problems of human welfare, utilizing an 
approach at the cellular and molecular level of inquiry. Its purposes are (1) to foster and encourage 
communication of ideas and information among its membership for mutual professional improve- 
ment; (2) to encourage students to adopt affiliation with the membership and to adopt an interdisci- 
plinary understanding of their particular areas of emphasis; (3) to foster an active research program 
on the part of the membership on problems best approached by the integration of chemistry, physics 
and biology; and (4) to seek ways of improving the individual teaching performance of its member- 
ship through interdisciplinary communication at all levels of instruction. 

It Is Intended that the institute will function as a service to the departments that it represents. The 
institute sponsors a series of special seminars devoted to topics in the molecular biological sciences, 
featuring speakers from its own personnel and from other campuses. 

The Institute for Reading 

In 1971, the Institute for Reading was established for the purpose of promoting an atmosphere 
congenial to research and creative activity for development of reading and related programs. In the 
fulfillment of this purpose, the institute Is dedicated to the pursuit of issues encountered in teaching 
of reading to children and adults, using an Interdisciplinary approach whenever feasible. 

It ( 1 ) fosters and encourages communication of ideas and information among its membership for 
mutual professional improvement; (2) encourages students to adopt affiliation with members and 
to adopt an interdisciplinary understanding of their particular areas of emphasis; (3) seeks ways of 
improving the teaching performance of its membership through interdisciplinary communication at 
all levels of instruction; and (4) fosters research activities on the part of the membership. 

The Reading Center is located in the School of Education. Its primary purpose is to serve as a clinic 
and laboratory for graduate students in the reading option of the Master of Science in Education. 
Children from the university community schools attend the Reading Center for diagnosis and 
remediation. The center houses materials and equipment relating to reading instruction. 

Laboratory for Phonetic Research 

The Laboratory for Phonetic Research is a research and training facility in the Department of 
Linguistics. It Is equipped with electromechanical facilities for the acoustical, psychoacoustical, and 
physiological study of human speech. 

Its objectives are twofold: 

Instruction. To provide teaching, training and experience for students who will serve during their 
professional lives to assist the language handicapp)ed. 

Research. To provide advanced students and faculty with facilities for research on language 
function and dysfunction. 

Special Education Clinic 

The primary purpose of the Special Education Clinic is to provide intensive experiences for students 
with children referred by schools and other agencies in the community. The experiences involve 
educational assessment, instructional methodology and evaluation. All students p>articipating in the 
clinic attend clinic seminars and prepare cases for presentation at the seminars. 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 

The Speech and Hearing Clinic operates as a nonprofit California State University, Fullerton Founda- 
tion agency. In addition it is an off-campus clinical program for graduate students that involves 
experiences within medical and paramedical settings. The primary purpose of the clinics both on 
campus and off campus is to provide opfxjrtunities for teaching, service and research. University 
students receive clinical experience and opportunity for observation. The on-campus clinic is ac- 


122-^ 10 610 


Titan Shops 21 

credited by the Board of Examiners of the American Sp)eech and Hearing Association and the 
California State Department of Education. 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 

The Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary operates as a nonprofit California State University, Fullerton Founda- 
tion agency. The sanctuary provides for a program of continuing educational service to the commu- 
nity; a research center for biological field studies; a facility for teacher education in nature 
interpretation and conservation education; and a center for training students planning to enter into 
the public service field of nature interpretation. 

CALIFORNIA STATE UNIVERSITY, 

FULLERTON FOUNDATION 

The California State University, Fullerton Foundation was established and incorp>orated in October 
1959 to provide essential student, faculty and staff services which cannot be provided from state 
appropriations; to supplement the program and activities of the university in appropriate ways; and 
to assist otherwise the university in fulfilling its purposes and in serving the p)eople of the State of 
California — especially those of the area in which the university is located. 

Services provided by the foundation include administration of scholarship and student loan funds; 
sponsored research programs; Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary; and certain institutes. 

The foundation's overall policies are administered by a board of trustees composed of members of 
the university faculty, administration and students as well as community leaders. 

TITAN SHOPS, INC. 

Titan Shops, Inc., is comprised of the Titan Bookstore and food services. Established in july 1971, 
it is administered by a board of trustees made up of members of the university faculty, administration, 
students and community business leaders. 

Titan Bookstore 

Students are able to purchase or order books and supplies as needed for classes from the on-campus 
bookstore, owned and operated by the Titan Shops, Inc. The Titan Bookstore is a nonprofit operation: 
its proceeds are used to further the educational aims of the university. It is located directly east of 
the Letters and Science Building and is closely adjacent to Langsdorf Hall. 

Food Services 

On the campus. Titan Shops, Inc., provides food in the Commons and in a snack bar in the lower 
level of the Letters and Science Building. Vending machines and mobile carts also are located at other 
locations. They are operated by R & R Food Services, Inc. A variety of restaurants and eating places 
also may be fourni within a short walking or driving distance from the university. 


125—33 10 625 


22 


STUDENT SERVICES 


While classroom activity is devoted to the academic development of the learner. Student Services 
offers programs which simultaneously provide students with services and opportunities for personal 
growth. Some Student Services programs such as housing and financial aid emphasize their service 
and educationally supportive roles; others, like counseling, accentuate their developmental aspects. 
The opportunities offered by the university's Student Services program vary from the traditional 
"student activity" of fraternity and sorority "rush" to the establishment of a coffee house complete 
with weekly entertainment. More developmental in nature is the investigating of vocational and 
personal life styles through group and/or individual counseling and testing. 

The Student Services program includes: counseling and testing, student activities. Associated Stu- 
dents government, housing, health services, financial aid, programs for the handicapped, internation- 
al education, placement, alumni affairs, educational opportunity for the culturally different, special 
projects, and services for women, minorities and veterans. 

OFFICE OF THE DEAN 

While each department within Student Services has its specific function and staff, the Dean of 
Student Services coordinates and administers the university's Student Services program. Additional- 
ly, the dean is an advocate for students to the faculty and administration and as such develops and 
maintains procedures within Student Services and the university which will increase the general 
welfare of the students and enhance their educational success at the university. Information regard- 
ing any of the Student Services programs may be obtained in the Dean of Student Services Office. 

COUNSELING AND TESTING SERVICES 

Counseling 

Students who need assistance with such concerns as choosing an academic major or vocational goal, 
with study skills, or with personal problems affecting their academic progress may obtain help 
through the Counseling Center. The staff of professionally trained counselors and psychologists has 
available a variety of resources including occupational information files, vocational and psychologi- 
cal tests, college and graduate school catalogs and directories of various kinds to assist the student. 
The Counseling Center also maintains contact with agencies and professional persons in the commu- 
nity to whom students may be referred. 

Counseling services are available only to fully matriculated, registered students. 

Testing 

Universitywide testing programs are coordinated and administered by the Testing Center. These 
include university admissions tests and general tests for graduate school admission. In addition, the 
Testing Center provides advice and consulting services to instructional departments in the develop- 
ment and administration of admission, selection, and placement tests for use by a specific depart- 
ment. 

The Testing Center also conducts ongoing research on the validity and appropriateness of tests used 
in university testing programs. 

Testing requirements for students seeking admission are listed in the admissions section of the 
catalog. Students seeking information about testing requirements for specific instructional programs 
should inquire in the appropriate instructional division or the Counseling and Testing Center. 

STUDENT ACTIVITIES 

The university recognizes the important role of student activities. An extensive organization of clubs, 
interest groups, commissions, councils and communities has been created within the student body 
structure so that opportunities are available to every student according to his interest, ability and 
available time. In addition each academic department has a student association which provides 
contact with faculty and opportunities for activities related to a student's major or vocational interest. 


131—33 11 15 


Student Services 23 


Student Activities Center 

The Student Activities Center provides a wide range of service. A professional staff provides aid and 
consultation to individuals and groups as well as assisting the Associated Students in planning and 
implementing programs, events and projects. The staff advises all student organizations concerning 
established policies and procedures, and aids students in arranging for use of university services and 
facilities. The commitment of the center is to aid students and faculty in the development of an 
enriched academic environment. 

Associated Students 

All students are members of the Associated Students and are represented by the Associated Students 
Senate and executive officers, who develop and maintain extracurricular programs of every type. 
Each year a budget is adopted in the spring which allocates anticipated activity fees and all other 
income to be derived from all programs during the following year. Senators are elected from various 
academic disciplines. One recent development is the Departmental Association Council, which js 
assigned a certain portion of the budget by the Senate. The many departmental associations are 
established to promote closer relationships among students and faculty of their departments and 
bring programs to the departments that might not be possible without the funding provided by the 
Senate. Most departments have established very active associations and participation by all students 
is solicited enthusiastically. 

Student Government ^ 

All registered students are members of the Associated Students of Cal State Fullerton. The Associated 
Students is governed through the executive, legislative, and judicial branches of the Associated 
Students organization. The president and commissioners constitute the executive branch which has 
the responsibility for the development and administration of the program, including such activities 
as publications. Intercollegiate athletics, intramural athletics, forensics, and music. The Associated 
Students Senate has full responsibility for legislation by which this program is directed and for the 
allocation of student funds for the program. The judicial branch serves as the legal body for 
interpretation of the constitution and enforcement of Associated Student policies. 

Student Organizations 

Student organizations are recognized as vital to the total educational process. They are chartered 
to encourage and facilitate use of university resources and integrate activities with a goal of sustaining 
a viable university community. Any group of students may become a chartered organization, 
provided the goals and activities are consistent with university rules and regulations, and applying 
through the Student Activities Office. Organizations are classified under the following headings: ( 1 ) 
Cocurricular (organizations which share learning goals with a sfjecific department); (2) Political or 
Religious; (3) Service; and (4) Social. More than 100 organizations are now recognized, Including 
seven national social fraternities, five national social sororities, a number of departmental associa- 
tions and many special interest groups. 

Student Publications 

The university newspaper, the Daily Titan, is published as a product of communications classes and 
financed by the Associated Students. In addition, a handbook Is available for use by organizations 
in the development and operation of their program. Two magazines. Focus and the Promethean, 
are also published by students. 

Men's Athletics 

The intercollegiate athletic program consists of teams in baseball, basketball, cross country, football, 
golf, gymnastics, soccer, swimming, tennis, track and field, water polo, fencing and wrestling. A 
year-round program of Intramural activities Includes basketball, badminton, flag football, handball, 
softball, tennis and wrestling, swimming and weight lifting. 

The university is a member of the Pacific Coast Athletic Association (PCAA). All athletic teams 
compete under rules of the National Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA). 


136—33 11 40 


24 Student Services 


Intramural Activities 

The intramural program is conducted on a seasonal basis and involves a variety of athletic and 
recreational activities for both men and women. Rules and regulations which govern participation 
in the intramural program are available in the Recreation Office located in the Physical Education 
Building. 

Women's Athletics 

Participation by women in extramural volleyball, basketball, tennis, swimming, track, and golf is 
provided though membership in the Extramural Coordinating Council of Southern California and the 
American Recreation and Athletic Federation for University Women. 

Recreation Programs 

Individual recreation opportunities in weight training, swimming, handball, volleyball, basketball and 
badminton are available through membership in the University Recreation Programs to members 
of the student body, faculty, staff and affiliated groups. Special instructional programs are also 
available in various activities. 

Birth Control Information Services 

Birth control counseling at the Student Health Center has been supplemented by a Birth Control 
Information Service, financed and operated by the Associated Students under the direction of the 
university medical director. A part-tincje coordinator is available in the Student Health Center to make 
appointments with a Student Health Center physician. The physician advises the patient on the 
advantages and disadvantages of the various methods of birth control as well as giving the necessary 
physical examination. 

Campuswide Events 

Student boards, organized by the Associated Students, sponsor many campuswide events. The 
lecture series, pop concerts, film series and special events are part of the ongoing program. All 
recognized student organizations frequently cosponsor events in the area of their interests. 

Child Care Center 

Sponsored by the Associated Students is the Children's Center which provides daytime nursery care 
for children of Cal State Fullerton students for a nominal fee. The professionally staffed center, 
located near the campus, is licensed by the State of California. 

Experimental College 

The Experimental College is a program created and funded by the Associated Students. A student 
director and his staff coordinate, guide, plan and publicize the program to the university community. 
The Experimental College is recognized by the university community as a creative, positive cocur- 
ricular program that is a supplement to the regular instructional program of the university. 

Legal Information and Referral 

This unique office provides assistance to students on matters pertaining to law and makes referrals 
in cooperation with the Orange County Bar Association and the Legal Aid Society. A full-time law 
student attending a recognized school of law maintains scheduled office hours in the University 
Union. 

Mutual Ticket Agency 

The Associated Students, through its business office, operates a ticket agency for the benefit of all 
students. Purchases for drama, music, shows and sp)orting events may be made during regular office 
hours. The agency is located in the University Union. 

Student News Bureau 

The Student News Bureau was organized in 1960 to provide the outside press with news of student 
activities on the campus. It is financed by a budgeted allocation from Associated Students. 


140-33 11 60 


Financial Aid 25 


University Union 

The University Union is leased by the Associated Students from the university. This facility houses 
the Associated Students government offices and business office, as well as the Student Activities 
Center, student organizations rooms and a snack bar. Facilities are available to all students for 
meeting rooms, pool, cards, films, and small discussion groups. The union is located in the lower 
level of the Letters and Science Building. 

HOUSING OFFICE 

The Housing Office has a staff whose primary concern is to insure that every student's housing needs 
are measured and every attempt is made to satisfy these needs. 

In order to meet these primary concerns, the office provides the following: 

• List of off-campus housing, rooms and apartments. These listings are continuously updated by 
conventional and computerized procedures. 

• Summer orientations designed to find housing for students well in advance of the fall semester. 
The orientations generally bring together groups of students who share similar interests because 
of their housing needs. 

• Model rental agreements are available to all students. This agreement has been carefully 
reviewed by legal counselors and represents the university's best recommendations to students. 

• Information is available for students with questions about the rights and responsibilities of being 
a tenant. 

• Bulletin boards are available for students requesting roommates or needing an apartment. 

• A free computerized car pool service is available to students with transportation difficulties and 
students attempting to improve our ecology. 

THE HEALTH CENTER 

The Student Health Center is located on Gymnasium Campus Drive between the Physical Education 
Building on the west and the Engineering Building and the Geodesic Dome on the east. The center 
is open from 8 a.m. to 7 p.m., Monday through Thursday and 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Friday. 

The doctors and nurses, laboratory and x-ray technologists, pharmacists and aides are there to care 
for patients' medical needs, not to judge their morals. No one has access to a patient's medical 
records unless the patient gives permission for the transfer of records, or in the rare case, by court's 
subpoena. 

Most of the doctors are generalists who have wide experience and interest in the health needs of 
university people. In addition, there are psychiatrists, an orthop)edist and gynecologists. The center 
has a limited pharmacy (not for outside prescriptions), a laboratory, an x-ray service and 
physiotherapy. 

The cost of care given in the Health Center, except for a few specific fees, already has been paid 
through student fees and by the State of California. Every registered student is eligible for care. 
However, the Health Center cannot meet all medical needs. So students are urged to obtain health 
insurance. A good, inexp>ensive p)olicy is offered through the Associated Students Office. 

The new Health Center opened in February 1974. All members of the university community are 
invited to come in for a personal tour. 

FINANCIAL AID 

The Financial Aid Office provides guidance and assistance in financial matters to all students. 
Financial aid administers all scholarships, emergency loans, grants. National Direct Loans and the 
work-study programs. 

One application for aid covers all programs for which a student may be eligible. Deadlines for 
applications are as follows: December 1 for the spring semester; April 1 for summer sessions and 
for the fall semester. 

Dependent students, defined as those who are dependent upon their parents for support, must 
submit the following documents: (1) application; (2) Parent's Confidential Statement of the College 
Scholarship Service; and (3) copy of parents form 1040. 

Independent students, defined as those who are not dependent up)on their parents for supp>ort, must 
2 -86012 


144—33 11 80 


26 


Financial Aid 


provide the following documents: (1 ) application; (2) Student's Financial Statement of the College 
Scholarship Service; (3) copy of their own form 1040 and spouse's, when applicable; and (4) 
Independent Student Certificate. 

Early submission of documents is advised, as funds are limited and demand is great. 

Scholarships 

A limited number of scholarships is available for outstanding students. Qualified students should 
obtain scholarship applications from the Financial Aid Office, and return by April 15 for the fall 
semester. Scholarship applications are evaluated by the university Scholarship Committee. Awards 
are based on scholastic record, financial need and personal qualifications. Some scholarships are 
limited to students majoring in specified disciplines. Departmental recommendations weigh heavily 
in such cases. 

Scholarships offered by Cal State Fullerton are made possible by interested organizations, business 
firms and individuals. Recent contributors to the scholarship program include: 

American Association of University Women (Placentia-Yorba Linda Branch) 

California Congress of Parents and Teachers, Inc. 

California Retired Teachers Association 

Cal State Fullerton Computer Center Scholarship Fund 

California State Employees' Association (Cal State Fullerton Chapter) 

Delta Delta Delta East Orange County Alumnae Chapter 

Ebell Club of Fullerton 

Edward Mittleman Memorial Scholarship 

Fourth District, California Parents and Teachers Association 

Fullerton Rotary Club 

Gamma Phi Beta Sorority (Orange County Alumnae) 

Kappa Phi Sigma Sorority 

Los Amigos Club of Fullerton 

Mr. and Mrs. Rodney Coulson (President's Award) 

Mu Phi Epsilon Scholarship Fund 

National Federation of the Blind of California, Inc. 

Orange County Engineering Council Scholarship 
Robert King Maxwell Memorial Scholarship Fund 
Sadie Landon Memorial Music Scholarship Fund 
Sheryl Cummings Memorial Scholarship Fund 

Loans 

The generosity of organizations and Individuals enables the university to offer short-term loans to 
students who meet unexpected financial difficulties of a temporary nature. Loans from these funds 
are made for various periods of time and to specified categories of students, according to university 
regulations and the wishes of the donors. The prime purpose of these loans is to meet educationally 
related expenses, and thus loans cannot be made for the purposes which are normally financed by 
private lending institutions. Application for a short-term loan may be made at any time during the 
school year. 

The following is a listing of the loan funds available during the 1973-74 school year: 

Altrusa Club of Fullerton Loan Fund 

Associated Students Foreign Student Loan Fund 

Brea Rotary Club Loan Fund 

California Retired Teachers Association 

Carrie Lou Sutherland Memorial Fund 

Cal State Fullerton Faculty Women's Club Loan Fund 

Don Miller Memorial Fund 

Gamma Epsilon Chapter of Delta Kappa Gamma Loan Fund 

James Merrick Memorial Fund 

Junior Ebell Club of Anaheim Loan Fund 

Laguna Beach Pan-Hellenic Loan Fund 

Laura E. Imhoff Memorial Fund 

Mary Virginia Lopez Memorial Fund 

Memorial Loan Fund 


14^-33 11 105 


Educational Opportunity Program 27 

Newport Harbor Children's Theatre Loan Fund 
Newport Harbor Pan-Hellenic Loan Fund 
Pan-Hellenic Club of Northern Orange County Loan Fund 
Pierre Cuyette Memorial Fund 

Alan Pattee Scholarship (Children of Deceased Peace Officers or Firemen) 

Surviving children, natural or adopted, of California peace officers or firemen killed in the line of 
duty are not charged fees or tuition of any kind while enrolled at any California State University or 
College, according to the Alan Pattee Scholarship Act and Section 23762, California Education Code. 
Students qualifying for these benefits are known as Alan Pattee scholars. 

INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION 

Foreign Students 

Special services for foreign students are coordinated by the Office of International Education and 
Exchange. These services include aid with problems concerning visa status and employment; orien- 
tation to academic procedures and requirements; advisement related to finances and social customs; 
and to resources and opportunities offered by campus and community. 

International Programs 

Information concerning study opportunities for American students in foreign universities is available 
in the International Student Office. The director of international education and exchange coordinates 
the selection of students applying for admission to one of the international programs operated by 
The California State University and Colleges in Denmark, France, Germany, Italy, japan, Mexico, 
Spain, Sweden, Taiwan and the United Kingdom. (See also International Programs on page 15.) 

HANDICAPPED STUDENTS PROGRAM 

Located in the Library Building, this office offers services and assistance to handicapped students. 
The goal of this program is to make the full educational, cultural, social and physical facilities of the 
university available to students with orthopedic, visual, hearing or other mobility or perceptual 
disabilities. 

A full range of services is available in coop)eration with other university departments — a learning 
resource center, preregistration, orientation, attendant /reader/ note-taker services, counseling, ca- 
reer planning, academic advisement, housing, transportation and job placement. The purpose is to 
provide necessary services and assistance that will eliminate or significantly reduce barriers resulting 
from the mobility problems encountered by most handicapped students. The program serves as a 
centralized source of information and provides individual attention to students. It is staffed by 
personnel experienced in the particular needs of the handicapp>ed. 

The coordinator for this program may be contacted in the Center for the Handicapped. 

EDUCATIONAL OPPORTUNITY PROGRAM 

The Educational Opportunity Program is an innovative educational program designed to provide 
comprehensive services for educationally disadvantaged and/or culturally different students. These 
services include the identification, selection, counseling and retention of students who would not 
normally acquire a university education because of academic, ethnic, financial or motivational 
barriers. 

EOP gives each of the students in its program individual attention. It also uses knowledge of the 
student's distinctive patterns of social behavior, learning styles, motivations, and aspirations to assist 
students in realizing their full potentialities. Additionally, EOP strives to develop a sense of commu- 
nity among its students through a variety of creative and identity-seeking activities. 

Students are encouraged not only to understand the background and strengths of their own particular 
ethnic groups, but also to work together in support of central, universal human values. EOP is keenly 
interested in advancing the understanding of different cultural groups on this campus by promoting 
an awareness of their concerns and potentialities. 

The services offered by the Educational Opportunity Program include. Project Upward Bound, 
recruiting, counseling. Learning Assistance Center, direct intervention programs and supporting 


169—33 11 205 


28 Placement Services 


secretarial services. These support services of EOP are designed to ensure a progressive rate of 
student achievement and to provide the opportunity of realizing a full capacity of academic success. j 

Project Upward Bound I 

This program is directed to high school students with good possibility and who are therefore capable i 
of college work, but who are underachieving. Upward Bound provides these students with supple- 
mental academic and counseling support to motivate them to complete high school and assist them 
in entering higher education. | 

Recruiting j 

EOP recruitment teams visit high schools and colleges within a specified service area and advise I 
students of the benefits of higher education at Cal State Fullerton. Utilizing Affirmative Action 1 
guidelines, a special attempt is made to recruit students with high academic potential. Assistance j 
with admissions and financial aid procedures is an important service of this component. 

Counseling Service | 

The counseling component is the key to the effectiveness of the entire EOP. Peer counsel- i 
ors, working under the direction of professional counselors, are the important liaisons between each 
individual EOP student and the university as a whole. Assistance and guidance is provided to help 
the student resolve academic, social, financial and personal problems. The EOP Counseling Center 
also acts as a referral p)oint to direct students to the appropriate support services, e.g. financial aid, 
housing. Learning Assistance Center, with tutorial services, health services, etc. 

Learning Assistance Center and Tutorial Center 

The EOP Learning Assistance Center (LAC) is for students who need to bring about changes in their 
present learning skills, particularly in the areas of reading, writing, computation and study skills. The 
LAC also serves as a resource center, containing special study materials, collateral textbooks, and 
tap)ed programs that supplement regular course offerings. Individual tutoring is available to students 
after their needs have been properly assessed through the LAC on request and through faculty or i 

peer counselor referrals. All tutors are first selected on the basis of ability in their particular area of | 

concentration. Prior to tutoring, they are assigned to a series of education courses designed to give i 

the prospective tutor a greater understanding and awareness of the nature of his role in the learning | 

process. ^ 

Direct Intervention Programs 

These programs bridge the gap between a student's present achievement and university scholastic 
requirements. Currently, special programs are offered for academic credit in reading, mathematics, 
study skills and ethnic studies. The LAC is now preparing additional direct intervention programs i 
in mathematics, and the sciences. Additional programs will be created and implemented relevant 
to student needs. 

Tutorial Services 

Individual tutoring is available to students through the LAC on request and through faculty or peer 
counselor referrals, and after their needs have been properly assessed. All tutors are first selected 
on their ability in their particular area of concentration. Prior to tutoring, they are assigned to a series 
of education courses designed to give the prospective tutor a greater understanding and awareness 
of the nature of his role in the learning process. These classes are new this year and are not listed 
in this catalog. 

PLACEMENT SERVICES 

A centralized Career Planning and Placement Center is maintained with responsibilities for assisting 
students in career planning and in finding both part-time and career employment. The university 
believes that it best serves both the student and employers only when its graduates have been placed ^ 
in the professions for which they are prepared and trained. All registered students are welcome to : 
use the services of the Placement Center without cost and are also eligible for career counseling and 
placement. 


174 -^ 11 230 


Alumni Relations 29 


Part-Time Placement 

All registered students wishing part-time jobs either on or off campus are eligible to receive the 
assistance of the office. New students may receive service after August 1 for the fall semester or after 
january 1 for the spring semester. Secretarial skills are in great demand, but calls for drivers, 
custodians, teacher aides, draftsmen, waiters, clerks, youth and recreation leaders, sitters, gardeners, 
etc., are received. Entering freshmen who must augment their resources while going to school are 
encouraged to limit their work hours to approximately 15 per week. 

Business, Industry and Government Placement 

Through personal interviews the career placement counselor assists graduating seniors, graduate 
students, and alumni seeking career employment in business, industry, or public service in defining 
occupational preference, providing active job leads and writing resumes. 

In addition, the Placement Center makes arrangements for the on-campus recruitment program 
which brings the employers to the students. Also available through this office is the job Bank service. 
The center is a member of the Orange County job Bank, and a computerized listing of more than 
1,000 job opportunities in Orange County is received daily. 

Located in the Placement Center is the Career Library with an ever-expanding selection of resource 
materials on career opportunities. Federal, state, county, city and armed forces brochures and 
applications are also available for student access. One section of the Career Library is devoted to 
information on nontraditional or alternative vocations. 

The Placement Center serves as liaison office for the military and Action /Peace Corps-VISTA offering 
counseling and information brochures to any interested student. 

Educational Placement 

Students in the teacher education, pupil personnel services, or administration curriculum of the 
university, who are in the final semester of a credential program, or who are in student teaching or 
directed field work, are eligible to register and receive the services of the Placement Center, chief 
of which is help in establishing a professional employment file. Such registrants are supplied informa- 
tion on openings and helped to establish their candidacies in the school districts and educational 
institutions. 

Students who are not in the student teaching program but who are completing their credential 
program at the university are also eligible for service. This includes those about to receive their 
master's degree in library science or academic areas, who plan to apply for a community college 
credential. Certain specified services are available to alumni as well. 

Coordinator of Minority Relations 

The coordinator of minority relations has the resp)onsibility for broadening awareness in the entire 
community of placement services available to all minorities and for encouraging minority students 
to register with the center for career counseling and placement services. The coordinating officer 
works cooperatively with colleagues resp)onsible for other specialized functions, e.g. teaching, 
part-time jobs, business, industry and government, and does not serve as the sole placement 
counselor for all minority students. 

SPECIAL PROjECTS 

The Office of Special Projects is concerned with formulating and adjudicating student rights, griev- 
ances and responsibilities. The office coordinates both the student grievance and the student discipli- 
nary procedures. Additionally, the office carries out sp>ecial projects related to Student Services as 
assigned by the dean. 

ALUMNI RELATIONS 

The Alumni Association of Cal State Fullerton provides the opportunity for alumni to maintain 
contact with the university after graduation through various publications, information about continu- 
ing education programs as well as special social, recreational, travel and service events at the 
university. The association is directed by a board which also advises the university president and 
administration. Further information regarding membership and the programs can be obtained by 
calling the Office of Alumni Relations. 


179—33 11 255 


30 Veterans' Services 

OFFICE OF MINORITY SERVICES 

The Office of Minority Services offers information regarding the opportunities available to the 
minority student for graduate studies. This resource encompasses financial aid, application filing, 
recruitment sessions and personal contact with those involved In minority programs on other 
campuses. 

Maintaining student awareness of deadline dates, requirements, etc., hopefully will increase enroll- 
ment of minorities into programs of higher education. 

OFFICE OF VETERANS' SERVICES 

The Office of Veterans' Services was established to aid and assist all veterans, especially Vietnam 
era veterans, who are not now participating in a postsecondary educational experience. Functioning 
under an institutional award from the U.S. Department of Health, Education and Welfare, the office 
Is charged with the responsibilities of (1) outreach, (2) recruitment, (3) special programs and (4) 
counseling. In addition, it assists, and aids veterans in: registration, tutoring, benefit advisement, 
educational opportunities, housing and job placement (both on and off campus). 

The program director of veterans' services may be contacted in the Veterans' Services Office. 


181—33 11 265 


ADMISSION 

REGISTRATION 

RECORDS 

AND REGULATIONS 



32 


ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY 


OFFICE OF ADMISSIONS AND RECORDS 

The Office of Admissions and Records is resp>onsible for the administration of the admission, 
registration, and records programs and services for undergraduate and graduate students in the 
regular sessions of Cal State Fullerton. These programs and services include; the admission and 
readmission of students within established enrollment categories, quotas and priorities; the evalua- 
tion of the applicability of undergraduate transfer credit toward all-university requirements of the 
curriculum; the registration of student programs of study, including enrollment into classes; the 
maintenance of academic records; the administration of academic probation and disqualification 
p)olicies; the provision of enrollment certifications on student request, including transcripts of aca- 
demic records, certificates for Selective Service, Veterans Administration and other purp)oses; the 
certification of the completion of degree and credential requirements; the review of petitions for 
exceptions to academic regulations; and the provision of information about these programs and 
services. 

RELATIONS WITH SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES 

The Office of Relations with Schools and Colleges administers a universitywide program to assist 
undergraduate students in the transition from school to college. This assistance is provided in the 
form of preadmission guidance to prospective students, counseling with parents, provision of current 
information about the university's curricula and requirements to school and college counselors, and 
research into the articulation problems of the transfer student. 

Requirements for Admission 

Requirements for admission to Cal State Fullerton are in accordance with Title 5, Chapter I, Subchap- 
ter 3, of the California Administrative Code. A prospective applicant who is unsure of his status under 
these requirements is encouraged to consult a high school or college counselor or the Admissions 
Office. Applications may be obtained from the Admissions Office at any of the campuses of The 
California State University and Colleges or at any California high school or community college. 

Undergraduate Application Procedures for 1975-76 

Prospective undergraduates, whether applying for part-time or full-time programs of study, in day 
or evening classes, must file within the appropriate filing period, a complete application including 
all the required forms and fees as described in the application booklet. The S20 nonrefundable 
application fee should be in the form of a check or money order payable to The California State 
University and Colleges. Undergraduate applicants may file only at their first choice campus. Alter- 
nate choice campuses and majors may be indicated on the application, but an applicant should list 
as alternate campuses only those campuses of The California State University and Colleges that he 
will attend if his first choice campus cannot accommodate him. Generally, alternate degree majors 
will be considered at the first choice campus before an application is redirected to an alternate 
choice campus. Applicants will be considered automatically at the alternate choice campus if the 
first choice campus cannot accommodate them. Transcripts and other supporting documents should 
not be submitted until requested by the campus. 

PosPBaccalaureate Application Procedures for 1975-76 

All applicants for any type of post-baccalaureate status (eg., master's degree applicants, those 
seeking credentials, and those interested in taking courses for professional growth, etc.) must file, 
within the appropriate filing period, a complete application including all of the required forms and 
fees described in the application booklet. Post-baccalaureate applicants who completed under- 
graduate degree requirements and graduated the preceding term are also required to complete and 
submit an application and the $20 nonrefundable fee. Since applicants for post-baccalaureate pro- 
grams may be limited to the choice of a single campus on each application, redirection to alternative 
campuses or later changes of campus choice will minimal. In the event that a p>ost-baccalaureate 
applicant wishes to be assured of initial consideration by more than one campus. It will be necessary 


186-^ 11 290 


Admission to the University 33 


to submit a separate application (including fee) to each. 

Post-baccalaureate applicants seeking second baccalaureates are considered undergraduate appli- 
cants for purposes of application and admission procedures, categories, and quotas. 

Application materials may be obtained from the Office of Admissions or the Graduate Studies Office 
of any campus within the system and must be filed with the campus of first choice. 


Admission Categories and Quotas 

Admission quotas are established at each college for student categories selected within policies 
established by the Trustees of The California State University and Colleges. At Cal State Fullerton, 
categories have been established for students who are; first-time freshmen; freshman and sophomore 
undergraduate transfer applicants; junior and senior undergraduate transfer applicants; special pro- 
gram applicants; hardship applicants; and foreign students. Also, there is a quota for most graduate 
level programs. 

All applications received in the initial filing period will receive equal consideration for such catego- 
ries. Certain undergraduate programs (architecture, natural resources, nursing and physical therapy) 
are impacted throughout the 19-campus system, and applicants to such programs are expected to 
meet supplementary admission criteria for admission to these programs. Applicants to these major 
programs will be sent further information by the campuses about the supplementary criteria to be 
used, and how and when applicants must meet them. 

After admission to Cal State Fullerton, requests for change to a different (i.e., a new) academic 
objective involving established admission categories and quotas will be evaluated following policies 
and procedures parallel to those for new students. 


Application Filing Periods 

Term Initial Filing Period 

Summer the previous February 

Fall the previous November 

Winter the previous June 

Spring the previous August 


Extended Filing Period 
March until filled 
December until filled 
July until filled 
September until filled 


All applications postmarked or received during the initial filing period will be given equal considera- 
tion within established enrollment categories and quotas. There is no advantage in filing before the 
initial filing period. Applications received before the initial filing period may be returned, causing a 
delay in processing. With the exception of the impacted undergraduate program areas (architecture, 
natural resources, nursing and physical therapy), most campuses will be accepting applications well 
into the extended filing periods until quotas are filled. 


Space Reservations 

Applicants who apply during the initial filing period and who can be accommodated will receive 
a space reservation. A space reservation is not a statement of admission but is a commitment by 
Cal State Fullerton to admit the student once eligibility has been determined. The space reservation 
directs the applicant to arrange to have appropriate records forwarded promptly to the Admissions 
Office. Applicants should not request that any records be forwarded until they have received a space 
reservation notice. 

Hardship Petitions 

Each college or university has established procedures to consider qualified applicants who would 
be faced with an extreme hardship if not admitted. Prospective hardship p)etitioners should contact 
the campus regarding specific policies governing hardship admission. 

How to Apply 

1 . Submit a completed application for admission within the announced filing period accompanied 
by the required application fee to: 

Office of Admissions and Records 
California State University, Fullerton 
Fullerton, California 92634 

2. Request required transcripts of record of all previous scholastic work from each school or 


192—33 11 320 


34 Admission of Undergraduate Students 

college attended when asked to do so by the campus where space has been reserved for you. 
The transcripts required at Fullerton are 
— for undergraduates — 

(a) the high school transcript, and 

(b) a transcript from each college or university attended. Undergraduate applicants for a 
teaching credential must submit two copies of the transcript from each college or 
university attended; 

— for graduates — 

( a ) applicants for unclassified graduate standing with no degree or credential objective must 
submit a transcript from the college or university where the baccalaureate was earned. 

(b) applicants for a master's degree or teaching credential, or both, must submit two copies 
of the transcript from each college or university attended. 

All students are advised that they should also have a complete set of college transcripts for their 
personal use at all times of advisement. 

All transcripts must be received directly from the issuing institution to be considered official 
and cannot be returned to the student. Foreign language transcripts must be accompanied by 
certified English translations. 

3. If required, submit the scores from either the Scholastic Aptitude Test or the American College 
Test. Scores are required for all undergraduate applicants with fewer than 56 completed 
transferable semester units of study (84 quarter units) . Applicants to classified graduate curric- 
ula must submit the scores of any qualifying examinations required in their prospective program 
of study. 

UNDERGRADUATE ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS 

First-time Freshmen 

Applicants who have completed no college work after high school graduation will be considered 
for admission as first-time freshmen under one of the following provisions. Results of either the CEEB 
Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) or the American College Testing program examination (ACT) are 
acceptable in establishing eligibility. 

Exceptions: College credit earned concurrent with high school enrollment; college credit earned 
in summer session after high school and prior to regular matriculation in college; college credit 
granted for the CLEP or Advanced Placement programs, or military or USAFI courses; or college 
credit granted for some nontraditional learning exp)erience, will not affect the applicant's status 
as a first-time freshman for application quota purposes as well as admission. Further, the accelerat- 
ed student, who completes his high school program mid-year, who has applied to The California 
State University and Colleges for the following fall term, but chooses to attend a local community 
college in the spring term will be considered a first-time freshman for application quota purposes 
as well as admission. All such college or advanced standing credit, if fully acceptable as transfer 
credit, will be granted the student after admission. 

California high school graduates or legal residents for tuition purposes must have a grade-point 
average and total score on the SAT, or composite score on the ACT, which together provide an 
eligibility index placing them in the upper one-third of California high school graduates. For 1974-75 
the minimum eligibility index is 3,072 using the SAT or 741 using the ACT. 

High school graduates from other states or possessions who are nonresidents for tuition purposes 
must present an eligibility index which places them in the upp>er one-sixth of California high school 
graduates. For 1974-75 the minimum eligibility index is 3,402 using the SAT or 826 using the ACT. 
The eligibility index is computed either by multiplying the grade-point average by 800 and adding 
it to the total SAT score, or multiplying the grade-point average by 2(X) and adding it to 10 times 
the composite ACT score. Grade-point averages are based on work completed in the last three years 
of high school, exclusive of physical education and military science. 

As an alternative, the following table may be used to determine the eligibility of graduates of 
California high schools (or California legal residents) for freshman admission to a California State 
University or College. This table is based on the eligibility index. Scores shown are the SAT Total 
and the ACT Composite. Students with a given GPA must present the corresponding test score. 
Conversely, students with a given ACT or SAT score must present the corresponding CPA in order 
to be eligible. 


209—33 11 405 


Admission of Undergraduate Students 35 


ADMISSIONS TABLE FOR CALIFORNIA HIGH SCHOOL GRADUATES 
OR CALIFORNIA LEGAL RESIDENTS 



ACT 

SAT 


ACT 

SAT 


ACT 

SAT 

CPA 

Score 

Score 

CPA 

Score 

Score 

CPA 

Score 

Score 

( )• 



2.80 

19 

832 

2.39 

27 

1160 

3.20 

11 

512 

2.79 

19 

840 

2.38 

27 

1168 

3.19 

11 

520 

2.78 

19 

848 

2.37 

27 

1176 

3.18 

11 

528 

2.77 

19 

856 

2.36 

27 

1184 

3.17 

11 

536 

2.76 

19 

864 

2.35 

28 

1192 

3.16 

11 

544 

2.75 

20 

872 

2.34 

28 

1200 

3.15 

12 

552 

2.74 

20 

880 

2.33 

28 

1208 

3.14 

12 

560 

2.73 

20 

888 

2.32 

28 

1216 

3.13 

12 

568 

2.72 

20 

896 

2.31 

28 

1224 

3.12 

12 

576 

2.71 

20 

904 

2.30 

29 

1232 

3.11 

12 

584 

2.70 

21 

912 

2.29 

29 

1240 

3.10 

13 

592 

2.69 

21 

920 

2.28 

29 

1248 

3.09 

13 

600 

2.68 

21 

928 

2.27 

29 

1256 

3.08 

13 

608 

2.67 

21 

936 

2.26 

29 

1264 

3.07 

13 

616 

2.66 

21 

944 

2.25 

30 

1272 

3.06 

13 

624 

2.65 

22 

952 

2.24 

30 

1280 

3.05 

14 

632 

2.64 

22 

960 

2.23 

30 

1288 

3.04 

14 

640 

2.63 

22 

968 

2.22 

30 

1296 

3.03 

14 

648 

2.62 

22 

976 

2.21 

30 

1304 

3.02 

14 

656 

2.61 

22 

984 

2.20 

31 

1312 

3.01 

14 

664 

2.60 

23 

992 

2.19 

31 

1320 

3.00 

15 

672 

2.59 

23 

1000 

2.18 

31 

1328 

2.99 

15 

680 

2.58 

23 

1008 

2.17 

31 

1336 

2.98 

15 

688 

2.57 

23 

1016 

2.16 

31 

1344 

2.97 

15 

6% 

2.56 

23 

1024 

2.15 

32 

1352 

2.% 

15 

704 

2.55 

24 

1032 

2.14 

32 

1360 

2.95 

16 

712 

2.54 

24 

1040 

2.13 

32 

1368 

2.94 

16 

720 

2.53 

24 

1048 

2.12 

32 

1376 

2.93 

16 

728 

2.52 

24 

1056 

2.11 

32 

1384 

2.92 

16 

736 

2.51 

24 

1064 

2.10 

33 

1392 

2.91 

16 

744 

2.50 

25 

1072 

2.09 

33 

1400 

2.90 

17 

752 

2.49 

25 

1080 

2.08 

33 

1408 

2.89 

17 

760 

2.48 

25 

1088 

2.07 

33 

1416 

2.88 

17 

768 

2.47 

25 

10% 

2.06 

33 

1424 

2.87 

17 

776 

2.46 

25 

1104 

2.05 

34 

1432 

2.86 

17 

784 

2.45 

26 

1112 

2.04 

34 

1440 

2.85 

18 

792 

2.44 

26 

1120 

2.03 

34 

1448 

2.84 

18 

800 

2.43 

26 

1128 

2.02 

34 

1456 

2.83 

18 

808 

2.42 

26 

1136 

2.01 

34 

1464 

2.82 

18 

816 

2.41 

26 

1144 

2.00 

35 

1472 

2.81 

18 

824 

2.40 

27 

1152 

( )t 




Graduates of Secondary Schools in a Foreign Country 

Applicants who are graduates of foreign secondary schools must have preparation equivalent to that 
required of eligible California high school graduates. The university will carefully review the previous 
record of all such applicants arni only those with promise of academic success equivalent to that 
of eligible California high school graduates will be admitted. Such applicants are not required to take 
^ther the SAT or ACT except when specifically requested to do so. 


Non-High School Graduates 

Applicants who are over 1 8 years of age, but have not graduated from high school, will be considered 

• Students earning grade-point averages above 3.20 are digibte for admission, 
t Students earrung grade-point averages betow 2.0 are rnX eligible for admission. 


213—33 11 425 


36 


Admission of Post-Baccalaureate (Graduate) Students 


for admission as first-time freshmen only when preparation in all other ways is such that the 
university believes promise of academic success is equivalent to that of eligible California high school 
graduates. 

High School Students 

Students still enrolled in high school will be considered for enrollment in certain special programs, 
including summer session, if recommended by their principal and if in the judgment of the university 
their preparation is equivalent to that required of eligible California high school graduates. Such 
admission is only for a given course or program. 

Recommended Preparation 

Overall excellence of performance in high school subjects and a test score giving evidence of 
academic potential provide the best bases for predicting success at Cal State Fullerton. While no 
specific course pattern is required, prospective students are strongly encouraged to include the 
following subjects in their preparation for work at Cal State Fullerton: college preparatory English; 
another language; mathematics; laboratory science; history or social science (or both); and study 
in speech, music, art and other subjects contributing to a well-rounded academic background. 
Students who anticipate intensive study in science are urged to take four years of mathematics and 
three years of foreign language in high school. 

ADMISSION OF UNDERGRADUATE TRANSFER STUDENTS 

Applicants for admission as undergraduate transfers in good standing at the last institution attended 
will be considered for admission under one of the following provisions: 

1. He is eligible for admission in freshman standing (see First-Time Freshman requirements) and 
has earned an average grade of "C" (2.0 on a scale where A = 4.0) or better in all transferable 
college units attempted. 

2. He has completed at least 56 transferable semester units or 84 transferable quarter units with 
an average grade of "C" (2.0 on a scale where A = 4.0) or better if a California resident. 
Nonresidents must have a grade-p)oint average of 2.4 or better. 

Other Applicants 

Applicants not admissible under one of the above provisions should enroll in a community college 
or other appropriate institution. Only under the most unusual circumstances, and then only by 
sp)ecial action, will such applicants be permitted to enroll in the university. 

ADMISSION OF POST-BACCALAUREATE (GRADUATE) 
STUDENTS 

Unclassified Graduate Status 

For admission with graduate standing as an unclassified graduate student, a student: shall have 
completed a four-year college course and hold an acceptable baccalaureate degree from an accred- 
ited institution; or shall have completed equivalent academic preparation as determined by the 
appropriate authorities; and additionally must satisfactorily meet the professional, (personal, scholas- 
tic and other standards for graduate study (including qualifying examinations) that the appropriate 
authorities may prescribe. Such admission do€*s not, however, constitute acceptance to specific 
graduate degree or credential curricula. 

Classified Graduate Status 

A student who has been admitted to a California State University or College under the unclassified 
graduate requirement above may, upon application, be admitted to an authorized graduate degree 
or credential curriculum if he satisfactorily meets the professional, personal, scholastic, and other 
standards for admission to the graduate curriculum (including qualifying examinations) that the 
appropriate authorities may prescribe. Only those applicants who show promise of success and 
fitness will be admitted to graduate degree curricula, and only those who continue to demonstrate 
a satisfactory level of scholastic competence and fitness, as determined by the appropriate campus 
authorities, shall be eligible to continue in such curricula. Students whose performance in a graduate 
degree curriculum is judged to be unsatisfactory by the authorities of the campus may be required 
to withdraw from all graduate degree curricula offered by the campus. 


218—33 11 450 


Readmission 37 


ADMISSION OF STUDENTS FROM OTHER COUNTRIES 

Normally, the university accepts for consideration only two categories of applicants from other 
countries: 

1 . Those who have completed, with a good academic record, a two-year program in an accredit- 
ed institution of higher education. 

2. Those who have completed a bachelor's degree or its equivalent, with a good academic record, 
in an accredited institution and wish to enroll as graduate students. 

Persons applying from their home countries are normally considered for admission to the fall 
semester only. Those transferring from U.S. institutions may apply to the fall or spring semesters. 
All applicants whose native language is other than English are required to present a satisfactory score 
on the Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL). The international administrations of this 
examination are scheduled for September 16 and November 25, 1974, and February 24 and May 
19, 1975. Applicants should obtain the TOEFL Bulletin of Information registration forms well in 

advance. Copies of this bulletin and registration forms are often available at American embassies 
and consulates, offices of the United States Information Service, United States educational commis- 
sions and foundations abroad, bi-national centers, and several private organizations. Those who 
cannot obtain locally a TOEFL Bulletin of Information should write to: Test of English as a Foreign 
Language, Box 899, Princeton, New jersey, U.S. A., 08540. 

Application procedures in other respects are the same as for other students, except that transcripts 
of educational documents in languages other than English must be accompanied by approved 
translations into English. 

SUMMER SESSION STUDENTS 

Although the quality of the progranvand most of the course offerings are the same as in the regular 
session, the university does not require an advance application or transcripts from students register- 
ing for credit courses in the summer session. However, students must be high school graduates and 
are exp)ected to have satisfied the prerequisites for the courses in which they register. In addition, 
students are expected to file a request to register in the summer session. Admission to summer 
session does not grant admission to the regular session. 

READMISSION OF FORMER STUDENTS 

A Student previously enrolled in the university, planning to return after an absence of one or more 
semesters, must file a new application for admission in accordance with procedures set forth below. 
The application fee is required if the student was not enrolled in either of the two semesters prior 
to the semester to which he is seeking admission or if he was enrolled in another institution during 
his at)sence from Cal State Fullerton. Unless a leave of absence was granted, catalog requirements 
at the time of readmission will apply. 

Former Students in Good Standing 

A student who left the university in good standing will be readmitted provided any academic work 
attempted elsewhere since the last attendance does not change his scholastic status. Transcripts of 
the record of any work attempted in the interim are required. 

Former Students Who Were on Probation 

A student on probation at the close of his last enrollment will be readmitted on probation provided 
he is otherwise eligible. The student must furnish transcripts of any college work taken during his 
absence. 

Former Students Who Were Disqualified 

readmission of a previously disqualified student is by special action only. Ordinarily the univer- 
sity will consider an application for reinstatement only after the student has remained absent for a 
minimum of one year following disqualification and has fulfilled all recommended conditions. In 
every instance, readmission action is based on evidence, including transcripts of study completed 
elsewhere subsequent to disqualification, which in the judgment of the university warrants such 
action. If readmitted, the student is placed on scholastic probation. 


223-^ 11 475 


38 


Genera! Information About Admission 


GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT ADMISSION 

Determination of Residence 

New and returning students of The California State University and Colleges are classified for the 
purpose of determining the residence of each student for nonresident tuition purposes. The residence 
questionnaire and, if necessary, other evidence furnished by the student is used in making these 
determinations. A student may not register and enroll in classes until his residence questionnaire has 
been received by the Admissions Office. 

The following statement of the rules regarding residency determination for nonresident tuition 
purposes is not a complete discussion of the law, but a summary of the principal rules and their 
exceptions. The law governing residence determination for tuition purposes by the California State 
University and Colleges are found in Education Code Sections 22800-22865, 23753.1, 23754- 
23754.4, 23758.2, 23752, and in Title 5 of the California Administrative Code, Article 4 (commencing 
with Section 41901) of Subchapter 5 of Chapter 1, Part V. A copy of the statutes and regulations 
is available for inspection at the campus Admissions Office. 

Legal residence may be established by an adult who Is physically present in the state while, at the 
same time, intending to make California his permanent home. Steps must be taken at least one year 
prior to residence determination date to evidence the intent to make California the permanent home 
with concurrent relinquishment of the prior legal residence. Some of the relevant indicia of an 
intention to establish and maintain California residence may be established by registering to vote 
and voting in elections in California; satisfying resident California state income tax obligations on total 
income; ownership of residential property or continuous occupancy or letting of an apartment on 
a lease basis where one's permanent belongings are kept; maintaining active resident memberships 
in California professional or social organizations; maintaining California vehicle plates and operator's 
license; maintaining active savings and checking accounts in California banks; maintaining perma- 
nent military address and home of record In California if one Is in the military service, etc. 

The student who Is within the state for educational purposes only does not gain the status of resident 
regardless of the length of his stay in California. 

In general, the unmarried minor (a person under 18 years of age) derives legal residence from his 
father (or from his mother if the father is deceased), or, in the case of permanent separation of the 
parents, from the parent with whom the minor maintains his place of abode. The residence of a 
minor cannot be changed by act of the minor or that of the minor's guardian, so long as the minor's 
parents are living. 

A man or a woman may establish his or her residence; marriage is not a governing factor. 

The general rule is that a student must have been a California resident for at least one year 
immediately preceding the residence determination date in order to qualify as a "resident student" 
for tuition purposes. A residence determination date is set for each academic term and is the date 
from which residence is determined for that term. The residence determination dates for the 1974-75 
academic year are August 30, 1974, and January 15, 1975. If you have any questions respecting the 
applicable date, the campus Admissions Office can give the student the residence determination date 
for the term for which he is registering. 

There are several exceptions for nonresident tuition. Some of the exceptions provide for: 

1 . Persons below the age of 19 whose parents were residents of California but who left the state 
while the student was still a minor. When the minor reaches age 18, the exception continues 
for one year to enable the student to qualify as a resident student. 

2. Persons below the age of 19 who have been present in California for more than a year before 
the residence determination date, and entirely self-supporting for that period of time. 

3. Persons below the age of 19 who have lived with and been under the continuous direct care 
and control of an adult, not a parent, for the two years immediately preceding the residence 
determination date. Such adult must have been a California resident for the most recent year. 

4. Dependent children and spouses of p)ersons in active military service stationed in California on 
the residence determination date. This exception applies only for the minimum time required 
for the student to obtain California residence and maintain that residence for a year. The 
exception is not affected by transfer of the military person directly to a post outside the 50 states 
and the District of Columbia. 


230—33 11 510 


General Information About Admission 39 


5. Military personnel in active service stationed in California on the residence determination date 
for purposes other than education at state-supported institutions of higher education. This 
exception applies only for the minimum time required for the student to obtain California 
residence and maintain that residence for a year. 

6. A student who is an adult alien is entitled to residence classification if the student has been 
lawfully admitted to the United States for permanent residence in accordance with all applica- 
ble provisions of the laws of the United States; provided, however, that the student has had 
residence in California for more than one year after such admission prior to the residence 
determination date. A student who is a minor alien shall be entitled to residence classification 
if both the student and the parent from whom residence is derived have been lawfully admitted 
to the United States for permanent residence in accordance with all applicable laws of the 
United States, provided that the parent has had residence in California for more than one year 
after acquiring such permanent residence prior to the residence determination date of the term 
for which the student proposes to attend the university. 

7. Certain credentialed, full-time employees of school districts. 

8. Full-time California State University and Colleges employees and their children and spouses. 
This exception applies only for the minimum time required for the student to obtain California 
residence and maintain that residence for a year. 

9. Certain exchange students. 

10. Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire suppression employees, who were Califor- 
nia residents, and who were killed in the course of law enforcement or fire suppression duties. 

1 1 . A person in continuous full-time attendance at an institution who had resident classification on 
May 1, 1973, shall not lose such classification as a result of adoption of the uniform student 
residency law on which this statement is based, until the attainment of the degree for which 
currently enrolled. 

Any student, following a final decision on campus on his residence classification, may make 
written appeal to: Office of General Counsel, 5670 Wllshire Boulevard, Suite 1260, Los Angeles 
90036, within 120 calendar days of notification of the final decision on campus of his classifica- 
tion. The Office of General Counsel may make a decision on the issue, or it may send the matter 
back to the institution with instructions for a further review on campus. Students classified 
incorrectly as residents or incorrectly granted an exception from nonresident tuition are subject 
to reclassification as nonresidents and payment of nonresident tuition in arrears. If incorrect 
classification results from false or concealed facts, the student is subject to discipline pursuant 
to Section 41301 of Title 5 of the California Administrative Code. Resident students who 
become nonresidents, and nonresident students qualifying for exceptions whose basis for so 
qualifying changes, must immediately notify the Admissions Office. Applications for a change 
in classification with respect to a previous term are not accepted. 

The student is cautioned that this summation of rules regarding residency determination is by 
no means a complete explanation of their meaning. The student should also note that changes 
may have been made In the rate of nonresident tuition, in the statutes, and in the regulations 
between the time this catalog is published and the relevant residence determination date. 

Admission to Credential Programs 

Admission to the university as a student does not constitute admission to the teaching credential 
program. Students who plan to work toward teaching credentials must apply to the School of 
Education following procedures available from the School of Education. 

Cancellation of Admission 

A student who is admitted to the university for a given semester but who does not register in the 
specified semester will have his admission canceled. The student must file a new application form 
when he again seeks admission and must follow the complete application procedure and meet the 
then current admission requirements. 

Honors at Entrance 

Honors at entrance are awarded to both freshman and transfer students who have demonstrated 
outstanding achievement in past academic work. For first-time freshmen who have no previous 
college units earned, a grade point of 3.5 on a 5-polnt scale must be earned in the coursework 


236—33 11 540 


40 


Evaluation of Academic Records 


considered for admission to the university. Students who have completed fewer than 56 transferable 
semester units of credit must meet the grade-point average criteria for first-time freshmen and must 
also have earned a 3.5 grade-point average on all college work attempted. Students who have 
completed 56 or more transferable semester units are eligible if a grade-point average of 3.5 is earned 
in all college work completed. 

Undergraduate Entrance Testing Requirements 

All undergraduate students, who have completed fewer than 56 semester or 84 quarter units of 
transferable work, are required to submit scores from either one of two national testing programs 
before eligibility for admission to the university can be determined. This requirement does not affect 
undergraduate students who have previously attended Cal State Fullerton and who have submitted 
ACT or SAT scores at the time of their first admission. 

Registration forms for either test may be obtained from high school and community college counsel- 
ors, Cal State testing offices or directly from the testing service at the address below: 


SAT 
CEEB 
Box 1025 

Berkeley, Calif. 94770 


ACT 

Registration Unit 
P. O. Box 168 
Iowa City, Iowa 52240 


Dates Test Given: 
Oct. 12, 1974 
Nov. 2, 1974 
Dec. 7, 1974 
Feb. 1, 1975 
April 5, 1975 
June 28, 1975 

To take one of these tests: 


Dates Test Given: 
Oct. 19, 1974 
Dec. 14, 1974 
Feb. 22, 1975 
April 26, 1975 
June 14, 1975 


1 . Obtain a registration form and a Student Information Bulletin from your high school or commu- 
nity college counselor, from one of the addresses above, or from the university Testing Center. 
Select a test center near your home from the list printed in the Bulletin. 

2. Send the completed registration form and the appropriate test fee to the proper address. Do 
not send to the Fullerton campus. 

3. Have your ACT or SAT scores reported to the Testing Center, Cal State Fullerton. These scores 
should be received before the deadline for application. Use the appropriate code number for 
score reports. 

If you have already taken either the ACT or SAT, send $2 to the appropriate testing agency and 
request that your scores be reported to the Testing Center. Use appropriate code number when 
requesting such reports, and provide complete information concerning testing date, test center, name 
and address changes, etc. These test scores when included on high school or college transcripts 
are not acceptable. 


EVALUATIONS OF ACADEMIC RECORDS 

Evaluation of Transfer Credits 

The Office of Admissions will evaluate previous college work in terms of its relationship to the 
requirements of Cal State Fullerton. All degree candidates will be issued a credit summary during 
the first semester of attendance which serves as a basis for determining specific remaining require- 
ments for the student's specific objectives. 

Once issued to a st ent, the evaluation remains valid as long as the student enrolls at the date 
specified, pursues the objective specified, and remains in continuous attendance. The student will 
not be held to additional graduation requirements unless such requirements become mandatory as 
a result of changes in the California Administrative Code or the California Education Code. If the 
student does not remain in continuous attendance and has not applied for and been granted a formal 
leave of absence, the evaluation issued upon readmission will specify the remaining requirements 
for the student's specific objectives. 


257—33 12 5 


Evaluation of Academic Records 41 


In view of the foregoing regulations, the student should notify the Office of Admissions immediately 
if he changes the objective specified in his evaluation. While the evaluation for a student remains 
valid, the student is held responsible for complying with all changes in regulations and procedures 
which may appear in subsequent catalogs. 

Acceptance of Credit 

Credit for work completed at accredited institutions, other than coursework identified by such 
institutions as remedial or in other ways as being nontransferable, will be accepted toward the 
satisfaction of degree and credential requirements at the university within limitations of residence 
requirements and community college transfer maximums. 

Transfer of Credit From a Community College 

Upper division credit is not allowed for courses taken in a community college. Credential credit is 
not allowed for courses in professional education taken in a community college. This does not 
invalidate credit for preprofessional courses taken at a community college, such as introduction to 
education, art or design, arithmetic, or music for classroom teachers. After a student has completed 
70 units of college credit at a community college, no further community college units will be 
accepted for unit credit. 

Credit for Military Service 

Students who have been in active military service for at least a year may be granted six units of 
undergraduate credit. Courses taken in service schools may be given credit on the basis of an 
evaluation which determines that they are of university level. Any credit for military experience will 
be given only upon request. Records verifying such experience must be filed with the Office of 
Admissions. 

Credit for Extension and Correspondence Courses 

The maximum amount of credit through correspondence and extension courses which may be 
allowed toward the bachelor's degree is 24 units, if otherwise applicable. 

Credit by Advanced Placement 

Students who have successfully completed courses in the advanced placement program (defined 
as receiving a score of 3, 4 or 5) shall be granted credit toward graduation, advanced placement 
in the university's sequence courses, and credit for curriculum requirements. 

Credit by Examination 

Students may be granted credit for a course toward graduation and to meet curriculum requirements 
by the satisfactory completion of a challenge examination in that course requirement. The examina- 
tions are to be comprehensive and administered by the department in which the course is offered. 
Well in advance of the challenge examination the student will secure written approval of his major 
adviser and the chairman of the department in which the course is offered. Upon the successful 
completion of the examination, the notation on the permanent record of the student will be made 
as "CR" for the course. "CR" is to indicate credit for the course with a passing grade. Upon failure 
of the examination, the notation on the permanent record of the student will be made as "No CR " 
for the course. Credit by examination may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence requirements. 
The challenge examination for any course may be attempted only once. A maximum of 30 credits 
can be earned by challenge examination, including those achieved by advanced placement. 

College Level Examination Program 

Operating under an interim policy. Cal State Fullerton may grant credit and advanced standing based 
upon examination results from the College Level Examination Program of the College Entrance 
Examination Board using as minimum standards: 

General Examinations 

T That the student achieve a score at or above the 50th percentile, college sophomore norms. 
2. That no unit credit be granted for any test in the general examinations, but that six units of 
general education requirements be waived for each test completed with the appropriate score. 


262—33 12 30 


42 


Evaluation of Academic Records 


Subject Examinations 

1. That the student submit a score at or above the 50th percentile of those in the norming group 
who earned a mark of C or better. 

2. That equivalency to Cal State Fullerton courses be determined by the appropriate academic 
department in conjunction with the Office of Admissions and Records. 

3. That university credit shall have not been previously earned in the courses in question. 

In no case will credit so awarded count towards residence credit. 


263—33 12 35 


43 


REGISTRATION 


Orientation 

Various opportunities are provided for new students to obtain information relating to academic 
programs, student services and activities, and other aspects of university life. Information about 
specific programs will be published separately. 

Registration 

Class Schedule; A complete listing of courses offered will be found in the Class Schedule published 
prior to the start of each semester. This publication, which may be purchased in the Titan Bookstore 
for a nominal charge, also states detailed information pertaining to the semester including class 
enrollment and fee payment procedures. 

It is important that each student familiarize himself not only with the academic policies stated in the 
catalog but also with the requirements and procedures in the class schedule as both are used In the 
selection of classes for the semester. 

Course Selection; Cal State Fullerton believes its students have the intelligence and capability to plan 
their schedules each semester and to make a selection among available sections of a course. Such 
matters are the responsibility of the student and permit him to develop an individualized class 
schedule for each semester to meet the student's academic program requirements as well as his own 
unique personal requirements (study, work, etc.). 

Course selection should be based on an adviser-approved formal academic program, course descrip- 
tions In the current catalog (including course prerequisites), and courses offered as listed in the 
semester Class Schedule. With this information each student should be able to determine courses 
needed, courses available, and eligibility for enrolling in them. The study list resulting from such an 
appraisal forms the basis for completing the official program card which is used in registration. 
Registration; Registration is made up of two steps — class enrollment and fee payment. At registration, 
every student is required to file a program card with the Office of the Registrar. The filing of a 
program card by the student and its acceptance by the university obligates the student to perform 
the designated work to the best of his ability. All undergraduates are urged to declare a major at 
the earliest practicable time and not later than at the time they have completed 60 units of college 
work. 

It Is emphasized that registration does not become official until fees have been paid. 

Computerized Records System 

The student personnel records system, including the registration process, is computer based. This 
means that records and reports are produced from an information data file maintained in the 
university Computer Center. It is a fact of life in a large institution such as Cal State Fullerton that 
use of the computer Is essential. Thus, there is a requirement for data cards, code numbers, student 
file numbers and for meeting precise criteria for data input and stringent deadlines. All of this 
introduces an element of the impersonal in the student records system. Despite these conditions, 
every effort is made to provide courteous, efficient and personalized service to students and the 
entire university community. To assist In providing this service, students are urged to be extremely 
careful and accurate in preparing data cards, especially the official program card and change of 
program card, for entry into the information file. Accurate input of information will assure each 
student of error-free records. 

"H" Classes 

Course code numbers followed by an "H" Identify courses which require special departmental 
approval before a student can enroll in them. 

The "H" means a student must obtain special approval from the department prior to class enroll- 
ment. Having such approval, in effect, "reserves" a place for the student in the class. Approvals must 
be obtained from the specific department in which the course is offered. 


269—33 12 65 


44 Reserve Officers' Training Corps 

Late Registration 

The last day to register late each semester will be announced in the Class Schedule. Late registrants 
will find themselves handicapped in arranging their programs and must pay a $5 late registration fee 
in addition to regular fees. 

Changes in Program 

Each student is responsible for the program of courses he lists when he registers. Changes may not 
be made thereafter without the filing of a change of program (add-drop) form in the Office of the 
Registrar following procedures announced in the Class Schedule. 

Failure to file an official change of program request in the case of dropped classes may result in a 
penalty mark being recorded. Through the fourth week of instruction in the semester no record of 
enrollment is made of dropped classes. After four weeks students are expected to complete all 
courses in which they are enrolled. However, for reasons of ill health or reasons involving other 
serious and unforeseen problems, the student may drop a class or classes and receive a W (With- 
drawal) by obtaining the approval and signature (s) of the professor (s) involved and filing the 
change with the registrar on the form provided. 

No classes may be dropped during the last three weeks of instruction, although complete withdrawal 
from the university is still possible (See page 52). 

Concurrent Enrollment 

A student enrolled at the university may enroll concurrently for additional courses at another 
institution only with advance written approval from the student's academic adviser on official forms 
filed in the Office of the Registrar. Permission will not be granted when the study load in the 
proposed combined program exceeds the units authorized at this university. 

Auditors 

A properly qualified student may enroll in classes as an auditor. The student must meet the regular 
university admission requirements and must pay the same fees as other students. An auditor may 
not change his registration to obtain credit after the last date to add courses to the study list. An 
auditor is not permitted to take examinations in the course. 

Handicapped Students 

Students physically handicapped who require assistance should contact the Office of the Registrar 
prior to the announced semester registration period so that special arrangements for them can be 
made. 


VETERANS 

Cal State Fullerton is approved by the Bureau of Readjustment Education, State Department of 
Education, to offer programs to veterans seeking benefits under state and federal legislation. All 
students seeking veterans' benefits must have a degree or credential objective. 

Applications for benefits should be filed well in advance of the semester in which the veteran plans 
to use these benefits in order to have the authorization at the time of registration. 

SELECTIVE SERVICE 

Male students requiring certification of their student status may request the Office of Admissions and 
Records to submit the appropriate forms to their draft board. 

Undergraduate students shall normally be enrolled for 1 2 units a semester to be considered full time. 
Graduate students enrolled for nine units of study may be considered full time provided at least three 
units are SOO-level courses. 


RESERVE OFFICERS' TRAINING CORPS 

Cal State Fullerton does not have a Reserve Officers Training Corps program. However, through 
arrangements with the University of Southern California, two-, three- and four-year Air Force 
Reserve Officers Training Corps (AFROTC) programs are available to all qualified undergraduate 


273—33 12 85 


Fee Schedule 45 


students of the university. Successful completion of the AFROTC Program leads to commission as 
an officer in the Air Force Reserve. Academic units earned in the program are counted as elective 
credit towards the baccalaureate. For additional information, write the Department of Aerospace 
Studies (AFROTC), University of Southern California, Los Angeles 90007. ,or the University Place- 
ment Office. 

FEE SCHEDULE, 1974-75 

Tuition is not charged to legal residents of California. The following are the fees and expenses 
currently assessed. 

All Students 

Application fee (nonrefundable) 

Payable by check or money oroer at time of applying $20 

Materials and Service fee: Semester 

Fewer than 4 units $48 

At least 4 but fewer than 8 units $54 

At least 8 but fewer than 12 units $60 

12 or more units $68 

Facilities fee $ 3 

Associated Students fee $10 

University Union fee $10 

Nonresidents 

Nonresident tuition fee (in addition to fees required of resident students, except for enrollment in 
extension or summer session) 

15 or more units, maximum $650 

Fewer than 15 units, per unit $43 

Per academic year $1,300 

Foreign-Visa Students 

Nonresident foreign-visa students (in addition to fees required of resident students) 

15 or more units, maximum $650 

Fewer than 15 units, per unit $43 

Per academic year $1,300 

Summer Session 

Standard course fee per unit $30 

Associated Students fee $ 3 

University University Union fee $ 4 

Effective 1975 $ 5 

Facilities fee $ 3 

Extension Fees 

Per unit or fraction of unit $24 to $48 

Other Fees or Charges 

Campus service card $1 

Late registration fee (in addition to other fees listed above) $5 

Check returned from bank for any cause $5 

Transcript fee $1 

Failure to meet administrative required appointment or time limit $2 

Auditors pay the same fees as others. 

Fees are subject to change by the Trustees of The California State University and Colleges without 
advance notice. 

Alan Pattee Scholars 

No fees of any kind shall be required of or collected from those individuals who qualify for such 
exemption under the provisions of the Alan Pattee Scholarship Act. 


81—20 1 390 


46 A verage Annual Costs and Sources of Funds 

Refund of Fees 

Upon withdrawal from the university, the materials and service fee may be refunded if written 
application for refund, on forms provided by the university, is submitted to the registrar not later 
than 14 days following the day Oi' the term that instruction begins; provided that the amount of $10 
shall be retained to cover the cost of registration. Late registration fees, change of program fees and 
application fees are not refundable. 

The entire fee may be refunded if a student is unable to continue his registration because of a 
university regulation or because of compulsory military service. Application for refund under such 
circumstances may be made at any time before the date when the student received any academic 
credit for the courses for which he is registered. 

No refund of fees will be given if the unit load of the student is reduced to a lower material and 
service fee category. 


Parking Fees 

Semester pass (nonreserved spaces): 

Regular and limited students $15 

Coin operated gate, per admission 25 

Summer session, each six-week period $6 


Typical Student Expenses 

Typical school year budgets for California residents living at home or making other housing arrange- 
ments will vary widely. It is estimated that, including a $900 yearly allowance for room and board, 
the cost will approximate $1,900. Nonresident students must also allow for nonresident tuition. 


AVERAGE ANNUAL COSTS AND SOURCES OF FUNDS 

The 19 campus.es of The California State University and Colleges are financed primarily through 
funding provided by the taxpayers of California. For the 1 973-74 year, the total costs of operation 
is $553.8 million, which provides continuing support for 233,290 full-time equivalent (FTE *) stu- 
dents. This results in an average cost per FTE student of $2,374 per year. Of this amount, the average 
student pays $224. Included in this average student payment is the amount paid by nonresident 
students. The remaining $2,150 In costs are funded by state and federal taxes. 

Averages do not fit all students alike or even any specific student. To arrive at an average figure that 
Is meaningful, the costs outlined above exclude "user fees" for living expenses, housing, and parking, 
as well as costs for extension and summer session work. Computations are based on full-time 
equivalent students, not individuals, and costs are prorated by system totals, not by campus. The 
average costs for full-time equivalent student in the system are depicted In the following chart: 

1973-74 TOTAL COSTS OF CAMPUS OPERATION— (Including Building and land Amortiza- 
tion) 


Enrollment: 233,290 FTE 

A verage Cost Per 


Amount 

Amount 

Student (FTE) * 

Percentage 

State Appropriation (support) 

$441,860,573 

$1,894 

79.8 

State funding (capital outlay) •* 

29,161,250 

125 

5.3 

Student charges 

52,349,450 

224*** 

9.4 

Federal (financial aids) 

30,476,849 

131 

5.5 

Total 

$553,848,122 

$2,374 

100.0 


* For budgetary purposes, full-time equivalent (FTE) translates total head count into total academic student load. The term assumes 

that a full-time student in The California State University and Colleges is enrolled for 15 units of academic credit. Some students 
enroll for more than 1 5 units; some students enroll for fewer than 1 5 units. 

*• The system's more than 14,000 acres of land and the wide range of facilities and equipment on the 19 campuses are currently 
valued at approximately $1.2 billion. Amortized over a 40-year period, they are valued at $125 per FTE student 

* * * The average costs paid by a student include the materials and service fee, health facilities fee, university union fee, student body 

fee and the nonresident tuition. This amount is derived by taking the total of all student fees and dividir>g by the total full-time 
equivalent student enrollment. Individual students may pay more or less than $224 depending on whether they are part-time, 
full-time, resident or nonresident students. 


87—20 1 420 


47 


RECORDS AND REGULATIONS 


ENROLLMENT DEFINITIONS AND REGULATIONS 

Unit of Credit 

Each semester unit represents three hours of university work per week for one semester. Courses 
are of three types: 

(1 ) Lecture — one hour in class plus two hours of study. 

(2) Activity — two hours of class plus one hour of study. 

(3) Laboratory — three hours in class. 

Some courses may combine two or more of these types. All required courses carry unit credit. 

Classification in the University 

Undergraduate students who have completed 0-29)^ semester units of work are classified as fresh- 
men, 30-59!^ semester units as sophomores, 60-89!^ semester units as juniors, and 90 or more as 
seniors. 

Maximum Number of Course Units 

Undergraduate students' requests to carry units beyond 18 (19 for engineering majors) must be 
approved by the student's adviser and the department chairman of the major. If such requests are 
denied, appeals may be made to the appropriate school dean. Undeclared majors must receive the 
approval of the director of academic advisement to carry over 18 units of work. The minimum 
full-time load is 12 units. 

A student whose academic record justifies a study list in excess of the normal may request to be 
allowed to carry extra units. Request forms may be obtained from the Office of the Registrar and 
are submitted during the first week of instruction. In general, only students with superior academic 
records are allowed to enroll for more than the maximum unit load. In addition, the need to carry 
an overload must be established. Factors such as time spent in employment or commuting, the nature 
of the academic program, extracurricular activities and the student's health should be considered 
in planning a study load. Students who are employed or have outside responsibilities are advised 
to reduce their program of study. 

The minimum full-time program of study for graduate students is defined In the "Graduate Policies 
and Procedures" section of this catalog. 

Undergraduate Students Taking Graduate Level Courses 

Graduate level (500) courses are organized primarily for graduate students. Undergraduate students 
may be permitted to enroll in a graduate level (500) course if: 

1 . They are within nine units of completion of graduation requirements, or 

2. They are exceptionally qualified seniors whose undergraduate work in the related field or fields 
has been of 3.5 grade-point average or better, and whose cumulative overall grade-point 
average Is at least 3.25. 

Such cases shall require specific approval by the Instructor and also chair of the department or dean 
of the school in which the course is offered and by the chair or dean of the student's major 
department or school. 

Graduate level (5(X)) courses taken under 1. above may be applied to a graduate program if 
approved under graduate studies policies. 

Graduate level (5(X)) courses taken under 2. above may be applied to the undergraduate program 
ordy. 

Class Attendance 

While class attendance is not recorded officially by the university, regular attendance in class Is often 
essential to success In a course. The policy on class attendance is within the discretion of the 
Individual faculty member and shall be announced by the faculty member at the first class meeting 
of the semester. 

Initial Class Meeting 

It Is especially important that students attend the first meeting of a class. Students who are absent 
from the first meeting and fail to notify the instructor or departmental office no later than 24 hours 


48 Grading Policies 

after the class meeting may be denied admission to the class. Instructors may deny admission to 
absentees in order to admit any persons on waiting lists in their places. 

Instructor-lnitiated Drops 

A student who registers for a class and whose name appears on the first-day-of-class list should 
attend all class meetings in the first week or the first two class meetings, whichever alternative covers 
the longer time span. If the student is absent without notifying the instructor or departmental office 
within 24 hours after any meeting missed, the student may then be dropped administratively from 
the class by the instructor. This administrative withdrawal shall be without penalty and must be filed 
by the instructor with the registrar no later than the 20th day of instruction. 

GRADING POLICIES 

Grading System 

Every student of the university will have his coursework reported by the faculty in terms of letter 
grades or administrative symbols. 

When, because of circumstances, a student does not complete a particular course, or withdraws, 
certain administrative symbols may be assigned by the faculty. Grades and symbols are listed in the 
chart below together with grade-point values. The chart also illustrates the academic bookkeeping 
involved for all grades and symbols used. 

The university utilizes a combination of traditional and nontraditional grading options as follows: 
Traditional 

Option 1. Letter Grades: A, B, C, D, F 
Nontraditional 

Option 2. Letter Grades: A, B, C and NC (No Credit) 

Option 3. CR (Credit) for satisfactory and NC (No Credit) for less than satisfactory work. 

Grade Progress 

Units Units Point Point Full 

Grade or Symbol Attempted Earned Value Value Credit 


Option / Option 2 


Satisfactory Grade 


A A 

Yes 

Yes 

4 

4 

Yes 

D* B 

Yes 

Yes 

3 

3 

Yes 

C C 

Yes 

Yes 

2 

2 

Yes 

Unsatisfactory Grade 






D 

Yes 

Yes 

1 

1 

No 

NC (No Credit) 

No 

No 

0 

0* 

No 

F 

Yes 

No 

0 

0 

No 

Option 3 






CR (Credit) 

No* 

Yes 

0 

2* 

Yes 

NC (No Credit) 

Administrative Symbol 

No* 

No 

0 

0* 

No 

1 (Incomplete) 

No 

No 

0# 

0# 

No 

W (Withdrawal) 

No 

No 

0 

0 

No 

AU (Audit) 

No 

No 

0 

0 

No 

SP (Satisfactory Progress) 

No 

No 

0 

0 

No 

RD (Report Delayed) 

No 

No 

0 

0 

No 

TOTALS 

Used 

Counted 

Used 

Counted 



in 

Tov^ard 

in 

Toward 



CPA 

Objective 

CPA 

Progress 



NOTES 

• Credit/ No Credit course units are not included in grade-point computations; however Credit/ No Credit course units attempted 
are included in progress-point computations. 

# If not completed within one caletKiar year the "I" will be counted as an "F" (or “NC”) for grade-point and progress-point 
calculation. 


96—20 1 465 


Grading Policies 49 


Selection of a grading option, with certain exceptions, is the responsibility of the student. For 
graduate students, only letter grades under Option 1 are acceptable for courses which are on their 
study plans leading to a master's degree. 

Exceptions are those courses designated by the faculty to be graded solely on a Credit/ No Credit 
basis, or on an A, B, C, No Credit basis. These courses will be so designated in the Class Schedule 
(and shall not be changed by the faculty after publication of the Class Schedule\ for each semester 
and may be included in major, core, or speical program requirements. 

The instructor shall grade all students using the traditional A, B, C, D or F grades except in Credit/ No 
Credit courses, and the registrar shall make the necessary changes from A, B, C, D or F, converting 
A, B, C to Credit and D, F to No Credit. In those courses offered only on a Credit/ No Credit basis, 
the instructor shall assign grades of "Credit" or "No Credit" or appropriate administrative symbols, 
i.e., (Incomplete), ""SP" (Satisfactory Progress). 

NONTRAOmONAL GRADE OPTIONS 

Nontraditional grading options are available to undergraduate students, nonobjective graduate stu- 
dents, and to classified graduate students for courses not included in the approved study plan. Any 
student attempting a course using either of the nontraditional grading options must meet the 
prerequisites for that course. Each student shall be permitted to select courses in subjects outside 
of the major requirements for enrollment on a Credit/ No Credit basis (grading Option 3) . The phrase 
"major requirements" shall be taken to include core plus concentration (or option) requirements 
in departments using such terms, and professional course requirements in teacher education curric- 
ula. A student in any one term may take a maximum of two courses under Option 2, or one course 
from Option 2 and one course from Option 3 (but not two courses under Option 3). In addition, 
he may enroll in a required course offered only under Option 3; however, a maximum of 36 units 
of Credit/ No Credit (or pass/fail) courses including those transferred from other institutions may 
be counted toward the baccalaureate. 

Students shall inform the registrar up to the end of the fourth week of classes (university census date) 
regarding the selection of grading options in designated courses. If a student does not do so, he shall 
be graded under Option 1 . 

A, B, C No Credit (Option 2) 

There is no difference in grade-point values or other essentials between letter grades in this option 
and the traditional letter grades. The principal difference lies in the fact that the NC (No Credit) 
replaces both the D and F as an "unsatisfactory grade" and has "0" progress point value. No Credit 
(NC) grades are included in progress computations. 

Credit/ No Credit (Option 3) 

Under Option 3 the term "Credit" signifies that the student's academic performance was such that 
he was awarded full credit toward an undergraduate degree objective with a quality level of 
achievement equivalent to a "C" grade or better. "No Credit" signifies that the student attempted 
the course but that his performance did not warrant credit toward his objective. As in Option 2, No 
Credit (NC) grades are included in progress point computations. 

Ordinarily, a student shall be limited to one non-major course per term using this option, exclusive 
of courses offered only on a Credit/ No Credit basis. 

When an undergraduate student changes his major field of study to one where he has completed 
courses on a Credit Basis, such lower divisions courses shall be included in his major requirements. 
Upper division courses may be included at the option of the department upon petition by the 
student. 


ADVISORY CAUTION: Undergraduate students who plan to pursue graduate or profes- 
sional studies later are advised to be selective in opting for courses on a Credit/ No Credit 
basis. As a general rule (advisory only), coursework that is preparatory or prerequisite 
to advanced specialized study should be completed and evaluated on a letter grade basis 
and not Credit/ No Credit. 


30B-33 12 260 


50 Administrative Symbols 

ADMINISTRATIVE SYMBOLS 

Incomplete (!) 

A grade of Incomplete ( I ) may be given only when, in the opinion of the instructor, a student cannot 
complete a course during the semester of emrollment for reasons beyond his control. Such reasons 
are assumed to include: illness of the student or of members of his immediate family; extraordinary 
financial problems; loss of outside position; and other exigencies. In assigning a grade of "I", the 
instructor will file with his department, a statement of the specific requirements for completion of 
coursework. Such requirements will not include or necessitate retaking the course. This statement 
will also include a provisional grade indicating the quality of work completed at that time, and the 
instructor's designation of the time limit allowed for completion of course requirements. Upon later 
completion of the course requirements, the instructor shall initiate a change to a grade of A, B, C, 
D or F, or CR (Credit), NC (No Credit) if the course was offered only for such grades. When the 
instructor is no longer available, instructional departments will determine procedures for completion 
of course requirements and assigning grades for such completed coursework. 

An Incomplete (I) signifies that a portion of required coursework has not been completed and 
evaluated in the prescribed time period and that there is still possibility of earning credit. It is the 
responsibility of the student to bring pertinent information to the instructor and to reach agreement 
on the means by which the remaining course requirements will be satisfied. A final grade is assigned 
when the work agreed upon has been completed and evaluated. 

An "Incomplete" must be made up within one calendar year immediately following the end of the 
term in which it was assigned. This limitation prevails whether or not the student maintains continu- 
ous enrollment. Failure to complete the assigned work will result in an "Incomplete" being counted 
as equivalent to an "F" (or an "NC") for grade-point average and progress-point computations. 

Withdrawal (W) 

The symbol "W" indicates that the student was permitted to drop the course after the 20th day of 
instruction (university census date) with the approval of the instructor and department chair. It 
carries no connotation of quality of performance and is not used in calculating grade point averages 
or progress points. Withdrawal is permitted during the first 20 days of classes without record of 
enrollment. 

After the first 20 days of classes, students are expected to complete all courses in which they are 
enrolled. However, for serious and compelling reasons, such as Illness, the student may, by obtaining 
appropriate authorizations, withdraw from a class or classes and receive the symbol of "W" 
(withdrawal). Authorization to withdraw after the census date and prior to the last three weeks of 
instruction, shall be granted only with the approval of the instructor and the department chair or 
school dean. All requests for permission to withdraw under these circumstances and all approvals 
shall be made in writing on the "Change of Program" form and shall briefly state the reason for the 
withdrawal. The completed change of program form shall be filed at the Registrar's Office by the 
student or his proxy. 

Withdrawals shall not be permitted during the final three weeks of instruction except in cases such 
as accident or serious Illness where the assignement of an "Incomplete " is not practicable. Ordinar- 
ily, withdrawals in this category will involve total withdrawal from the campus, except that Credit, 
or an Incomplete may be assigned for courses in which sufficient work has been completed to permit 
an evaluation to be made. Requests for permission to withdraw from all classes under these circum- 
stances, with authorizations as described above, shall be made on the change of program form and 
shall be filed by the student, or his proxy, with the registrar. 

Audit (AU) 

The symbol "AU" is used by the registrar in those instances where a student has enrolled In a course 
either for information or other purposes not related to the student's formal academic objective. An 
auditor may not change his registration to obtain credit after the last date to add courses to the study 
list. An auditor is not permitted to take examinations in the course; therefore, there is no basis for 
evaluation and a formal grade report. 


314—33 12 290 


Administrative Symbols 51 


Satisfactory Progress (SP) 

The "SP" symbol is used in connection with thesis, project or similar courses that extend beyond 
one academic term. It indicates that work is in progress and has been evaluated and found to be 
satisfactory to date, but that assignment of a final grade must await completion of additional 
coursework. Cumulative enrollment in units attempted may not exceed the total number applicable 
to the student's educational objective. Work is to be completed within a stipulated time period which 
may not exceed one year except for graduate degree thesis or project for which the time may be 
up to two years, but may not exceed the overall time limit for completion of all master's degree 
requirements. Any extension of time limit must receive prior authorization by the dean of the school 
(or the dean's designee) in which the course is offered. 

Report Delayed (RD) 

The "RD" symbol is used in those cases where a delay In the reporting of a final grade is due to 
circumstances beyond the control of the student. The symbol is assigned by the registrar and should 
be replaced by a more appropriate grading symbol as soon as possible. An "RD" shall not be 
included in calculations of a grade-point average or in determination of progress points. 


Grade Reports to Students 

A report of the final grades assigned in classes Is sent to each student at the end of each semester. 
Many students also leave self-addressed post cards for teachers of specific courses to send them 
slightly faster evaluations of their work. 


Examinations 

Final examinations, if required by the instructor, will be given at times scheduled by the university. 
Once established, the final examination schedule may not be changed unless approved by the dean 
of the school. No makeup final examination will be given except for reason of illness or other verified 
emergencies. 

Grade-Point A verages: Repetition of Courses 

Each undergraduate student shall complete with a grade-point average of 2.0: 

A. All units accepted toward a degree, including those accepted by transfer from another institu- 
tion, 

B. All units in the major, 

C. All units attempted at the university. 

The numerical grade-point values in the grading system chart are intended to give an exact determi- 
nation of a student's scholarship. To compute the grade-point average for coursework at Cal State 
Fullerton, the point value of each grade with the exception noted below is multiplied first by the 
unit value of the course to obtain a total of all grade points earned. The total is then divided by the 
total units attempted in a// courses in which grades of A, B, C, D or F were received. The resulting 
figure is the grade-point average (CPA). 

The exception in grade-point computations is as follows: Undergradute students may repeat, using 
the traditional grading system (A, B, C, D, F), those courses for which grades of D or F were earned. 
In computing the grade-point average of a student who repeats courses in which he received D or 
F, only the most recently earned grades and grade points shall be used for the first 16 units repeated. 
Nevertheless, the original grade on the academic record shall not be changed or eradicated. 

In the case of any additional repetition (beyond the 16 unit limitation), both grades are considered 
in computing grade-point averages. However, successful repetition of a course originally passed 
carries no additional unit credit toward a degree or credential except for certain courses such as 
independent study or practicum (specified in this catalog as "may be repeated for credit"). 

Grade Changes 

All grades except Incomplete(l) are final when filed by the instructor in his end-of-term course grade 
report. Each student is notified by mail of the grades earned during the term. These grades become 
a part of the official record and may be changed ony upon official authorization by the instructor 
and department chair. 


321—33 12 325 


52 Continuous Residency Regulations 

TRANSCRIPTS 

Official transcripts of courses taken at the university are issued only with the written permission of 
the student concerned. Partial transcripts are not issued. A fee of $1 for each transcript issued must 
be received before the record can be forwarded. 

Normally transcripts are available within three working days, except at the end of the semester when 
the student should allow about 10 days after the last day of the semester. 

Transcripts from other institutions, which have been presented for admission or evaluation, become 
a part of the student's permanent academic file and are not returned or copied for distribution. 
Students desiring transcripts covering work attempted elsewhere should request them from the 
institutions concerned. 

CONTINUOUS RESIDENCY REGULATIONS 

Good Standing 

"Good standing" indicates that a student is eligible to continue and is free from financial obligation 
to the university. A student under academic disqualification, disciplinary suspension or disciplinary 
expulsion is not eligible to receive a statement of "good standing" on transcripts issued by the 
university or on other documents. 

Choice of Catalog Regulations for Meeting Degree Requirements 

A student remaining in continuous attendance in regular sessions and continuing on in the same 
curriculum in any California State University or College, in any of the California community colleges 
or in any combination of California community colleges and The California State University and 
Colleges, may, for purposes of meeting graduation requirements, elect to meet the graduation 
requirements of The California State University or College from which he will graduate in effect either 
at the time of his entering the curriculum or at the time of his graduation therefrom, except that 
substitutions for discontinued courses may be authorized or required by the proper college authori- 
ties. 

Continuous Enrollment for Graduate Students 

A graduate student with a degree objective is expected to maintain continuous enrollment in the 
university (summer sessions and extension excluded) until completion of the degree. If a student 
pursuing an advanced degree finds it impossible to attend during a certain semester, and is not 
eligible for a leave of absence, as detailed elsewhere in this catalog, he may request permission to 
register in Graduate Studies 700, a course with no unit credit, which does not require class attend- 
ance. 

If a graduate student who has completed student teaching and is pursuing a standard elementary 
or secondary teaching credential finds that he cannot enroll in courses leading to the credential 
during a certain semester, he may enroll in Credential Studies 701. This course is a course with no 
unit credit, which does not require class attendance. Students may not enroll in Credential Studies 
701 for a third consecutive semester. 

A graduate student who fails to register has discontinued enrollment in the university. 

Leave of Absence 

A student may petition for a leave of absence and if approved may upon his return continue under 
the catalog requirements that applied to his enrollment prior to the absence. Except in the case of 
required military service a leave of absence may be granted for a maximum of one year. Illness and 
compulsory military service are the only routinely approved reasons for a leave of absence. Students 
should realize that an approved leave of absence does not reserve a place for them in the 
university. 

Complete Withdrawal from the University 

Students who wish to withdraw from the university must complete a change of program form. See 
section on refund of fees for possible refunds. No student may withdraw after the date shown on 
the university calendar as the last day of instruction. Complete withdrawal from the university is 
accomplished by following the procedures for dropping classes (see Change of Program) indicating 
complete withdrawal in the appropriate place (box). 


34S-33 12 445 


Academic Progress^ Probation and Disqualification 53 

STUDENT HONORS 

Dean's Honor List 

Academic achievement is recognized with the publication each semester of a list of undergraduate 
students whose grade-point average for the previous term has been 3.5 or better. Students are 
notified in writing when they have earned this distinction. Eligibility is based on a minimum of 12 
units of graded coursework. 

Honors at Graduation 

Honors at graduation have been defined by the Faculty Council in three classifications: 


With honors CPA 3.5 

With high honors CPA 3.85 

With highest honors CPA 4.0 


ACADEMIC PROGRESS, PROBATION AND 
DISQUALIFICATION 

For purposes of determining a student's eligibility to remain in the university both quality of perform- 
ance and progress towards his educational objective will be considered. 

Academic Probation 

An undergraduate student shall be placed on academic probation if in any semester his cumulative 
grade-point average or his grade-point average at Cal State Fullerton falls below 2.0 (grade of C on 
five-point scale), and if he fails to earn twice as many progress points as all units attempted during 
that semester. The student shall be advised of probation status promptly and, except in unusual 
instances, before the start of the next consecutive enrollment period. 

An undergraduate student shall be removed from academic probation and restored to clear standing 
when he earns a cumulative grade-point average of 2.0 (C) In all academic work attempted, in all 
such work attempted at Cal State Fullerton, and is making satisfactory progress towards his educa- 
tional objective by achieving at least twice as many progress points as units attempted during each 
semester. 

Academic Disqualification 

An undergraduate student on academic probation shall be subject to academic disqualification If: 

1 . As a lower division student (fewer than 60 semester hours of college work completed) he falls 
15 or more grade points below a 2.0 (C) average on all college units attempted or in all units 
attempted at this institution, or falls to earn during any semester twice as many progress points 
as all units attempted In that semester. 

2. As a junior (60 to 89% semester hours of college work completed) he falls nine or more grade 
points below a 2.0 (C) average on all college units attempted or in all units attempted at this 
institution, or fails to earn during any semester twice as many progress points as all units 
attempted in that semester. 

3. As a senior (90 or more semester hours of college work completed) he falls six or more grade 
points below a 2.0 (C) average on all college units attempted or in all units attempted at this 
institution, or fails to earn during any semester twice as many progress points as all units 
attempted in that semester. 

A graduate student (unclassified or classified) shall be disqualified if he falls below a 2.0 (C) average 
•n all units attempted at this institution as a graduate student, or fails to earn during any semester 
twice as many progress points as all units attempted in that semester. 

Student Conduct 

The university properly assumes that all students are in attendance to secure a sound education and 
that they will conduct themselves as mature citizens of the campus community. Compliance with 

regulations of the university is therefore expected. If, however, on any occasion a student or an 
organization is alleged to have compromised accepted university policies or standards, appropriate 
i^diciary procedures shall be initiated through the established university judicial process. Every effort 


349—33 12 465 


54 Right of Academic Appeal 

will be made to encourage and support the development of self-discipline and control by students 
and student organizations. The dean of student services, aided by all members of the faculty and 
advised by the Student Affairs Committee of the faculty, is responsible to the president of the 
university for the behavior of students in their relationships to the university. The president in turn 
is responsible to the Chancellor and the Trustees of The California State University and Colleges who 
themselves are governed by specific laws of the State of California. 

A list of specifically prohibited behavior is available upon request from the dean of student services 
and also is posted on the administrative bulletin boards in the breezeway of the Letters and Science 
Building and in the second-floor lobby of Langsdorf Hall (Administration-Business Administration). 
Prohibited behavior includes hazing, now defined as acts likely to cause physical or emotional harm. 
Students have the right to appeal certain disciplinary actions taken by appropriate university authori- 
ties. Regulations governing original hearings and appeal rights and procedures have been carefully 
detailed to provide maximum protection to both the individual charged and the university commu- 
nity. Information about the operation of the judicial system involving student discipline may be 
obtained in the Office of Special Projects. 

Debts Owed to the University 

From time to time the student may become indebted to the university. This could occur, for example, 
when the student fails to repay money borrowed from the university. Similarly, debts occur when 
the student fails to pay library fees, or when the student fails to pay for other services provided by 
the university at the request of the student. Should this occur. Sections 42380 and 42381 of Title 5 
of the California Administrative Code authorize the university to withhold "permission to register, 
to use facilities for which a fee is authorized to be charged, to receive services, materials, food or 
merchandise or any combination of the above from any person owing a debt" until the debt is paid. 
For example, under these provisions the university may withhold permission to register, and may 
withhold other services such as grades and transcripts. If a student feels that he or she does not owe 
all or part of a particular fee or charge, the student should contact the business office. 

RIGHT OF PETITION 

Students may petition for review of certain university academic regulations when unusual circum- 
stances exist. It should be noted, however, that academic regulations when they are contained in 
Title 5, California Administrative Code, are not subject for p)etition. 

Petition forms are available in the Office of Admissions and Records and must first be reviewed and 
signed by the student's adviser. Action will then be taken on the petition and the student will be 
notified of this decision. A copy of the action will also be placed in the student's folder in the Office 
of the Registrar. 

RIGHT OF ACADEMIC APPEAL 

The student who believes he has been graded capriciously or treated with obvious prejudice by 
faculty members or administrators may initiate steps for an academic appeal. In all cases the student 
should first make an effort to resolve the issue by consulting the faculty member or administrator 
concerned. If the issue cannot be resolved, the student should consult with the dean of student 
services or director of special projects. 


353—33 12 485 


DEGREE 

REQUIREMENTS 


56 


GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR 
THE BACHELOR'S DEGREE 


A student is eligible for graduation if he is in good standing and fulfills the following requirements; 

/. Genera! Education 

To be eligible for a baccalaureate degree from Cal State Fullerton, the student shall have completed 
a minimum of 45 semester units of general education courses selected in accordance with the pattern 
designated below. Such courses may be lower division courses or upper division courses for which 
the student qualifies. 

/. Natural Sciences Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of two courses, one from each of two fields which shall 
include the following: biological sciences, chemistry, earth sciences, physics and physical 
science. 

if. Soda! Sciences Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of three courses, one from each of three fields which shall 
include the following: anthropology, economics, geography, history, political science, psy- 
chology and sociology. 

Note: Of the courses taken to meet the requirements in U.S. history. Constitution, state and 
local government (California Administrative Code, Section 40404), a maximum of three units 
may be applied for credit in Section II. 

Hi. Arts — Humanities Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of three courses, one from each of three fields which shall 
include the following; art, drama, language (English, intermediate or advanced courses in 
foreign languages), literature (American, comparative, English, foreign), music, philosophy 
and speech. 

iV. Basic Subjects Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of three courses, one from each of three fields which shall 
include the following: computer science, elementary foreign languages, health education, 
mathematics, oral communication, physical education, reading, statistics and writing. 

K Genera! Education Electives 

The student may fulfill any remaining units required for general education by selecting any 
undergraduate course offered by the university for credit except courses which apply to the 
student's major or credential program. Transfer students certified under provisions of California 
Administrative Code, Title V, as having met the 40-unit minimum general education require- 
ments will be required to complete five additional units In general education selected from two 
or more sections, l-V above. 

2. Statutory Requirements in American Institutions and Values 

In addition to general education-breadth requirements California Administrative Code, Section 
40404, states that for graduation the student Is required "to demonstrate competence in the Constitu- 
tion of the United States, and in American history including the study of American institutions and 
Ideals, and of the principles of state and local government established under the Constitution of this 
state." To meet this requirement, the student may select the following alternatives: (1) pass a 
comprehensive examination In these fields, (2) pass Political Science 100 and a course in U. S. 
history or American Studies 201, (3) pass a combination of Political Science 300 and History 170A 
or 170B. 

Note: Coursework completed to satisfy Section 40404 may be applied in the social sciences area 
of general education to a maximum of three units. 


357^33 12 505 


Bachelor's Degree 57 


3. Electives 

After fulfilling the requirements in general education, American institutions and values, and a specific 
major (and possibly a minor), each student is free to choose the rest of the courses needed to 
complete the 124 semester units required for graduation. Different majors vary considerably in both 
the number of units they require in their own and related fields. They also vary considerably in the 
amount of latitude or choice they permit in selecting courses to satisfy the major requirement. The 
general education requirement encourages great freedom of choice within the broad categories of 
the natural sciences, social sciences, arts and humanities, and basic subjects. Students at the univer- 
sity use their electives to broaden their general educations, deepen some aspect of their specialties, 
pursue work in related fields, and satisfy curiosities and enthusiasms for particular subjects or areas 
of interest. 

4. Units 

(a) Total units 

A minimum of 124 semester units is required for graduation with a bachelor of arts degree. 
The Bachelor of Science in Engineering requires a minimum of 132 semester units. 

(b) Upper division units 

Completion of a minimum of 40 units of upper division credit is required. 

(c) Resident units 

Completion of a minimum of 24 semester units in residence is required. At least one-half of 
these units must be completed among the last 20 semester units counted toward the degree. 
Extension credit, or credit by examination, may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence 
requirement. 

5 . Scholarship 

(a) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units attempted, including those 
accepted by transfer from another institution. 

(b) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units in the major. 

(c) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units attempted at Cal State Fullerton. 

6. Major 

Completion of all requirements for a major as specified by appropriate university authority is 
required. 

7. Multiple Majors and Second Baccalaureate Degrees 

Second majors 

Within the units required for the baccalaureate it is possible for a student to complete the 
requirements for more than one major within a degree program when the additional major is 
within the degree program for the first major. The student shall declare the additional major 
with the appropriate department not later than the beginning of the student's final year of study. 
The completion of additional majors will be noted at the time of graduation by appropriate 
entries on the academic record and on the commencement program. 

Second baccalaureate 

(a) First degree completed elsewhere, second at Cal State Fullerton 

Students seeking a bachelor's degree from Cal State Fullerton after having received a 
baccalaureate from another institution may qualify for graduation with the approval and 
recommendation of the faculty upon completion of the following: 

( 1 ) general education requiremments 

(2) all requirements in the major field of study 

(3) residence and scholarship requirements 

(b) Two baccalaureates from Cal State Fullerton 

A student completing a baccalaureate program at Cal State Fullerton will have completed 
the general education, residence, and scholarship requirements. With the approval and 
recommendation of the faculty, he may qualify for a second baccalaureate under the 
following circumstances: 

3—86012 


361—^ 12 525 


58 Bachelor's Degree 


(1 ) The second field of study is offered in a different program (e.g. bachelor of arts to 
bachelor of science) 

(2) At least 24 units are earned in residence beyond the requirements for the first degree 

(3) All requirements of the major are fulfilled 

Units included in second baccalaureate programs may not apply to graduate degrees 
or credential programs. 

No student shall be granted two diplomas or two degrees as distinguished from a 
double major for the same four-year program. 

8. Minor 

Completion of a minor field is not required for the baccalaureate degree at this time. 

9. Graduation Requirement Check 

A candidate for graduation should file an application for a graduation requirement check in the 
Office of the Registrar during registration for the semester prior to the semester in which he expects 
to graduate (please refer to the current schedule of class for the deadlines applied to requesting and 
returning graduation checks). A senior should have completed at least 100 units (including the 
current work in progress) and a substantial portion of his major requirements before requesting a 
graduation check. If the candidate does not complete the requirements in the semester indicated, 
he must file a change of graduation date in the Office of the Registrar. The original graduation check 
is valid as long as a student is in continuous attendance and is completing the major under which 
the graduation check was requested. 

10. Approval and Recommendation by the Faculty of the University 


364—33 12 540 


59 


THE PROGRAM OF MASTER'S DEGREES 


Master's degree programs offered at Cal State Fullerton are listed on page 72 and are described in 
the appropriate section of this catalog under "University Curricula." Program descriptions and 
additional information are contained in the Graduate Bulletin, copies of which are available in the 
Office of Admissions and the Graduate Office. 

Master's degrees in other areas are under consideration and will be announced when approved. 

STANDARDS FOR GRADUATE STUDY 

Graduate study deals with more complex ideas and demands more sophisticated techniques, search- 
ing analysis, and creative thinking than undergraduate study. The research required is extensive in 
both primary and secondary sources and the quality of writing expected is high. The student is 
advised to consider these factors when deciding upon the amount of coursework to be undertaken 
during any one semester. 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MASTER'S DEGREE 

General requirements for the master's degree include a study plan consisting of a minimum of 30 
semester units of approved upper division and graduate (500-level) coursework taken after the 
baccalaureate and completed with a 3.0 (B) minimum grade-point average. The coursework should 
normally be completed within five years (see "Time Limit for Completion"). For specific require- 
ments of particular programs, please see the descriptions elsewhere in this catalog. 

In the degree program: 

1. Not less than 24 semester units shall be completed in residence. 

2. Not less than 15 semester units shall be in graduate (500-level) courses. 

3. Not more than six semester units shall be allowed for a thesis if a thesis is required. 

Some type of final evaluation, near the end of the student's work toward the master's degree, is 
required. It may be a thesis, a project, a comprehensive examination, or any combination of these. 
Each student's program for a master's degree (including eligibility, classified status, candidacy, and 
award of the degree) must be approved by the graduate program adviser, the graduate committee, 
and the dean of graduate studies. 

GRADUATE REGULATIONS 

The following are in addition to other policies and procedures applying to both undergraduates and 
graduates described elsewhere in this catalog and in the appropriate class schedule. Requirements 
of individual programs are shown in the appropriate sections of this catalog. Also, individual academ- 
ic areas may have established particular rules governing programs offered. 

Students are advised to consult the Graduate Bulletin for detailed instructions concerning steps in 
the master's degree program. It is the student's responsibility to initiate the requests for classified 
status, advancement to candidacy, and for a graduation check at the appropriate times. The deadline 
for requesting the graduation check appears in the official calendar for each semester. 

Since all policies and procedures are subject to change, by appropriate authority, students should 
consult class schedules and other official announcements for possible revision of policies and 
procedures stated herein. 

Admission With Graduate Standing: Unclassified 

Eor post-baccalaureate admission in unclassified status, a student shall have completed a four-year 
college course and hold an acceptable baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution; or shall 
have completed equivalent academic preparation as determined by the appropriate authorities; and 
^ust satisfactorily meet the professional, personal, scholastic, and other standards for graduate 
study. Including qualifying examinations, as the appropriate authorities may prescribe. 

Admission in unclassified status does not constitute admission to a graduate degree program. 
Duration of unclassified status may be determined by appropriate authorities. 


369—33 12 565- 


62 Master's Degree 

admission with unclassified graduate standing. However, test scores are required for admission to 
classified status in many of the master's degree programs. See program descriptions in this catalog 
for the types of tests required. 

The Graduate Record Examinations are nationally administered and are given only a few times a 
year on specified dates. A current list of these dates is available at the Office of Counseling and 
Testing, and the Graduate Office. The student must make written application for the tests on a form 
available at the above offices which must be submitted to the particular testing service office by the 
applicable deadline. Since test results are measured against those of students who normally take the 
tests in their senior year and since they are required before the student can become a classified 
student, the taking of the tests should not be deferred. 

Limitation on Preclassification Coursework 

No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken at Cal State Fullerton prior to classified status 
may be applied to a student's master's degree study plan. Any acceptable transfer work is excluded 
from the nine units permitted. Students who receive postgraduate credit for courses taken during 
their final semester as a senior may accumulate as many as 12 units. 

Inapplicable Courses 

Courses numbered 100 to 299 and in the 700 series may not be included in a master's degree study 
plan. Courses numbered 300 to 399 do not give graduate credit unless included on an approved 
graduate study plan. 

Courses taken to meet baccalaureate degree requirements, or postgraduate coursework taken to 
satisfy quantitative or qualitative deficiencies may not be used on a master's degree study plan. Credit 
by examination and correspondence credit are not acceptable. 

Workshop, extension, and institute coursework offered either at this institution or by other colleges 
or universities is not normally acceptable as part of a master's degree study plan. A student who 
desires to utilize such coursework must obtain approval from the graduate adviser and committee, 
and from the dean of graduate studies. When such coursework has been taken elsewhere, the 
student should provide evidence that the college or university concerned would consider such 
coursework acceptable toward a comparable graduate degree. Any such courses offered by other 
institutions, but which are not acceptable for their own graduate degrees, may not be accepted by 
this university for a graduate degree. 

Also see the sections following on "CR, P or S Grades" and "Time Limit for Completion." 

CR, P or S Grades 

Any course taken at this university with a grade of CR, P, S or similar cannot be accepted on a 
master's degree study plan. 

A course taken at another college or university with a grade of CR, P, S or similar cannot be accepted 
on a master's degree study plan unless such a course with such a grade is acceptable at that college 
or university for a graduate degree. 

Declassification 

Graduate students in classified graduate status may be declassified upon the recommendation of the 
appropriate academic unit, reverting to unclassified status, when one or more of the following 
conditions exist: 

1 . The student's request for declassification is approved by the graduate committee. 

2. The student fails to maintain the grade-point average required in the master's degree program. 

3. The student's professional performance is judged to be unsatisfactory. 

4. The student fails to petition for an extension of the time limit. 

Time Limit for Completion 

All coursework on the master's degree study plan should normally be completed within five years, 
except that, upon petition to the Graduate Office, two additional years may be allowed. The 
university, at its option, may further extend the time for students who pass a comprehensive 
examination in the relevant course. Requests to take such comprehensive examinations should be 
made to appropriate graduate studies committees. 


386 -^ 1 10 


Master's Degree 63 


when an examination is administered, a report of successful completion will be made to the dean 
of graduate studies. The grade received on the original course will be used on the master's degree 
study plan, rather than the CR grade used for challenge examinations. 

The following shows the dates of expiration of courses according to the five-year limitation: 


Courses taken in 

1969 

1970 

1971 

1972 

1973 

1974 

1975 


Will expire in 

1974 

1975 

1976 

1977 

1978 

1979 

1980 


The five-year period is computed as the time between the actual date of completion of the earliest 
course and the month the degree is granted. 

Changes in Study Plan 

The student must complete the courses shown on the approved study plan on file in the Graduate 
Office and in the particular academic unit with at least a 3.0 (B) grade-point average. If a student 
wishes to make a change in the study plan, a request should be made on the appropriate form 
(copies available In the Graduate Office, and graduate program offices) in the academic unit offering 
the master's degree prior to registration. The recommendation for a change must be signed by the 
adviser. No course for which a grade has been assigned may be removed from a study plan. 

Minimum Full-Time Course Unit Load 

The minimum full-time unit load for a graduate student is either 12 units of coursework a semester 
or nine units of which six are in 500-level courses. Students for whom the unit count does not 
adequately reflect the study load may request a review. Consult the Graduate Office for further 
information. 


Maximum Course Unit Load 

Twelve units Is considered to be a maximum course load for graduate students, but, on the approval 
of an adviser, in exceptional cases, a student may take more. 

Theses and Projects 

When a thesis is required, the approved original copy, or a fully acceptable duplicated copy, in the 
approved binding, and a microfilm of it, must be deposited in the Library. An abstract, of not more 
than 1 50 words, must accompany the thesis, and will be published in the journal. Master's Abstracts. 
Arrangements for the binding, microfilming and publication of the abstract are made through the 
Titan Bookstore and include the execution of a publication agreement. The current fee (subject to 
change) for microfilming, publication of the abstract, and the archival copy is S20 (plus tax), plus 
Si for postage. The fee (subject to change) for binding is $8.50 (plus tax). 

When a project is required, it will be filed with the academic unit offering the degree program. Some 
f^ecord of the project, or the project itself. Is preserved in the academic unit and, when appropriate, 
in the Library. When the appropriate authority recommends, a project or its written record may be 
treated as a thesis. 

The thesis and, where appropriate, the project, must conform in matters of style and format to the 
rules In the section on "Theses and Projects" in the Graduate Bulletin. Since adherence to these rules 
rnust be checked and approved, and valuable assistance can be given with problems associated with 
illustrations, etc., students are advised to consult the Library adviser (In the Reference Room) well 
in advance of the final typing of the thesis. In addition, schools, divisions, departments, and programs 
have adopted particular form books and/or style sheets, which are to be followed in matters of 
documentation and bibliography (see the chart in the Graduate Bulletin or consult the Graduate 
Office, or appropriate academic area). 

It is the student's resp)onslbility to become acquainted with the appropriate rules and regulations and 
lo make all necessary arrangements for the typing of the thesis, including instruction of the typist, 
if other than the student. Adequate time should be allowed for reading and criticism by the adviser. 


392—34 1 40 


64 


Master's Degree 

the committee members, and the library clerk, for revisions, as needed, and for completion of the 
final edition of the thesis, including approvals. 

The deadline for submission of the completed thesis to the adviser and committee is six weeks in 
advance of the last day of classes of the semester in which the student hopes to be awarded the 
degree, unless other arrangements are made with the school or department. The deadline for 
depositing the approved copy of the thesis in the Titan Bookstore and making the arrange- 
ments for binding, microfilming and publication of the abstract, is the last day of classes of 
the semester in which the degree is to be awarded. If a student's program requires a thesis, or 
if the project has been determined to be regarded as a thesis, the master's degree cannot be awarded 
unless the notification that the student has completed this final step is received by the dean of 
graduate studies. 

Graduate Assistantships, Fellowships, and Financial Aids 

A limited number of appointments as graduate assistants are available to outstanding graduate 
students who are working in graduate degree programs. These may pay up to $1,465 per semester. 
If interested, consult the dean or chair of the appropriate academic area. Teaching fellowships are 
not currently available. 

Each year the State of California may award a certain number of graduate fellowships (payment of 
fees only ) . Qualified students who are residents of California may make application for these through 
the Financial Aid Qffice. 

The Graduate Office maintains a file of scholarship and fellowship opportunities offered by other 
educational institutions and foundations. 

For information concerning other financial aids and part-time placement services, see pages 25 and 
28, resjoectively. 

International Study 

Cal State Fullerton participates in The California State University and Colleges' program of study 
abroad. Under this program, limited studies taken at designated foreign universities, when arranged 
in advance, may be applied toward the requirements of a graduate degree awarded by Cal State 
Fullerton. It is important that plans be completed several months before starting such a program. For 
details see page 1 5 and consult the director of international education and exchange. 

Second Master's Degree 

A graduate student desiring to work for a second master's degree at Cal State Fullerton must request 
permission from the academic area offering the program and the Graduate Council to apply for 
admission for a second master's degree program (in unclassified status). If the request is granted, 
the student must as a minimum satisfy all prerequisites and all requirements of the new degree 
program. Approval of classified status for the second degree will be given only after the first degree 
has been awarded. Please consult the Graduate Office for further details. 

Postgraduate Credit 

If a graduate student has not, while an undergraduate, received permission to consider coursework 
which was not required for the baccalaureate as postgraduate, a petition may be filed for such credit 
to be granted retroactively. Petitions for postgraduate credit are filed in the Office of Admissions and 
Records. 

If subsequent approval is given by the graduate program adviser ior the appropriate academic area, 
and university committees, such coursework may be included as a part of the student's study plan, 
within existing regulations concerning applicable coursework and requirements for the degree. See 
also "Inapplicable Courses." 

Enrollment in 500^ Level Courses by Seniors 

Under certain circumstances, a senior may take a 500-level course. If the student is not within nine 
units of graduation, postgraduate credit is not given for such courses. The senior must have a 
minimum grade-point average of 3.25 overall and of 3.5 in the field or fields of the intended graduate 
program, and the specific approval of the dean or chair of the academic area in which the course 
is offered and the chair or dean of the student's major area. 

If the senior is within nine units of completion of graduation requirements and has been given 
approval, as above, the student may petition for postgraduate credit for these units as provided under 
"Postgraduate Credit. " 


398—34 1 70 


ACADEMIC 

ADVISEMENT 


66 


ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 


OFFICE OF ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

In order to help students make their study years a meaningful educational experience, the university 
established the Office of Academic Advisement. This office assists students in choosing an under- 
graduate major and in choosing general education courses and electives. It also provides initial 
interviews for special majors and is a center for undeclared majors, i.e., for those students who have 
not yet decided upon a major. 

The Office of Academic Advisement is located In Room 112 of the Humanities-Soclal Sciences 
Building. No app>ointment is necessary to engage the assistance of an adviser about various aspects 
of the academic life at the university. For more sp)ecific information about the office, the student 
should consult the Class Schedule. 

Choosing an Undergraduate Major 

Every student is expected to choose a major or field of concentration by the beginning of the junior 
year. The majors currently offered at this university are described in the next sections of this catalog. 
Most major requirements allow students the freedom to take a number of courses in fields other than 
in their majors or closely related fields. 

Lower division students who are uncertain about their primary vocational goals or educational 
interests may, and probably should, enroll as undeclared majors. Then, and during their freshman 
and sophomore years, such students should explore the possibilities open to them that will meet their 
interests and potentialities. To help students in their searching and selecting, the university has 
available a number of useful resources: the Office of Academic Advisement; summer advisement 
sessions and orientation programs that are given every year; a variety of counseling and testing 
services provided by the Counseling and Testing Centers; and the different department and school 
offices for information and advice on particular fields, their programs of study and later work 
opportunities. There also Is a collection of college and university catalogs available in the Library. 
Additionally, there are a growing number of student organizations on the campus that are organized 
in terms of disciplinary and professional interests. The Career Planning and Placement Center also 
has much useful information on vocations and specific work opportunities. 

Most students have general ideas about some subjects in which they might like to major, and almost 
all students are aware of the fields In which they do not wish to major. The task of selecting a major 
(and often a minor or other complementary specialization) then becomes one of crystallizing these 
earlier ideas on the basis of experiences in specific courses, discussions with other students and 
faculty, etc. Before commitment to a specific major, students should be sure that they have not 
rejected a field of study because of some wrong preconceptions or inaccurate information. Students 
also should not overlook interests and potentialities that they previously may not have discovered. 
The option of taking a limited number of courses on a Credit/ No Credit basis often will be helpful 
in these pursults."Minlcourses" also provide an excellent opportunity to explore the multiple areas 
of knowledge. 

Students, however, must be very careful to plan freshman or sophomore programs which will permit 
their entering or taking advanced courses in fields they think they may want to be their majors. Such 
students should check such major requirements as mathematics, chemistry, foreign language, etc. 
which must be taken before the junior year or perhaps even begun during the freshman year. 
Students anticipating graduate or professional study in a certain field should exercise special care 
In planning their undergraduate programs, and they should seek faculty counseling in the fields 
concerned. Such choices do not have to be made during the first two years, and may or may not 
be made during the second two. However, careful and advance examination of the possibilities of 
graduate or professional study often will be helpful to students who have fairly clear ideas of the 
educational and vocational objectives they would like to seek. 

Students also should be careful about concentrating so heavily in a particular field that they cannot 
change majors to a different field should they wish to do so. Some students come to the campus 
with no clear idea of the field in which they would like to major. Such students, and others whose 
goals and objectives have not yet firmly crystallized, will have opportunities to take courses in 
various fields and make up their minds during their lower division work. They should, however, take 


415—34 1 155 


Academic Advisement 67 

full advantage of the opportunities that exist on and outside the campus to learn more about available 
fields of study and occupational fields. 

Planning a Major Program 

when students have selected a major field, they should study carefully all the requirements which 
are specified in this catalog under their chosen degree program. Then they should make a tentative 
semester by semester plan for completing the requirements, with careful regard for courses which 
are prerequisite to others. They should discuss this plan with their major advisers who will be able 
to help them with any problems. 

In addition to courses in the major department, related courses in other fields and supporting courses 
in basic skills also may be required. These, too, should be included in the tentative semester by 
semester plan. These auxiliary requirements are described in the degree program for each major. 
Some departments require placement tests prior to admission to classes. The time and place for such 
tests is given in the class schedule, often before registration. Students should purchase a copy of the 
Class Schedule at the Titan Bookstore well before registration for classes begins. 

Choosing Genera! Education Courses and Electives 

In keeping with the liberal arts tradition, the university requires its graduates to have sampled a 
variety of disciplines as part of their general education. The broad categories of general education 
courses are presented in the catalog section on "Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor's 
Degree". Through these requirements students are introduced to the worlds of values, ideas, and 
beauty, to mankind and his problems, to the natural world in which man lives, and to skills essential 
for scholarship. 

To many students the selection of general education courses and electives poses many difficult 
choices. With well over 2,700 classes to choose from and over 50 fields of specialization that can 
be sampled, some demanding decisions must be made. Various aids or resources are available. 
Among these are: this catalog and the Class Schedule Wwh their descriptions of regular and new and 
experimental courses; informal consultations with other students and faculty members; and advisers 
in the Office of Academic Advisement. 

The reasons for selecting particular general education courses and electives include: 

• A meaningful and adequate preparation for a selected field of study for those students who 
have decided on their major. 

• The need to explore potential major or vocational interests. 

• Curiosity about or enthusiasm for a particular subject. 

• The desire to clarify thinking and values on problems and issues of personal and social 
significance. 

• The urge to broaden and synthesize work in a specialization with perspectives and skills from 
other fields. 

• The desire to deepen understanding and improve skills for such central human activities as 
personal relationships, family and community life, citizenship activities and leisure pursuits. 

• The interest in experiencing the various approaches and teaching methods of different, talented 
teachers. 

• Sharing learning experiences with friends. 

Communication Skills 

Skills in written, oral, and gestural communication are important tools and marks of well educated 
^^n and women. Great competencies in both articulation and advocacy are arts well-worth attain- 
ing for living effective, full and civic lives and for achieving excellence in vocational careers. 

A variety of experiences at the university provides opportunities to practice and develop communi- 
cations skills. The acts of written and oral expression also serve to consolidate, synthesize, and 
develop thinking and personality. 

Students will be required to demonstrate, in all classes where written expression is appropriate, their 
ability to write clearly and correctly about the materials of the course. Ability of a student to 
demonstrate writing proficiency shall be used as a part of the final grade determination in any course. 


420 -^ 1 180 


68 Preprofessional Programs 

Change of Major, Degree or Credential Objective 

A student who wishes to change his major, degree, or credential objective must obtain the required 
form in the Office of Admissions and Records or the Office of Academic Advisement. Such a change 
is not official until the form has been signed and filed in the Registrar's Office. A student should be 
aware that he will be responsible for the requirements for the new choice of major, degree, or 
credential that are in the catalog in effect at the time he files a change. 

DEPARTMENTAL ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

According to the established practice at the university, each department follows the advisement 
system which it finds the most appropriate for its majors. 

Each undergraduate student is assigned or may request an adviser who will help the student plan 
an academic program. The adviser is a resource person who can provide valuable information and 
suggestions and who can assist the student to find the most desirable ways to meet the requirements 
for graduation and for his major or credential. Although the adviser is consulted, the final choice 
of courses and the responsibility for the program lies with the student himself. 

Academic program advisers are able to offer better advice when consulted if students come pre- 
pared with lists of courses they already have taken and their own copies of transcripts from colleges 
previously attended (if students are new to Cal State Fullerton). 

Those seeking a credential will also be assigned a professional adviser by the School of Education. 
Students who have not yet decided upon a major (undeclared majors) or who are not seeking a 
degree will be advised in the Office of Academic Advisement. 

In the Division of Engineering, each student will be assigned an adviser by the chair of the division 
and is expected to meet with that adviser at least once a semester. He is required to file an 
adviser-approved program plan before the beginning of the second semester of the junior year. 
Graduate students will be assigned a major adviser in their fields of specialization, except in educa- 
tion where all will have a professional adviser from the School of Education. Those students seeking 
a credential for teaching in secondary schools will be assigned both a professional and a major 
adviser. 

PREPROFESSIONAL PROGRAMS 

The academic programs of the university provide appropriate preparation for graduate work in a 
variety of fields. Students who have made tentative decisions about institutions in which they may 
wish to pursue graduate work should consult the catalogs of those graduate schools as they plan 
their undergraduate programs. Students planning to undertake graduate work should supplement 
their undergraduate programs by anticipating language requirements at major graduate schools and 
by intensive work in areas of special relevance to their intended graduate work. Professional schools 
in many universities either require or recommend that applicants complete four-year programs for 
admission. Although the professional schools do not always require a bachelor's degree, they 
generally encourage basic preparation and a broad general education leading to that degree before 
beginning specialization. 

The university offers a number of professional programs through the master's degree. These include 
programs in the fine arts, business administration, communications, education, engineering, health 
education and physical education and recreation, library science, public administration, and speech 
pathology-audiology. Students interested in preparing for professional careers in these areas, either 
here or in other educational institutions, are encouraged to seek assistance and guidance from our 
faculty members in these fields. 

Paramedical Health Sciences 

(Dental Technician, Nursing, Occupational Therapy, Optometry, Physical Therapy, Podiatry) 
Although no specific bachelor's or master's degree program is available in the professional areas of 
dental technician, nursing, occupational therapy, optometry, physical therapy, podiatry, academic 
preparatory courses for these professions are given in the science departments. Students should 
register their specific interest preference in either the Office of the Vice President for Academic 
Affairs or the department offices in biological science or chemistry. 


426-^4 1 210 


Preprofessional Programs 69 


Prelegal Preparation 

Students planning to enter law school may elect any one of several majors. In general, the better 
law schools require that an applicant hold a baccalaureate degree. Although there is no uniform 
prelegal course of study or specific university major required, it is recommended that prospective 
law students prepare themselves in such fields as English, American history, economics, political 
science (particularly the history and development of English and American political institutions) and 
such undergraduate courses as judicial process, administrative law, constitutional law and interna- 
tional law, philosophy (particularly ethics and logic), business administration, anthropology, psy- 
chology and sociology. 

The major chosen and many of the courses selected should demand a high level of performance 
in reading difficult material, understanding abstract and complex concepts, and speaking and writing 
clearly and persuasively. Prelegal students are advised to take the minimum program to meet the 
requirements of their chosen major and courses beyond the introductory survey level In other 
selected fields. A distribution of course sequences among the social sciences, the natural sciences 
and the humanities is desirable. Students with Interests in becoming lawyers should contact the 
Prelaw Society. Some faculty members in the School of Business Administration and Economics and 
the Department of Political Science also can provide advice and assistance. 

Premedical-Predental Committee 

Student counseling with respect to preprofessional programs in medicine, dentistry and other health 
sciences as well as professional school admission problems are the concern of this committee. (See 
membership listing, page 388.) All students wishing to prepare for dental or medical careers should 
register In the Office of the Academic Vice President for Academic Affairs or either the department 
offices in biological science or chemistry. 

Premedical Preparation 

Medical schools are currently seeking applicants with as broad and liberal an educational experience 
as possible. They recommend that applicants pursue collegiate major programs which are of vital 
interest to the student. However, all medical schools require a basic minimal training in the natural 
sciences and the Premedical-Predental Committee upon review of these admission requirements 
recommends the following coursework which satisfies this minimum training: 
one year of English 

four semesters of biology (including embryology and genetics) 

one year of general chemistry 

one year of organic chemistry with laboratory 

one year of college physics with laboratory 

one year of calculus 

Most medical school applicants complete a baccalaureate degree program prior to beginning their 
medical training. However, applications to medical school are processed normally at the termination 
of the sixth semester (junior year) . The medical college admission test, required of all medical school 
applicants, is taken normally during the spring of the sixth semester (junior year). The prospective 
medical school applicant should therefore normally plan to complete the above natural science 
minimal requirements by the end of the junior year. Thus he should begin general chemistry in his 
freshman year in order to satisfy the prerequisite requirements for the advanced courses in chemis- 
try. 

Since medical school admissions are limited, the best prepared applicants are likely to have an 
advantage. Many medical schools recommend certain courses in the natural sciences in addition 
to those listed above in the minimal requirements. 

The prospective applicant is advised to consult the catalogs of those medical schools to which he 
anticipates applying for additional recommended preparatory subjects. He is further advised to 
consult a member of the Premedical Committee for assistance in planning his total collegiate 
program and to obtain copies of optimal programs from the chairman of the Premedical Committee. 
Application forms for both the Medical College Aptitude Test (MCAT) and medical schools admis- 
sions are to be. obtained from the chair of the Premedical Committee. 


430—34 1 230 


70 Preprofessional Programs 

Medical Technology 

A concentration in medical technology is available under the B.A. in Biological Science program. 
Students interested in pursuing this field of study should select appropriate paramedical courses as 
electives in their study plan. 

A concentration in medical technology is also available under the M.A. in Biology. Students electing 
this must take as part of their course requirements Biological Science 514A-E (6 units) . These courses 
are open only to students who are M.A. candidates In the medical technology concentration and 
they are given at an approved cooperating hospital laboratory school. For further details consult the 
coordinator of medical technology in the Department of Biological Science. 

Social Welfare 

Full preprofessional training usually consists of two years of graduate training leading to the degree 
of Master of Social Welfare. Students who plan to seek employment in social work or social welfare 
should prepare themselves in the fields of human services, psychology (particularly child and 
adolescent psychology), sociology, anthropology, political science, economics and research meth- 
ods in social science. 

Students who Intend to enter a professional school following undergraduate training should learn 
about the specific prerequisites for admission to the graduate school of their choice. Ordinarily a 
major in one of the social sciences, and some additional work in at least several other social sciences, 
is recommended. Students with interests in pursuing careers in the fields of social welfare should 
contact the Department of Sociology for advice and assistance. 

Pretheological 

Students who might be interested in pursuing careers in counseling, social work, the teaching of 
religion, and the ministry and associated fields should take some courses in religion, psychology, 
anthropology, sociology, philosophy, education, communications, history, English, speech com- 
munication and a foreign language. Students desiring assistance and counseling regarding advanced 
work or professional careers may seek help from the faculty in the Department of Religious Studies. 


433—34 


1 


245 


JNIVERSITY 

ZURRICULA 


72 


UNIVERSITY CURRICULA 


DEGREE PROGRAMS 

California State University, Fullerton offers the following baccalaureate degree programs which are 


described on the pages listed; 


Page 

B.A. American Studies 206 

B.A. Anthropology 208 

B.A. Art 80 

B.A. Biological Science 319 

B.A. Business Administration 119 

B.S. Chemistry 328 

B.A. Communications 219 

B.A. Comparative Literature 227 

B.S. Computer Science 146 

B.A. Criminal justice 231 

B.A. Earth Science 336 

B.A. Economics 126 

B.S. Engineering 339 

B.A. English 233 

B.A. Ethnic Studies 202, 214 

B.A. French 240 

B.A. Geography 253 

B.A. German 240 

B.A. History 258 


Page 

B.S. Human Services 149 

B.A. Latin American Studies 153 

B.A. Liberal Studies 154 

B.A. Linguistics 270 

B.A. Mathematics 357 

B.A. Music 95 

B.M. Music 97 

B.A. Philosophy 276 

B.S. Physical Education 192 

B.A. Physics 365 

B.A. Political Science 280 

B.A. Psychology 289 

B.A. Religious Studies 294 

B.A. Russian Area Studies 156 

B.A. Sociology 298 

B.A. Spanish 240 

B.A. Special Major 159 

B.A. Speech Communication 305 

B.A. Theatre Arts 108 


M.A. Anthropology 

M.A. Art 

M.A. Biology 

M.B.A. Business Administration (includ- 
ing a concentration in international 

business) 

M.A. Chemistry 

M.A. Communications 

M.A. Comparative Literature 

M.S. Counseling 

M.A. Economics 

M.S. Education (with emphases in ele- 
mentary education, reading, school ad- 
ministration, and special education) .. 

M.S. Engineering 

M.A. English 

M.S. Environmental Studies 


M.A. French 

83 M.A. Geography 

319 M.A. German 

M.A. History 

M.S. Library Science 

124 M.A. Linguistics 

330 M.A. Mathematics 

221 M.A. Music 

227 M.S. Physical Education 

165 M.A. Political Science 

127 M.A. Psychology 

M.P.A. Public Administration. 

M.A. Social Sciences 

164 M.A. Sociology 

343 M.A. Spanish 

235 M.A. Special Major 

148 M.A. Speech Communication 

M.A. Theatre Arts 


The following master's degree programs are offered: 

Page 
208 


Page 
. 240 
. 254 
. 240 
. 259 
. 314 
. 270 
. 359 
. 99 
. 194 
. 281 
. 290 
. 282 
. 158 
. 298 
. 240 
. 159 
. 306 

. no 


The university is accredited by the California State Board of Education and the National Council for 
Accreditation of Teacher Education for programs leading to credentials and master's degrees. 


ia_ 2 n 2 .Vi'S 


Subject Finder 73 


SUBJECT FINDER 

The listing of degree programs does not include all of the fields or subject matter areas in which 
some courses currently are being offered at Cal State Fullerton. Additionally, different colleges and 
universities differ in the names they assign to degrees, curricular programs, and the academic units 
offering courses. The following "subject finder" lists some of the most commonly used terms for 
fields with information on where courses or programs on these subjects can be locahed at Fullerton 
and in this catalog. 


Subject 

Accounting 

African Studies (See Afro-Ethnic Studies, Anthropology, Geography, F^istory, Political 
Science) 

Afro-American Studies (See Afro-Ethnic Studies) 

Page 

128 

202 

202 


206 


206 

Anthropology 

208 

80 


90 


81 

Asian Studies (See Anthropology, Comparative Literature, Geography, History, Political 
Science) 

318 


165 


318 


118 


327 


214 


242 

Classics (See Comparative Literature, History and Latin) 

218 


227 

Computer Studies (See Engineering, Mathematics, Quantitative Methods) 

146 

165 


231 


90 


107 


115 


335 


126 


164 


168 


171 


165 


165 


165 


175 


179 


339 


233 


239 


148 

Ethnic Studies (See Afro-Ethnic Studies and Chicano Studies) 

202,214 

133 

Folklore (See Anthropology and Comparative Literature) 

239 


242 


243 


253 


356 


113—20 2 380 


74 Subject Finder 

German 245 

Graduate Studies • 77 

Health Education 195 

Hebrew 247 

History 258 

Human Services 149 

Interdisciplinary Center 150 

International Relations (See Political Science, Economics, History) 

International Study 77 

Italian 248 

japanese 248 

journalism (See Communications) 

journalism Education 227 

Latin 248 

Latin American Studies 152 

Law (See Political Science, Management) 280, 136 

Library Science 314 

Liberal Studies 1 54 

Linguistics 269 

Management 136 

Marketing 138 

Mathematics 357 

Mathematics Education 363 

Meteorology 363 

Medical Biology Courses 327 

Mexican-American Studies (See Chicano Studies) 

Music 93 

Music Education 107 

Mythology (See Anthropology and Comparative Literature) 

Native American Studies (See American Indian Studies) 206 

Nature Interpretation 370 

Oceanography 364 

Philosophy 276 

Photography (See Art and Communications) 

Physical Education 192 

Physical Science 364 

Physics 364 

Political Science 280 

Portuguese 249 

Psychology 289 

Public Administration (See Political Science) 

Public Relations (See Communications) 

Quantitative Methods 140 

Radio (See Theatre and Communications) 

Reading 168 

Recreation 200 

Religious Studies 294 

Russian 249 

Russian Area Studies 156 

Sanskrit (See Linguistics) 

School Administration 249 

Science Education 370 

Social Sciences 157 

Social Welfare 70 

Social Work (See Social Welfare) 

Sociology 298 

Spanish 250 

Special Major 159 

Speech (See Speech Communication) 

Speech Communication 305 


114—20 2 385 


Genera! Course Numbering Code 75 


speech Education 

Sports (See Physical Education) 

Statistics (See Mathematics and Quantitative Methods) 

Student-to-Student Tutorial 

Swahili 

Teacher Education 

Technological Studies 

Television (See Theatre and Communications) 

Theatre 

Theatre Education 


312 

357, 140 
77 
253 
179 
160 
107,218 
107 
115 


COURSE DESCRIPTIONS 

Course descriptions briefly describe the content or subject matter to be covered and provide 
additional information on units of credit, the level of instruction (general course numbering code), 
prerequisites, and the type of course (lecture, laboratory, activity, seminar, and individually super- 
vised work). Information on specific offerings of courses (times, rooms, instructors) will be found 
in the class schedule which is printed in advance of the fall and spring semesters. Information on 
additional (new, special, or experimental) courses for each semester also can be found in these class 
schedules. 

Some of the courses listed in the catalog are not taught every year. Many are taught once only every 
year. Others are taught every semester, and often in many sections. Advance information regarding 
the plans for offering particular courses may be obtained from the offices of the departments teaching 
them. 

The forms and methods of teaching vary widely in sp)ecific classes, depending on the subject matter 
and purposes and the particular instructor and students. The more traditional methods of lecturing, 
discussion, laboratory work, and individually supervised research or projects increasingly are being 
supplemented by such learning resources as group and individual exercises, television, and films and 
records, videotaping, and the use of the computer. Modern specialized facilities and equipment are 
used in many courses in different fields. These include: laboratories for teaching the sciences; studios 
for teaching the fine arts; a small museum and archaeology /physical anthropology laboratory; a 
variety of facilities for teaching communications; a language laboratory for teaching foreign lan- 
guages and linguistics courses; a speech and hearing clinic; and the Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary. 
Cal State encourages experimentation and innovation in teaching and welcomes a diversity of 
approaches. Increasingly, and with growing help from students, efforts are being made on the 
campus to examine and evaluate and improve the learning experiences in some classrooms in more 
scholarly ways. Students also are being provided more opportunities to learn through teaching 
experiences in activities such as tutoring and organizing and conducting courses in the Experimental 
College of the Associated Students. 

SCHEDULES 

A new Class Schedule \s published in advance of the fall and spring semesters. This general, university 
schedule contains not only detailed information on times, places, and instructors for specific courses 
but also materials on registration, new courses that are not in the catalog, the times for final 
examinations, and many other useful items for course and program planning. The Class Schedule 
niay be purchased at the Titan Bookstore. Special schedules, which may be obtained from the office 
of continuing education, are provided for the summer sessions and the extension curriculum. The 
Experimental College of the Associated Students also distributes a schedule in advance of its pro- 
grams of course offerings. 

general course numbering code 

100-299 Lower division courses of freshman and sophomore level, but open also to upper division 
students. 

300-399 Upp>er division courses of junior and senior level, which do r7o/give graduate credit unless 
included on an approved graduate study plan (such as a credential or graduate degree 
program) for a specific graduate student. 

^^0(M99 Upper division courses of junior and senior level which give graduate credit when taken 


119—20 2 410 


76 Independent Study 

by a graduate student. (Note limitations in specific graduate programs.) 

500-599 Graduate courses organized primarily for graduate students.* 

700-799 Graduate professional courses in the postgraduate program, not applicable to graduate 
degrees. 

DEPARTMENTAL COURSE NUMBERING CODE 

Because of the differences in the organization and content of the various disciplines and professions, 
there is no uniform, reasonable way of numbering courses that would be equally useful for all fields 
of knowledge. Some of the departments explain the logic of their own course numbering system in 
this catalog. 

In general it may be assumed that increases in class (freshman, sophomore, junior, senior, or 
graduate) and certainly division level (lower, upper, graduate) correlate with more difficult and 
challenging academic work. Sometimes, however, disciplines organize their course numbering partly 
in terms of criteria other than degree of difficulty; e.g. anthropology numbers its area courses in the 
300's and its theoretical or institutional courses in the 4(X)'s. It should be noted, too, that some 
students find introductory courses to be more demanding than advanced, sp>ecialized courses; in 
such courses, a more comprehensive approach and the first exposure to new ways of thinking may 
be harder for some individuals than covering a smaller, more familiar area, in much greater detail. 

SPECIAL COURSE NUMBERS 

For uniformity, certain types of courses have been listed by all departments and schools with the 
same numbers; 499 and 599 are used for undergraduate and graduate "independent study"; 196 or 
496 for "student-to-student tutorials"; 597 for a graduate "project"; and 598 for a graduate "thesis." 
The course numbers for senior seminars are not so uniform but they tend to be numbered 485, 490, 
491, or 495. 

EXPLANATION OF COURSE NOTATIONS 

Certain notations are uniformly used In the course descriptions in the catalog. 

1 . The figure In parentheses following the course title indicates the number of semester units for the 
course. Courses offered for varying units are Indicated as (1-3) or (3-6). 

2. A course description such as Anthropology 453 (3) (Same as Geography 453) indicates that; the 
same course is "cross-listed" by both departments, i.e. a student can choose to take the course 
and count it as either an anthropology or a geography course; the complete course description 
will be found with the geography courses; and probably the instructor will be a member of the 
Geography Department. For this same cross-listed course, the Geography Department will indi- 
cate after the course description "(Same as Anthropology 453)." 

3. A notation such as (Formerly 433) following the course title and the number of units indicates 
the same course previously was numbered 433. 

PREREQUISITES 

Students are expected to meet stated prerequisites for all courses. However, in exceptional cases, 
and at the discretion of the division in which the course is taught, students may be allowed to meet 
prerequisites by examination. 

INDEPENDENT STUDY 

Under the independent study program, the upper division student can pursue topics or problems 
of sp)ecial interest beyond the scope of a regular course under the supervision of a faculty adviser. 
The work is of a research or creative nature, and normally culminates in a paper, project, compre- 
hensive examination, or performance. Before registering, the student must get his topic approved 
by the instructor who will be supervising independent study. The catalog numbers for indep)endent 
study in departments are 499 and 599. Independent study courses may be repeated. A student 
wishing to enroll in more than six units of independent study in any one semester must have the 

• Note exceptions on page *7. 


45^—34 1 340 


StudenMo-Student Tutorials 77 

approval of his major adviser and of the chair of the department (s) in which the independent study 
is to be conducted. 

INTERNATIONAL STUDY COURSES 

Cal State Fullerton students under The California State University and Colleges International Study 
Programs register concurrently at Cal State Fullerton and at the host institution abroad, with credits 
assigned to the student which are equivalent to courses offered at Cal State Fullerton. Undergraduate 
students who discover appropriate study opportunities at the host institution but no equivalent 
course at Cal State Fullerton may use Independent Study 499 and International Study 292 or 492. 
Graduate students may use Independent Graduate Research 599 and International Study 592. 

292 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-6 lower division units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University and Colleges International Programs. Study 
undertaken in a university abroad under the auspices of The California State University and 
Colleges. 

492 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 upper division units) 

Op)en to students enrolled in California State University and Colleges International Programs. Study 
undertaken in a university abroad under the auspices of The California State University and 
Colleges. 

592 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 graduate units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University and Colleges International Programs. Study 
undertaken in a university abroad under the auspices of The California State University and 
Colleges. 

GRADUATE STUDIES 700 

A credit/no credit course with no (0) units of credit, which is designed to ensure continuous 
registration for those graduate students with an advanced degree objective who find that they are 
unable to enroll in regularly offered coursework. This course does not require class attendance. 
Permission to register in Graduate Studies 7(X) must be given by the academic area sponsoring the 
graduate degree sought. 

Registration in Graduate Studies 700 normally wll be restricted to gradate students who have been 
classified or who are in a prescribed prerequisite program for a specific graduate degree. 

STUDENT-TO-STUDENT TUTORIALS 

The university has begun a program of exp)eri mentation with and development of "student-to- 
student tutorials." One of the fastest and profoundest ways to learn is to teach. The "student-to- 
student tutorial" will provide a formal way to encourage students to learn through teaching. It will 
expand significantly the opportunities for students to have meaningful experiences as teachers. At 
the same time, it greatly will increase the amount of tutoring available and will extend tutoring to 
all of the kinds of students who need and want tutorial assistance. 

Students electing to be tutors not only will increase their mastery of particular subject matters but 
also will have practice in developing their communication, cooperation and interpersonal relation- 
ship skills. Most important adult roles and jobs also involve a teaching dimension and the tutorial 
experience will provide opportunities to develop awareness of teaching problems and competence 
in teaching techniques. 

Each department will decide whether or not it wishes to offer this course. Departments choosing 
to offer the student-to-student tutorial course will follow the rules listed in the following course 
description. 

The course number will be 1% or 4%, and one to three units of credit can be given for each course. 
Prerequisites: A 3.0 or more grade-p)oint average and/or consent of instructor and simultaneous 
enrollment in the course or previous enrollment in a similar course or its equivalent. The tutor and 
his tutee or tutees will work in mutually advantageous ways by allowing all involved to delve more 
carefully and thoroughly into the materials presented in this specific course. One to three students 
may be tutored by the tutor unless the instructor decides that special circumstances warrant increas- 
ing the usual maximum of three tutees. Three hours of work are expected for each unit of credit, 
dnd this work may include, apart from contact hours with tutees, such other activities as: tutorial 
preparations; consulting with instructors; re|X)rting, analysis and evaluation of the tutorial experi- 


470—34 1 430 


78 StudenMo-Student Tutorials 


ences; and participation in an all-university orientation and evaluation program for tutors. A max- 
imum of three units can be taken each semester and nine units of any combination of 196 and 496 
for an undergraduate program. This course must be taken as an elective and not counted toward 
general education, major or minor requirements. The course can be taken on a credit/no credit basis 
by the tutor. Requests for tutors must be initiated by tutees and can be initiated up until the official 
university date for dropping a class with a W. Tutors electing to respond to such requests will receive 
credits at the end of the semester and can register in the course until the official university date for 
dropping a class with a W. Both tutors and tutees must submit written reports, analyses and 
evaluations of their shared tutorial experience, and both must participate in an all-university orienta- 
tion program as well as in any conferences or critiques that the instructor of the course may require. 
Further information can be obtained from the department in which the student is interested in 
"student-to-student tutorials." 


471—34 


1 


435 


rHE ARTS 


80 


SCHOOL OF THE ARTS 

Dean; J. Justin Gray 


DEPARTMENT OF ART 

FACULTY 
jerry Samuelson 
Department Chair 

Robert Baron, Alvin Ching, Darryl Curran, Naomi Dietz, Henry Evjenth, Robert Ewing, Dextra 
Frankel, Carmel Goode, Ray Hein, Thomas Holste, George James, Claude Kent, G. Ray Kerciu, 
Ruth Kline, Donald Lagerberg, Michael Lee, Ronald Leighton, Gary Lloyd, Clinton MacKenzie! 
Robert MacLean, John Olsen (Emeritus), Robert Partin, Albert Porter, Leo Robinson, Jerry Roth- 
man, Victor Smith, Jon Stokesbary, Vincent Suez, George Williams, Mark Witten 

The Department of Art offers a program which includes the several fields of art history, theory and 
appreciation; drawing, painting, sculpture; design and crafts; and art education. The broadest objec- 
tive of the program is to contribute to the intellectual, social, and creative development of the student 
as he prepares for citizenship in a democratic society. More specifically, the art program provides 
opportunities for students: (1 ) to develop a knowledge and understanding of those general principles 
of visual organization and expression basic to all forms and fields of art; (2) to develop a critical 
appreciation and understanding of historical and contemporary art forms through a study of these 
principles as they relate to the range of artistic production of mankind; (3) to use these general 
principles as a means to express more clearly their ideas, thoughts, and feelings in the creation of 
visual forms; (4) to develop those understandings and skills needed to pursue graduate studies in 
the field, to teach art in the schools, or to qualify for a position in business and industry as an art 
specialist. 

Undergraduate curricula leading to the bachelor of arts degree have been designed to meet the 
specialized needs of the following groups: (1 ) students who wish to study art as an essential part 
of their personal and cultural development; (2) students seeking preprofessional preparation in art; 
and (3) students planning to teach art in grades K-12. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree with a major in art, students must have a C average in all 
courses required for the degree. No credit toward the major will be allowed for specific major 
courses in which a grade of D is obtained. As is customary, the Art Department reserves the right 
to hold projects completed by a student for class credit for a period of three years. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ART 

Three course programs have been planned to meet the individual needs and interests of students 
working for the bachelor of arts degree with a major in art. 

In the development of specific course offerings which make up these programs, it has been the 
concern of the art faculty to see that each program contains: ( 1 ) basic courses in art history, theory, 
appreciation, and studio practice which have as their primary focus the study of those general 
principles of visual organization and expression underlying all fields of art: (2) more specialized 
courses which provide for adequate preparation in depth in a single field of art. The teaching of art 
history, theory, and criticism is not confined to courses bearing that title. Rather, each studio course 
involves theory as well as the practice of art, includes as part of its content the study and reference 
to related historical art forms, and has as part of its purpose the development of those critical abilities 
which are necessary to a valid evaluation and appreciation of the art expressions of man. 

Plan I provides for an emphasis in the area of art history, theory, and appreciation and is particularly 
recommended for those students who wish to pursue graduate studies in art history or museology. 
Plan II is designed for those students who prefer a studio-type program with a preprofessional 
orientation and an area of sp>ecializatlon selected from the following: (1 ) drawing and painting; (2) 
printmaking; (3) sculpture; (4) crafts; (5) ceramics; (6) graphic design; (7) illustration; (8) environ- 
mental design; or (9) creative photography. 

Plan III is for those students who wish to meet the requirements for single subject Instruction (Ryan 
Act) for teaching art in grades K-12. 


476—34 1 460 


Art 81 


Plan I requires a minimum of 60 units in art or approved related courses with a minimum of 36 units 
of upF>er division in art. Plan II r^uires a minimum of 60 units in art with a minimum of 33 units 
of upp>er division in art. Plan III requires a minimum of 55 units of art including a minimum of 27 
units of upper division art. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet the other university 
requirements for a bachelor of arts degree (see page 56). Students following Plan III also must meet 
any specific requirements for the desired teaching credential (see section in catalog for School of 
Education). 

PLAN I: ART HISTORY EMPHASIS Units 

Preparation for the Major: Art history 201 A,B (6 units) ; 6 units of studio courses; approved 
electives (12 units) in art, anthropology, drama, foreign languages, history, literature, 

music or philosophy 24 

The Major: Art history (36 units) including one course from each of the following six 
groups: 301-302, 411-412; 341-421-422; 431-432; 451-452; 461-462-471; six courses in 
not more than three of the above groupings and three courses (9 units) of approved 

electives 36 

Reading knowledge of one modern foreign language 

PLAN II: STUDIO EMPHASIS 
Drawing and Painting 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A, B; 107A,B; 103; 104; 117 (3 units) and 207 A, B 27 

The Major: Art 307A,B, 31 7A,B; 487A,B or C (6 units); 6 units of upper division art history; 

and 9 units of art electives 33 

Printmaking 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A, B; 107A,B; 247; 117 (3 units); 103; 104; and 3 units 

of art electives 27 

The Major: Art 347A,B; 487D (6 units); 307 A, 31 7A, 6 units of upper division art history; 

and 9 units of art electives 33 

Sculpture 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A, B; 107A,B; 103; 104; 216A,B; 117 (3 units) 27 

The Major: Art 316A,B, 336A,B; 486 ( 6 units); 6 units of upper division art history and 

9 units of art electives 33 

Crafts 

Preparation for the Major: KrX 201A,B; 107A,B; 103; 104; 205A; and 6 units selected from 

Art 106A, 123B, 205B, 216A, or 117 (3 units) 27 

The Major- -General Concentration: Art 305 A; 31 5A; 325A; 330 or 355A or 365 A; 6 units 
of upper division art history and 15 units selected from Art 305B, 31 5B, 31 6A, 325B, 

338A, 485A, 485B, 485C, 485D or 485E 36 

The Major — jewelry /Metalsmithing Concentration: Art 305 A; 315A,B; 325A,B; 6 units of 
upper division art history; 6 units selected from Art 305B, 330, 355A, 365A or 338A; 

and 6 units selected from 485A or 485C 33 

The Major — Fibers Concentration: Art 355 A, B; 365 A, B; 6 units selected from 330, 485D 

or 385E; 6 units of up>per division art history; and 9 units of art electives 33 

Ceramics 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A,B; 107 A,B; 103; 104; 106A,B; 117 (3 units) 27 

The Major: Art 306A,B; 326A,B, or 426A,B; 484 ( 6 units); 6 units of upper division art 

history and 9 units of art electives 33 

Graphic Design 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A,B; 107 A,B; 103; 104; 223A,B; 117 (3 units) 27 

The Major: Art 323A,B, 483A (6 units); 338A; 363A; 6 units of upper division art history; 

and 9 units of art electives 33 


139—20 2 510 


82 


Art 


Illustration Units 

Preparation for the Major: ^xX 201A,B; 107A,B; 103; 104; 123A; 117 (3 units); and 3 units 

of art electives 27 

The Major: Art 363 A, B; 483C (6 units); 317A,B; 323 A; 6 units of upper division art history; 

and 6 units of art electives 33 

Environmental Design 

Preparation for the Major: \tX 20} 107A,B; 103; 104; 123B; and 6 units of art electives 27 

The Ay*?/or;313A,B; 333A,B; 483B (6 units); 453A; 6 units of upper division art history and 

6 units of art electives 33 

Creative Photography 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A,B; 103; 104; 107A,B; 117(3 units); 247; and 3 units 

of art electives 27 

The A/a/or-; 338A,B; 489 (6 units); 347A; 6 units of upper division art history; and 6 units 

selected from 323A, 363A, 307 A, 347B, or 443A; and 6 units of art electives 33 

PLAN III: TEACHING EMPHASIS 

Single Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

(Qualifies for teaching Art in grades K-12) 

Preparation for the Major: \rx 102; 103; 104; 106A; 1 07 A, B; 2 units of 11 7, or 123A; 201 A, B; 


and 205A 27-28 

The Major: (Select one of the following) 

Drawing and Painting: 307 A,B; 316A; 317A; 338A or 443A, 347A; 41 1 or 412; and 441 A, B 27 

Crafts: 305A; 306A,B; 307A; 315A; 330, 411 or 412; and 441A,B 27 

Graphic Design and Photography: 307 A; 323A; 338A; 347A; 363A, 41 1 or 412, 443A; and 

441A,B 27 

Professional Preparation: 

Art Ed 442 3 

Education coursework 9 

Student teaching (one semester full time) 12 

Program requirements: 

1. Assignment by the Art Department chair to a faculty adviser in art education. 


2. Fulfill credential requirements listed in this catalog within the School of Education for the 
curriculum pertinent to the Ryan Act provisions. 

3. Meet the requirements listed under Plan III, Teaching Emphasis for the bachelor's degree in 
art. 

4. Completion of major and education course requirements prior to enrolling in student teaching. 

5. Admission to teacher education through the School of Education is required prior to enrollment 
In Art Ed 442 and student teaching. 

6. Acceptance for student teaching is based on candidate quotas, a review of a candidate's 
portfolio of art work, and evidence of success in university coursework completed. 

7. Recommendation by the faculty adviser in art education. 

Upon completion of the above program and the bachelor of arts degree, the student is eligible for 
a partial credential, which meets state requirements for teaching in grades K-12. Within a specified 
(period of time from the beginning of a teaching assignment, 30 units of coursework must be 
completed at an accredited college or university to qualify for a full credential. Credentials are issued 
from the institution where this unit requirement has been completed. 

Multiple Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

The following three courses are recommended for all students intending to teach in the elementary 
schools in multiple subject classrooms: 

Units 


Art 380 3 

Music 333 3 

Theatre 402 3 


9 


144—20 2 535 


Art 83 

The following additional list of courses would be strongly recommended for any student who wishes 
to expand his knowledge in any or all of the arts: 

Art 100, 101, 103, 104, 107 A, 201A,B, 310A,B, 320, 330, 340, 380, and 441A,B 
Dance 101, 125A,B, 140, 210, 221 A, B, 227A,B, 245A,B, 311A,B, 331 A,B, 477 
Music 111A,B, 184A,B, 251, 281A,C,E,C, 283A, 381 A,B, 435 
Theatre 100A,B, 211, 263A, 276A, 277, 370A,B, 402, 403, 41 1C 

MINOR IN ART FOR THE BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

A minimum of 24 units is required for a minor in art for the bachelor of arts degree of which a 
minimum of 10 units must be in upper division courses. Included in the program must be a basic 
course in each of the following areas: (1) art history and appreciation; (2) design; (3) drawing and 
painting; and (4) crafts. Those students planning to qualify for a standard teaching credential with 
specialization in elementary or secondary teaching and art for a minor must obtain approval from 
the Art Department for the courses selected to meet the upper division requirements for d minor 
in art. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ART 

The program of studies leading to the master of arts degree in art provides a balance of theory and 
practice for those who desire to teach art or wish to develop a sound basis for continued advanced 
work In this field. The program offers each student the opportunity to expand his intellectual and 
technical resources and to acquire greater richness and depth In terms of creative understanding and 
achievement in one of the following areas of concentration: (1) drawing and painting (including 
printmaking); (2) crafts (Including ceramics); (3) design; (4) sculpture; and (5) art history. 

Prerequisites for the Program 
Prerequisites to the program include: 

1. An undergraduate major in art or 24 units of upper division art including at least 12 units of 
upper division study in the elected area of concentration with a CPA of 3.0 or better; 

2. Portfolio review — before any units may apply to the approved study program for the degree, 
the student must arrange for a faculty committee evaluation of the student's background, 
including a statement of purpose by the student, and review of creative work. Portfolio review 
dates are May 1 for the following fall semester, and December 1 for the following spring 
semester of each year. Arrangements may be made through the Art office to meet these 
deadlines prior to admission. 

Study Plan 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study approved by the student's graduate commit- 
tee of which 1 5 must be 5(X)-level courses. The 30 units are distributed as follows: 

Units 

1 . Core courses in art history, philosophy, analysis and criticism 9 

A. Art 5(X)A Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3 units) 

(admission for students with classified status only) 

B. Art 500B Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3 units ) 

(admission for students with classified status only) 

C. Art 481 Seminar in Art History (3 units), or substitute of a 400-level art history 
course, or Philosophy 311, Aesthetics, on the recommendation of the major 
adviser 

2. 500- and/or 400 level courses in the area of concentration selected from one of the 

following areas 12 

A. Drawing and painting 

B. Crafts 

C. Design 

D. Sculpture 

E. Art History 


3. Additional coursework in area of concentration or approved electives 3-6 

4. Project or thesis 3-0 


30 


489—34 1 525 


84 


Art 


All courses must be completed with a B average, and all courses in the area of concentration must 
be graded B or better. The Department of Art requires the candidate for the Master of Arts in Art 
degree to exhibit his or her project in the department upon completion of the Master of Arts in Art 
degree and the art faculty reserves the right to retain an example from the student's master's exhibit 
for the university collection. 

For further information, consult the Department of Art. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 59, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ART COURSES 

100 Exploratory Course in Art (3) 

Exploration and creative use of a variety of art materials, processes, and concepts. Field trips 
required. Not open to art majors for credit except by permission of the Art Department. (6 hours 
activity) 

101 Introduction to Art (3) 

A course for the general student designed to develop an understanding of historical and contempo- 
rary art forms. Illustrated with examples of painting, sculpture, architecture, and design. Field trips 
required. Not open to art majors for credit except by permission of the Art Department. 

102 Art in Southern California (1) 

Discussion and field trip experiences to see art in the Los Angeles community. 

103 Two-dimensional Design (3) 

The inventive use of materials, tools, and elements of plastic organization as related to a two- 
dimensional surface. (6 hours activity) 

104 Three-dimensional Design (3) 

The inventive use of materials, tools, and elements of plastic organization as related to three- 
dimensional form. (6 hours activity) 

106A,B Beginning Ceramics (34) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. A basic course in the study of form as related to ceramic materials, tools, 
processes, and concepts. (6 hours activity) 

107A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting (34) 

Beginning work in the creative use of the materials of drawing and painting with emphasis on visual 
concepts, use of medium, individual exploration, and growth, planning and craftsmanship. 107A 
emphasizes drawing; 107B emphasizes painting. (9 hours laboratory) 

111 Fundamentals of Art (3) 

A comparative study of the elements of plastic organization in relation to personal and cultural 
aesthetic expression and concepts. Fundamental art ideas, problems of organization and struc- 
ture, and terminology. Field trips required. 

117 Life Drawing (1) 

Drawing from the live model. May be repeated to a maximum of 4 units. (3 hours laboratory for 
each unit) 

123A,B Descriptive Drawing (34) 

An intensive study of traditional and contemporary drawing techniques and theories. Emphasis in 
123A on representation of nature forms and in 123B on manmade and mechanical forms includ- 
ing linear perspective. (9 hours laboratory) 

201A,B Art and Civilization (34) 

A comparative survey of the basic ideas, forms, and styles of the visual arts as they developed In 
various cultures from prehistoric time to the present day. 

205A Beginning Crafts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Art 104 may be taken concurrently. A study and evaluation of craft 
concepts, processes and materials as they relate to the development of aesthetic forms based 
on function. (6 hours activity) 

205B Beginning Crafts: Wood (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Art 104 may be taken concurrently. A study and evaluation of 
woodworking concepts and processes as they relate to the development of wood into aesthetic 
form based on function. (6 hours activity) 


494-^ 1 550 


Art 85 


207A,B Drawing and Painting (Experimental Methods and Materials) (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 117, 107A,B or equivalents. An intensive study of traditional and contemp)orary 
methods and materials as they relate to current approaches in drawing and painting. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

213A,B Beginning Environmental Design (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104 or equivalents, and Art 123B. An introduction to design theory and 
communication skills related to the design field. A — Emphasis on architectural terminology, plans 
and elevations, and graphic symbols. B — Emphasis on material analysis finishes and lighting 
concepts. (6 hours activity) 

216A,B Beginning Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 104. An introductory course in sculpture with emphasis on the creative use of wood 
and metal, power equipment and hand tools. (6 hours activity) 

223A,B Lettering, Typography and Rendering (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. A study of the history, design and use of letter forms including techniques for 
rough and comprehensive layouts and the use of both hand-lettered forms and handset type. 
(6 hours activity) 

247 Beginning Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A,B. An introductory course of all printmaking forms to include litho, etching, 
woodcut and serigraphy. (6 hours activity) 

288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

(Same as Theatre 288) 

301 Ancient Art (3) 

A study of the developments in art from the Paleolithic to the period of late antiquity. 

302 Medieval Art (3) 

A study of the developments in art from the period of late antiquity through the Gothic. 

305A Advanced Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 205A. Study and evaluation of craft concepts, processes, and materials as they relate 
to the development of aesthetic forms based on function. (9 hours laboratory) 

305B Advanced Crafts: Wood (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 205B. A study and evaluation of craft concepts and processes as they relate to the 
development of wood Into utilitarian and aesthetic form. (9 hours laboratory) 

306A,B Advanced Ceramics (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 106A,B. Further experiences in the study and evaluation of form as related to the 
creative use of ceramic concepts and materials Including design, forming, glazing, and firing. (6 
hours activity) 

307 A,B Drawing and Painting (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 117, 107A,B, 207A,B or equivalents. The study, evaluation and creative use of the 
concepts and materials of drawing and painting with emphasis on individual exploration, growth, 
planning and craftsmanship. (9 hours laboratory) 

310A,B Drawing and Painting: Techniques and Approaches for the Classroom Teacher 
(33) 

Prerequisite: Art 100. The study and development of painting and drawing materials and approaches 
as they relate to elementary and secondary education. (6 hours activity) 

312 History of Architecture (3) 

Architecture from antiquity to the present. Buildings will be studied in terms of their relationship to 
the societies which produced them, their symbolic content and their contributions to the evolu- 
tion of western architectural tradition. 

313A Environmental Design: Unit Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 102, 103, 104 and 213. Environmental design projects related to the study of unit 
concepts. (6 hours activity) 

313B Environmental Design: Systems Concepts (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 31 3A. Environmental design projects related to the study of systems concepts. (6 
hours activity) 

315A,B Jewelry (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken concurrently. Design and creation of 
jewelry. (9 hours laboratory) 

316A,B Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 104 and 21 6A. (9 hours laboratory) 


498—34 1 570 


86 Art 


317A,B Advanced Life Drawing (3,3) 

Prerequisite: three units lower division life drawing. Drawing and painting from the live model. (9 
hours laboratory) 

320 Paper: Structural and Decorative Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. An exploration of the structural and decorative aspects of construc- 
tion with paper, emphasizing three-dimensional design. Such techniques as papier mache, paper 
sculpture, paper folding and paper applique will be considered through a variety of papier 
surfaces. (6 hours activity) 

323A,B Graphic Design (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 223A. Development and projection of ideas in relation to the technical, 
aesthetic, and psychological aspects of advertising art. (6 hours activity) 

325A,B Metalsmithing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken concurrently. A study and evaluation of 
fundamental metalsmithing concepts, processes and materials as they relate to the aesthetic 
development of utilitarian forms, raising, silversoldering, forging, casting, engraving, chasing and 
repousse. (9 hours laboratory) 

326A,B Ceramic Sculpture (3,3) 

Development of basic ceramic technology into individual sculptural forms and techniques. (6 hours 
activity) 

327A,B Supergraphics (3,3) 

The design and production of environmental paintings. Team and individual projects. A variety of 
advanced technical means are employed. Studio and lecture. A historical survey of environmen- 
tal painting, concepts and techniques is included. (6 hours activity) 

329A,B Art and Technology (3,3) 

Creative activity in the context of modern technology. (9 hours laboratory) 

330 Fibers and Fabrics, Non-woven Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 or 205A or B, or consent of instructor. Exploration of concepts of design 
using knotting, crochet, fabric manipulation, basketry, stitchery and applique as techniques 
applied to the creation of art works. 

333A Environmental Design: Space and Structure (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 21 3. Architecturally oriented projects to develop concepts of exterior-interior design 
and planning. (6 hours activity) 

333B Environmental Design: Space and Structure (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 333A. Architecturally oriented projects to develop exp)erimental spaces and struc- 
tures. (6 hours activity) 

336A,B Casting Techniques and Theories of Cast Sculpture (33) 

Prerequisite: Art 31 6A. Projects in various waxing molding and metal casting techniques. Media with 
emphasis on aluminum and bronze and the lost wax process. (9 hours laboratory) 

338A Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103 or its equivalent. Exploration of the photographic media as a means of personal 
expression. Historical attitudes and processes are discussed in relationship to new materials and 
contemporary aesthetic trends. Field trips required. (9 hours laboratory) 

338B Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A. Further exploration of the photographic medium as a means of personal 
expression. Historical and new processes introduced as a vehicle toward the individual student's 
personal goal. Field trips required. (9 hours laboratory) 

340 Ceramics: Techniques for the Classroom Teacher (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 100. Beginning work in the creative use of hand building processes, and glazing of 
ceramic ware. Related information on decorating processes, drying and firing kilns as they apply 
to appropriate teaching levels. Historical development of ceramics as it relates to various cultures. 

341 Art of India (3) 

A study of the art of India and its impact on the cultures of Southeast Asia, with an emphasis on 
Buddhist and Hindu monuments. Schools of miniature painting and the art of Muslim India 
included. 

347A Printmaking — Etching (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 247, and 117. Development of concepts and exploration of materials 
involved in printmaking including etching, and aquatint. (9 hours laboratory) 


502—34 1 590 


Art 87 


347B Printmaking — Lithography (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 247, and 117. Development of concepts and exploration of materials and 
techniques involved in lithography printing. (9 hours laboratory) 

355A,B Fibers: Fabric Printing and Dyeing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A or B or consent of instructor. Exploration of concepts of design as they 
relate to fabric surfaces with emphasis on various printing techniques and dyeing techniques 
applied to the cieation of art works. (6 hours activity) 

360 Elementary School Crafts (2) 

Studio activities and techniques of drafts appropriate to the elementary school. Strongly recommend- 
ed for elementary teaching credential candidates. (4 hours activity) 

363A,B Illustration (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A,B and 117. Development and projection of ideas relative to the needs 
of story, book, and magazine, and film illustration. (6 hours activity) 

365A,B Fibers: Weaving (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 or 205A,B or consent of instructor. Exploration of concepts of design using 
various weaving techniques and learning the uses of a loom applied to the creation of art works. 
(6 hours activity) 

380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 100 or equivalent. The study and evaluation of art concepts, materials, and proc- 
esses as they relate to and promote child development. (6 hours activity) 

381 Early Childhood Development in Art (3) 

A variety of studio activities as they relate to early child art based on research of the behavioral 
sciences having relevance for the understanding of the child's artistic development. (6 hours 
activity) 

401 Criticism of the Arts (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in the School of the Arts or consent of instructor. Develop- 
ment of criteria and vocabulary for criticism of the visual and performing arts through lectures, 
readings, discussions, and exhibit and p)erformance attendance. Emphasis on descriptive and 
evaluative skills In music, art, theatre, dance and cinema criticism. 

411 Foundations of Modern Art (3) 

Basic problems of painting and sculpture of the realism, impressionism, p>ost-impressionism periods. 

412 Art of the 20th Century — 1900 to Present (3) 

Fundamentals of modern painting, graphics and architecture. 

421 Oriental Art: China (3) 

A study of the historical development of the arts of China and their relation to Chinese philosophy 
and culture. 

422 Oriental Art: Japan (3) 

A study of the historical development of the arts of japan and their relation to Japanese philosophy 
and culture. 

423 Film Animation (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 107 A,B and 117. Aesthetic and technical considerations of animation 
applied in the production of film. 

426A,B Glass Forming (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 106A,B, 306A, and consent of instructor. A course in the chemistry, handling and 
manipulation of glass and its related tools and equipment for the ceramic artist. (6 hours activity) 

431 Renaissance Art (3) 

Basic problems of painting, sculpture and architecture of the Renaissance period. Lectures, discus- 
sion and field trips. 

432 Baroque and Rococo Art (3) 

Basic problems of painting, sculpture and architecture of the Baroque and Rococo p>eriod. Lectures, 
discussion and field trips. 

441A,B Media Exploration for Teaching Art (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104, 107A,B, 205A or consent of instructor. Provides a wide range of oppor- 
tunities for exploring the art media used In secondary school art programs today. Deals with 
materials appropriate for secondary art curriculum. Offers creative investigation of two and three 
dimensional media in a variety of subject matter applications. 

443A,B Film Making (3,3) 

Development of film as a visual art form. 


167—20 3 10 


88 


Art 


451 Oceanic Art (3) 

An introductory survey of the styles of the aboriginal people of the following regions: Australia, 
Melanesia, Micronesia, Polynesia and Indonesia. 

452 Art of Sub-Saharan Africa (3) 

An introduction by region and tribal group to the art forms of West Coastal Africa and the Sudan, 
Niger River kingdoms, Yoruba kingdoms, Cameroon chieftainships, Congo tribes. Central Africa 
and East Coastal Africa. 

453A,B Display and Exhibition Design (3,3) 

A course in the appropriate and creative use of materials, processes, and design concepts as they 
relate to the special problems involved in the planning and preparing of displays, exhibits, bulletin 
boards, wall cases, and art portfolios. (More than 6 hours laboratory) 

461 Art of North American Indian (3) 

An introduction to the art forms and style groupings of the following American Indian groups; Eskimo, 
Pacific Northwest, California, Eastern Woodlands, Mound Builders, Southwestern and Northern 
Mexico. 

462 Art of Mesoamerica (3) 

An introduction to the art and architectural forms of Mesoamerica from the early, formative stages 
to the Spanish Conquest. 

471 Art of Central and South America (3) 

An introduction to the art styles and cultural regions of Central America and South America. 

481 Seminar in Art History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Opportunities for intensive study and evaluation in one area of 
art history and appreciation. 

483 Special Studies in Design (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Opportunity for intensive study in the design areas listed below. 
Each area listed may be repeated to a maximum of 12 units, but no more than 3 units of credit 
may be obtained in any one area in a single semester. 

483a Graphic Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

483b Environmental Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

483c Design and Composition (2 hours activity for each unit) 

483d Display Design (More than 3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

483f Film Making (2 hours activity for each unit) 

484 Special Studies in Ceramics (1-3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper division units in ceramics. Course may be repeated to a 
maximum of 12 units, but not more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one area 
in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

485 Special Studies in Crafts (1-3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper division units in designated area or consent of instructor. 
Opportunity for intensive study in the craft areas listed below. Each area listed may be repeated 
to a maximum of 12 units, but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one 
area in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

485a Jewelry 

485b General Crafts 

485c Metalsmithing 

485d Fibers — Weaving 

485e Fibers — Fabric Printing and Dyeing 

485f Fibers and Fabrics 

486 Special Studies in Sculpture (1-3) 

Prerequisites; Art 316A,B and consent of instructor. Opportunity for intensive study in the following 
sculptural processes. May be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but no more than three units 
of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

486a Modeling and Fabrication 
486b Casting 


512-^ 1 640 


Art 89 


487 Special Studies in Drawing and Painting and Printmaking (1-3) 

Prerequisites: a minimum of six upper division units and consent of instructor. Opportunity for 
intensive study in the drawing and painting areas listed below. Each area listed may be repeated 
to a maximum of 12 units, but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one 
area in a single semester. (3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

487a Painting 
487b Life Drawing 
487c Drawing 
487d Printmaking 

488A,B Advanced Scene Design (3,3) 

(Same as Theatre 488A,B) 

489 Special Studies in Creative Photography (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A,B. Advanced projects in photography as a means of personal expression. May 
be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but no more than three units of credit may be obtained 
in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

499 Independent Research (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in art with consent of department chair and written consent of instructor. 
May be repeated for credit. 

500A Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Selected advanced problems and issues in art. Emphasis is on intellectual clarification and verbal 
articulation of individual intent as an artist. Each student will develop oral and written material 
in support of his master's project. 

500B Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 5(X)A. Directed research in the area of major emphasis. Each student will develop 
oral and written material on historical backgrounds and developments in art as the/ relate to his 
intent as an artist (stated in Art SOOA) and in support of his master's project. 

502 Seminar in Contemporary Art (3) 

Selected advanced problems and directed research in relation to the contemporary art form. 

503 Graduate Problems in Design (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, development, and 
evaluation of individual projects in the design areas listed below. May be repeated to a maximum 
of 12 units in each area, but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one area 
in a single semester. 

503a Graphic Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503b Environmental Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503c Design and Composition (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503d Display Design (More than 3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

503f Film Making (2 hours activity for each unit) 

504 Graduate Problems in Ceramics (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects in ceramics. May be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but no 
more than three units of cr^it may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each 
unit) 

505 Graduate Problems in Crafts (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, development, and 
evaluation of individual projects in the crafts areas listed below. May be repeated to a maximum 
of 12 units but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours 
activity for each unit) 

505a Jewelry 
505b General Crafts 
505c Metalsmithing 

505d Fibers — Weaving, Fibers and Fabrics 
505e Fibers — Fabric Printing and Dyeing 

4—86012 


515—04 2 15 


90 


Dance 


506 Graduate Problems in Sculpture (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, development, and 
evaluation of individual projects in sculpture. May be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but 
no more than three units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for 
each unit) 

507 Graduate Problems in Drawing and Painting (1-3) 

Prerequisite: 12 units of upper division drawing and painting. Intensive study with emphasis on 
planning, development, and evaluation of individual projects in the drawing and painting areas 
listed below. May be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but no more than three units of credit 
may be obtained in a single semester. (3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

507a Painting 
507b Life Drawing 
507c Drawing 
507d Printmaking 

597 Project (3-6) 

Prerequisites: Art 500A,B, written consent of instructor and recommendation of the student's gradu- 
ate committee. Art 500B may be taken concurrently with Art 597 on approval of instructor. 
Development and presentation of a creative project in the area of concentration beyond regularly 
offered coursework. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisites: Art 500A,B, written consent of instructor and recommendation of the student's gradu- 
ate committee. Art 500B may be taken concurrently with Art 598 on approval of instructor. 
Development and presentation of a thesis in the area of concentration beyond regularly offered 
coursework. No more than three units may be taken in any one semester. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students in art with consent of department chair and written consent of instructor. 
May be repeated for credit. 


ART EDUCATION COURSES 

332 Industrial Arts for Elementary Teachers (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 41 1 or consent of instructor. Creative selection, organization and use of materials 
and tools in construction activities. Includes correlation experiences with the social studies, 
science, and other units of work. (4 hours activity) 

370A,B Art Activity (2,2) 

Opportunities to observe, analyze, and evaluate child growth in and through creative art experi- 
ences. (4 hours activity) 

429A,B Arts and Crafts for Teaching Exceptional Children (2,2) 

Methods of using a variety of art materials and processes with emphasis on those experiences which 
meet the needs of retarded or handicapped children. (4 hours activity) 

442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Objectives, methods, and materials including audiovis- 
ual instruction for teaching art in secondary schoolu. Required before student teaching of stu- 
dents presenting majors in art for the standard teaching credential. 

749 Student Teaching in Art in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See page 190 for description and prerequisites. 

FACULTY IN DANCE 

FACULTY 

Araminta Little 
Acting Faculty Chair 

K. Wright Dunkley, Frank Hatch, Masami Kuni, Miriam Tail 


533—34 2 105 


Dance 91 


PART-TIME 

john Dougherty, Richard Duree, Al Gilbert, Linda Hatch, Robert Regger, Bruce Terry 
The program of studies in dance provides training in each of the related aspects of dance such as 
its history, theory, composition and the techniques of movement leading to dance performances and 
productions. The curriculum is designed in accordance with the following three objectives: (1 ) to 
prepare the student who wishes to enter dance as a profession, either in teaching, choreography 
or performance; (2) to provide for the general university student the opportunity for a personal 
involvement in dance as an art form and as a basic movement experience; and (3) to offer curricular 
experiences in dance for the student who is majoring in fields of study that are closely related to 
dance such as art, music and theatre. 

Opportunities for dance performance are available through dance faculty sponsored and cospon- 
sored dance concerts, operas and musicals. Every dance concentration major is required to enroll 
for at least one unit of repertory credit each semester excepting the freshman year. 

Whereas, no major in dance is as yet offered by the dance faculty, the Department of Theatre offers 
B.A. and M.A. degrees in theatre arts with areas of concentration in dance which are designed to 
meet the requirements of educational and professional careers in dance. 


DANCE COURSES 

Dance concert attendance required for all courses listed. 

101 Introduction to Dance (2) 

Historical and aesthetic approach to dance as an art form, to provide student with basic knowledge 
and aesthetic values in ballet, modern dance, educational dance, theatrical dance as well as 
ethnic dance. Field trips. 

105 Eurythmics for Teachers (1) 

Designed to teach and develop the rhythmic sense and ability of the students with the method of 
eurythmics by Jaques Dalcroze and the rhythm-training method of Rudolf Bode. Recommended 
for students of dance, music, theatre and art as well as education. (2 hours activity) 

125A,B Improvisation (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 125A is prerequisite for 125B. Theory and practice of improvisation in move- 
ment. The student will be taught to overcome inhibitions, to move freely and naturally and to 
improvise imaginatively in movement. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

135A,B Movement and Rhythm (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 135A is prerequisite for 135B. Designed to equip the student with higher kines- 
thetic and kinetic ability. Basic movement experience for dance, drama, art, music as well as the 
general student. (4 hours activity) 

140 Dance Activities (1) 

A physical activity experience in dance activities with a student in an educational setting and under 
the direction of an instructor who directs the activity to meet the needs and interests of the 
student. May be repeated for credit. 

210 Creative Dance for Children (3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 135A,B. Designed not only for the student who is going to teach children how 
to create dance, but also for the student who is going to be a dance creator. Basic dance subjects 
in relation to the growth of children from 5 to 17 years of age. How to make a dance motif and 
how to compose simple dances. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

221A,B Fundamentals of Classical Ballet (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 140 or consent of instructor. Fundamental structure and technique of classic 
ballet, based on R.A.D. method. Designed for students who aim to be professional performers 
or choreographers on stage, film and television. (4 hours activity) 

227A,B Space Forming in Dance (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 135A,B. 227A is prerequisite for 227B. Theory of space and principle of space 
forming to train students to understand spacial movement, so that they can master movement 
on stage, stage design and the basic skills of choreography. (1 hour lecture, 4 hours activity) 


538—34 2 130 


92 


Dance 


245A,B Mime and Pantomime (2,2) 

Prerequisite: 245A is prerequisite for 245B. Theory and practice of mime and pantomime for drama, 
dance and education (expression and gesture). Historical and contemporary knowledge and 
techniques with emphasis on individual development of creative skill in mime and pantomime. 
(4 hours activity) 

255 Jazz Dance (2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 101 and 135A,B. Designed to the basic rhythm of jazz and to equip the students 
with the technique of classic and modern jazz dances. (4 hours activity) 

311A,B Elements and Forms of Dance Composition (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 135A,B and 227A,B. Basic forms and elements of dance composition. Dances 
in which these rules must be applied will be composed by the student. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
activity) 

331 A,B Character Dance for Theatre (2,2) 

Prerequisite; Dance 135A,B or consent of instructor. Basic character dances such as Mazurka, 
Czardas, Friska, Polonaise, Fandango, Tarantella, along with the Court Dances such as Minuet 
and Calliard. Designed for students who aim to be professional performers or choreographers, 
as well as for actors and directors of theatre. (4 hours activity) 

335 Afro-American Dance (3) 

Study of primitive and tribal rhythm including jazz and other derivational dances of Africa. (1 hour 
lecture, 4 hours activity) (Same as PE 335 and Afro-Ethnic Studies 314) 

358 Philosophy and Methodology of Educational Dance (3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 125A,B and 31 1 A,B or consent of instructor. A short history of dance education; 
principles and objectives of modern educational dance and the methodology to meet these 
objectives; principle and structure of curriculum for educational dance. 

375A,B Dance Theatre Production (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 135A,B and 227A,B or consent of Instrutor. A — The theory and practice of the 
technical aspects of dance production. B — Students direct the technical aspects of dance per- 
formers. 

401 Criticism of the Arts (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in the School of the Arts or consent of instructor. Develop- 
ment of criteria and vocabulary for criticism of the visual and performing arts through lectures, 
readings, discussions, and exhibit and performance attendance. Emphasis on descriptive evalua- 
tive skills in music, art, theatre, dance and cinema criticism. 

437 Music for Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 374A,B or consent of instructor. Designed to give knowledge and technique 
of accompanying dance, (including electronic music) and to give knowledge and understanding 
of the structure and rhythm of dance and Its relation to music for music students who are 
interested in composing music for dance. 

441 Seminar in Ethnic Dance as Culture Phenomena (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A study of the mutual influence and relation between the religion, 
living form, habits and economical-political-geographical environment and dance form (includ- 
ing music and costume) of the major ethnic groups of the world. 

450 Creative Dance for Teachers (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 135A,B and 358, or consent of instructor. Study and analysis of creative dance 
and its relation to dance education in elementary and secondary schools. Recommended for 
students of dance, theatre, music and art as well as practicing teachers. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
activity) 

470 Dance Repertory (1-3) 

The production and performance of major dance repertory. A minimum of one unit p)er semester, 
excepting the freshman year, required for all dance emphasis theatre majors. 

474 Special Studies in Dance Theatre Performance (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 374A,B or equivalent and consent of instructor. Opportunity for Intensive study 
in theory and practice in dance theatre and production. May be repeated to a maximum of eight 
units but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (More than 
3 hours production p)er unit) 

476A,B History of Dance (3,3) 

History of dance from primitive times to the present. Covers development of dance in Europ>e, the 
Orient, Asia, America (including American Indian) in its general relation to culture history. 


544—34 2 160 


Music 93 


477 Dance Aesthetics (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 101 and 374A,B and/or consent of instructor. Philosophical as well as theoreti- 
cal knowledge of dance as an art form. A study of the processes of dance creation, movement 
and image; the problems of music accompaniment in dance, and dance as an art form of 
metaphysical beauty. 

482 Ethnic Dance (3) 

Prerequisite: advanced preparation and/or exp)erience in dance or consent of instructor. Theoretical 
and practical study of folk, square and social forms of dance in terms of cultural and environmen- 
tal influences (includes geography, music, costumes, customs. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 
(Same as PE 482) 

484 Contemporary Dance Technique (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 140, Dance 135A or equivalent. Study of theories, approaches, and techniques of 
contemporary dancers. Emphasis is on development of individual technique in dance. (6 hours 
activity) (Same as PE 484) 

486 Choreography (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 140, Dance 135A or equivalent. Theoretical and creative aspects of choreography. 
Application and analysis of elements of choreographic form. Composition of solo and group 
dances. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) (Same as PE 486) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Directed reading, reports, creation and performance according to predetermined arrangements with 
instructor and department chair. 

DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 

FACULTY 

Leo Kreter 
Department Chair 

Roger Ardrey, David Berfield, Carole Chadwick, Andrew Charlton, Eugene Corporon, M'Lou Dietz- 
er, John Farrer III, Rita Fuszek, Kenneth Goldsmith, j. Justin Cray,* Su Harmon, Burton Karson, 
Terry King, Joseph Landon, John Lueck, Gary Maas, Donal Michalsky, Benton Minor, Jane Paul, 
Lloyd Rodgers, Patricia Roycroft, Robert Stewart, Howard Swan, David Thorsen, Rodger Vaughan 

PART-TIME 

Suzanne Aultz (voice), Kalman Bloch (clarinet), Lynwood Bronson (piano), Dorothy Evinger 
(music education), Bonnie Farrer (piano), William Foster (music education), Pamela Goldsmith 
(viola). Jay Grauer (double bass), Susan Greenberg (flute), David Crimes (guitar), Michael 
Kurkjian (voice), Karen McKinney (organ), Todd Miller (French horn and percussion), Frederick 
Moritz (bassoon), Donald Muggeridge (oboe), William Nicholls (trombone and tuba), Harvey 
Pittel (saxophone), Tom Ranier (jazz ensemble), Erma Reynolds (theory), JoAnne Ritacca 
(piano), Leona Roberts (voice), Michael Seyfrit (theory), John Sorenson (theory), James Stamp 
(trump)et), Susan Talevich (piano), Earle Voorhies (piano), Paul Woltz (bassoon), Brett Watson 
(choral) 

The Department of Music offers courses for both majors and non-majors. The fundamental purpose 

of the music curriculum is threefold: (1 ) to promote excellence in all aspects of music and academic 

coursework; (2) to provide basic preparation for careers in music; and (3) to promote interest in 

3ll musical and artistic endeavors in the university and the surrounding community. 

requirements of the department of music 

1. All entering music majors must register for the Bachelor of Arts degree program for the first 
semester of residence. Students may change their degree objective to the Bachelor of Music 
program upon completion of at least one semester of coursework at the university, successful 
completion of an examination in applied music, and recommendation of the coordinator in the 
appropriate area of concentration. 

2. An aptitude test in music, a placement audition in the principal (performance area (student's 
voice or instrument), and proficiency examinations in theory, literature, and basic piano will be 
given to all music majors at the time of entrance to the university. Each student must pass the 

* University administrative officer 


548 -^ 2 180 


94 


Music 


proficiency examinations in theory and basic piano before being approved for graduation. The 
basic piano requirement may also be satisfied by successful completion of Mu 282B. Students 
deficient in any of the above areas will be advised to take additional coursework. 

3. Each music major must declare a principal performance area with the approval of a faculty 
adviser who will be assigned upon completion of the placement audition at the time of entrance. 
Before being approved for graduation, each student must achieve at least the 300 level of 
performance proficiency in his area of principal performance. 

4. Each music major is required to present a senior recital appropriate to his degree program before 
being approved for graduation. In the Music History and Theory, Selective Studies, Conducting, 
Composition, Accompanying and Musical Theatre programs, this requirement will be met by 
some means other than a conventional recital. Consult the appropriate coordinator for more 
specific information. 

5. All music majors are required to participate in a major performance ensemble (band, orchestra, 
opera or chorus) each semester of the regular school year (minimum: B.A. six semesters, B.M. 
eight semesters). Students who declare wind or percussion as their principal performance area 
must register for band (or orchestra, if designated by the instrumental coordinator) , string majors 
must register for orchestra; and voice majors must register for chorus (or opera, if designated 
by the choral-vocal coordinator). A music major whose principal performance area is piano, 
organ, or guitar shall be assigned to an appropriate ^performance group by his faculty adviser. 

6. All music majors whose principal p)erformance area is an orchestral Instrument or piano are 
expected to take part in small ensembles for a minimum of two semesters, except for students 
enrolled in the Bachelor of Arts degree — Music Education option. 

7. The principal performance area for the major in music requires work in applied music, as follows: 

a. All music majors must complete a minimum of six semesters (eight semesters for the 
Bachelor of Music) of applied music in the principal performance area. 

b. A student pursuing the Bachelor of Music (Composition) or the Bachelor of Arts 
(Music History and Theory or Selective Studies options) must complete six units of 
applied music in a principal performance area. If he attains the 300 level of competency 
before completing the maximum of six units allotted for this study, he may use the 
remainder of these units as music electives. A Music History and Theory or Selective 
Studies major may elect additional units in applied music only upon the recommenda- 
tion of his adviser and the coordinator In his area of performance, and with the 
approval of the coordinator of applied music. The Composition major must also 
complete six units of applied composition culminating in the successful presentation 
of a senior recital of his own compositions. 

c. A student pursuing the Bachelor of Music (Instrumental, Keyboard, Voice or Accom- 
panying specializations) must achieve the 400 level of performance proficiency before 
being approved for graduation, and may not receive double lessons (two units) for 
more than three semesters at any given jury level. Specific information about jury level 
criteria is available In the Music Department office. 

d. In order to receive state-funded lessons in applied music, an undergraduate student 
must be enrolled for a minimum of six units, two of which must be in an academic 
area of music (any courses other than performing ensembles and applied music), and 
he must be making satisfactory progress toward a degree. If courses are dropped during 
the semester reducing his enrollment below the six-unit minimum, state-funded lessons 
will be withheld in a subsequent semester of enrollment. 

8. Senior transfer students entering Cal State Fullerton with a major in music, or graduate students 
in music entering to complete credential requirements are expected to complete a minimum of 
one semester of successful upper division work in music before they may be approved for 
student teaching (Mu Ed 749) . Required courses and comp)etencies expected of all music majors 
must be satisfied before endorsement by the faculty committee for acceptance in the credential 
program. 

9. All credential candidates are required to pass functional examinations in piano and voice (In 
addition to the piano proficiency described in 2 above) before being approved for admittance 
to teacher education. This requirement may also be satisfied by successful completion of Mu 
282B and 283. 

10. All music majors will be exp)ected to attend a weekly departmental recital hour in conjunction 
with their study of applied music. 


554 -^ 2 210 


Music 95 


11. A music major must maintain a 2.5 grade-point average in major field coursework at this 
institution in order to be approved for graduation. 

12. All exceptions to departmental or curricular requirements should be directed by p)etition to the 
department chair. 


MUSIC DEGREE PROGRAMS 

The Department of Music offers a variety of courses and programs leading to baccalaureate and 
graduate degrees in teaching and the professions. The baccalaureate degree may be earned In two 
degree programs (Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Music). Within these patterns, a student will 
normally pursue an emphasis in music history and theory, piano pedagogy, selective studies, music 
education, performance, composition, accompanying, or musical theatre. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

The Bachelor of Arts in Music shall consist of no fewer than 55 units, of which at least 29 shall be 
in the upper division. 


Basic Requirements for the Bachelor of Arts Units 

Music theory (Mu 111A,B, 211) 9 

Music literature (Mu 251) 3 

* Applied techniques (Ensemble 4, Principal Performance Area 4) 8 

20 

Music History and Theory Option 


This is designed as a balanced program in music history and theory providing suitable preparation 
for advanced degrees In theory, literature or musicology and basic preparation for advanced study 
in other fields, such as musical acoustics, music therapy, ethnomusicology, library science in music 
and music in industry and recreation. 

Units 


Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 20 

Music theory (Mu 316, 321A,B, and 320A or 320B or 3210 9 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 A, 352A,B, 498, 499) 11 

•Applied techniques (Ensemble 2, Principal Performance Area 2) 4 

Conducting and composition (Mu 391 A or 392A and 391 B or 392B or 422 A) 4 

Elective courses In music history, theory, and literature 7 

55 


Allied requirements for Music History and Theory Option; 

1. An academic minor (20 units) with approval of the faculty adviser 

2. Foreign language, preferably German, to be satisfied by one of the following: 

a. four years study of foreign language at the secondary school level, 

b. a pass examination given by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, 

or 

c. completion of the second semester of the beginning university course in foreign 

language. 

Piano Pedagogy Option 

This is designed to prepare the student for a career as a private teacher of piano. 

Units 


Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 20 

Music theory (Mu 318, 320A, 321A, 422A) 9 

Music history and literature (Mu 351A,B, 454A,B) 10 

Applied techniques (Principal Performance Area) 4 

Ensemble (Mu 363) 1 

Keyboard skills (Mu 372 or 373, 385, 386) 4 

Observation In applied music (Mu 267) 1 

Pedagogy internship (Mu 367) 1 

Piano pedagogy (Mu 467A,B) 4 

Elective 1 

55 


•See 7b under Requirements of the Department of Music, page 94. 


5.58—34 2 230 


96 Music 


Selective Studies Option 

This is designed to provide considerable latitude in the study of music and is nonvocational in 
orientation. Up)on completion of a block of core courses, the student is encouraged to pursue his 
own curricular interests in the field of music, culminating in the development and completion of a 
senior project. 

Students preparing for a professional career in music or further graduate study should be aware that 
other degree options exist which are more specifically designed to achieve those objectives. 

Units 


Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 20 

Music theory (Mu 316 or 318, 320A or 320B, 321A) 7 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 A, 352A,B) 9 

• Principal performance area 2 

Major performance ensemble (See Special Requirements below) 1-2 

Small ensemble (See Special Requirements below) 2-3 

Special project (Mu 397, 497, See Special Requirements below) 4 

Electives in Music _9 

55 

Special Requirements; 


1 . Every student must incude eight units of study in a {performance ensemble, of which a minimum 
of five shall be in a major performance ensemble, and a minimum of two in a small ensemble. 
Participation in a major performance ensemble is encouraged for all students every semester, 
since additional units in performance may be taken as electives. Performance courses may be 
taken concurrently, but performance units must be distributed over a minimum of six semesters. 

2. Every student shall prepare a special project in his senior year culminating in a public perform- 
ance, lecture, lecture-recital, or other suitable demonstration. To the greatest extent possible, 
this project should be an independent investigation into an area of special interest with minimal 
faculty guidance. This project will serve in lieu of a senior recital, though in some instances 
a recital may be appropriate; a specific plan of study for the project must be approved by the 
adviser a semester in advance of its completion. In preparation for this study. Mu 397, Prosemi- 
nar in Music, should be taken in the year preceding graduation, followed by Mu 497, Senior 
Project, in the final year. 

3. Every student shall take a comprehensive examination over the areas of theory, history, and 
basic musicianship in the first semester of his senior year. This examination must be passed 
before the student will be approved for graduation. The examination may be repeated in the 
second semester, if necessary, and if not passed on the second attempt, the student must enroll 
for a minimum of six units each semester thereafter (with specific advisement) until the 
examination is passed. 


Music Education Option 

This is designed to provide in-depth preparation for teaching in the public schools under the 
provisions of the Teacher Preparation and Licensing Law of 1970 (Ryan Act). 


Units 


Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Arts 20 

Music theory (Mu 320A, 321 A) 5 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 A,B) 6 

Applieo* techniques (Ensemble 3, Principal Performance 2) 5 

Specialisation in the major 19 


Voice-Choral Specialization: 

Mu 281 (4), Mu 354 (2), Mu 390 (2), Mu 391 A,B (4), Mu 316 (2), Mu 361d (1 ), Mu 
457 (2), Mu 453 (2) 

Instrumental Specialization: 

Mu 362F (1),Mu 392A,B (3), Mu 281 (6), Mu 323A (2), Mu 422A (2), Mu 353 (2), 
Mu 316 (2), Mu 371 or 471 (1) 


• See 7b under Requirements of the Department of Musk, page 94. 


242—20 3 385 


Music 97 


Genera! Music Specialization: 

Mu 281 (4), Mu 333 (3), Mu Ed 435 (3), Mu 391 A (2), Mu 392A (1), Mu 362F (1), 

Mu 381B (2), Mu Ed 441 (2), Electives (1) 

Total 55 

(Mu 299 and 399 — Clinical Practice — are recommended as a corollary to Mu 271, 281 
and/or Mu 391, 392) 

Students who wish to earn a teaching credential in addition to a Bachelor of Arts degree with a Music 


Education Option must complete the following: Units 

Mu Ed 442 (3) — professional education courses 12 

Student teaching, full-time 12 

24 


The following comp)etency examinations are required for the teaching credential: 

Prior to Junior Level: 

Theory 

Prior to Student Teaching: 

Keyboard functional 
Voice functional 
Senior recital 

Multiple Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

The following three courses are recommended for all students intending to teach in the elementary 
schools in multiple subject classrooms: . . 


Art 380 3 

Mu 333 3 

Theatre 402 * 3 


9 

The following additional list of courses would be strongly recommended for any student who wishes 
to expand his knowledge in the arts: 

Art 100, 101, 103, 104, 107A, 201A,B, 310A,B, 320, 330, 340, and 380 
Dance 101, 125A,B, 140, 210, 221 A,B, 227A,B, 245A,B, 311A,B, 331 A,B, 477 
Mu 100, 101, 111A,B, 184A,B, 251, 281A,C,E,C, 283A, 381 B, Mu Ed 435 
Theatre 100A,B, 211, 263A, 276A, 277, 370A,B, 402, 403, 41 1C 

BACHELOR OF MUSIC 

This degree program is designed to provide training for the highly gifted students who show promise 
and capability of becoming professional performers and composers. 

This degree shall consist of no fewer than 70 semester units, of which at least 32 shall be in the upper 
division. 


Basic Requirements for the Bachelor of Music Units 

Music theory (Mu 111A,B, 211) 9 

Music history and literature (Mu 251, 351 A) 6 

Principal performance area (Mu 171) 2 

Major performance ensemble 4 

Senior recital (Mu 498) _1^ 

22 

Composition Specialization 

Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Music 22 

Music theory (Mu 316, 318, 320A,B, 321A and 321B or C, 323A, 422A) 17 

Music history and literature (Mu 352A,B) 6 

• Principal performance area 4 

Applied composition 5 

Major performance ensemble 4 

Electives in music U 

70 


• See 7b under Requirements of the Department of Musk, page 94. 


588-04 2 380 


Units 

22 

11 

I* 3-6 

11 

i, 4 

4 

6 

^ 

70 

22 

9 

’ 7-10 

11 

3 

1 

Accompanying 

Pedagogy (Mu 372 or 373, 467 A,B) 

Electives in music 


Voice Specialization 

22 

Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Mus^c 

9 

Music theory (Mu 316, 320A or B, 321A g,' 

10-13 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 B or 352A,B, 456, 457A,b) .... 

11 

Principal performance area : 


Major performance ensemble (2 units minimum in mu so i .. 

3 




70 


5 

9-12 

70 


98 Music 

Instrumental Specialization 

Basic requirements for the Bache. ” of Music 

Music theory (Mu 316, 320A or B, 321 A, 323A, 422A) 

Music history and literature (351 B or 352 A, B) 

Principal performance area 

Major performance ensemble 

Conducting (392A,B, 

Chamber music 

Electives in music 

Keyboard Specialization 

Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Music 

Music theory (Mu 316, 320A or B, 321 A, 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 B or 352A,B, 454A,B) . 

Principal performance area 

Chamber music 


Allied requirement for Voice Specialization. 

Two foreign languages, each to be satisfied by one of the following; 


Units 

Accompanying Specialization 22 

Basic requirements for the Bachelor of 1 1 

Music theory (Mu 316, 318, 320A or B, ^ 8-11 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 B or 352A,B, 55, ^ 

Principal performance area 2 

Sight reading (Mu 385) 2 

Accompanying (Mu 386) 2 

Chamber music (Mu 363) ^ 

Harpsichord class (Mu 372) 2 

Conducting (Mu 391 A) 4 

Diction (Mu 390A,B,C,D) ^ 

Organ class (Mu 373) 3_^ 

Electives in music ~ 


591—34 2 395 


Music 99 


Musical Theatre Specialization Units 

* Basic requirements for the Bachelor of Music 22 

Music theory (Mu 321 A or 323A) 2-3 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 B, 456) 6 

Principal performance area 5-6 

Major performance ensemble/workshop 4 

Diction (Mu 390D) 1 

Conducting (Mu 391 A or 392 A) 2 

Music/Theatre workshop (465A, 4650 6 

Music /Theatre history (473) 3 

Theatre (Theatre 263A, 263B, 342A, 342B) 14 

Dance (Dance 135A,B or 245A,B) __4 

70 


Minor in Music 

The minor in music may be used as an appropriate area of study by persons whose majors are in 
other fields, or may be used to satisfy minor field requirements for elementary or secondary teaching 
credentials. A maximum of 12 units from the lower division may be included in work counted toward 
the music minor. The music minor requires a minimum preparation of 20 units. 


Composite of Lower Division and Upper Division Units 

Theory of music (selected from Mu 101, 111A,B, 211 or any 300- or 400-level theory 

classes for which student is qualified) 6 

Music history and literature (Mu 100, 251, 350 or courses at the 400- or 500-level for 

which student is qualified) 5-6 

Applied techniques (including ensemble, conducting, piano, voice and orchestral in- 
struments) 8-9 

20 


Note: Students expecting to use the minor for teaching must complete four units of Mu 281 a-d 
and/or Mu 381 A,B Orchestral Instruments, and a minimum of two units in an ensemble appropri- 
ate to their area of specialization. 

Master of Arts in Music 

The program of studies leading to the Master of Arts in Music provides advanced studies In breadth 
as well as In an area of graduate sp)eclalization. The program is further intended to provide advanced 
coursework with a suitable balance in such music studies as theory, comp>osition, history, literature 
and advanced applied techniques and music education. There are suitable graduate sp)ecializations 
in the areas of history and literature and p)erformance. 

The Master of Arts in Music is designed for teachers and supervisors of music; persons intending 
to specialize in applied fields in the pursuit of occupational goals; individuals preparing for college 
teaching; and persons intending to pursue advanced degrees beyond the master's level. 

Prerequisites 

The student must have a baccalaureate degree with a major in music (or the equivalent of a major, 
i.e., 29 upper division units in music) with a minimum grade-point average of 3.0 in the major and 
2.75 overall. Opp)ortunity is given the student to remove deficiencies by taking certain prescribed 
courses. Such courses cannot be applied to the master's degree program. 

Study Plan 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study, no more than nine of which shall be outside 
the field of music, and at least 15 of which must be in 500-level courses in music. The student must 

• Student may receive 498 credit for a leading role in a major production upon approval of the instructor and the area coordinator. 


596—34 2 420 


100 


Music 


include Mu 500, Introductiqp to Graduate Studies in Music, within the first nine units taken as a 
graduate student. The degree program offers two options: Option I in History and Literature, or 
Option II in Performance. A thesis or project is required in both options. In addition, in Option I 
the program will include at least six units of study outside the field of music, but supportive to the 
program. Each program is individually designed in conference with the adviser. 

For further information, consult the Department of Music. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 59, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


MUSIC COURSES 

100 Introduction to Music (3) 

A basic approach to musical enjoyment and understanding through a general survey of musical 
literature representative of various styles and ^performance media. Music will be related to other 
arts through lectures, recordings, and concerts. Closed to music majors. 

101 Music Theory for Non-Music Majors (3) 

Basic theory and practical applications to further understanding of basic music principles and to 
improve music performance and listening skills. Includes sightsinging and relationship to key- 
board and simple melodic instruments. Closed to music majors. 

111A,B Diatonic Harmony (33) 

A year course covering diatonic harmony and musicianship. Includes scales and intervals, triads and 
their inversions, harmonizations, nonharmonic tones, modulation and dominant seventh chords. 
Practical applications, to include sightsinging, dictation and keyboard harmonizations. (2 hours 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 

171, 271, 371, 471 Individual Instruction (1-2) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual study with approved instructor with emphasis on 
technique and ref>ertoire. Music majors must register for a minimum of one unit per semester. 
Performance majors approved by jury recommendation should register for two units per semes- 
ter. jury examination required. May be rep)eated for credit. 

172 Piano Class for Piano Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: placement by coordinator. Croup instruction in basic pianistic technique and repertoire. 
May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

173 Voice Class for Voice Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: placement by coordinator. Group instruction in basic vocal technique and repertoire. 
May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

182A,B Piano Class for Music Majors (1,1) 

Fundamentals of keyboard technique for students whose major performance instrument is not piano. 
(2 hours activity) 

183 Voice Class for Non-majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary techniques in singing for the non-music major. May be rep)eated for credit. 
(2 hours activity) 

184A,B Piano Class for Non-Majors (1,1) 

Prerequisite: Mu 101. Beginning and elementary instruction in basic piano techniques for the non- 
music major. (2 hours activity) 

199 Clinical Practice in Major Performance (1) 

Observation, experimentation, clinical practice of instrumental and/or choral music in applied field 
situations, as in public and private schools. Co-enrollment in Mu 361 recommended. (2 hours 
activity) 

211 Chromatic Harmony (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 1 1 1 B. Continuation of Mu 1 1 1 A,B with emphasis on the chromatic practice of the 
19th century. Includes secondary dominants; ninth, eleventh, and thirteenth chords; sequence, 
and chromatically altered chords. Practical applications to include sightsinging, melodic and 
harmonic dictation, and keyboard practice. Required of all music majors. (2 hours lecture, 2 
hours activity) 


600—34 2 440 


Music 101 


251 Survey of Musical Literature (3) 

An introductory course required of majors in the study of the literature of music in Western 
civilization. Open to minors and qualified students by consent of instructor. Students should be 
able to read music as a part of the analysis of form, design and style. (3 hours lecture) 

267 Observation in Applied Music (1) 

Prerequisites; declared B.A. piano pedagogy major, sophomore standing. Observation of specialists 
in private music teaching; teaching techniques, materials, development of student and prepara- 
tion for beginners, adult beginners, intermediate and early avanced students under the specialist 
in these areas. Requires written reports of activity in these areas. 

281a-g Orchestral Instruments (1) 

Mu 281a,c,e, and g are required of all music credential candidates. Instrumental music candidates 
are required to take two additional units selected from Mu 281b, d, or f. (2 hours activity) 

281a String Instruments (1) 

Sp>ecialization on violin and viola. Violin and viola majors substitute Mu 281b for this course. 

281b String Instruments (1) 

Specialization on cello and string bass. Cello and bass majors are exempt. 

281c Brass Instruments (1) 

Specialization on trumpet and French horn. Trumpet and French horn majors substitute 281 d for 
this course. 

281d Brass Instruments (1) 

Specialization on trombone, baritone and tuba. Trombone and tuba majors are exempt. 

281e Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Specialization on clarinet and flute. Secondary emphasis on saxophone. Clarinet and flute majors 
substitute 281 f for this course. 

281f Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Specialization on oboe and bassoon. Oboe and bassoon majors are exempt. 

281g Percussion Instruments (1) 

Specialization on the snare drum and mallet-played instruments with related work on other 
standard percussion instruments. Special consideration given to typical problems encountered 
with percussion in the public schools. Percussion majors are exempt. 

282A,B Piano Class for Music Majors (1,1) 

Prerequisite: Mu 182B or placement by instructor. Designed to meet music major minimum piano 
proficiency requirements for degree. Fundamentals of keyboard technique for students whose 
major performance field Is not piano. Not required for keyboard majors. (2 hours activity) 

283 Voice Class (1) 

Prerequisite; placement by coordinator. Recommended for credential candidates. Not required for 
voice majors. (2 hours activity) 

299 Clinical Practice in Instrumental and Vocal Techniques (1) 

Clinical practice and field applications of instrumental and vocal techniques classes, as in public and 
private schools. Co-enrollment in Mu 271 or Mu 281 recommend^. (2 hours activity) 

300 Music of Today (3) 

Prerequisite; Mu 100 or 101, or consent of instructor. Concentration on the musical trends of the 
last two decades. The emphasis will be on western art music, but recent developments in jazz, 
rock, and folk idioms will also be discussed. 

301 Advanced Theory for Non-Majors (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 101. Further study in music theory beyond Mu 101. Study of traditional and current 
techniques with emphasis on original composition. Includes sightsinging and keyboard applica- 
tions. Not open to music majors for credit. 

316 16th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite; Mu 21 1 or consent of instructor. Sixteenth-century counterpoint in two, three and four 
parts, covering motet, canon, double counterpoint. Required of all music majors pursuing the 
B.M. degree. 

318 18th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite; Mu 316 or consent of instructor. Eighteenth-century counterpoint in two, three and four 
parts, covering invention, canon, double and triple counterpoint and fugue. 


606—34 2 470 


102 


Music 


320A,B 20th-Century Techniques (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 21 1 . A survey of the compositional practices of the 20th century with emphasis on 
written examples in the various styles. Practical applications to include sightsinging, keyboard 
practice, and dictation. A — Compositional techniques from 1890 to 1945. Required of all music 
majors. B — Compositional techniques since 1945, to include limited experience with the synthe- 
sis of sound. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

321A,B,C Form and Analysis (3,2,2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 21 1 or consent of instructor. A — Analysis of structural elements of music such as 
motive, phrase, and period; binary, ternary, rondo, sonato allegro and larger musical forms in 
representative musical works. Required of all music majors. B — Continuation of A, with emphasis 
on larger musical works. C — Continuation of A and B with emphasis on literature of the 20th 
century. 

323A,B Orchestration (2,2) 

Prerequisite; Mu 320, 321 A or consent of instructor. Writing and analysis of orchestral music. 

333 Music and Child Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 101 or equivalent or successful completion of proficiency test. Study of the relation- 
ship of music to child growth and development, with emphasis on the child from 5 to 12. 

341 Survey of the Symphony (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. A study of the history and literature of symphonic 
music from the 18th through the 20th centuries, with special emphasis on the relationships 
between musical composition and the general artistic temper of historical periods. For non-music 
majors only. 

342 Survey of the Concerto (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. A study of the history and literature of the concerto 
from the 17th century to the present. The nature of the soloist and the social display of virtuosity 
will be considered. For non-music majors only. 

343 Survey of Choral Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. A study of choral music through the ages, from 
Gregorian Chant to contemporary forms, concentrating on choral works of the great composers 
of the Baroque, Classical and Romantic eras. For non-music majors only. 

350 Music in Our Society (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. Designed to increase interest and an understanding 
of music in its relation to our general culture. A sociological approach which includes musical 
criticism and journalism, concert life, audience psychology, and the political /religious /business 
aspects of the American musical scene. 

351A,B History and Literature of Music (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 21 1 and 251 or consent of instructor. A — A study of the history and literature of 
music from early Creek beginnings through the Renaissance. B — A study of the history and 
literature of music covering the baroque, classic, romantic period and the 20th century. Required 
of all music majors. 

352A,B History and Literature of Music from 1600 to the Present (33) 

Prerequisite: Mu 211 and 251, or consent of instructor. A — Historical and stylistic study in the 
baroque and classic periods. B — Historical and stylistic study in the romantic period and 20th 
century. May be used to replace 351 B. If used to fulfill music history requirements, both A and 
B sections of Mu 352 must be completed. This course is recommended to all music majors who 
intend to continue music study at the graduate level. 

353 Survey of Instrumental Music Materials (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 392A. Through examination and analysis of multiple examples of the repertory, this 
course is designed to develop skills in the practical use of instrumental literature for performance 
in secondary schools and community colleges. 

354 Survey of Public School Choral Music Materials (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 391 A. Thorough examination and analysis of multiple examples of choral repertoire 
suitable for junior and senior high choruses. 


609—34 2 485 


Music 103 


361a-^ Major Performance Ensemble (1) 

The study and performance of standard and contemporary music literature. Public concerts on 
campus and in the community are included in the scheduled activities each semester and 
participation is required. A concert tour may be included by some groups. (More than 3 hours 
major production.) May be repeated for credit. 

361a Symphony Orchestra (1) 

Open to all university students and qualified adults in the community by audition or consent of 
instructor. 

361b University Choir (1) 

Open to all university students with consent of instructor. 

361c University Concert Band (1) 

Open to all university students with consent of instructor. 

361d Opera Theatre (1) 

Study of roles and representative excerpts from standard and contemporary operas and the basic 
musical, dramatic and language techniques of the musical theatre. Performance of operatic 
excerpts and complete operas. 

361e University Singers (1) 

Membership restricted to advanced voice students or those accepted by audition. 

361f University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Membership restricted to advanced wind and percussion students or those accepted by audition. 

361g University Chorale (1) 

Open to upper division and graduate students with consent of instructor. Audition necessary. 

362A Wind Ensemble-Jazz Ensemble (1) 

Open to qualified students by audition or consent of instructor. Public performances on campus and 
in the community are scheduled each semester, 

362B Wind Ensemble — Varsity Band (1) 

Open to all university students with consent of instructor. Varsity Band provides music for Titan 
football and basketball home games. Concurrent enrollment in Mu 361c is recommended. 

362C Vocal Ensemble (1) 

Study and performance of choral literature of the Renaissance and baroque periods. Open only to 
students by audition. Public performance required. (2 hours activity) 

362D Percussion Ensemble (1) 

Study and performance of music written for the Percussion Ensemble. Open to any qualified student 
with consent of instructor. (2 hours activity) 

362E Brass Ensemble (1) 

The study and performance of music written for large brass choir/ensemble. Open to any qualified 
student with consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

362F Conducting Laboratory Ensemble — Instrumental (1) 

A non-performing ensemble composed of orchestral instruments (strings, woodwinds, brass, and 
percussion) which functions as a laboratory ensemble for instrumental conducting students. 
Literature covered is of limited difficulty. Required of students enrolled in Mu 392A; open to all 
students. (2 hours activity) 

362G String Ensemble (1) 

Study and performance of string orchestra literature covering all F)eriods of musical styles. Open to 
students by audition or consent of instructor. 

362H Chamber Orchestra (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study and performance of representative chamber orchestra 
literature. Open to university students and qualified adults in the community. 

363 Chamber Music Ensembles (1) 

Open to all qualified wind, string, or keyboard students. Various ensembles will be formed to study, 
read, and to perform representative chamber literature of all periods. (2 hours activity) 

367 Pedagogy Internship (1) 

Prerequisites: Mu 267 and 467A. Supervised internship in private piano teaching. Private piano 
teachers in the B.A. piano pedagogy degree will have clinical practice under the supervision of 
qualified personnel. 

372 Harpsichord Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in piano or organ or consent of instructor. The study of the harpischord 
as an instrument, the application of baroque stylistic characteristics, and training in the rudiments 
of continuo playing in ensemble with voices and instruments. (2 hours activity) 


613--34 2 505 


104 


Music 


yj'i Organ Class for Music Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in piano. The study of the organ as an instrument, the playing techniques, 
and repertoire. Instruction will include the differences between piano and organ techniques. (2 
hours activity) 

381A Survey of Orchestral Instruments (2) 

A general survey of orchestral instrumental practices. (4 hours activity) 

381 B Survey of Recreational Instruments (2) 

A general survey of recreational instrument practices for credential candidates. (4 hours activity) 

385 Keyboard Sight-reading (2) 

Prerequisite: 200-jury level in piano or organ or consent of instructor. Analysis of sight-reading skills 
and procedures. Emphasis on development of ability to read solo, ensemble, and scores without 
hesitation at first sight. (4 hours activity) 

386 Piano Accompanying (1) 

Prerequisite: by audition only. The study and performance of piano accompaniments for instrumen- 
talists, vocalists, and ensembles. Participation in rehearsals, recitals, and concerts required. (2 
hours activity) 

387 Church Service Playing (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 211 or consent of instructor. Transp)Osition and improvisation of interludes and 
playing of hymns, chants and accompaniments. Includes characteristics of services of various 
denominations and a survey of suitable organ literature. May be repeated for credit. 

390A,B,C,O Diction for Singers 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of instructor. Study of proper singing diction; may not 
be considered a substitute for formal language study. Examples from standard vocal literature 
explained through the use of the International Phonetic Alphabet. A — Italian. B — German. C 
—French. O — English. 

391A,B Choral Conducting (2,2) 

Prerequisite: one semester of voice class or consent of instructor. A — Principles, techniques, and 
methods of conducting choral groups. Required of all music education majors. (4 hours activity) 
B — Continuation of 391 A including laboratory work with class and vocal ensembles, using 
standard choral repertoire. (4 hours activity) 

392A,B Instrumental Conducting (1,2) 

Prerequisite: two courses from 281 a-g or consent of instructor. A — Principles, techniques, and 
methods of conducting orchestral and band groups. Required of all music education majors. (2 
hours activity) B — Continuation of 392 A, including laboratory experience in conducting instru- 
mental groups, using standard instrumental literature. (4 hours activity) 

397 Proseminar in Music (3) 

Prerequisites: Mu 21 1 and 351 A or 352A or B, or consent of instructor. Study of the aesthetic and 
intellectual nature of music and its relationship to other arts and society through both structured 
and independent investigations, leading to the selection of an area of special interest for further 
investigation in the senior project. 

399 Clinical Practice in Conducting (1) 

Clinical practice and field applications of concepts, materials, and procedures as applied to field 
situations, as in public and private schools. Co-enrollment in Mu 391 A or 392A recommended. 

401 Criticism of the Arts (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in the School of the Arts or consent of instructor. Develop- 
ment of criteria and vocabulary for criticism of the visual and p)erforming arts through lectures, 
readings, discussions, and exhibit and performance attendance. Emphasis on descriptive and 
evaluative skills in music, art, theatre, dance and cinema criticism. 

422A,B Composition (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Mu 31b, 320 and 321 A or consent of instructor. A — Ear-training analysis of smaller 
forms, simple composition of two- and three-part song form styles. B — Analysis arul writing of 
more complex musical forms. 

453A,B Choral Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Mu 391 A or equivalent and 351 A,B. A — The study of choral literature from the 
medieval, renaissance and baroque eras analyzed in historical perspective. Appropriate perform- 
ance practices will be examined. B — Continuation of A with representative examples from the 
classic, romantic and contemp)orary eras. 


620-^ 2 540 


Music 105 


454A,B Piano Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

Prerequisite: 351 A, B and junior level piano standing or consent of instructor. Study and performance 
of representative styles and schools of piano literature, with particular reference to solo and 
ensemble repertoire. A — Concentration on contrapuntal forms, sonatas, and variations. B — 
Concentration on concerti, character pieces, fantasies, suites, and etudes. 

455 Instrumental Chamber Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Open to all music majors, or to non-majors by consent of instructor. Members of the class will be 
grouped into ensembles for demonstration purposes. Emphasis will be placed on the stylistic 
differences required in performing works of all periods. 

456 Opera Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A,B or consent of instructor. Study of all periods and nationalities, including 
stylistic and historical connotations. 

457A Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite; Mu 390B or consent of instructor. Study and performance of German Lieder with 
representative examples of periods and styles. 

457B Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite; Mu 390A or consent of instructor. Study and performance of Italian, French, Russian, 
English and American art songs, with representative examples of periods and styles. 

458 Collegium Musicum Practicum (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A, B or consent of instructor. The study and performance of rare and old music, 
both instrumental and vocal. Techniques of musical research will be applied. Students should 
be competent performers. 

459 Guitar Literature, Interpretation and Pedagogy (3) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury leve' in guitar or consent of instructor. A survey of the literature available to 
guitarists. Includes works for lute, vihuela, and baroque guitar as well as the compositions and 
transcriptions for the modern guitar. An introduction to materials and methods essential for the 
guitar instructor. 

460 Interpretation of Early Music (3) 

Prerequisite: 300-jury level in principal p)erformance area. A survey of the various stylistic interpreta- 
tions of vocal and instrumental literature from the 16th, 17th and 18th centuries. Designed for 
the senior or graduate student majoring in performance. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

467A,B,C Piano Pedagogy (2,2,1) 

Prerequisite: junior piano standing or consent of instructor. Fundamentals of piano pedagogy, with 
reference to individual and group instruction. A — Survey of materials and methods for beginning 
and elementary students. Supervised teaching. B — Survey of materials and methods for interme- 
diate and early advanced students. Physiology and psychology for studio teachers. Supervised 
teaching. C — Prerequisite: 467A or consent of instructor. Observation and practice teaching 
while learning organizational procedures, teaching techniques, and course literature for class 
piano. 

468A,B Vocal Pedagogy (2,2) 

Prerequisite: senior standing or consent of instructor. A — Fundamentals of vocal pedagogy with 
reference to studio and public school teaching, with consideration of physiology and acoustics 
as they apply to singing. B — Practical application of the fundamentals discussed in A. The student 
will participate in seminar discussions and be observed in an actual studio teaching situation. 
Emphasis will be on the diagnosis and cure of specific vocal problems. 

497 Senior Project (1) 

Prerequisite: Mu 397. Intensive independent investigation of an area of special interest in music, 
culminating in a public performance, lecture, lecture-recital, or other suitable demonstration. 

498 Senior Recital (1) 

Prerequisites: 371 -level (471 -level for performance majors) and consent of instructor. Intensive 
preparation and presentation of representative works in the principal performance area. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Study of a special topic in music selected in consultation with the instructor and carried out under 
his supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Music (2) 

Required of all graduate music majors. Study of basic bibliography, literature, and research tech- 
niques and materials useful in graduate music study. 

522 Contemporary Techniques of Composition (2) 

Advanced techniques of composition, as applied to the student's area of graduate specialization. 


626—34 2 570 


106 


Music 


523 Advanced Orchestration (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 323B. Analysis and practice of traditional and contemporary orchestration tech- 
niques. Scoring of music for large ensembles such as orchestra, band, chorus and orchestra, or 
band and orchestra. 

551 Seminar in Music of the Medieval Period (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A detailed study of the music forms, structures and styles from 
500 to 1450. Detailed analysis of important representative works as well as the contributions of 
individual composers and theoretical writers. 

552 Seminar in Music of the Renaissance (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A comprehensive study of the forms, styles, and developmental 
characteristics of music between 1450 and 1600. Detailed analysis of selected works by repre- 
sentative composers and theoretical writers. 

553 Seminar in Music of the Baroque Period (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A, B or consent of instructor. Musical forms, styles, and performance practices 
of the baroque period. Detailed analysis of significant representative works. 

554 Seminar in Music of the Classic Period (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A,B or consent of instructor. A study of the history and literature of music from 
approximately 1750 to 1900. Detailed analysis of imp)ortant representative works. 

555 Seminar in Music of the Romantic Period (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An intensive study of the structure and development of music 
In the 19th century. Detailed analysis of important representative works. 

556 Seminar in 20th-Century Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A,B or consent of instructor. Developments in the music of western Europe and 
the western hemisphere since 1890. Intensive study of contemporary music and its structure. 

557 Seminar in Musicology (2) 

Prerequisites: at least two courses from Mu 551-556 and consent of instructor. Detailed investigation 
and systematic analysis of specific developments in musicology including exercises in transcrip- 
tions from old notations and historical investigations prepared by members of the seminar. 

558 Collegium Musicum (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced studies in the performance of rare and old music. (See 
Mu 458 for general description.) May be repeated for credit. 

571 Individual Instruction (1-2) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual instruction with approved instructor with emphasis 
on performance techniques and repertory. Required of all graduate students whose terminal 
project Is the graduate recital. 

591 Seminar in Advanced Choral Conducting and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 391 B, conducting exp>erience, or consent of instructor. Advanced problems in 
choral conducting techniques, with emphasis on laboratory work with student groups and in 
concert conducting. 

592 Seminar in Advanced Instrumental Conducting and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisites: Mu 392B, keyboard facility for score reading and consent of instructor. Advanced 

study of conducting techniques through assignments with the university symphony. Interpretive 
problems of each period covered in lectures. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Systematic study and rep)ort of a significant undertaking in the area of musical composition, musical 
performance, or other related creative activity. A written critical evaluation of the work or activity 
will be required. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Individual investigations of specific problems in the area of concentration by candidates for the M.A. 
degree. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in music and consent of instructor. Research and study projects in 
areas of specialization beyond regularly offered coursework. Oral and written reports required. 


631—34 2 595 


Theatre 107 


MUSIC EDUCATION COURSES 

435 Music in the Modern Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 333 or consent of instructor. A survey of 20th-century materials and techniques, 
of recordings for creative movement to music, and of basic conducting techniques for song 
leading in the elementary school. Adaptation of materials for use in classroom music. 

441 Teaching General Music in Secondary Schools (2) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education, senior standing, or consent of instructor. Objectives, 
methods, and materials for teaching general music or allied arts-humanities classes in secondary 
schools, including their relationship to sp)ecialized instrumental and choral programs. Practical 
problems and field work applications are included. 

442 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public Schools (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. History, principles of public education, grades K-12, 

with special emphasis on music. Philosophy, methods, materials and procedures for organizing 
and teaching music in elementary and secondary schools. 

444 Administration, Materials and Arranging for the Marching Band (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 323A or consent of instructor. A study of techniques, materials, administration and 
arranging for marching band. Includes charting for the football field, parade activities, and 
practical exp)erience in the scoring of music for marching band with particular emphasis on the 
needs of school bands. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

530 Practicum of Research in Music Education (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in music and completion of Mu 500. Research techniques and 
procedures in music education. Students will be required to complete a creative project or 
research paper. 

531 Foundations of Music Education (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 500. Study of philosophical and historical bases which have influenced music 
education. Identification of philosophic frames of leading educators. Contemporary trends which 
affect the teaching of music in the schools. Prerequisite for all graduate music education courses. 

532 Seminar in Music Education (2) 

Studies in the trends and application of educational theory in relation to the teaching of music in 
the public schools. 

544 Curriculum Planning and Construction in Music (2) 

Principles and practices of curriculum planning in music education, with special reference to the 
public elementary, junior and senior high school. Required of majors who intend to complete 
sup>ervision credential. 

545 Supervision and Administration of Music in the Public Schools (2) 

Open to music education majors with teaching experience. Philosophy, principles and practices of 
supervision of music in the public elementary and secondary schools. Emphasis on modern 
principles of leadership, types of services, organization, management and evaluation of programs 
of instruction. Required of candidates for supervisory credential. 

749 Student Teaching in Theatre in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See page 190 for description and prerequisites. 

DEPARTMENT OF THEATRE 

FACULTY 
Alvin Keller 

Department Chair 

Teri Allen, Joseph Arnold, John Boyd, Ronald Dieb, Edwin Duerr, Marjorie Farmer, Donald Henry,* 
Dean Hess, Michael McPherson, R. Kirk Mee, S. Todd Muffatti, Dwight Odie, jerry Pickering, 
William Raoul, Robert Renee, Darrell Winn, James Young,* Allen Zeltzer * 

The Department of Theatre program includes the several fields of playwriting, oral interpretation, 
acting-directing, technical theatre, theatre history and theory, radio-television-film and dance. Sp>e- 
cifically, the coursework is arranged to provide opportunities for students (1) to develop an ap- 
preciation for the theatre; (2) to become aware, as audience or participants of the shaping force 
of the theatre in society; (3) to improve the understandings and skills necessary for work in the 
theatre as a profession; (4) to prepare for teaching theatre; and (5) to pursue graduate studies. 


* University administrative officer. 


649—34 3 45 


108 


Theatre 


Theatre majors must maintain a 2.5 grade-point average in their major for graduation. In addition 
to course requirements, all students will enroll for one unit of Theatre 478 each semester. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 

Course programs have been planned to meet the individual needs and interests of students working 
for the Bachelor of Arts in Theatre Arts. 

Plan I Is for those who wish to study theatre as a cultural contribution or who wish to pursue graduate 
degrees in theatre with emphasis in theatre history and theory. It is strongly recommended that 
students electing this plan support the major with approved electives from art, theatre, music, foreign 
languages, literature, philosophy or speech. 

Plan II Is designed to develop the necessary competency for pursuing theatre as a profession, or for 
pursuing graduate degrees in theatre with an emphasis in an area of concentration other than history 
of the theatre. Areas of concentration are: playwriting; acting; directing; oral interpretation; radio- 
television-film; technical theatre and dance. 

Plan III meets the requirements of the teaching credential with specialization in secondary or 
community college teaching. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet the other university 
requirements for a bachelor of arts degree. Students following Plan III also must meet any specific 
requirements for the desired teaching credential (see section in catalog for School of Education). 
Those students who plan to work on the M.A. degree as well as the credential should see the chair 
of the Department of Theatre. 


PLAN I: THEATRE HISTORY AND THEORY EMPHASIS Units 

Lower Division: 100A,B, Introduction to the Theatre (6); Theatre 263A, Begin- 

ning Acting (3); Theatre 276A,B, Stagecraft (6); Theatre 277, Costume Fundamen- 
tals (3) or Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup (2); Theatre 211, Oral Interpretation 

(3) 20-21 

Upper Division: Theatre 370A, Fundamentals of Directing (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, 

World Theatre (12); Theatre 477 A,B, Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (6); 

Theatre 472, American Theatre (3); electives (3 units) 27 

PLAN II: PROFESSIONAL EMPHASIS IN AN AREA OF CONCENTRATION Units 

Lower Division: Sdirr\e as in Plan I, with exception of acting, radio-television-film, dance 
technical theatre and directing. 

Upper Division: In one of the following areas of concentration: 


Play writing — Theatre 364, Seminar in Play writing (6), or Theatre 364 (3) and Theatre 
383, Television Writing (3); Theatre 370A,B, Fundamentals of Directing (6); 

Theatre 468, Experimental Theatre (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre (12); 

Theatre 477A,B, Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (6) 33 

Oral Interpretation— Theatre 311, Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 411A,B,C, Oral 
Interpretation of Prose, Poetry, Drama (9); Theatre 414A,B, Readers Theatre (6); 

Theatre 475A,B,C, or D, World Theatre (6); electives selected from the following 
courses: Theatre 386, Stage Lighting; Theatre 472, American Theatre; Theatre 
475A,B,C, or D, World Theatre; Theatre 477 A,B, Senior Seminar in Critical Tech- 
niques (6) 30 

The major in theatre with an emphasis in oral interpretation requires 25 units in 
supportive courses from related areas such as art, anthropology, comparative 
literature, English literature, linguistics, speech, philosophy to be selected in consul- 
tation with the student's adviser. 

Acting — Lower Division: 1(X)A,B, Introduction to the Theatre (6); Theatre 241, 

Voice Production for the Performer (3); Theatre 251, Body Movement for the 
Actor (3); Theatre 263A,B, Beginning Acting (6); Theatre 276A,B, Stagecraft (6); 

Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup (2) 26 


653—34 3 65 


Theatre 


109 


Upper Division: 370A,B, Fundamentals of Directing (6); Theatre 363A,B, Inter- 

mediate Acting (6); Theatre 463A,B, Advanced Acting (6); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, 

World Theatre (12); Theatre 480, Television Production and Direction (3) or 
Theatre 382, Television Dramatic Techniques (3); Dance electives (2) 35 

Radio-Television-Film 

Unit Croup !: Theatre 100A,B, Introduction to Theatre (6); Theatre 276A,B, Stagecraft 
(6); Theatre 282, Video Basics (3); Theatre 290A,B, History of Motion Pictures 
(6); Theatre 380, Introduction to Radio and Television (3); Theatre 382, Television 
Dramatic Techniques (3); Theatre 386, Stage Lighting (3); Theatre 392A,B, Dra- 
matic Film Production (6) 36 

Unit Croup II: Theatre 211, Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 241, Voice Production for 
the Performer (3); Theatre 263 A, B, Beginning Acting (6); Theatre 277, Costume 
Fundamentals (3); Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup (2); Theatre 370A,B, Funda- 
mentals of Directing (6); adviser approved courses in Communications Depart- 


ment 6 

Unit Croup III: Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre (12) 6 


Unit Croup IV: Theatre 282, Video Basics (3); Theatre 381, Radio and Television 
Announcing (3); Theatre 383, Television Writing (3); Theatre 480, Television 
Production and Direction (3); Theatre 486, Advanced Lighting (6); Theatre 
490A,B, Advanced Dramatic Film Production (6); Theatre 492, Film Aesthetics and 


Criticism (3) 15 

Directing — Lower Division: Theatre 100A,B, Introduction to the Theatre (6); Theatre 
263 A, Beginning Acting (3); Theatre 276A,B, Stagecraft (6); Theatre 277, Costume 
Fundamentals (3); Theatre 285, Theatrical Makeup (2); Theatre 21 1 Oral Interpre- 
tation (3) 23 

Upper Division: IhedXxe 350, Organization for Production (1 ); Theatre 370A,B, Funda- 
mentals of Directing (6); Theatre 386, Stage Lighting (3); Theatre 470A,B, Direct- 
ing (8); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre (12); Theatre 480, Television 
Production and Direction (3) o/- Theatre 382, Television Dramatic Techniques (3); 
electives, 6 upper division units in technical theatre 39 


Technical Production/ Design Major — The technical theatre major does not divide 
into an upper division or lower division format. Majors will be exp)ected to follow 
unit groupings for a total of 60 units. 

Unit Croup /. Basic technical class core to be taken by all majors — ^Theatre 1(X)A,B, 
Introduction to the Theatre (6); Theatre 188, Historical Styles (3); Theatre 276A,B, 
Beginning Stagecraft (6); Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals (3); Theatre 285, 
Theatrical Makeup (2); Theatre 288, Design for the Theatre (3); Theatre 350, 
Organization for Production (1); Theatre 370A, Fundamentals of Directing (3); 
Theatre 386, Stage Lighting (3); Theatre 387, Audio Techniques (3); Theatre 450, 


Theatre Management (3) 36 

Unit Croup II: Theatre 211, Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 263A, 

Beginning Acting (3) 3 

Unit Croup III: Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre (12) 


Unit Croup IV: Theatre 376A,B, Advanced Stagecraft (6); Theatre 377 A,B, Stage Cos- 
tuming (6); Theatre 385, Advanced Theatrical Makeup (3); Theatre 388, Interme- 
diate Scene Design (3); Theatre 392A,B, Dramatic Film Production (6); Theatre 
480, Television Production and Direction (3); Theatre 486, Advanced Stage Light- 
ing (3); Theatre 488A,B, Advanced Scene Design (6); or any adviser-approved 


three unit compatible course (3) 15 

Dance — Lower Division: Theatre 100A,B (6); Dance 101 (2); Dance 135A,B (4); 

Dance 227A,B (6); four units selected from: Dance 105; Dance 245A,B; Dance 
140; Dance 125A,B; Dance 210; Dance 221 A,B; Dance 255; five to six units select- 
ed from: Theatre 276A; Theatre 277; Theatre 285 27-28 

Upper Division: Dance 311 A (3); Dance 375 A, B (6), Dance 476A,B (6), Dance 484 


(3); Dance 486 (3); six units by advisement selected from: Theatre 386, Theatre 
350, Theatre 387, Theatre 450, Theatre 486; three units selected from: Theatre 
363A, Theatre 370A; three units selected from: Theatre 475A,B,C,D; three units 
selected from: Dance 331A,B; Dance 335; Dance 358, Dance 401; Dance 441; 

Dance 450; Dance 474; Dance 477; Dance 499 36 


658—34 3 90 


110 


Theatre 


PLAN III: TEACHING EMPHASIS (Secondary or Community College) Units 

Lower Division: JheaXre 100A,B, Introduction to Theatre (6); Theatre 211, Introduction 

to Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 263A, Beginning Acting (3) 12 

Upper Division: JhediXte 342A,B, Simplifed Technical Production (8); Theatre 370A,B, 
Fundamentals of Directing (6); Theatre 403, Theatre for Children (3); Theatre 414, 

Readers Theatre (3); Theatre 470A, Directing (4); Theatre 475A,C,D, World 
Theatre (9) 33 


MASTER OF ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 

The Master of Arts in Theatre Arts is designed to provide a program of coordinated graduate studies 
built on the framework of the undergraduate preparation; to provide added incentive for intellectual 
growth reflected in improvement in teaching and professional recognition; and to provide a sound 
basis for continued graduate study in the field of theatre. The student is expected to demonstrate 
a high degree of intellectual and creative competence and to demonstrate mastery of one of the areas 
of emphasis in theatre: (1) acting and directing, (2) dance, (3) dramatic literature and criticism, 
(4) oral interpretation, (5) playwriting, (6) radio and television, (7) theatre for children, (8) theatre 
history; (9) technical theatre. 

Prerequisites 

In addition to the university requirements for unclassified status, students subsequently admitted 
(classified) into this program must have an appropriate undergraduate major in theatre, with a 
grade-point average of 3.0 in all upfjer division work in the major, or at least 24 units of appropriate 
upper division work in theatre, with a CPA of 3.0, and have completed Theatre 477A, Senior Seminar 
in Critical Techniques, or in the case of transfer students, its equivalent, before being classified. Upon 
recommendation of the student's graduate committee, additional prerequisites may be required prior 
to classification and the approval of the area of emphasis. Students will complete an oral interview 
before being admitted to a program of studies. 

Study Plan 

The degree study plan in theatre will include at least 30 units of adviser-approved graduate studies, 
1 5 units of which'must be in 500-level courses. Each program will have 24 units in theatre, including 
a core of six units (Theatre 500, Introduction to Graduate Study — which must be taken the first 
semester of graduate study after admission to graduate study; Theatre 597, Project; or Theatre 598, 
Thesis) and six units of adviser-approved supF>orting courses in related fields either in other depart- 
ments or within the Theatre Department. Before the degree is granted each student will pass oral 
and written examinations. Students will be p>ermitted to take the written examination twice. 

For further information, consult the Department of Theatre. See also "The Program of Master's 
Degrees," page 59, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


THEATRE COURSES 

100A,B Introduction to the Theatre (33) 

A — A study of the production aspects of contemporary theatre through examination of audience/ 
performer relationships and the organization of support personnel. B — A study of current plays, 
motion pictures and television with special emphasis on dramatic analysis and cultural signifi- 
cance. Required of all theatre majors in their freshman year. 

101 Theatre Hour (1) 

Various aspects of the theatrical arts through guest lectures and artists, as well as presentations from 
the different areas of emphasis within the department's curricula. Enrollment on a credit/no 
credit basis only. 

188 Historical Styles for Theatrical Design (3) 

A visual survey through lecture, pictorial sources and field trips of artistic periods throughout the 
ancient and modern world as a cultural foundation for beginning and advanced creative work 
in technical theatre. Consideration of representative artists and architects. 

211 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 

An introduction to the analysis of literature and to the principles of its presentation by the oral 
interpreter. 


664—34 3 120 


Theatre 111 


241 Voice Production for the Performer (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Fundamental techniques, methods, and training to give the actor 
maximum use of his voice in theatre. Correction of speech faults and regional accents. Introduc- 
tion to problems of stage dialects. Study of basic interpretative material. May be repeated for 
credit. (1 hour lecture, 4 hours activity) 

251 Body Movement for the Actor (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Fundamental work in developing the body as an expressive 
instrument; acquiring of strength, flexibility, relaxation, control. Establishment of an awareness 
of and coordination of relationship of the body to the creative project. May be repeated up to 
six units of credit. (6 hours activity) 

263A,B Beginning Acting (33) 

Prerequisite: 263A is prerequisite to B, or consent of instructor. Laboratory practice and discussions 
of the form and content of the art of acting. A — Improvisation, action, and motivation and 
behavior. B — Continuation of A and problems in characterization. (6 hours activity) 

272 Understanding Theatre (3) 

A nontechnical survey course for the general student leading to an appreciation and understanding 
of the theatre as a medium of communication and entertainment and as an art form. Field trips 
to certain significant productions. Recommended for non-majors. 

276A,B Beginning Stagecraft (33) 

Prerequisite: 276A is prerequisite to B. Study and practice in planning and construction of stage and 
television scenery including use of tools, stage equipment and reading of technical drawings. 
Students will crew productions. Required by second year. (More than 6 hours activity) 

277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Study of the principles and procedures of costuming theatrical and television productions. Practical 
experience in basic construction techniques, organizing and executing duties of the costume 
crew. Designed primarily for non-technical majors within the department and as an introductory 
course for technical majors. (More than 6 hours activity) 

280 History of Radio and Television Programming (3) 

Analysis of selected aural and visual programming presented by major networks. From 1926 to the 
present. (Same as Communications 280) 

282 Video Basics (3) 

Theory and practice in the fundamentals of production for television. (6 hours activity) 

285 Theatrical Makeup (2) 

Theory and practice in makeup for stage and television. Emphasis on development of individual skill 
in techniques of character analysis, application in pigment, plastic, hair makeup, and selection 
and use of makeup equipment. (4 hours activity) 

288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 or Theatre 276A, or consent of instructor. Study and practice in the basic 
principles of designing scenery for the stage and television. Work in the designing and planning 
of sets for theatre productions. (Same as Art 288) (6 hours activity) 

290A,B History and Aesthetics of Motion Pictures (33) 

History and development of the motion picture as an art form and social influence. A — The motion 
picture from its origins until 1945. B — The contemporary cinema, from 1945 to present. (Same 
as Communications 290A,B) 

311 Oral Interpretation (3) 

Analysis of various forms of literary material, program planning, culminating in advanced application 
of theories of control of voice and body, and projection of idea and emotion of these literary 
forms to an audience. 

342A,B Simplified Technical Production (4,4) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Instruction in simplified, inexpensive methods of producing In 
following technical areas: management, design, stagecraft, painting, costume, makeup, lighting, 
and sound. Course includes handling of limited resources, untrained p)ersonnel, improper facili- 
ties and equipment. Participation on production crews. (More than 8 hours activity) 

350 Organization for Production (1) 

Prerequisites: completion of all beginning courses in technical theatre and directing. Theory and 
training in backstage management stressing interrelationship of production personnel. Students 
will serve as crew heads or stage managers for major productions. Theatre 478 not required 
during the semester this course is taken. 


670—04 3 150 


112 


Theatre 


363A,B Intermediate Acting and Characterization (33) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 241, 251, 263A,B. A is prerequisite to B, or consent of instructor. Emphasis on 
extended and integrated speech and movement problems in characterization. Ensemble acting, 
extensive analysis and exploration and basic television techniques. (6 hours activity) 

364 Seminar in Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: evidence of student's previous interest in creative writing and consent of instructor. 
Study of superior models, development of style, and group criticism and evaluation of each 
student's independent work, as it relates to play writing. May be repeated for credit. (Same as 
English 364) 

370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: A is prerequisite to B; Theatre 263 A, B; consent of instructor. The study of prerehearsal 
problems and procedures, of the structural analysis of plays, and of composition, picturization, 
pantomimic dramatization, movement, and rhythm on stage and in television. Practice in direct- 
ing scenes. (6 hours activity) 

376A,B Advanced Stagecraft (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 276B or consent of instructor. Advanced problems in planning and executing 
scenery for stage and television. Students will also work in the scene shop for major productions. 
(More than 6 hours activity) 

377A,B Stage Costuming (33) 

A — A chronological study of fashions and textiles of major historical periods, methods of research; 
interpreting historical costume for theatrical statement. B — Techniques of designing and con- 
structing costumes with emphasis on creative planning. Participation in major productions of the 
department. (More than 6 hours activity) 

380 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 

The history and development of the broadcasting industry and its impact and influence on our 
society. A study of the basic broadcasting practices, audiences, production and programming. 
(Same as Communications 380) 

381 Radio and Television Announcing (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 21 1 or consent of instructor. Theory and practice of control room operation. 
Lectures and practice in microphone and camera techniques, commercial announcements, 
interviewing, sp>ortscasting, narration, foreign pronunciation, and continuity. (6 hours activity) 

382 Television Dramatic Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 282 and consent of instructor. Television techniques and production, designed 
primarily for theatre majors to train the director, actor and designer in the elements of televised 
drama. (6 hours activity) 

383 Television Writing (3) 

Study of the principles and practices and experience in the writing of scripts and other forms of 
continuity for television. May be rep)eated for credit. 

385 Advanced Theatre Makeup (2) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 285. Advanced problems in makeup including special techniques and material 
prosthetics, hairpieces, masks for television and film; practical application of study through design 
and supervision of makeup for departmental productions (4 hours activity) 

386 Stage Lighting (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 276A,B or equivalent. Theory and practice in stage lighting and television 
presentations. Emphasis is given to design and the technology for its illumination. (More than 
6 hours activity) 

387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 276A,B or consent of instructor. Theory, procedures, and practice necessary 
to develop and to integrate live and recorded sound into performing arts productions. Emphasis 
given to recording, reproduction and studio techniques. (6 hours activity) 

388 Intermediate Scene Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 288. Designing stage sets on paper and in model form for a variety of produc- 
tions and theatres. Work in preparing designs for practical execution as part of an actual produc- 
tion. (6 hours activity) 

392A,B Dramatic Film Production (33) 

Theory and practice of silent dramatic film production techniques to include mechanical operation 
of sup)er 8mm and 16mm equipment, preparation of shooting script, direction and production 
of several short films, criticism and analysis of finished products. (6 hours activity) 


676—34 3 180 


Theatre 113 


401 Criticism of the Arts (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in the School of the Arts or consent of instructor. Develop- 
ment of criteria and vocabulary for criticism of the visual and p)erforming arts through lectures, 
readings, discussions, and exhibit and performance attendance. Emphasis on descriptive and 
evaluative skills in music, art, theatre, dance and cinema criticism. 

402 Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 

Theory and practice in the use of creative dramatics, storytelling, puppetry, assembly programs, 
role-playing, and other aspects of dramatics as tools for the teacher, group worker, recreation 
major, and others who work with children. (6 hours activity) 

403 Theatre for Children (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Theories and principles of production in the formal theatre arts 
for children. Demonstrations of appropriate theatrical forms with analysis and evaluation. (6 
hours activity) 

411 A Oral Interpretation of Prose Literature (3) 

Relevant critical techniques are developed and applied to the study of various types of prose 
literature and to the development of oral interpretation skills appropriate to these types. 

41 IB Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) 

Relevant critical techniques are developed and applied to the study of various types of poetry and 
to the development of oral interpretation skills appropriate to these types. 

411C Oral Interpretation of Drama (3) 

Relevant critical techniques are developed and applied to the study of various types of dramatic 
literature and to the development of oral interpretation skills appropriate to these types. 

414A,B Readers Theatre (3,3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. The theory, principles and techniques of the interpretation of 
literature in the medium of readers theatre. May be repeated for credit with consent of instructor. 
(6 hours activity) 

450 Theatre Management (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Discussion and practice of the basic elements of public relations 
as applied to theatre with a detailed analysis of various advertising mediums and experimentation 
In their use. A study of the various financial aspects of academic, community, and professional 
theatre operations including practical experience in front-of-the-house management and box 
office operation through the department's public presentations. (6 hours activity) 

463 A,B Advanced Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 363A,B. 463A is prerequisite to B, or consent of instructor. A study of historical 
theories and techniques of styles of acting as an art form. The first semester will include Greek 
through renaissance periods and the second semester will include the neoclassic periods to 
contemporary styles. (6 hours activity) 

468 Experimental Theatre (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An activity course in which dramatic principles are applied 
through production of full length and one-act plays using various styles of acting and staging. May 
be repeated up to six units for credit. (More than 3 hours production per unit) 

470A,B Directing (4,4) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 350 and 370A,B or consent of Instructor. Readings in theory, analysis of scripts 
and practice in directing plays for their oral and visual value as theatre. A — Each student directs 
public p)erformances of a one-act play. B — Each student directs public performances of two 
one-act plays or equivalent. (8 hours activity) 

472 American Theatre (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing. The development of the art of theatre in the United States from colonial 
times to the present day; its place and potentialities as a force in a democratic society. 

475A,B,C,D,E World Theatre (33^3^) 

Examination of the historical and dramatic evolution of world theatre. A — Ancient Greece and 
Rome, Middle Ages; Italian Renaissance; B — England from 1558-1790, 16th- and 17th-century 
Spain and France; C — 18th- and 19th-century Europe and Russia; 19th-century England; D — 18th- 
and 19th-century America; the Orient; the modern world. E — Historical background and contem- 
porary view of the musical theatre. Students registering for Theatre 475 must have completed 
the requirements for upper division standing. 


682-^ 3 210 


114 


Theatre 


477A,B Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (3,3) 

Theatre 477A or consent of instructor prerequisite to B. First semester presents a historical survey 
of major critical theories as they apply to theatre. Second semester provides the opportunity to 
apply critical theories to local dramatic productions. 

478A,B Rehearsal and Performance (1,1) 

A — Acting in stage or television performances. B — Technical crew work on stage and television 
performances. One unit per semester required of all theatre majors. Enrollment on a credit/no 
credit basis only. (More than 3 hours production per unit) 

480 Television Production and Direction (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 282 and consent of instructor. Theory and practice in the production of 
television programs and announcements: the planning, organizing, directing, rehearsing, per- 
forming, recording and editing of television programs and announcements. (1 hour lecture, 4 
hours activity) 

486 Advanced Theatrical Lighting (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 386 or consent of instructor. The design and technology of lighting. Student will 
be prepared to design for the stage, dance, pageant, display, film and television. Student will do 
at least one major lighting project as part of the course. (6 hours activity) 

488A,B Seminar in Advanced Scene Design (3,3) 

Prerequisite. Theatre 288, 388, or equivalent beginning work in design. Lecture, discussion, and 
research in scene design with emphasis on style, ornamentation and illusion leading to practical 
problems in designing for the stage and television. (Same as Art 488A,B) 

489 Practicum in Television Production (3) 

(Same as Communications 489) 

490A,B Advanced Dramatic Film Production (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 392A,B. Theory and practice of 16mm sound film production with emphasis 
on the narrative film. Labs and lectures include the development of scripts, uses of sound film, 
editing and directing the sound film and production of several short films. (6 hours activity) 

491 Senior Seminar: Greek Tragedy (3) 

(Same as Comparative Literature 491 ) 

492 Film Aesthetics and Criticism (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 290A,B and/or consent of instructor. An exploration of the nature of film and 
the film experience through aesthetic and theoretical bases and establishment of a critical basis 
for film evaluation and understanding. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Undergraduate creative or research projects. Open to advanced students with the consent of 
instructor. Student must complete course application form by the end of the seventh week of 
the semester preceding the semester in which the work is to be done. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Theatre (3) 

Introduction to methodological problems in graduate research. Location of source materials, includ- 
ing library and original data; research and project design and execution; interpretation of re- 
searches. Must be taken the first semester after admission to graduate study. 

501 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Theatre Theory and Appreciation (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 500. Directed research with emphasis on the relationship between historical 
backgrounds and developments in the theatre and the student's area of concentration. 

503 Seminar: Theatre for Children (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 403. Critical study of the historical development, philosophies, theories, tech- 
niques and trends of the art of theatre for children. Research and investigation of problems related 
to the use of materials in educational, community and professional children's theatres. 

511 Graduate Seminar in Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The historical and philosophical backgrounds in the development 
of interpretation and its relationship to contemporary theory and practice. 

571 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research of instructor, this course will offer directed research and 
writing, group discussion, and lectures covering major figures. May be repeated with different 
content for additional credit. (Same as English 571) 


688—34 3 240 


Theatre 115 


572 Graduate Seminar, Literary Genres (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. As appropriate to the specialized research and publications of 
instructor, this course will offer directed research and writing, group discussion and lectures 
covering such major literary types as: tragedy, comedy and historical drama. With consent of 
adviser, may be repeated with different content for additional credit. (Same as English 572) 

576 Production Planning in Theatre Arts (3) 

History and philosophy of production problems in theatre arts. Organization of the university theatre 
as it relates to the total university program. Planning of the production within the limitations of 
budgets and physical facilities. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor, student's graduate committee and department executive com- 
mittee. (Development and presentation of a creative project in the area of concentration beyond 
regularly offered coursework. May be repeated to a maximum of six units. Student must complete 
course application form by the end of the seventh week of the semester preceding the semester 
in which the work is to be done. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student's graduate committee. (Development and presentation of a thesis 
in the area of concentration beyond regularly offered coursework. Student must complete course 
application form by the end of the seventh week of the semester preceding the semester in which 
the work is to be done. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students in theatre with consent of instructor and student's graduate committee. 
May be repeated for credit. Student must complete course application form by the end of the 
seventh week of the semester preceding the semester in which the work is to be done. 


THEATRE EDUCATION COURSES 

442 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. See page 216 for description of secondary school 
teaching credential program. Objectives, methods, and materials including audiovisual instruc- 
tion for teaching in secondary schools. 

449A Student Teaching in Theatre in the Secondary School (10) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education, page 188. 

449B Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education, page 188. 

484 Educational Television Production (3) 

Theory and practice in the activities, methods of lesson preparation, and presentation of educational 
television productions. 

749 Student Teaching in Theatre in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See page 190 for description and prerequisites. For candidates seeking the Fisher standard credential 
in secondary teaching. 


690 -^ 3 250 


t 




:*! ■ . 





■ >)■ 





V ■ ■ ,!'f ■ 


f.{-. ,v. 

' V ^ /' ■ ,, ■ .'r,: v,. , 

‘ ’-r .’ '■ ‘ ■'.: 

■■ ■ ■ ' ■- ' ‘ ■:^'.:v.v>‘ •'^r- ^ 

■'■’■ • .-ii ', ■>' ;.■ ■'*. ■'! ; ■’' ' . •'' • 

'■ ‘:'.-T , .• :xS 

' ' ••-•.' '^■’:-^ 769 T' 

. • • .' ’ -I/';; : '•• w:', • -I; •■!-■■ 

•'■ . ■ ', '«'■ -■ y\ )vi‘- ''■ :. ■.»' ■> . ■•/’kI'*" 

- •• ' ■ ' ■ 2 AV.-;; >iT^v,-r 

-•i- ' .•■• •"";>' > . :^>T 

^ . { • , - A ' •■■ -,. .. ,.• • •■"t., .-... ,! 

‘ • . -v ■.; ,■ r V r, 


I 




BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
AND ECONOMICS 


MMnUII 



118 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS 

Dean: Jack W. Coleman 
Associate Dean: Edward R. Zilbert 


Department of Accounting: Robert Vanasse, Chair 
Dale Bandy, Donald Barnett, lames Cork, Eugene Corman, Mary Fleming, Clyde Hardman, John 
Hinds, A. jay Hirsch, Guy Tull, Dorsey Wiseman, John Woo 
Department of Economics: John Lafky, Chair 

Maryanna Boyntop, Kwang-wen Chu, James Dietz, Franz Dolp, Alan Fisher, Kenneth Goldin, 
Levern Graves, Lionel Kalish, Sidney Klein, Stewart Long, Robert Michaels, Gary Pickersgill, Joyce 
Pickersgill, Jack Pontney, Guy Schick, Norman Townshend-Zellner 
Department of Finance: Dennis O'Connor, Chair 
Dick Bednar, Albert Bueso, Peter Mlynaryk, John Nichols, Radha Sharma, Peter Sibbald, Frank 
Taylor, Marco Tonietti, B. E. Tsagris, Cary Tuchman 
Department of Management: Granville Hough, Chair 
Farouk Abdelwahed, Mei Ling Bickner, Robert Chapman, Fred Colgan, James Conant, Richard 
Gilman, Leo Guolo^ Geoffrey King, Leland McCloud, Kent McKee, Richard Mushegain, Tai Oh, 
Donald Shaul, Paul Siegrist, John Trego, Edgar Wiley 
Department of I'vlarketing: William Bell, Chair 

Robert Barath, John Foster, Paul Hugstad, Robert Jones, Irene Lange, Peter McClyfe, Robert Olsen, 
Frank Roberts, William Tater, James Taylor, Jack Wichert, Guthrie Worth 
Department of Quantitative Methods: David Stoller, Chair 
Cora Bhaumik, Cary Bloom, Milton Chen, Wen Chow, Ronald Colman, Ben Edmondson, Basil 
Gala, William Heitzman, James Hightower, John Lawrence, Marshal McFie, Demetrios Mi- 
chalopoulos, Fred Mueller, Herbert Rutemiller, Sohan Sihota, Ram Singhania, Eric Solberg, La- 
Verne Stanton 

Academic Objectives of the School 

The faculty of the school believes that it can best optimize its effectiveness in achieving the broad 
educational objective of the university by concentrating its energies on the exploration and teaching 
of relevant concepts principles and practices, including interrelationships. Additionally, the faculty 
recognizes the need for integrating and relating the various disciplines into a balanced and thought- 
provoking educational experience for the student. While considerable emphasis must be placed on 
the need for breadth of knowledge and creativity in thought and actions, there must also be emphasis 
on exploration and analysis in some depth of those disciplines most relevant to the business 
profession. These disciplines are recognized to be interrelated and are to be integrated through the 
application of economics, behavioral and quantitative sciences, systems theories and concepts, 
decision theories, computer sciences, logic, and theoretical and applied research methodology. 

In addition, the faculty of the school has set forth specific objectives for its curriculum arxJ related 
programs. A summary statement of these objectives is as follows: 

1 . Educational and Professional 

Through a study of the various theoretical and practical business and economic models, 
policies and procedures, each student is to be afforded and provided with technical expertise 
in a chosen discipline — accounting, economics, finance, management, marketing, quantitative 
methods and business education — to a depth acceptable to prospective employers for begin- 
ning professional employment. 

2 . Human and Ethical 

A major part of effective society and business leadership is related to organization and direction 
of human resources to achieve general and specific goals. Therefore, a knowledge of human 
values — the ethical, psychological and sociological foundation for human behavior — is essen- 
tial. This includes an awareness and understanding of the nature of human values, of individual 


280—20 4 285 


Business A dministration 119 


goals and the forces which lead to their achievement; the function of leadership in relating 
individual and enterprise goals; the impact of group dynamics, informal organizations, and 
interpersonal relationships on the administrative process; and the need for a personal code of 
ethics. 

3. Socioeconomic, Political and Cultural Environment 

Firms do not operate in a vacuum, and information about the external forces and constraints 
which bear on the enterprise comprises a necessary body of knowledge for competent business 
planners and administrators. In particular, development of economic literacy to sup|X)rt rational 
choice; recognition of economic implications resulting from economic policy decisions by 
various levels of government; and a conceptualization of the impact of the various institutions 
on the enterprise and the impact of business leadership decisions on the social system as a 
whole are stressed. 

Student Organizations 

Chapters of the following national honor societies have been established on campus with member- 
ship open to qualified students: Alpha Delta Sigma (advertising). Beta Alpha Psi (accounting). Beta 
C^mma Sigma (business), Omicron Delta Epsilon (economics). Phi Kappa Phi (all campus). In 
addition there are the following departmentally affiliated clubs which students are encouraged to 
join: the Accounting Society, Economics Association, Finance Association, Society for the Advance- 
ment of Management, Marketing Club, QM Club and Computer Club. 

Undergraduate Program in Business Administration and Economics 

The School of Business Administration and Economics offers two undergraduate degree programs: 
the B.A. in Business Administration and the B.A. in Economics. Students majoring in the school are 
encouraged to elect courses in other divisions of the university, particularly in the area of behavioral, 
social, and political sciences, and foreign languages. It is assumed that the first half of their university 
work toward a bachelor's degree represents a required basic education in communication, math- 
ematics, natural science, social sciences and the humanities. Since quantitative and written com- 
munication skills are increasingly emphasized in business and the social sciences, students who 
contemplate enrollment in either business administration or economics are encouraged to take 
college preparatory English and four years of high school mathematics. College algebra, or three 
years of high school mathematics including a second course in algebra, will be a minimum mathe- 
matical prerequisite for entrance to the program. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
Degree Requirements 

In addition to the required coursework in business administration, students must complete Math 130 
or its equivalent and demonstrate proficiency in written communication by either passing the College 
Board Achievement Test in English composition or completing a basic course in English composition. 
If credits for elementary accounting, economics, calculus and the English requirement have not been 
met, it will be necessary to enroll in these courses the first semester of the junior year. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet the other university 
requirements for a B.A. degree (see page 56). The degree requirements are as follows: 

1 . Completion of a minimum of 60 semester credit hours in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics, of which 42 semester credit hours must be upper division. 

2. Completion of the required core courses in the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

3. Completion of 12-18 semester credit hours of required courses in an area of concentration to be 
selected by the student. (Refer to specific departmental requirements.) 

4. Completion of at least 50 percent of the required units in the concentration and 15 of the last 
24 units are required in residence in the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

5. Completion of at least 60 semester credit hours in areas other than business administration. 
Students may elect to apply lower division economics core courses outside the School of Business 
Administration and Economics to fulfill this requirement. 

6. Attainment of at least a 2.0 grade point average (C average) in all university work attempted, in 
all courses taken in the School of Business Administration and Ecnomics, and in the area of 
concentration. 

7. Completion of Math 130, A Short Course in Calculus, or its equivalent.* 

• Students who concentrate »n quantitative methods must take Math 1 50A in lieu oT Math 1 30. 


286—20 4 315 


120 Business Administration 


8. Demonstration of proficiency in written communication skills. Students must either pass the 
College Board Achievement Test in English composition or complete English 100, Comp>osition; 
English 103, Seminars in Writing; or Communications 103, Applied Writing; or equivalent. (Infor- 
mation on the College Board Achievement Test and the testing fee can be obtained from the 
university Counseling and Testing Center.) 

Academic Advisement for Business Administration Students 

The School of Business Administration and Economics provides an advisement service for its stu- 
dents. New students are particularly encouraged to consult an adviser in the school's Academic 
Programs Office to review program and course requirements. 

CORE: The business administration and economics courses listed below are required of all students 
majoring in business administration: 

Lower Division: Units 

Eco 100 The Economic Environment and 3 

Eco 200 Principles of Economics, or 

Eco 210 Principles of Economics (5) 3 

Acc 201 A,B Elementary Accounting 6 

Man 246 Business Law 3 

QM 265 Computer Methods in Business and Economics 3 

Upper Division: 

Eco 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory or Eco 320 Intermediate Macroeco- 
nomic Theoryf 3 

Fin 330 Business Finance 3 

Man 340 Behavioral Science for Business 3 

Man 341 Organization and Management Theory 3 

Mar 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

QM 360 Management Science Methods in Business and Economics or 

QM 363 Management Sciences* * 3 

QM 361 Statistical Methods in Business and Economics 3 

Man 449 Seminar in Business Policies* * 3 

42 

AREAS OF CONCENTRATION FOR MAJORS IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

A student in business administration should select an area of concentration as soon as possible, but 
not later than the second semester of the junior year and take the required courses in the area. 

Accounting 

301 A,B Intermediate Accounting 

302 Cost Accounting 
308 Federal Income Tax 

And at least two of the following courses: 

401 Advanced Accounting 

402 Auditing 

406 Cost Control 

407 integrated Data Processing Systems 

408 Problems in Taxation 

Economics 

310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory 
320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 
6 units economics electives, 3 units of which must be 400-level 
Management 446, Managerial Economics 

t Management and Quantitative Methods require Economics 310. All other departments require either EcorKKnkrs 310 or 320. 

• Students taking quantitative methods as their area of concentration will take QM 363, Management Science. 

•• Studems taking busirtess economics as their area of cortcentration will take Ecornimics 410. CoverrKnent and Business — in lieu 
of Management 449, Business Policies. 


713—34 3 365 


Business Administration 121 


Finance 

The department offers three primary areas of emphasis: financial management, real estate and 
securities-investments. Courses are also offered in insurance and personal finance. A finance concen- 
tration requires Finance 331, Financial Analysis, plus 1 5 additional credit hours offered by the Finance 
Department. The student may choose all courses from one area or may elect to sample several areas. 
Finance 333, Personal Financial Management, will not count toward the area of concentration. 

Financial Management Emphasis: Designed for students interested in the financial organization 
and operation of financial and business enterprises. Students interested in this area of emphasis are 
encouraged to include the following courses in their plan of study: 

425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution Managment 

431 Capital and Money Markets 

433 Problems in Business Finance 

441 Capital Budgeting and Financial Forecasting 

Real Estate Emphasis: Designed for students interested in a broad range of careers in real estate 
and urban development. Students interested in this option are advised to include the following 
courses in their plan of study: 

336 Principles and Practices of Real Estate * 

401 Real Estate Research 

436 Legal Aspects of Real Estate * 

437 Real Estate Finance * 

438 Real Estate Valuation * 

Securities-investments Emphasis: Designed for students interested in securities and investment 
analysis, money and capital markets, and portfolio management. Students interested in this area of 
emphasis are encouraged to include the following courses in their plan of study: 

335 Security Investments 

431 Capital and Money Markets 

435 Security Analysis and Portfolio Management 

Management 

In consonance with university and school objectives, the major goals of the Management Depart- 
ment are to: 

1 . Provide students with foundational competence in the utilization of the factors of production. 

2. Develop in each student an understanding of the theory and practices needed for successful 
performance in managerial and staff |X)sitions in business, government and the community. 

3. Provide students with a knowledge of human values — the ethical, psychological and sociologi- 
cal foundation for human behavior, and the impact of group dynamics, informal organizations, 
and interpersonal relationships on the administrative process. 

Students with an area of concentration in management must choose one of the three following 
emphases: 

Administrative Management Emphasis: Designed for students interested in all aspects of business or 
in general supervision of organized activity. 

342 Production Operations 

343 Personnel Management 

445 Advanced Production Operations 

446 Managerial Economics or 

447 Management Decision Games 
Two other concentration courses to be arranged 

• These courses satisfy the California State Real Estate Brokers Licer>se Examination requirements. 


•^-86012 


717—34 3 385 


122 


Business Administration 


Operations Management Emphasis: Designed for students who have interest in and aptitude for 
managing new projects and production operations in both manufacturing and non-manufacturing. 
343 Personnel Management 

342 Production Operations 

445 Advanced Production Operations 

446 Managerial Economics or 

447 Management Decision Games 
Two other concentration courses to be arranged. 

Human Resources Management Emphasis: Designed for students interested in interpersonal relations 
and group leadership opportunities in all organizations but specifically found in manpower manage- 
ment, small business, industrial relations, hospital and welfare administration, and organizations 
carrying out social change. 

343 Personnel Management 

441 Labor-Management Relations 

443 Individual, Interpersonal, and Group Dynamics for Management 

444 Management of Systems 

Two other concentration courses to be arranged. 

Marketing 

Students with an area of concentration in marketing must choose one of the following career path 
programs: marketing management, marketing research, advertising, sales management, retailing, 
international marketing or physical distribution. 

Required: 

The student must take at least 18 hours in marketing in addition to Marketing 351. This includes: 
459 Marketing Problems (3) 

One of the following three courses (3) 

350 Buyer Behavior and Marketing Communications 

452 Marketing Research 

457 Quantitative Marketing Analysis 

The selection of the remaining 12 units is dependent on the student's particular career path 
program which must be approved by an adviser in the Academic Programs Office. 

Quantitative Methods 

The objective of the Quantitative Methods Department is to prepare the student to utilize quantita- 
tive information and methods effectively in evaluating alternatives and making decisions. Emphasis 
is placed on the theory and practice of quantitative methods, especially those topics contributed by 
the disciplines of computer science, operations research and statistics. 

Students with a quantitative methods concentration are required to take Math 150A, Calculus,! QM 
170, Introduction to Quantitative Methods, in lieu of Math 150B, QM 461, Advanced Statistics, and 
at least 1 5 units in a study plan approved by the student's adviser. These courses may include any 
of the following, as well as approved courses in other disciplines. 

Computer Science 

364 Computer Logic and Programming 

382 Information Structures and Machine Language Programming 
446 Computer Programming Theory 
464 Information Retrieval and Natural Language Processing 
480 Information Theory and Cybernetics 


721—34 3 405 


Business Administration 


123 


482 Introduction to Discrete Structures 

484 Computer Assisted Instruction 

485 Programming Systems and Programming Language Processing 

486 Automata Theory 

487 Artificial Intelligence 

488 Introduction to Pattern Recognition 
Operations Research 

448 Digital Simulation in Business and Economics 

465 Linear Programming 

466 Nonlinear Programming 

470 Conflict, Bargaining and CooF>eration 
490 Stochastic Process Models in Business and Industry 
Statistics 

367 Statistics and Society 

420 Applied Statistical Forecasting 

422 Surveys and Sampling Design and Applications 

467 Statistical Quality Control 
469 Reliability Statistics 

475 Multivariate Analysis 

A student majoring in quantitative methods may also elect to minor in computer science. For details 
concerning the Bachelor of Science in Computer Science and the minor in computer science see 
page 146. 

BUSINESS EDUCATION 

Students who wish to major in business administration in preparation for a career as a secondary 
school teacher in business subjects must meet the requirements of the School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics and the secondary school teacher education program including the require- 
ments for the proper credential as outlined in the catalog. 

The requirements for a major in this area are as follows: 

1. The core requirements as set forth for all business administration majors, page 120. 

2. Completion of 12-18 hours of required coursework in one of the six areas of concentration: 

a. Accounting 

b. Economics 

c. Finance 

d. Management 

e. Marketing 

f. Quantitative methods 

3. Meet the school's minimum requirement of 60 credit hours in business administration and 
economics courses. 

4. A maximum of 12 credit hours in the secretarial field, including those applied as electives, may 
count toward the degree in business administration and economics. •• 

5. Completion of at least 60 credit hours in areas outside business administration and economics. 
Education courses required for a credential will be detailed by the School of Education. 

t Quantitative methods concentration studems shall substitute QM 363 for QM 360 in their business core. Math 150A may be taken 
with the credit/no credit option. 

•• The university does not offer work in secretarial training, typewriting, or business machines, but will accept some transfer work 
in these areas taken at other ir>stitutions 


725-84 3 425 


124 


Business Administration 


The requirements for a minor in this area are as follows: 

Eco 100 The Economic Environment and tco 200 Principles of Economics or Units 

210 Principles of Economics 5-6 

Acc 201 A, B Elementary Accounting 6 

QM 264 Computer Programming 2 

One of the following: 

Man 264 Business Law 3 

QM 265 Computer Methods in Business and Economics 3 

Fin 330 Business Finance 3 

Mar 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

Educ 442 Teaching Business in Secondary School 3 

t Electives 6 


25-26 


MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Applicants, as well as continuing students, should read carefully “The Program of Master's Degrees," 
page 59, and consult the Graduate Bulletin, particularly the “Steps in the Master's Degree Program." 

Programs of Study 

The School of Business Administration and Economics offers two plans for the M.B.A. degree. 
Plan I is a broad, integrated program designed primarily for students with an undergraduate degree 
in a field other than business administration. 

Plan II is an integrated program allowing some concentration in an area of specialization. Under this 
plan the student is required to complete 12 units in an area of concentration. It is designed primarily 
for students with baccalaureate degrees in business administration. 

The procedural steps for admission to, and completion of, the Master of Business Administration 
degree follow: 

Admission 

Admission into the M.B.A. programs (classified status) of the School of Business Administration and 
Economics requires the following: • 

1 . A bachelor's degree from a fully accredited college or university. 

2. At least a 2.75 CPA ( B — ) on the last 50 (percent of coursework taken for the bachelor's degree, 
or at least a 3.0 CPA on the sequential 60 semester units immediately preceding the application 
for classified standing, provided that the student has met all other entrance requirements. 
Furthermore, all work within any given quarter or semester must be included even though that 
will result in more than 60 semester units. The units to be included in the 60 semester units 
may come only from among the following: 

a. Work taken in postgraduate status within the last seven years. ** 

(1) Graduate work taken at other institutions. 

(2) Upper division courses at this institution for which upp)er division or graduate credit has 
been given. 

(3) A prescribed remedial program agreed to by the associate dean, academic programs. 

b. Units earned prior to the bachelor's degree. 

3. A minimum score of 450 on the Admission Test for Graduate Study in Business (ATCSB). 

4. for Plan II, the equivalent to an undergraduate degree in business from Cal State Fullerton is 
required. 

The courses in the major are to be no more than seven years old and are to have at least a 
3.0 grade-point average. Courses with grades less than C must be repeated. In addition the Plan 
II student will be required to successfully complete the Foundation Examination which covers 
the core requirements in the school's undergraduate degree in business. 

t A maximum o( six units of secretarial courses, includir^ those applied as el^ivea, may count toward the mirKX in business 
education. 

• If the student is deficient in one of the entrance requirements but has either an exceptional CPA or Admission Test for Graduate 
Study in Business score, he may be eligible for admission to the program. Consult the school’s Academic Programs Office for 
further information. 

•• These courses may nd* be counted toward fulfilling M.B.A. coursework requirement. 


308—20 4 425 


Business Administration 


125 


5. Preparation and approval of a program (Study Plan) in consultation with an adviser. 

6. Completion of an application form for classified status. 

PLAN I 

CURRICULUM 

First- Year Program 
Acc 510 Financial Accounting 
Acc 511 Managerial Accounting 
Eco 514 Principles and Problems of Economic Policy, A 
Eco 515 Principles and Problems of Economic Policy, B 
Fin 517 Managerial Finance 

Man 516 Organizational Theory and Management of Operations 
Man 518 Legal Environment of Business 
Mar 519 Marketing Management 
QM 512 Quantitative Business Decision Techniques, A 
QM 513 Quantitative Business Decision Techniques, B 
Note: Upon completion of the first year curriculum. Plan I students are required to successfully 
complete the Business Foundation Examination. 

Second- Year Program 

Acc 521 Seminar in Administrative Accounting 
Eco 522 Comparative Economics Seminar 
Fin 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management 
Man 524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and Administration 
Mar 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems 
QM 526 Quantitative Business Decision Analysis or 
QM 560 Operations Research 
BAE 5% M.B.A. Management Came 
Two electives at the 400- or 500-level 

PLAN II 
Prerequisites 

Plan II is designed for students with an undergraduate degree in business. As a prerequisite, the 
student is required to have the equivalent to an undergraduate major in business at Cal State 
Fullerton. 

CURRICULUM 

(A minimum of 24 of the 30 units required for the degree must be at the 500 level.) 

Required Courses 

Acc 51 1 Managerial Accounting • or 

Acc 521 Seminar in Administrative Accounting 
Eco 515 Principles and Problems of Economic Policy, B or 
Eco 522 Comparative Economics Seminar 
Fin 523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management 
Man 524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and Administration 
Mar 525 Seminar in Marketing Problems 
QM 526 Quantitative Business Decision Analysis or 
QM 560 Operations Research 

Concentration ^ 

Each student shall elect an area of concentration of at least 12 units to be approved by the 
department chair concerned, or his designee within the department, and the associate dean, aca- 
demic programs. Concentrations offered in Plan II are: accounting, finance, international business, 
management, marketing and quantitative methods. 

* Students who have credit in cost accounting may not receive credit for Accounting 511. 


312—20 4 445 


126 


business Administration 


Terminal Evaluation 

A terminal evaluation is required for the degree. Departmental requirements vary, however, and the 
student should check with his department chair. In many cases students take BAE 5%, M.B.A. 
Management Came, to satisfy this requirement, thus increasing the number of units offered for the 
degree from 30 to 33. The terminal evaluation may be repeated once during a two-year p>eriod. 
For further information, consult the School of Business, Administration and Economics Announce- 
ment and/or the associate dean, academic programs, in the School of Business Administration and 
Economics. See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 59, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

The economics major is designed to prepare students for positions in business, education and 
government, and for graduate work in economics and related disciplines. 

Advanced Placement Program in Economics 

An Advanced Placement Program in Economics has been established by the Department of Eco- 
nomics, the Center for Economic Education, and the Center's affiliated Leadership Group of High 
School Teachers of Economics. Three semester-units of university academic credit in principles of 
economics advanced placement are offered to students taking economics in high school who 
enroll in the program and pass the Advanced Placement Examination in Economics given at the 
university at the end of each fall and spring semester. To enroll in the program contact Dr. Norman 
Townshend-Zellner, director. Center for Economic Education. 

RequiremeMs 

Required of all students for the degree: 

1. Completion of 41 semester credit hours of courses in economics and business administration 
of which 27 semester credit hours must be in upper division courses. At least 1 5 sennester 
hours must be completed in residence in the School of Business Administration and Econom- 
ics. 

2. Completion of the major course requirements for economics majors as listed below. Students 
in economics are required to take Quantitative Methods 265 or equivalent as prerequisite to 
Quantitative Methods 361. 

3. Completion of at least 60 credit hours in areas other than economics and business administra- 
tion. Of these 60 semester credit hours the department suggests that special attention be 
placed on related social sciences, particularly political science, sociology, history and geogra- 
phy, as well as philosophy and the fields of quantitative methods and mathematics. A list of 
suggested courses is available in the Economics Department office. 

4. Students must attain at least 2.0 grade-point average in all college or university work attempt- 
ed, and in all courses in the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

Business administration and economics courses required of all students majoring in economics are 


listed below: 

Lower Division Units 

Eco 100 and 200 or 210 Principles of Economics 5-6 

Acc 201 A,B Elementary Accounting or Mathematics 150A,B Analytic Geometry and 
Calculus (students who take Math 150A,B in substitution of Acc 201 A,B are re- 
quired to take QM 363 Management Science In lieu of QM 360) 6-6 

QM 265 Computer Methods in Business and Economics 3 

Total 14-17 

Upper Division Units 

Eco 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory 3 

Eco 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 3 

Eco 420 Money and Banking 3 

QM 360 Management Science Methods in Business and Economics or 

Mathematics 150A Analytic Geometry and Calculus 3-4 

QM 361 Statistical Methods in Business and Economics 3 

Fifteen hours of upper division electives in economics approved by the student's 

adviser 1 5 

Total 30-31 


317—20 4 470 


Business Administration 127 


MINOR IN ECONOMICS 

A minor in economics may be achieved by taking the following courses: 


Eco 100 and 200 or 210 Principles of Economics 5-6 

Eco 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory 3 

Eco 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 3 

Upp)er division economics electives 9 

Total 20-21 


MASTER OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

The Master of Arts in Economics is a program designed both for candidates who will be studying 
full time and for those employed full time or part time while working for the M.A. degree. The 
program is separated into two parts, the core requirements and the electives. The purpose of the 
core is to provide rigorous training fundamental to the discipline of economics, yet eminently useful 
to the candidate, whatever his special area of interest. It represents a planned sequence of work, 
progressing from economic theory (Economics 502 and 503) through methodology (Economics 
505) to the seminar (Economics 506) in which the student prepares a project applying what he has 
learned in theqry and method to an area of his special interest. The purpose of the electives is to 
provide the student an opportunity to broadly cover his special area of interest in an interdisciplinary 
way. 

The procedural steps for admission to, and completion of, the Master of Arts in Economics follow. 
Admission Requirements 

1 . Apply for admission to the university in unclassified graduate status and declare the objective 
to be a Master of Arts in Economics degree. This must be accomplished at the Office of 
Admissions before the dates established in the university calendar. 

2. Apply for admission to the Master of Arts in Economics program. Please read carefully page 
59, and secure informal advisement from the academic programs office of the School of 
Business Administration and Economics. The informal advisement should occur at least three 
weeks prior to your first registration, but in any event during the first semester of work. Specific 
admission requirements include: 

a. An overall grade-p)oint average in all undergraduate work of not less than 2.5. 

b. Completion of Qk-1 265, Computer Methods in Business and Economics, and QM 360, 
Management Science Methods in Business and Economics, oz-QM 264, Computer Program- 
ming, and one semester of calculus. 

c. Satisfactory level of performance on the Graduate Record Examination (verbal and quanti- 
tative), aptitude only. 

Prerequisites 

Acceptance into the program requires the completion of the following prerequisite courses, or 
equivalent: 

1 . For students without an undergraduate major in economics (a grade-point average of not less 
than 3.0 in the following prerequisites is required): Units 


Principles of Economics 6 

Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis 3 

Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis 3 

Statistics (analytical) 3 

Money and Banking 3 

Total 18 


2. For students with an undergraduate major in economics: 24 semester units of work in econom- 
ics or related courses (e.g., statistics), with a minimum grade-point average of 3.0. The 24 units 
must include the following courses or their equivalent, with a minimum grade of 3.0 in each 
course: Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis, Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis, Statis- 


tics (analytical). Money and Banking. 

Program of Study 

1 . A core of 1 2 graduate units in economics is required: Units 

Eco 502 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis 3 

Eco 503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis 3 


337—20 4 570 


128 A ccounting 


Eco 505 Methodology in Economic Research Seminar 3 

Eco 506 Seminar in Micro- and Macroeconomic 

Applications (p/'cyec^ required) 3 

Total 12 


2. In addition to the core, 18 units of electives are required as follows: 

a. Eighteen units of electives at the 400 or 500 level, with a minimum of six and a maximum 
of 1 2 in a field outside of but related to economics. 

b. At least nine units of electives must be at the 500 level, six of which must be in economics. 

c. If nine or more units are taken in fields outside of economics, at least three units must be 
at the 500 level. 

For further information, consult the School of Business Administration and Economics Announce- 
ment and/or the associate dean, academic programs, in the School of Business Administration and 
Economics. See also "The Program of Master's Degrees, " page 59, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ACCOUNTING COURSES 

201A,B Elementary Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 A must be taken before taking 201 B. Accounting concepts and tech- 
niques essential to the administration of a business enterprise; accounting as a process of measur- 
ing and communicating economic information; analyzing and recording financial transactions; 
preparation of financial statements; analysis and interpretation of financial statements; introduc- 
tion to manufacturing accounts and reports; the interaction of accounting with the areas of 
finance, quantitative methods, interpersonal relations, motivation, and data-information systems. 

301A,B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B; 301 A must be taken before 301 B. The quantification, recording, and 
presentation of balance sheet and income statement items with particular emphasis on the 
corporate type of organization; statement of application of funds; cash flow statement; basic 
concepts of accounting theory; interpretation of financial statements. 

302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. The development of accounting information for management of 
manufacturing enterprises; cost records; cost behavior and allocation; standard costs; and an 
introduction to cost control. 

303 Governmental Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: one course in accounting. A consideration of the accounts and reports of nonprofit 
institutions, municipalities, state and federal governments; organization, procedures, budgets. 

304 Managerial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. Intended for students whose area of concentration is not accounting. 
Analysis, interpretation, and application of accounting information for managerial decision mak- 
ing; budgets and budgetary control; special-purpose reports; differential cost analyses. 

305 Elements of Accounting (3) 

For students majoring in computer science. Accounting concepts essential to the administration of 
business enterprises and measuring and communicating economic information. Emphasis on 
interaction of accounting with computers. Not open to business administration or economics 
students. 

307 Distribution Costs (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B and Marketing 351. The development of quantitative measures for 
marketing activity; costs of distributing through different channels of distribution, advertising vs. 
personal selling, and movement activities; development of sales budgets, standard costs, and the 
analysis of actual perfomance in the light of budgets and standards. 

308 Federal Income Tax (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. Basic consideration of the history, theory, and accounting aspects 
of federal income taxation. 

401 Advanced Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 301 B. A study of partnerships, statements for special purp)oses, receiver- 
ships, consolidated financial statements, branch accounting and foreign exchange. 


342—20 4 595 


Accounting 129 


402 Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites; Accounting 301 B and 302. Nature of an audit, auditing standards and procedures, audit 
reports; professional ethics and responsibilities of the independent public accountant; introduc- 
tion to internal auditing. 

406 Cost Control (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 302. A study of current and persistent problems in cost accounting; theories 
of cost allocation and absorption; flexible budgeting; responsibility accounting; and distribution 
cost control. 

407 Integrated Data Processing Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B and QM 264 or 265. Integrated systems for the collection, processing, 
and transmission of information; aspects of the information service function; feasibility studies; 
case studies of operating systems. 

408 Problems in Taxation (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. Research in problems of taxation with emphasis on income taxes as 
they relate to corporations, partnerships and fiduciaries. 

409 C.P.A. Problems and Theory (3) 

Prerequisite; Accounting 401, or consent of instructor. Selected problems and questions as found in 
the uniform C.P.A. examination; preparation, analysis and revision of financial statements; assets, 
liabilities and ownership equities; income determination; cost accounting; governmental and 
institutional accounting; accounting theory. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by department chair. Open to qualified undergraduate 
students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

502 Seminar in Accounting Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B, classified M B. A. status and consent of instructor. The concepts and 
theory of accounting; the effects of professional, governmental, business, and social forces on 
the evolution of accounting theory. 

503 Seminar in Contemporary Financial Accounting Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 502 and classified M B A. status. A critical examination of the current 
problems and areas of controversy in financial accounting. 

504 Seminar in Contemporary Managerial Accounting Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 511 or 302, classified M B A. status and consent of instructor. A critical 
examination of the current problems and areas of controversy in managerial accounting. 

505 Seminar in Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 402 and classified M.B.A. status. Auditing theory and practices; profes- 
sional ethics; auditing staridards; SEC and stock exchange regulations; auditor's legal liability; 
statement trends and techniques. 

507 Seminar in Accounting Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 407 or equivalent, and classified M B A. status. Case studies of large scale 
accounting systems used by organizations such as universities, banks, and industrial corporations. 
Applications of conceptual knowledge of system components and controls learned previously 
to actual OF>erating systems. 

508 Seminar in Tax Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 308 or consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. A review of 
substantive provisions of federal tax law with an emphasis on tax planning from a corporate 
viewfHDint; case studies of the effect of federal tax law on business decisions. 

510 Financial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. The basic fundamentals of accounting as they apply to the 
accumulation, organization, and interpretation of financial and quantitative data relevant to the 
activities of the corporate business enterprise. The interaction of accounting with the areas of 
finance, interpersonal relations, motivation, and data-information systems. 

511 Seminar in Managerial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B or 510, consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. Accounting 
information for management decision; elements of manufacturing, distribution, and service costs; 
cost systems; standard costs; cost reports; cost analysis. 


347—20 4 620 


1 30 Economics 


518 Seminar in International Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 A, B or equivalent and classified M.B.A. status. Comparative analysis 
of accounting principles and practices, current problems of international financial reporting, 
accounting planning and control for international operations with emphasis upon multinational 
companies. 

521 Seminar in Administrative Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 302, or 304, or 511; classified M B A. status; and consent of instructor. 
Integrative aspects of accounting, financial, and quantitative data for managerial decision-mak- 
ing; long-term, short-term profit planning; budgetary control; cost analysis; financial analysis and 
planning; taxation; and transfer pricing. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, consent of instructor, and approval by department chair. May 
be repeated for credit. 


BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION COURSES 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

Prerequisites: business administration core, senior standing and consent of instructor. Application of 
research methods: selection and identification of a problem, determining a method of approach, 
collection and analysis of relevant data, eliciting conclusions and solutions. 

595 Modern Capitalism (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and consent of instructor. The changing role of capitalism and 
its control In the United States, European countries and Japan. The trends as to Government 
policy and action, relative to private ownership and coordinated economic planning. 

5% M.B.A. Management Game (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status and within six units of completion of the M.B.A. study plan. This 
course serves as the required ternr»inal evaluation for M.B.A. candidates. An integrated approach 
to policy decisions using the principles and practices of the several disciplines in the M.B.A. 
program. 


ECONOMICS COURSES 

100 The Economic Environment (3) 

An introduction to economics with application to problems such as unemployment, poverty, dis- 
crimination, inflation, gold and foreign exchange, pollution, urban decay, defense, war, and 
industrialization. 

Ill Economics of Utopia (3) 

An economic analysis of utopian thought and attempts to create ideal economic systems. Emphasis 
is placed on the importance of economic structure and environment to the performance of 
utopian experiments. 

200 Principles of Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100. A survey of basic economic theory. Includes the central problem of 
allocating resources, the distribution of income, unemployment, inflation, and the role of markets 
and public p)olicies solving these problems. 

210 Principles of Economics (5) 

Prerequisite: open only to junior transfers. (Duplicates 100 and 200). An introduction to the princi- 
ples of economic analysis and policy including the central problem of scarcity, basic economic 
institutions of the United States, resource allocation and income distribution, economic stability 
and growth, and the role of public policy. 


352—20 5 5 


Economics 131 


361 Economic Principles (3) 

Prerequisites. Math 150A,B and QM 265 or equivalents. An introduction to economic principles for 
students who have a strong quantitative background, and who have a special interest in the 
technical areas of engineering and computer science. Not open to students majoring in business 
administration or economics. 

310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 and 200 or 210. An analysis and evaluation of (1 ) rational decision- 
making behavior of consumers and firms and (2) price and output determination in markets; with 
special emphasis placed on the use of cases and problems to illustrate the application of the 
analysis to the contemporary scene. 

320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 100 and 200 or 210. The explanation and evaluation of the determinants 
of the level and fluctuations of such economic aggregates as national income and employment, 
with stress placed on the use of problems involving the application of analytical tools to modern 
macroeconomic issues. 

324 Money and Banking (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200 or 210. A study of the structure and operation of commercial banks and 
financial institutions including a consideration of the impact of money and capital market devel- 
opments on economic activity. Not open to economics majors. 

330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200 or 210 or 100 plus consent of instructor. A study of alternative economic 
systems with regard to their theoretical foundations, actual economic institutions, and achieve- 
ments and failures. The contrast between socialist and capitalist systems will be emphasized. 

331 The Soviet Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200 or 210. An analytical evaluation of Soviet economic development 
including the structure and performance of the Soviet economy and problems of planning and 
control. 

332 Economic Problems of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. Analysis of the natural resources, population, agricultural, 
industrial, transportation, communications, monetary, banking, etc. problems of Asia i.e. China, 
lapan, etc. and the Asian subcontinent. The relations of non-economic problems to the economic 
are considered in detail. 

333 Economic Development: Analysis and Case Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. An examination of the processes of economic growth with 
sp>ecial references to developing areas. Considers capital formation, resource allocation, relation 
to the world economy, economic planning and institutional factors, with appropriate case stud- 
ies. 

334 Economics of Poverty, Race and Discrimination (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. An economic analysis of the problems and policies dealing with 
FKDverty, race and discrimination. A field investigation or project is required of each student. 

350 American Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. The development of American economic institutions with 
special emphasis on economic problems, economic growth, and economic welfare. 

351 European Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. The evolution of European economic institutions and their 
relation to the de''elopment of industry, commerce, transportation, and finance in the principal 
Europ)ean countries. 

341 Urban Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. Theory and analysis of the urban economy, urban economic 
problems and policy. 

345 Public Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200 or 210. A study of government finance at the federal, state, and local 
levels with particular reference to the impact of taxation and spending on resource allocation, 
income distribution, stabilization and growth. 

370 Economics of Research, Development and Technological Change (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 100 or 210. Examination of the importance of R&D and technological 
change in the economy; concepts, issues, and major figures in the study of economics of 
technology; analytical techniques for the assessment of technological change; and evaluation of 
the impacts of technological change. 


357—20 5 30 


132 Economics 


391 The Modernization of Russian Society, 1880-1939 ( 3) 

Prerequisites; Economics 100 or 210. An interdisciplinary seminar on the historical, political, cultural 
and economic forces promoting and impeding modernization under both the Tsarist and Com- 
munist regimes. Course is team taught by an instructor from the Economics Department and the 
History Department. 

410 Government and Business (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. An economic study of business organization, conduct and performance 
followed by an analysis of the rationale and impact <^f public policy on various segments of 
business and business activities, including the regulated industries, sick industries and antitrust 
policy. 

411 International Trade (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. An examination of the theory of international trade and the means and 
significance ot balance of payments adjustments, with an analysis of past and present develop- 
ments in international Commercial and monetary policy. 

412 Labor Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. An analysis of the basic economic and institutional influences operating 
in labor markets. Considers relevant aspects of resource allocation, income distribution, econom- 
ic stability and growth. 

420 Money and Banking (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320. A study of the money supply process and the impact of monetary 
policy on economic activity. 

421 Mor>etary and Fiscal Policy (3) 

Prerequisite; Economics 320. A study of the techniques of monetary and fiscal policy and an appraisal 
of their relative roles in promoting economic stability and growth. 

440 Introduction to Econometrics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310, 320 and QM 360 or Math 150A. Development of advanced statistical 
methods and their application in economic research. AdvarKed concepts in model building; 
development of different types of economic models. The use and effect of economic models in 
public policy. 

441 Introduction to Mathematical Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310, 320 and QM 360 or Math 150A. Selected topics in economic theory, 
drawn from microeconomics and macroeconomics. Content varying from year to year but with 
emphasis on constrained optimization problems and rational decision-making. 

450 History of Economic Thought (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and 320. A study of the development of economic thought as reflected 
in the evolution of major schools of thought and of leading individual economists as they 
influenced economic thought and policy. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major or concentration, senior standing and approval by the department 
chair. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. 
May be repeated for credit. 

502 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 100 and 200 or 210, and 310; classified status in the M.A. in Economics 
program or consent of instructor. An advanced theoretical formulation of the prirKiples of the 
determination of prices and outputs of goods and productive services in a market system. Topics 
include: consumer choice, demand, production, cost, the equilibrium of the firm and the market 
and distributior\ 

503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites; Economics 100 and 200 or 210, and 320; classified status in the M.A. in Ecorwmics 
program or consent of instructor. AdvarKed theory of the determination of employment, fluctua- 
tions of real and money income and the forces underlying economic growth. 

505 Methodology in Economic Research Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Classified status in the M.A. in Economics program or consent of instructor. Applica- 
tions of statistical and ecorrometric techniques in economic analysis. Emphasis is on practical 
problems in empirical research. Topics include statistical analyses of demand functions, con- 
sumption functions, cost and production functions, and models of national irKome determina- 
tion. Practical problems involved in using multiple regression analysis are examined. 


362—20 5 55 


Finance 133 


506 Seminar in Micro- and Macroeconomic Applications (3) 

Prerequisites; Economic* 502, 503, and 505; classified status in the M.A. in Economics program or 
consent of instructor. Complements the study of methodology in economic research. Students 
select approved topics and via independent investigation, seminar presentation and critique 
develop their analytical and research abilities, culminating with an acceptable paper. 

511 Economic Problems and Public Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 514, 515 and classified M.B.A. status. Seminar devoted to an examination 
of the nature and implication of the major economic problems facing the economy and an 
evaluation of current and alternative policies for their solution. Problems considered will include 
price level stabilization, balance of payments equilibrium, economic growth, and cyclical and 
technological unemployment. (Not op)en to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

514 Principles and Problems of Economic Policy — Part A (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. An intensive study of micro- and macroeconomic theory and 
policy within the framework of a market system. (Not open to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

515 Principles and Problems of Economic Policy — Part B (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 514 and classified M.B.A. status. An integration of modern microeconomic 
theory, optimization techniques, and microeconomic policy. Topics include: mathematical pro- 
gramming, consumer choice, production theory, firm and market equilibrium, and government 
regulation. (Not open to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

522 Cc^mparative Economics Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 514 and 515 and classified M.B.A. status. A comparative study of various 
analytical and prescriptive approaches to economic problems of scarcity, development, fiscal 
and monetary policy, planning and poverty. (Not open to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

528 Seminar in International Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 514 or equivalent, consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. A 
systematic survey of international monetary and international trade theories and policies. In- 
cludes analyses of international monetary reform, barriers to trade, economic integration, eco- 
nomic development and international capital flows. 

595 Modern Capitalism (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 595) 

5% Selected Topics in Economic Analysis and Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 2(X)or 210, 310 and 320; classified status in the M.A. in Economics program 
or consent of instructor. Seminar; Selected topics in economic analysis and policy will be covered 
in depth, with special emphasis on contemp)orary research and materials. May be repeated for 
credit. 

597 Projects (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, consent of instructor, and approval by department chair. Open to 
qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 


FINANCE COURSES 

324 Money and Banking (3) 

(Same as Economics 324) 

330 Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. Financing business enterprises; financial planning and control; analy- 
sis of alternative sources and uses of combinations of short-, intermediate- and long-term debt 
and equity. Cost of capital. Study of capital investment decisions; capital budget analysis and 
valuation; working capital and capital structure management. 


366—20 5 75 


1 34 Finance 


331 Financial Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. Development of techniques for internal financial control and their applica- 
tion to business situations. Capital costs and optimal capital investment decisions. Budgets and 
forecasts for projection of long-term profitable operations. Analysis of current financial models. 
Croup problems and case studies. 

333 Personal Financial Management (3) 

Financial problems of the household in allocating resources and planning expenditures. Considera- 
tion of housing, insurance, installment buying, medical care, savings and investments. (May not 
be used to fulfill the area of concentration requirement in finance.) 

334 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Principles of life, casualty and liability insurance, individual and group insurance programs; methods 
of establishing risks and rates. 

335 Security Investments (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 330 and QM 265 or consent of instructor. Principles underlying the analysis, 
selection and management of securities; characteristics of securities, valuation, trading methods, 
role of mutual funds and other institutions; computerized statement analysis and portfolio selec- 
tion methods; a computer securities game is played by members of the class. 

336 Principles and Practices of Real Estate (3) 

Survey of urban real estate principles and practices; structure and growth of cities; economic 
implication to real estate markets. Trends and factors affecting real property values, real estate 
financing and real estate law. Integrative cases and projects. Study of current urban models used 
in urban development. Croup problems and case studies. 

401 Real Estate Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 336 and 437 or 438. Croup problems, laboratory work as determined by 
computer terminal availability. 

425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331. Application of analytical techniques to the solution of financial institution 
problems. Major financial intermediaries and the broad range of decision-making problems they 
face. Regulation and its effect on management operations. Croup problems and case studies. 

431 Capital and Money Markets (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. Role of capital and money markets in the American economy; markets 
for new corporate and government issues; secondary markets; interrelation of financial institu- 
tions; factors influencing yields and security prices. 

433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 . Comprehensive case studies including group problems of estimating funds 
requirements, long-term financial planning, controlling and evaluating cash flows, and financing 
acquisitions and mergers. Croup problems and case studies. 

435 Security Analysis and Portfolio Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 335 or consent of instructor. Advanced securities analysis course utilizing 
computer applications for statement analysis, valuation models, and portfolio selection and 
management models. The data base utilizes Standard and Poor's "compustat tapes." A simulated 
portfolio management game is played at the erni of the course. 

436 Legal Aspects of Real Estate (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 246 or equivalent area; Finance 336. Law of real property; typ)es of 
ownership; titles and estates; transfers of interests; encumbrances; casements; fixtures; land sale 
contracts; recording; zoning; leases; responsibilities of real estate brokers. 

437 Real Estate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite. Finance 336 or consent of instructor. Sources and uses of capital in financing real estate 
transactions. Financial institutions and their effect on credit. Money and capital market conditions 
and their effect on credit availability and cost. Instruments of real estate finance. Real estate as 
an investment medium. Group problems and case studies. 

438 Real Estate Valuation (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 336 or consent of instructor. Theory of real property value, historical develop- 
ment; methods used in urban and rural property appraisals; special purpose appraisals. Croup 
problems, laboratory work as determined by computer terminal availability. 

439 Social Insurance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. Financial problems and policies in old age pensions, health insurance, 
unemployment insurance, workman's compensation, and private pension plans. 


802-^34 4 165 


Finance 1 35 


441 Capital Budgeting and Financial Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. Role of forecasting in financial management: effect of business fluctuations 
on financial planning; procedures for measuring changes in business activity; methods of fore- 
casting for the economy, the particular industry, and the individual firm. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by the department chair. Open to qualified undergradu- 
ate students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

517 Managerial Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M B A. status. The methodology of financial management including the 
primary tools for financial analysis, long-term investment decisions, valuation and working capital 
management. 

523 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 and classified M B A. status. Emphasis in this course is on the analysis of 
the financial decision-making process through case studies and seminar presentations. Current 
financial theory and models are utilized. 

533 Seminar in Financial Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 523 and classified M.B.A. status. Optimal financing and asset administration; 
advanced techniques of capital budgeting; application of analytical methods to the administration 
of the finance function of the business firm. 

534 Seminar in Financial Markets (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 431 or consent of the instructor and classified M B A. status. Structure and 
op)eration of major financial institutions; portfolio composition, price-cost problems, and market 
behavior; analysis of financial intermediation and interrelation of financial institutions and mar- 
kets. 

535 Seminar in Investment Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 435 or consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. Problems of invest- 
ment and portfolio management; concepts of risk evaluation and investment criteria; analysis of 
interest rate movements; investment valuation and timing; regulation and administrative prob- 
lems of the industry. 

536 Seminar in Risk Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 334 and classified M.B.A. status. Techniques of risk management, structure of 
risk management, insurance planning and control, risk management programs. 

537 Seminar in Real Estate Investment (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 330, 336 or equivalent and classified M.B.A. status. Problems of real estate 
investment; concepts of evaluation and investment criteria; analysis of real property values; real 
estate development and financing. 

538 Seminar in International Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 517 or consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. Focus on the financial 
problems of the multinational firm. Included are international financing instruments, capital 
investment decisions, and constraints on the profitability of multinational businesses. 

595 Modern Capitalism (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 595) 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, consent of the instructor and approval by the department 
chair. May be repeated for credit. 


806-34 4 181 


1 36 Management 

MANAGEMENT COURSES 

246 Business Law (3) 

Philosophy, institutions and role of law in business and society, with emphasis on functions of courts 
and attorneys, case studies in areas of contracts, and on the law relating to sale of goods. 

340 Behavioral Science for Business (3) 

Prerequisites: general education for social sciences. Study of social and cultural environments of 
business. Communication, leadership, motivation, perception, p)ersonality development, group 
dynamics and group growth. Covers fundamental aspects of human behavior with implications 
for organizational design and management practice. 

341 Organization and Management Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 200 or 210, or consent of instructor. Administrative processes, organization 
theories, applications in utility-creating business operations. Planning, control and information 
systems, measuring and improving effectiveness. Leadership in creating utility. Open to non- 
business majors. 

342 Production Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 341 and QM 265. Fundamentals of production systems which combine 
materials, labor, and capital resources to produce goods or services. Analysis of systems, models 
and methods for management of production operations. Product and process development. Case 
studies stress utilization of computer decision models. 

343 Personnel Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 341 or consent of instructor. A study of the personnel function, its 
activities, and its opportunities. Emphasis upon management's responsibilities for selection, de- 
velopment and effective utilization of personnel. Open to non-business majors. 

347 Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. Philosophy, institutions and role of law in business 
relationships, with emphasis on case studies in areas of agency, partnerships, corporations, 
bankruptcy, unfair competition and trade regulation. 

348 Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 246 or equivalent. The philosophy, institutions and role of law in commer- 
cial and p>ersonal transactions, with emphasis upK)n case studies in the areas of personal property, 
bailments, commercial paper, secured transactions, real property, mortgages, trusts, community 
property, wills, estate administration and insurance. 

441 Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 341 . Impact of labor-management relations upon labor, management, and 
the public. Proper grievance procedure, collective bargaining, and settlement of disputes are 
among subjects examined. 

442 Collective Bargaining and Labor Legislation (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 441. Study of effects of federal and state legislation on union and nonun- 
ion environments in both private and public sectors. Practicum in collective bargaining proce- 
dures. Case studies of recent successful and unsuccessful labor negotiations. 

443 Individual, Interpersonal and Group Dynamics for Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 340, 341 or consent of instructor. Case studies and current literature on 

human problems of work situations. Focuses on developing self-knowledge; manager motivation; 
communicator strengths; improving interaction skills; and improving interaction processes in 
groups. Laboratory work offers practical approach. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

444 Management of Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: QM core and other 300 level courses in student's program. Technology for managing 
business and other enterprises as cybernetic systems. Investigates the design and control of 
systems appropriate for product, project and program levels of analysis. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
laboratory) 

445 Advanced Production Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 342 and QM core. Planning and control methodologies for production 
ofjerations. Quantitative approaches which integrate cost, schedule and technical performance 
criteria. Collection, evaluation and use of real-time information. Individual and group projects 
synthesize control systems for actual cases. 


811—34 4 195 


Management 137 


446 Managerial Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM core, Economics 310 and Management 341. A study of relationships of manage- 
ment tools to applied economics and statistics in decision-making process; use of cases and group 
problems to study the true economic meaning of cost, demand, supply, price, product and 
competition. 

447 Management Decision Games (3) 

Prerequisites: business administration core less Management 449, or consent of instructor. A simula- 
tion of an oligopolistic industry to provide the student with an opportunity, through group 
problems, to use statistics and other analytical tools to make managerial decisions in the function- 
al areas of management. (2 hours lecture; 2 hours activity) 

449 Seminar in Business Policies (3) 

Prerequisites: all other School of Business Administration and Economics core courses and depart- 
mental approval. Through analyzing integrative cases from top management viewpoint, students 
use business and liberal arts training, especially knowledge of business operations, administrative 
processes, organization theory, and policy formulation. Individual and team efforts. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: management concentration, senior standing, and approval by faculty sponsor and 
department chair of proposed statement of work. Open to qualified undergraduate students 
desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

516 Organizational Theory and Management of Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status. Accounting 510, Economics 514 and Quantitative Methods 
512. Modern organization theory and application in utility creating operations. Planning, control, 
organizing, directing, communication and information systems, and measures of effectiveness are 
explored. Business ethics and relationships to society and politics are examined. Graduate 
discussion and research reports. 

518 Legal Environment of Business (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and Accounting 510. Philosophy, institutions and role of law 
in business, with emphasis upon legal implications inherent in business decisions and upon case 
studies in areas of contracts, sale of goods, agency, partnership)s and corporations. 

524 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and Administration (3) (Formerly 544) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status. Management 516 and 518 or equivalent. Analysis of human 
behavior in organization, studies in organizational theories, and administrative action. 

541 Seminar in Project Operations Problem Solving (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status. Management 516 and 518, or equivalent. A seminar designed 
to focus attention on application of system analysis and other dynamic techniques to current 
operations problems. Special projects are used to demonstrate application of concepts. 

542 Seminar in Labor Relations (3) 

Prerequisites; classified M.B.A. status. Management 516 and 518, or equivalent. Theories and 
philosophies of union-management relations in modern industrial society with attention to trends 
in nonindustrial organizations. Issues in collective bargaining, contract administration, labor law, 
and government regulation. Discussion and analysis of literature. 

543 Seminar in Personnel Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status. Management 516 and 518, or equivalent. Provides graduate 
students with opportunities to study cases, problems, and significant personnel administration 
literature in order to develop a comprehensive understanding of personnel administration and 
human relations. 

545 Seminar in Research and Development Project Management (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status. Management 516 and 518, or equivalent. Management of R&D 
projects. Techniques of preparing project proposals and assessing their economic worth. Project 
selection and review procedures based on fjerformance, cost and marketing projections. Project 
programming and control. Establishing a creative environment. 

548 Seminar in International Management (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status. Management 516 and 518, or equivalent. Problems in 
managerial qualifications and training, political structure within and without the operations, 
foreign receptivity to United States business, organization and controlling the international firm. 
Management in selected countries is examined. 


816—84 4 220 


138 Marketing 


549 Seminar in Policy Planning and Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M B A. status, Management 516 and 518, or equivalent. Planning, implement- 
ing and controlling policy strategies to achieve objectives are considered. Executive's role In 
overall enterprise operations and the firm's resource use are examined and supported by cases, 
literature and training techniques. 

595 Modern Capitalism (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 595) 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M B. A. status. Directed Independent project. Student will select and have 
approved a project proposal, conduct the project, and prepare a formal analysis and report. 

598 Thesis (3-4) 

Prerequisite: classified M B A. status. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M B. A. status, consent of the Instructor and approval by the department 
chair. May be repeated for credit. 


MARKETING COURSES 

350 Buyer Behavior and Marketing Communications (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Analysis of interactions between buyer decision-making processes and 
communication processes based on concepts of economics, sociology, psychology, and mass 
and informal communications. 

351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 1(X) and 200 or 210. Analysis of how management markets output of the 
enterprise — and obtains revenue. Covers product management, pricing, promotion, distribution 
channels. Marketing's role in socioeconomic system is examined from viewpoints of consumer, 
management and government. 

352 Principles of Retailing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Covers problems retailers face such as store location, store design and 
layout, what goods should be purchased, how to: obtain sales volume, plan operations, control 
the enterprise, and react to competitors. Current problems in retailing will be examined. 

353 Marketing Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Major problems facing the marketing executive, including marketing 
organization, planning and forecasting, market analysis, budgeting, product |X>licy, pricing, ad- 
vertising and sales promotion, administration of the sales force. 

354 Principles of Advertising (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The management of the advertising function, including the role of 
advertising in marketing strategy, budgetary considerations, allocation among media, measure- 
ment of effectiveness, administration and control, and its economic and social implications. 

355 Credit and Credit Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The general nature and functions of credit, credit instruments; the 
management of the credit department; sources of credit information; acceptance of credit risk; 
establishment of credit limits; and the problem of collections. 

356 Creative Motivation in Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Salesmanship, in the very broad context, is p>ersuading people to do 
what you want them to do. A fundamental managerial skill. Relevant principles of behavior are 
applied to the persuasion process. 

357 Industrial Purchasing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The principles and practices of purchasing for industrial organizations. 
Major buying |x>licies, sources of materials, quantity and quality considerations, and the relation 
to production cost.35B Physical Distribution (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351, QM 265, 360. Investigation of the practices and problems of logistics 
and physical distribution. Analysis and evaluation of the system and its elements — packaging, 
transportation, warehousing, inventory control — leading to improved system design and man- 
agement. 


830-34 4 285 


Marketing 139 


452 Marketing Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and QM 361. Presents marketing research as the systematic and 
objective search for and analysis of information relevant to: identification and solution of any 
problem in the marketing field; and, decision-making process in marketing management. (2 hours 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 

453 Marketing to the Government (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The marketing of defense and nondefense products to the government. 
The nature and administration of contractual agreements with government agencies. 

455 Management of the Sales Force (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Examines the job of the sales manager in such areas as organization; 
recruiting and selecting salesmen; sales training; formulating compensation and expense plans; 
supervising and stimulating sales activities; morale; sales planning, evaluating salesmen; and 
distribution cost analysis. 

457 Quantitative Marketing Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and QM 265. Management orientation of tools and techniques for 
planning and making decisions in marketing. Emphasis on understanding use of models in 
analyzing marketing processes and systems. Application of various objective analytical tools to 
analyze specific marketing problems. 

458 International Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and senior standing. Presents analytical framework for studying devel- 
opment of domestic marketing systems. Marketing problems arising across national boundaries 
and within national markets will be analyzed. Emphasis is given U.S. firms involved in internation- 
al marketing op>erations. 

459 Marketing Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing, two advanced marketing courses one of which must be marketing 350, 
452 or 457. Analysis and evaluation of marketing problems of both the firm and society. Emphasis 
placed upon intergrative interactions between marketing activities and the interfaces of marketing 
with finance and production. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: marketing concentration, senior standing, and approval by the department chair. Open 
to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be 
repeated for credit. 

519 Marketing Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 510, 511, Economics 514, 515, QM 512, 513, Management 516, 518 (may 
be taken concurrently) and classified M.B.A. status. The role of marketing within the context of 
society and the business firm is explored. A contemporary analysis of concepts, principles and 
techniques used by marketing management in the administration of the marketing variables. 

525 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) (Formerly Marketing 551) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 and classified M.B.A. status. A managerial approach to major marketing 
problems facing industry: definition of and organization for marketing task; demand analysis; 
decisions concerning product, price, promotion, and trade channels. A firm's adjustment to 
marketing environment with emphasis on competitive strategy. 

552 Seminar in Pricing and Price Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 525 and classified M.B.A. status. Critical analysis of pricing problems. Pricing 
function examined from standpoints of economic theory, management science, business prac- 
tices, legal constraints, ethical considerations. Relationship of pricing objectives, policies, strate- 
gies, methods market behavior, goals of firm. 

553 Seminar in Product Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 525 and classified M.B.A. status. Designed to assist marketing management 
in the formulation and execution of marketing plans for new and existing products. Examination 
of the management decision areas and procedures search, preliminary evaluation, development, 
testing, commercialization products. 

554 Seminar in Promotion (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 525, 452, and classified M.B.A. status. Critical analysis of the promotion mix 
as employed by businesses to optimize profitable operations. Particular emphasis given to: 
determination of promotional goals, planning, budgeting, controlling promotional programs; and 
measuring promotional effectiveness. 


836— 4 315 


140 Quantitative Methods 

555 Seminar in Marketing Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 452, 525, consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. The application 
of scientific method to marketing decisions; research methodology and models; decision-making 
applications. 

556 Seminar in Consumer Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites; Marketing 525 and classified M.B.A. status. Design and evaluation of marketing com- 
munications programs in consumer and industrial settings based on the critical analysis of buyer 
decision-making and communications models. Discussion, cases, and projects. 

558 Seminar in International Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 519 or equivalent and classified M.B.A. status. Includes: comparative inter- 
national marketing systems; managerial techniques and strategies as they apply to multinational 
and domestic firms engaged in export; and the impact of pK)litical, legal, social, economic and 
cultural forces ufwn the decision-making process. 

559 Seminar in Marketing Thought and Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 525 and classified M.B.A. status. Application of theoretical concepts in the 
behavioral sciences, managerial sciences and quantitative methods to the development of theo- 
ries and models in marketing. The emphasis is on the interdisciplinary exchange of ideas relating 
to marketing. Evolving concepts and theories in marketing are appraised. May be repeated for 
credit. 

595 Modern Capitalism (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 595) 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, consent of instructor and approval by department chair. May 
be repeated for credit. 


QUANTITATIVE METHODS COURSES 

170 Introduction to Quantitative Methods (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 150A or equivalent. For those business majors concentrating in quantitative 
methods. Emphasizes application of the mathematical tools which the student learns in a first 
course in calculus and analytic geometry. 

264 Computer Programming (2) 

Introduction to problem-oriented languages of computers. The solving of problems using computer 
programming. May be repeated for credit. 

265 Computer Methods in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 130 or equivalent (may be taken concurrently). Introduction to sets, logic, 
counting, frequency distributions, and probability. Solving problems on a digital computer with 
a compiler language. 

280 Computer Language Survey (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 264, 265, or equivalent. A study of selected computer languages. Introduction to 
formal language theory, nunr>erical data processing, string and list processing, formal structure 
manipulating, recursive routines. 

289 Computer Methods in Social Science (3) 

An introduction to the history and application of digital computers to problems in the social sciences. 
Student written programs in a problem-oriented computer language. Discussion of computers, 
law and society; artificial intelligence; and other topics of current interest. 

360 Management Science Methods in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 265 or equivalent and Math 1 30. Concepts of mathematical methods and their 
application to business and economic problems. Elementary mathematical optimization models. 
Students with a quantitative methods concentration must take QM 363 in lieu of this course. 


841—34 4 340 


Quantitative Methods 141 

361 Statistical Methods in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 265 or equivalent and Math 1 30. Collection, analysis, and presentation of statistical 
data. Random sampling, estimation, and hypothesis testing. Introduction to regression and corre- 
lation. 

363 Management Science (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 150B or QM 170. Introduction to the basic concepts of management science and 
its relationship to economics and decision theory. Topics surveyed include optimization in 
continuous models, linear programming, queueing and inventory models, dynamic programming 
and decision-making in the business environment. 

364 Computer Logic and Programming (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 264, 265, or equivalent, and QM 280 (may be taken concurrently). An introduc- 
tory survey of assembler language, hardware organization, design, logic, and system software of 
modern digital computers. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

367 Statistics and Society (3) 

A descriptive, non-mathematical survey of the impact of statistical concepts and techniques on 
social, political, biological, and environmental life of mankind. 

382 Information Structures and Machine Language Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 364. A formal discussion of information structures, the types of processes for which 
they are appropriate, and their relative computational efficiencies. Assignments implemented in 
a variety of machine languages. 

420 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 361 and Economics 310 or 320. Statistical methods applied to problems In business 
and industry; fundamentals of index-number constructions; practical multiple regression models 
with computer solutions; basic techniques in time-series analysis of trend, cyclical and seasonal 
components; correlation of time-series and forecasting with the computer. 

422 Surveys and Sampling Design and Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 361. Principles for designing busir>ess and economic surveys. Applications in 
accounting, marketing research, economic statistics and the social sciences. Basic methods of 
sampling: simple random, stratified and multistage design; construction of sampling frames; 
detecting and controlling non-sampling errors. 

430 Nonparametric Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 361 . The application of nonparametric statistical methods to problems in business 
and economics. Topics covered include sign tests, rank correlation, contingency tables, order 
statistics, runs. 

446 Computer Programming Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 382. A study of techniques for establishing the correctness of algorithms, estimating 
time and storage requirements of algorithms, and selecting the operational environment and 
linguistic media appropriate for algorithms. 

448 Digital Simulation in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 280, and Math 435 or QM 461. A study of techniques of generating stochastic 
variates and their use in solving numerical problems and studying operational problems in 
queueing, communication, economic, inventory, scheduling and other business models. 

461 Advanced Statistics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 170 or Math 150B and QM 361 or Math 335. An advanced treatment of the theory 
and application of the topics covered in QM 361, using the methods of the calculus. Moments, 
generating functions, point and interval estimation, Neyman-Pearson and Likelihood Ratio Hy- 
pothesis Tests. 

464 Information Retrieval and Natural Language Processing (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 364 or consent of instructor. An examination of modern computer hardware, the 
techniques of programming it, and the languages in which such programs are written. Includes 
discussion of memory protection, interrupt systems, recursive programming, list-structured-lan- 
guages and user-oriented languages. 

465 Linear Programming (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 1 50A and QM 1 70 or consent of instructor. The theory and applications of linear 
programming. Topics include: linear programming and the simplex algorithm; starting proce- 
dures; the dual and economic interpretation; parametric programming and sensitivity analysis; 
and transportation and assignment problems. 


846 -^ 4 365 


142 Quantitative Methods 

466 Nonlinear Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 465, Math 281, or consent of instructor. A unified study of nonlinear programming 
theory with emphasis on computational algorithms and industrial applications. Topics will in- 
clude: Kuhn-Tucker theorem, duality, quadratic programming, integer programming, dynamic 
programming, search techniques, and post-optimality analysis. 

467 Statistical Quality Control (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 361 . Shewhart Control Charts for variables, percent defective, and defects. Toler- 
ances, process capacity, special control charts, acceptance sampling, and batch processing 
problems. Bayesian aspects of process control. 

469 Reliability Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 461 or equivalent. Statistical principles of reliability; hazard functions; point and 
interval estimation of reliability; reliability demonstration; growth models. 

470 Conflict, Bargaining and Cooperation (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 265, Math 1 20, or consent of instructor. Analysis of the structure of two-, three- 
and many-sided conflict, bargaining, and cooperation by means of the theory of games of 
strategy. The structure of strategy and utility, domination, negotiability and non-negotiability, 
cooperation and equilibrium. 

475 Multivariate Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 461, or equivalent. The least squares principle; estimation and hypothesis testing 
in linear regression; multiple and curvilinear regression models; discriminant analysis; principal 
components analysis; application of multivariate analysis in business and industry. 

460 Information Theory and Cybernetics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 265, 361, and Math 250. Study of complex systems in their static aspects; informa- 
tion contents and communications and their dynamic aspects; change, control and stability. 

482 Introduction to Discrete Structures (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 150A,B and either QM 382 or consent of instructor. Combinatorial and graph 
theory techniques applied to study of known and unknown structures, to counting, approximate 
counting and enumeration of structural configurations, and to resolution of discrete optimization 
problems. 

484 Computer Assisted Instruction (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 264 and consent of instructor, knowledge of computer organization, terminology, 
and experience in programming. A survey of computer-assisted and computer-based instruction 
consisting of a review of present research activities and including: methodology of educational 
approaches, implementations, and present achievements. 

485 Programming Systems and Programming Language Processing (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 382. A study of monitor, assembler, and compiler systems and the hardware, 
firmware, and software characteristics required in a real-time, interactive environment. 

486 Automata Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 382 and Math 250, or consent of instructor. A formal introduction to the theory 
of computation and its relation to modern computing techniques. Includes development of 
Turing machines, recursive functions, equivalerKe theorems, and the algebraic theory of recog- 
nizers. 

487 Artificial Intelligence (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 382. Selected topics of current Interest from heuristic programming, pattern recog- 
nition, learning systems, problem solving systems, and formal symbol manipulating systems. 

488 Introduction to Pattern Recognition (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 382 and 461, or consent of Instructor. Classification techniques, discriminant 
functions, training algorithms, potential function theory, supervised and unsuf^ervised learning, 
feature selection, clustering techniques, multidimensional rotations and rank ordering relations. 

490 Stochastic Process Models in Business and Industry (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 461, Math 281, or consent of Instructor. Models of industrial waiting line and 
storage systems. Markov chains, single and multiple server nKxlels, discrete and continuous 
processes, and homogeneous birth and death processes. 

495 Symposium in Applied Mathematics (1) 

Prerequisites: a major in engineering, mathematics, or business administration (quantitative meth- 
ods) and at least junior standing. A series of weekly lectures to be given on varied topics in 
applied mathematics by invited experts in areas of current research and applications. 


850—34 4 385 


Quantitative Methods 143 


497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: quantitative methods concentration, senior standing, and approval by the department 
chair. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. 
May be reF>eated for credit. 

512, 513 Quantitative Business Decision Techniques (33) 

Prerequisites: QM 512 must be taken before QM 513 as must Accounting 510 and Economics 514; 
classified M.B.A. status. The development and application of mathematical and statistical meth- 
ods, including mathematical models, computer programming and simulation, used in business 
decision-making. 

526 Quantitative Business Decision Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 513 and classified M.B.A. status. Techniques from probability, statistical decision 
theory, and computer simulation applied to problems of management. 

560 Operations Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 150A, QM 513 and classified M.B.A. status. Techniques of operations research, 
with emphasis on model construction. Topics include optimization in continuous models, linear 
programming, queueing and scheduling models, inventory models, dynamic programming. (Not 
open to students with QM 363) 

561 Seminar in Operations Research (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 560 or consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. A particular topic in 
operations research, such as simulation, inventory theory, waiting line theory, or synthesis of 
large scale systems will be covered in depth with special emphasis on research methods. 

565 File Management and Information Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 464 or consent of instructor. An examination of innovative real-time computer 
based information systems in industry and government. 

566 Design of Experiments (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 513 and classified M.B.A. status. A survey of the fundamentals of exp>erimental 
design, including analysis of variance, factorial experiments, nested designs, confounding, and 
fractional replication. 

571 Seminar in Quantitative Methods of Policy Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 363 or 560 and classified M.B.A. status. The synthesis, analysis and evaluation of 
p)olicy alternatives through the use of quantitative methods. The analyst's role in evaluating 
operations of an enterprise is demonstrated by individual and team efforts in the design, develop- 
ment, performance and communication of results of operations research projects. 

576 Business Modeling and Simulation (3) 

Prerequisites: Graduate status and consent of instructor. Theory of modeling and simulation of 
business activities. Selected topics include planning models, flow graphs, queueing phenomena, 
industrial dynamics, human factors and large scale systems. 

581 Advanced Statistical Analysis for Business Decisions (3) 

Prerequisites: Graduate status and consent of instructor. Advanced treatment of classical and mod- 
ern methods of decisionmaking. IrKludes topics in experimental design, multiple regression 
analysis, nonparanwtric methods, Bayesian decision theory, utility theory and sequential decision 
theory, including dynamic programming. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-^) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Student will select and have approved a thesis topic, show 
evidence of original research and must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a faculty 
committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and approval by the department chair. May be repeated for 
credit. 


863—34 4 450 


:,.s . M ^ . ‘ . 'i _ - . 

. ‘ •!^"r K ‘ ,; f , . -i; 

I'' I' V. ' ' . '.. . .. . '* ' ‘..■’Jy '.-i -.j . ,, 

.{.j/-/’’/'''" ‘ "Vt' ‘ It. ^ 

‘ ■ > ri; ' 

‘ ' ' ■ - ‘ ■' " 'i r* 

:■ ', •'■■..s'-. V '■ ,> r r^. y 3 

■ ■ ’ ' ■ )■ t ,/ ••'.wjl tf',. : lOr I *>!/' '’.<•“ ■ >' 

' ' ■ '.■ - 'y- ; ^ yi ' r j' ijfj.;. ' 

■ ■ , ■■■ - 
' ' ■ ' -•■■ ■ ■ 

■ ; ’ i. I . 'V /);> ■ vr , 

'■ I '. ■ '■ .• ^ . /.•.;.?^ -Vf, ,•; '••- . 

• ' t * ' '■''•-■'•iiJvY? 'T 



CROSS-DISCIPLINARY 
UNIVERSITY PROGRAMS 


146 


CROSS-DISCIPLINARY UNIVERSITY 
PROGRAMS 


COMPUTER SCIENCE PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
Ronald Miller 
Acting Chair 

Gary Bloom (Quantitative Methods), Wen Chow (Quantitative Methods), Ronald Colman (Quan- 
titative Methods), Robert Curry (Mathematics), Richard Gilbert (Mathematics), Walter Hudetz 
(Engineering), Eugene Hunt (Engineering), Marshall McFie (Quantitative Methods), Demetrios 
Michalopoulos (Quantitative Methods), Sam Pierce (Mathematics), Chennareddy Reddy (Engi- 
neering), Herbert Rutemiller (Quantitative Methods), Jesus Tuazon (Engineering), Donnamaie 
White (Quantitative Methods) 

COUNCIL MEMBERS 

Ronald Colman, Richard Gilbert, Walter Hudetz, Larry Kaufman,* Ronald Miller, Sam Pierce, Her- 
bert Rutemiller, Edward Sowell, Mahadeva Venkatesan 
Computer science degree programs are administered by the Computer Science Council, an interdis- 
ciplinary group representing the Department of Mathematics, the Department of Quantitative Meth- 
ods and the Division of Engineering. 

The Association for Computing Machinery has given the following discipline description of computer 
science: 

"Computer science is not simply concerned with the design of computing devices — nor is it the 
design of computing devices — nor is it just the art of numerical calculation, as important as these 
topics are. Computer science is concerned with information in much the same sense that physics 
is concerned with energy; computer science is devoted to the representation, storage, manipula- 
tion and presentation of information in an environment p)ermitting automatic information systems. 

... All forms of information — numeric, alphabetic, pictorial, verbal, tactile, olfactory, etc. — are 
of interest to computer science." 

The computer scientist is interested in effective ways to present information, algorithms to transform 
information, languages in which to express algorithms, effective means to monitor the process and 
display transformed information, and effective ways to accomplish thc^ goals at reasonable cost. 

B.S. IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 

The degree requires completion of 54 units of basic courses which include courses in mathematics 
and statistics as well as in computer languages, information structures and computer logic design. 
Fifteen additional units are required beyond the basic courses. Considerable flexibility Is provided 
to the student in that he may elect a 1 5-unit concentration in mathematics, engineering or quantita- 
tive methods. The student's grade-p)oint average must be at least 2.0 for the 69 units required for 
the major, and none of these may be taken on a credit-no credit basis. 

Required courses are as follows: 

Units 

Lower Division 21 

Mathematics 150A,B Analytic Geometry and Calculus (8) 

Mathematics 250 Intermediate Calculus (4) 

Mathematics 281 Linear Alegebra with Differential Equations (3) 

Quantitative Methods 265 Computer Methods (3) or 
Engineering 205 Digital Computation (3) 

Quantitative Methods 280 Computer Language Survey (3) 

• Student. 


867—34 4 470 


Computer Science 


147 

Upper Division 33 

Quantitative Methods 364 Computer Logic and Programming (3) 

Quantitative Methods 382 Information Structures (3) 

Quantitative Methods 485 Programming Systems (3) 

Engineering 402 Digital Logic (3) 

Engineering 405 Digital Computer Design and Organization (3) 

Mathematics 340 Numerical Analysis (3) 

Mathematics 335 Mathematical Probability (3) or 
Engineering 423 Engineering Probability and Statistics (3) 

Mathematics 435 Mathematical Statistics 0)or 
Quantitative Methods 461 Advanced Statistics (3) or 
Mathematics 440 Advanced Numerical Analysis (3) 

Quantitative Methods 448 Digital Simulation (3) 

Quantitative Methods 363 Introduction to Management Science (3) 

Economics 301 Economic Principles (3) 

Units 

Ekctives: 1 5 

A minimum of 1 5 units of upper division electives, selected to comprise a concentration 
in one of the three areas: Engineering, quantitative methods or mathematics. The 15 units 
may include courses in other areas besides the concentration, but all electives must be 
approved by the student's adviser. 

Total 69 

Elective Courses; 

The approved list of upper division electives are as follows: 

Engineering: 303, 303L, 308,* 402L, 405L, 424, 445, 445L, 483 
Mathematics: 302, 304, 306, 308,* 310, 330, 350A, 350B, 412, 430, 431, 440 
Quantitative Methods: 446, 464, 465, 466, 467, 475, 480, 482, 486, 487, 488 
Economics. 310, 440 
Accounting: 405 

All courses within the computer science program originate in other departments within the 
university. Students should refer to the department originating the course for description. 

MINOR IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 

Students majoring in other fields, including those without an extensive mathematics background, 
may earn a minor in computer science. A minimum of 21 units of computer science are required 
for a minor. These shall include Quantitative Methods 265, Quantitative Methods 289 or Engineering 
205 in addition to Quantitative Methods 280 and either Quantitative Methods 364 or Engineering 
402, and a minimum of four courses (at most two from the same area) selected from the following 
upper division courses in the indicated areas: 

Engineering: 317, 402, 403*, 405, 424, 445, 458 
Mathematics: 335, 340*, 435*, 440 

C^uantitative Methods; 364, 382, 446, 448, 461*, 464, 480, 482, 485, 487, 488, 495 

Students must have a 2.0 grade-point average or better in the minor. These courses may not be taken 

on a credit /no credit basis. 

Student Advisement 

A student majoring in computer science may select a faculty adviser from a list of advisers from the 
faculties of engineering, mathematics and quantitative methods; otherwise an adviser will be as- 
signed. Students are strongly urged to consult with their advisers each semester, or as frequently as 
needed. 

Group advisement sessions are sponsored each semester by the Computer Science Council in 
conjunction with the Computer Club. Entering students are especially urged to attend these sessions. 
Contact the Department of Mathematics, the Department of Quantitative Methods or the Division 
of Engineering for details. 

*Not both Mathematics 435 and Quantitative Methods 461 nor both Mathematics 340 arni Engineering 403 may be used to fulfill 
mirw requirements. Not both Mathematics 308 and Engineering 308 may be used to fulfill upper division requirements. 


871—34 4 490 


1 48 Environmental Studies 

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
joel Weintraub 
Program Director 

COUNCIL OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES 

Arthur Earick (Urban Studies), Barry Gerber (Technological Studies), Lyle Kalish (Economics), 
Prem Saint (Earth Science), Beverly Schmidt (Student), Frank St. Clair (Student), Barry Thomas 
(Environmental Education), Floyd Thomas (Engineering) 

Environmental studies is an interdisciplinary program of courses dealing with man and his interac- 
tions with his environments — cultural as well as natural. The courses, both pre-existing in various 
departments and specially developed, attempt to integrate knowledge and methods from several 
disciplines, all of which independently study special asp)ects of this area. The program will deal with 
man and his social and cultural aspect, as he exploits, modifies and attempts to achieve balance with 
his environment. The student will have the opportunity to cope with problems involving ecological 
changes, pollution, technological solutions, economics, balanced land use, and politics. 

The program is intended to provide the widest possible variety of students with an opp)ortunity to 
become acquainted with and acquire a common vocabulary in this vital area. A basic element will 
be an introductory seminar in environmental studies, which will bring together students and staff 
from various disciplines to delineate environmental problems and explore fundamental methods. 
This seminar may be taken either on the undergraduate or graduate level and will be prerequisite 
to all further work in the projected graduate program. Additional graduate-level interdisciplinary 
courses serve as foundations for graduate curricula in the program options. 

No degree objective in environmental studies is planned for undergraduates; however, participation 
by such students in the program is encouraged. Individuals interested in environmental problems, 
irresp)ective of their majors, and those planning to enter job-related areas should consider supple- 
menting their regular course schedules with elements of this program. 

A Master of Science in Environmental Studies is offered. The student may elect emphases in human 
ecology, urban studies or environmental education; a technological studies emphasis is under 
development. 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES 
Prerequisites 

Prerequisites to classification in the M.S. in environmental studies program are as follows; 

1. A bachelor's degree with an overall CPA of at least 3.0 for the last 60 units. If the student has 
a grade deficiency, he will be eligible for classification if he achieves a CPA of 3.0 in nine units 
of adviser-approved coursework. 

2. Completion of Environmental Studies 440. 

3. Completion of no more than nine semester units of adviser-approved coursework. 

Study Plan 

The M.S. in Environmental Studies requires a minimum of 36 units of adviser-approved coursework 
with a CPA of 3.0 or better. 

I. Interdisciplinary Core, Environmental Studies 
440 Introduction to Environmental Studies (3) 

501 Environmental Analysis: Natural and Urban Environment (3) 

502 Environmental Analysis; Technology, Culture, and Change (3) 

595 Environmental Problems; Seminar (3) 

II. Project, Internship, Thesis 

Every student will either prepare a research project or participate in an internship at an 
institutional or private agency. A thesis is required on the results of these experiences. Projects 
will be interdisciplinary in nature. (6-9) 

III. Individualized Coursework 

Graduate level courses in the field of the undergraduate major or appropriate discipline (6) 


877—34 4 520 


Human Services 149 

and additional courses outside of the individual's major (9-12) will be chosen with the 
student's background in mind. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page (P), and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES COURSES 

431 Ecology of the Santa Ana Mountains (3) 

Seminars, field investigation, and laboratory compilation of environmental factors of a wild region 
within urbanizing Southern California. Team-taught intensive field investigations utilizing tech- 
niques of aerial photography, remote sensing, geologic and vegetation mapping, instrumentation 
of environmental factors and taxonomy. Open to advanced undergraduate and graduate stu- 
dents. 

440 Introduction to Environmental Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: advanced standing in an academic major. Principles, fundamentals and current prob- 
lems involving man and his physical, biological and man-made environment. Human ecology, 
urban studies, environmental education and technological studies are introduced to the student. 
Seminars, field trips and simulations. 

468 Law and Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 350 or Environmental Studies 440 or consent of instructor. An interdiscipli- 
nary seminar in the role of law in the allocation, management, and administration of resources 
and the environment. Relevant studies relate to conservation law, land tenure, water rights, 
environmental health and other topics. (Same as Geography 468) 

501 Environmental Analysis: Natural and Urban Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: Environmental Studies 440 or consent of instructor. A look at the factors influencing 
our views and planning approaches in natural and urban situations. Environmental planning 
including use of environmental impact rep)orts is included. Seminars, possible field trips and 
simulations. 

502 Environmental Evaluation and Protection (3) 

Prerequisite: Environmental Studies 501 or consent of instructor. A survey of selected environmental 
problems with emphasis on evaluation of quality standards and their impact on human health. 
Seminars and possible field trips. 

595 Environmental Problems (3) 

An interdisciplinary seminar discussing specific problems in environmental management. 

5% Internship (3) 

An opportunity for the student to gain field experience in governmental or private agencies. Only 
open to degree candidates in environmental studies. 

597 Project (3) 

Open to graduate students only by consent of instructor with whom the student wishes to pursue 
independent study in environmental studies. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: an officially app>ointed thesis committee and advancement to candidacy. Guidance in 
the preparation of a project or thesis for the master's degree. 

HUMAN SERVICES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 

George Watson (Psychology) 

Coordinator 
ADVISORY BOARD 

Marilyn Bates (Education), Paula Clark (Student), Gerald Corey (Interdisciplinary Center), Ernest 
Dondis (Psychology), Ray Steele (Student), Edsel Stiel (Mathematics) 

The Bachelor of Science in Human Services is a program designed to prepare the student with a 
specified set of clearly defined competencies which will qualify a fjerson to work in community 
service agencies, such as institutions dealing with exceptionality, child care, geriatrics, correction and 
detention, community change, minority relations, and career development. 

To complete the degree, students must satisfactorily complete 57 units as indicated below. An 


885 -^ 4 555 


150 Interdisciplinary Center 

adviser-approved study plan is required. Upon entrance into the major, students should consult with 
the coordinator regarding advisement policy. Each course counted toward the major must be 
completed wth a grade of "C" or higher. 

Units 

A. Core requirements 39 

Psychology 101 Introductory Psychology (3) 

Interdisciplinary Center 318 Character and Conflict (3) 

Psychology 331 Psychology of Personality (3) 

Psychology 341 Abnormal Psychology (3) 

Psychology 361 Developmental Psychology i3) or 
Education 312 Human Growth and Development (3) 

Human Services 388 Research Analysis (3) 

Human Services 390 Theories and Techniques of Counseling (3) 

Human Services 445 Practicum in Human Services. (Four consecutive semesters 
required. Maximum of 12 units, including equivalents.) 

Psychology 471 Behavior Modification (3) 

Human Services 489 Assessment Seminar (3) 

8. Electives — Minority Studies 3 

Three units selected from minority studies — e.g., Afro-ethnic, women, Chicano 
studies, native American studies, sociology. 

C. Electives 15 

Fifteen units of coursework, planned with an adviser, relevant to the student's career 
goals. _ 

Total 57 


HUMAN SERVICES COURSES 

388 Research Analysis (3) (Formerly 488) 

The design and interpretation of experiments involving humanistic concerns. Various forms of 
summary and inferential statistics are covered. The student will be required to design and run 
an experiment as part of the course. 

390 Theories aruJ Techniques of Counseling (3) (Formerly 490) 

An introduction to the various approaches to counseling with emphasis uF)on the applications of 
theories to irtdividual and group counseling situations. Techniques and methods of counseling, 
the counseling relationship, ethics, and problems in counseling. Course should be taken prior to, 
or concurrently with the first practicum. 

445 Practicum in Human Services (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of faculty screening committee. (Interdisciplinary Center 318 must be taken 
prior to the second semester of practicum.) Practical experience in campus and community 
settings. Seminar and field placement. 

489 Assessment Seminar (3) 

Prerequisites: senior starniing, concurrent enrollment in third or fourth semester practicum, and 
consent of instructor. The degree candidate must demonstrate for faculty assessment team a 
required number of competencies appropriate to his program at a required level of mastery. May 
be repeated for credit with ap>proval of faculty assessment team. 

INTERDISCIPLINARY CENTER 

FACULTY 
Paul Obler 
Director 

Gerald Corey, Barbara D'Angelo, William Lyon 

The Interdisciplinary Center was created out of the conviction that much of the real excitement 
happening in the intellectual world today (and probably other times as well) is at the bourniary lines 
where traditional disciplines converge. The concrete reality of the human situation raises problems 
amenable to no facile descriptions or easy solutions — certainly none that any one discipline can 


889—34 4 575 


Interdisciplinary Center 151 

yield. We are coming more and more to recognize the need for diverse perspectives — that whether 
we are confronting the immense complexity of the modern city or the subtle dimensions of love 
or anxiety, no single frame of reference or specialized knowledge can be sufficient. 

Many of the courses now offered or planned by the center lie outside the province of any single 
department or academic discipline. They challenge students and professors alike to utilize their 
specialized knowledges and yet to go beyond them. A subject like love may be approached from 
historical, psychological, aesthetic or philosophical perspectives. Several courses utilize the comple- 
mentary methodologies of the physical sciences, social sciences, or humanities. It follows that 
interdisciplinary courses frequently involve two or more professors and feature guests from outside 
the academic community. 


INTERDISCIPLINARY CENTER COURSES 

301 Psychological Approaches to Literature (3) 

Development of the work of I. A. Richards begun in his Practical Criticism. Psychological experimen- 
tation relevant to understanding errors of interpretation of literary texts. Several experimental 
approaches to understanding errors in interpretation will be described and illustrated. Current 
therapeutic techniques for the development of attitude change. 

303 Yoga (3) 

A study of Yoga; its theories, literature and practices; some methods of meditation taught; its 
relevance for today's world. 

310 Seminar in Human Sexuality (3) 

The concept of sexuality as it relates to man, including data regarding sexual practices, their biologi- 
cal and social implications, and their relationship to population and the survival of the species. 

315 Jazz: Past, Present and Future (3) 

jazz — its primitive and European roots; cross-cultural description of improvisation. Lectures, demon- 
strations, some concerts. 

318 Character and Conflict: The Struggle for Autonomy (3) 

An exploration — via lectures, discussion and group encounter — into the problems and techniques 
of resolving the conflicts created by the individual's struggle to achieve and maintain personal 
autonomy while living successfully in an automated world. Topics include: autonomy, masculini- 
ty-feminity, love, sex, marriage, meaning, and encountering others. 

351 Poverty in America (3) 

A study of the extent, causes, consequences and possible cures of poverty in modern America. 
Poverty will be treated as, among other things, a political issue, and spokesmen from various 
p>oiitical groups will lecture on their organization's approach to the poverty question. Lectures, 
discussion, some documentary films. 

402 Art, Literature and the Development of Consciousness (3) 

An application of theories of consciousness, particularly existential and Jungian, to poems, paintings 
and musical compositions. Intensive encounters between the individual and the art work; opp)or- 
tunities at checking one's own responses against those of others and exploring the significance 
of the differences. (Same as Comparative Literature 402) 

403 The Quest for Self: East and West (3) 

A comparative study of quest narratives which exemplify the Eastern and Western man's search for 
self-identity and fulfillment. Religious, psychological and literary texts will be used to help 
illuminate the comparison. (Same as Comparative Literature 403 and Anthropology 416) 

404 The Nature of Love: Plato to Joyce (3) 

An examination of the various dimensions of love as found in notable philosophical, psychological 
and literary works. (Same as Comparative Literature 404) 

405 Psychoanalysis and Drama (3) 

A detailed study of Freud's topographic and structural theories and their recent elaborations; the 
application of theory to selected readings in dramatic literature mainly, but also to some fiction, 
poetry and films. (Same as Comparative Literature 405) 


895—34 4 605 


152 


Latin American Studies 


410 Self-Actualization Group: Experiences in Human Growth (3) 

Prerequisite: Interdisciplinary Center 318 and consent of instructor. Intensive small group experi- 
ences will assist each individual in unleashing his own growth potential and accelerating his own 
developmental processes. Self-actualization and related existential and humanistic concepts will 
be explored in depth, using recently developed methods. Lectures, individual assignments sup- 
plement the class experience. Credit-no credit grading only. 

411 Group Process and Leadership (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The impact of the individual on other persons in a group and what 
takes place in a group, the structure and process of a group; the influence of leadership. Theories 
and concepts of those forces operating in a group situation, as well as a first-hand experience 
in of one's own self in a group; feedback on how others see one in a group relation; and 
involvement in group dynamics. Credit-no credit grading only. 

412 Special Group Experiences (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive group experience familiarizing the student with a 
practical encounter approach and its theoretical basis. Sections may be rep)eated for credit 
including: transactional analysis group; Gestalt group; OF>en couple; guided fantasies; residential 
marathon group; search for identity; therapeutic community; existential group; and other experi- 
mental group approaches. Credit-no credit grading only. 

418 Practicum in Group Leadership (3) 

Prerequisite: two semesters from Interdisciplinary Center 410, 411, 412 or equivalent personal 
development experience; consent of instructor. Supervised experience as a group leader, with 
emphasis upon various approaches and techniques to group leadership. Practicum in group work 
with coleaders. May be repeated for credit. 

421 Great 19th-Century Revolutionaries: Darwin, Marx, Freud (3) 

Consideration of the three great 19th-century revolutionaries, Darwin, Marx and Freud, with a 
purpose of discovering the force of their impact on 2C)th<entury society. Their major literary 
works will be discussed and their biographies studied to determine why they became revolutio- 
naries. 

422 lewish and Comparative Mysticism (3) 

A description and analysis of Jewish mysticism, and its comparison with other systems of mysticism 
from different cultures. (Same as Anthropology 422) 

450 The Way (3) 

An exploration of sensory awareness, interpersonal relations, dreams, body language through study 
and through laboratory sessions in Gestalt theory. 

451 Philosophical Backgrounds of Modern Literature (3) 

The connection between representative writers and such thinkers and philosophers as Freud, Spen- 
gler, Schopenhauer, Nietzsche and Kierkegaard. (Same as English 451) 

452 Student Protest (3) 

The dynamics of student protest with major attention given to contempKjrary activities in the United 
States. (Same as Political Science 417) 

470 Seminar: Interdisciplinary Issues (3) 

Concentrated study each year of a different key issue approached from an interdisciplinary view and 
frequently combined with two or three courses in other departments to form a nine-hour block. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects to be taken with consent of instructor and program coordinator. May 
be repeated for credit. 

799 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects to be taken with consent of instructor and program coordinator. May 
be repeated for credit. 

LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 

Thomas Flickema 
Director 

Oswaldo Arana (Foreign Languages), Nancy Baden (Foreign Languages), Warren Beck (History), 
David Feldman (Linguistics), Dagoberto Fuentes (Chicano Studies), Frank Hatch (Dance), Ar- 
turo Jasso (Foreign Languages), Paul Kane (Education), William Ketteringham (Geography), 


9(X3-34 5 5 


Latin American Studies 153 


Martin Klein (Communications), John Lafky (Economics), Leroy joesink-Mandeville (An- 
thropology), Sheldon Maram (History), Lon McClanahan (Biological Science), Neil Maloney 
(Earth Science), Marlene de Rios (Anthrop>ology), Edgar Wiley (Management), Jon Yinger 
(Political Science) 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES 

The Latin American studies program is designed for students desiring a general education with 
specific focus on Latin America. Therefore, students planning careers which will involve residence 
in, or a knowledge of Latin America (such as teaching, business, government, scientific research, 
engineering, or journalism) will profit immensely from this program. Moreover, the program pro- 
vides a sound base for students who will teach Spanish or the social sciences in the secondary 
schools. The program also prepares the student for graduate work in Latin American studies or in 
other disciplines involving a specialization in Latin America. 

Foundation Courses: 

All students should develop a language proficiency level which is the equivalent of Spanish 204 and 
Portuguese 102. 

Students with no language background should take: 

Spanish 101 Fundamental Spanish (5) 

Spanish 102 Fundamental Spanish (5) 

Spanish 203 Intermediate Spanish (3) 

Spanish 204 Intermediate Spanish (3) 

Portuguese 101 Fundamental Portuguese (4) 

Portuguese 102 Fundamental Portuguese (4) 

However, a student with a knowledge of Spanish and/or Portuguese may be able to meet part or 
all of the foundation course requirements by taking a test administered by the Department of Foreign 
Languages and Literatures. 

Required Core Courses: 

Language: 

Spanish 317 Advanced Conversation and Composition O) or either 
Portuguese 317 or 318 Advanced Conversation and Composition 

Literature: 

Spanish 441 Spanish American Literature from Modernismo to Present (3) or 
Portuguese 441 Brazilian Literature (3) 

History and Culture: 

Spanish 316 Introduction to Spanish American Civilization (3) or 
Portuguese 325 Introduction to Luzo Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) 

History 350A Colonial Latin America (3) 

History 350B Republican Latin America (3) 


Recommended Selected Concentrations: 1 5 units selected from three or more of the following 
groupings; 


Culture: 

Portuguese 315 Introduction to Luzo Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) 
Portuguese 317 or 318 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) or 
Spanish 317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Portuguese 325 Contemporary Brazilian (3) or 
Spanish 316 Introduction to Spanish American Civilization (3) 
Anthropology 322 Peoples of Mesoamerica (3) 

Anthropology 324 Ancient Mesoamerica (3) 

Anthropology 325 Peoples of South America (3) 

Anthropology 326 Prehistory of South America (3) 


6 86012 


907-^ 5 25 


154 


Liberal Studies 


Fine Arts and Literature: 

Art 462 Art of Mesoamerica (3) 

Art 471 Art of Central and South America (3) 

Portuguese 441 Brazilian Literature (3) or 
Spanish 441 Spanish American Literature from Modernismo to the Present (3) 

Spanish 440 Spanish American Literature from the Conquest to 1888 (3) 

Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 485 Senior Seminar: Hispanic Topics (with consent of program director) 

History and Politics: 

History 450 Change in Contemporary Latin America (3) 

History 453A Mexico to 1910 (3) 

History 453B Mexico since 1910 (3) 

History 451 The Andean Nations (3) 

History 452 A Brazil to 1889 (3) 

History 452B 20th-Century Brazil (3) 

Political Science 438 Latin American Interest Groups (3) 

Political Science 431 Government and Politics of Latin America (3) 

Political Science 452 Latin American Foreign Policies (3) 

Geography and Economics: 

Geography 333 Geography of Latin America (3) 

Geography 433 Man and Geographic Relationships in Latin America (3) 

Economics 330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

Economics 333 Economic Development: Analyses and Case Studies (3) 

t Senior Seminar: 

Latin American Studies 401 Contemporary Latin America (3) 

LIBERAL STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
jara A. Krivanek 
Director 
Michael Tang 
PART-TIME 

Brian Mark (Liberal Studies), Robert Ostermeyer (Liberal Studies), Ann Untereiner (American 
Studies), Albert Vogeler (History) 

BOARD MEMBERS 

Marvin Rosen, Chair (Communications), )ohn Farrington (Student), Dagoberto Fuentes (Chicano 
Studies), Bernard Kravitz (Education), Pat Lackey (Sociology), Otto Sadovszky * (Director of 
Academic Advisement), H. Eric Streitberger (Science Education), Michael Tang (Liberal Studies), 
Elena Tumas (English), E. lames Weaver (American Studies), lames Young • (Associate Vice 
President, Academic Programs). 

Policy for the liberal studies program is determined by an interdisciplinary board of liberal studies. 
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN LIBERAL STUDIES 

The degree program in liberal studies is interdisciplinary, involving the interactions of two or more 
different disciplines. These interactions may range from simple communication of ideas among 
disciplines to the mutual integration of organizing concepts, methodology, procedures, epistemolo- 
gy, terminology and data. 

The liberal studies program affirms that specialized higher education is not appropriate for every 
individual student or for every social purpose; and that a liberal or generalist type of education has 
great value for both individuals and society. The liberal studies program is designed to explore and 
evolve the appropriate ideas and ideals for "educated” man in his current and future circumstances. 

t Prerequisite, conserrt ot irrstructor An interdiscipiinary team taught sef>KX semirw on topics relevant to contemporary Latin 
America. The exact content ol the course will vary depending upon the faculty and present corxiitions within Latin America 
May be repeated for credit. 

• University administrative officer 


912—34 5 50 


L iberal Studies 155 


The program in liberal studies is more than the simple absence of specialization — it has its own 
purposefully structured form and contents. For its primary goals, the program stresses problem- 
formulation and problem-solving, using the most appropriate methodologies and theories available. 
The program emphasizes and focuses upon the student's own foundational synthesis of experiences 
and knowledge to achieve new and more effective levels of awareness, skills, perspectives, and 
useful action attitudes and techniques. To achieve these goals, the program develops the following 
competencies in its majors: 

1 . The capacities to inventory, evaluate and integrate knowledge; 

2. The capacities to describe, explain and evaluate within a framework of interdisciplinary ideas and 
information; 

3. The capacities to combine breadth of perspective with depth of understanding so that the nature 
and boundaries of new experiences and problems can be expressed, specified and delineated; 

4. The capacities to transform such perceptions and diagnoses into either effective forms of artistic 
expression or social and individual actions; and 

5. The capacities to be effective in communication for different modes of inquiry, purposes and 
types of audiences — competencies to speak, write and persuade with authenticity, clarity, preci- 
sion and style and effectively to strengthen such communication through nonverbal and artistic 
means. 

As the primary organizing framework in the liberal studies program, each student focuses on a broad, 
complex problem, issue, or theme of his own choosing and pursues it through an individualized study 
plan in consultation with faculty advisers. In addition to providing a valuable experience, per se, in 
higher education, the liberal studies degree program can help the student prepare for a career or 
profession. It may, for example, provide a diversified degree appropriate for students seeking an 
elementary teaching credential. The student's choice of an appropriate theme, problem or issue can 
make the program a valuable background exp>erience to other careers or professions as well (for 
example, a prelaw student might choose as his area of inquiry in liberal studies, "Equality and 
Inequality in Society"). 

The total liberal studies major requires 48 units of coursework consisting of: (1) required liberal 
studies courses (21 units); and (2) an individualized program of approved and coordinated courses 


drawn, universitywide, from other disciplines (27 units). 

1. Liberal studies course listed in the approved degree program; Units 

101 Introduction to Liberal Studies 3 

• 201 Liberal Studies in Art and Humanities 3 

• 202 Liberal Studies in Science and Mathematics 3 

• 203 Liberal Studies in Social Sciences 3 

301 Proseminar in Liberal Studies 3 

480 Practicum in Liberal Studies 3 

490 Seminar in Liberal Studies 3 

21 

2. Individualized program of approved, coordinated courses drawn from other disciplines 

to develop a study plan based on an integrating problem, issue or theme * * .... 27 

Total required 48 


LIBERAL STUDIES COURSES 

101 Introduction to Liberal Studies (3) 

Focus on the concept of liberal studies. Definition of interdisciplinarity and its relation to disciplines 
in natural sciences, social sciences, arts and humanities. Consideration of knowledge that gener- 
ates new krK)wledge. Preparation of student for an integrated general education program. 

“ Each department or program may oWer a course with interdisciplinary focus to fulfill this requirement. The course will be cross-listed 
with liberal studies by mutual agreement. 

•• Of the 27 program units, at least six upper division units must be elected in each of the three broad areas: humanities and the 
arts; science and matherrvatics; and social scierKes. In at least one of these areas, 12 upper division units must be taken. The 
Board of Liberal Studies must approve of the study plan urxler the individualized program. 


917-^ 5 75 


156 


Russian Area Studies 


301 Proseminar in Liberal Studies (3) 

Facilitates the integration of knowledge by focusing upon a common subject, problem, or phenome- 
non from various persfjectives. The course's practical outcome is a study proposal to be submit- 
ted to the Board of Liberal Studies for approval. 

324 World Literature to 1050 (3) 

(Same as Comparative Literature 324) 

325 World Literature 1650 to Present (3) 

(Same as Comparative Literature 325) 

RUSSIAN AREA STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
Charles Frazee 
Acting Director 

Robert Feldman (History), Ronald Helin (Geography), Karl Kahrs (Political Science), Harvey 
Mayer (Foreign Languages), Joyce Pickersgill (Economics), John Shippee (Political Science), 
Ted Smythe (Communications), Elena Tumas (Comparative Literature), Bruce Wright (Political 
Science), Michael Yessis (Physical Education) 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN RUSSIAN AREA STUDIES 

The Russian area studies major is an interdisciplinary program designed for students interested in 
the language, literature, politics, history, economics, ideology, customs and geography of the Soviet 
Union. In addition to fulfilling the various cultural objectives common to any liberal arts program, 
the Russian area studies major provides a foundation for teaching the Russian language and social 
studies on the elementary and secondary levels. This major serves especially the needs of students 
intending to pursue graduate studies and those who foresee employment in government and profes- 
sions that demand a regional as well as traditional orientation. 

To qualify for this major, a student must complete (1) 16 units of Russian language or their 
equivalent, (2) 24 units of upper division Russian area courses from at least four of the following 
fields: comparative literature, economics, geography, political science, history, foreign language, (3) 
1 5 units of upper division coursework in a related discipline to be determined in consultation with 
a Russian area counselor. Students are encouraged to have these units apply toward a second major 
in a traditional discipline. 

The basic lower division courses also may be used to meet general education requirements. 


RUSSIAN AREA STUDIES COURSES 

All courses within the Russian area studies program originate in other departments within the 
university. Students should refer to the department originating the course for description. 

Anthropology 

351 Peoples of Eastern Europe (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Communications 
499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Comparative Literature 

373 Masters of Russian Literature (3) 

374 Contemporary Russian Literature (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 


922—34 5 100 


Social Sciences 


157 


Economics 

330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

331 The Soviet Economy (3) 

391 Modernization of Russian Society (3)* 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Foreign Language: Russian 
315 Introduction to Russian Civilization (3) 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition 3) 

375 Introduction to Literary Form (3) 

400 Russian for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

431 Early Russian Literature (3) 

441 Tolstoy and Dostoevsky (3) 

451 The Golden Age of Russian Literature, (3) 

461 Russian Literature from 1917 (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Geography 

338 Geography of the Soviet Union (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

History 

434A Russia to 1890 (3) 

4348 Russian Revolution and the Soviet Regime (3) 

437 East Europe Since 1815 (3) 

490 Seminar in Polish History (3) 

490 Modernization of Russian Society (3)* 

490 Seminar in Russian Revolution, 1917 (3) 

491 Proseminar (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Political Science 

430 Government and Politics of the U.S.S.R. (3) 

431 Government and Politics of Authoritarian Systems (3) 

443 Theory and Philosophy of Marxism (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

PROGRAM IN SOCIAL SCIENCES 

FACULTY 

Lawrence de Craaf (History) 

Graduate Program Adviser 
Wayne Hobson 
ADVISORY BOARD 

Giles Brown (Graduate Studies), Norma Fimbres (Chicano Studies), Barry Gerber (Political 
ScierKe), Wacira Gethaiga (Afro-Ethnic Studies), Jean Nordstrom (Anthropology), Gary Pickers- 
gili (Economics), Gerald Rosen (Sociology), Imre Sutton (Geography), Joseph Thomas (Psy- 
chology), E. James Weaver (American Studies) 

• Students may sign up for this course for history credit under History 490 or economics credit ur>der EcorKKnics 391 . 


93S— 34 5 165 


158 Social Sciences 


MASTER OF ARTS IN SOCIAL SCIENCES 

This degree encompasses a series of coordinated programs of graduate studies, which emphasize 
the examination of human behavior and its relation to social institutions. These programs have the 
common purp>ose of exposing students to diverse methodologies, establishing the relationship be- 
tween disciplines, and providing the student with the opportunity to explore a selected area from 
a variety of intellectual fjerspcxrtives. 

The social sciences include the following related fields: Afro-ethnic studies, American studies, 
Anthropology, Chicano studies, economics, geography, history, political science, psychology and 
sociology. 

This degree is designed to provide interdisciplinary insights and tools for those students who are 
interested in (a) pursuing careers in government and business; (b) elementary or secondary teach- 
ing in the area of social studies; (c) a graduate program to complement their undergraduate degree 
in social science, liberal studies, area studies or other similar interdisciplinary programs; or (d) a 
custom tailored-program of advanced study in the liberal arts. 

Prerequisites 

It is recommended that an incoming student have an undergraduate major or the equivalent in one 
of the social sciences and substantial work in other social science fields.* The graduate program 
adviser will determine equivalence to major. 

An incoming student must have a grade-point average of 3.0 in upper division (undergraduate) 
social sciences courses; however, students may be considered for admission with grade deficiencies. 


Study Plan 

The study plan for the degree must include the following: Units 

1 . Social Sciences Core 6 

5(X) The Social Sciences in the Modern World: Theories (3) or 

502 Role of the Social Science Professional (3) 

501 The Social Sciences in the Modern World: Methods (3) 

2. Multidisciplinary Core 21 

Minimum 5(X)-level units (9) 

Maximum undergraduate units (12) 


The 21 units must be taken in at least two and generally three social science fields. At least nine 
of these units must be 500-level or graduate courses. At least two fields should be represented 
in the graduate units. 

3. Project or Thesis 3-6 

597 Project (3-6) 

•• 598 Thesis (3-6) 

Every student will prepare a project or thesis on a topic approved by the director and the 
student's committee. See descriptions below for details. Both the project and the thesis must 

reflect the student's interdisciplinary effort. 

Total 30-33 

For further information, consult the graduate program adviser. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 59, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


SOCIAL SCIENCES COURSES 

385 Philosophy of the Social Sciences (3) 

(Same as Philosophy 385) 

* The preiequisite for "substantial work" will vary anrtong departments arxi according to the specific courses within some depart- 
ments. Lack of substantial work in one or more fields will not ordtnahiy bar a student from admissK>n but will result in one or 
nx>re additional courses being required before the student may be classified. 

•• Subtect to 1974-75 curricukim approval. 


939--34 5 185 


Special Major 159 


500 The Social Sciences in the Modern World: Theories (3) 

A seminar providing a philosophical and theoretical basis for graduate work in the area of social 
science. It will focus on the Interrelationships which exist among the various social sciences as 
they relate to man in his social, physical and political environment. 

501 The Social Sciences in the Modern World: Methods (3) 

Analytical comparison of the historical, humanistic and scientific methodologies in the social 
sciences. This seminar will also deal with the contemporary trends in the social sciences methods. 

502 Role of the Social Science Professional (3) 

Examination of the role of the social science professional in public and private organizations. Focus 
on questions of role Identity, power and decision-making in organizations, relationships with 
clients, and relationships to broader questions of social policy. 

597 Project (3-6) 

Individual direction by committee of faculty in research and preparation of either: a prototype of 
a nonacademic professional paper; or an Innovative work in a media other than the written essay. 
Recommended for students planning to enter government agency or business. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) 

Open to graduate students in social science with the consent of program adviser or coordinator. May 
be repeated for credit. 

SPECIAL MAJOR PROGRAM 

From the total curriculum of the university, students may wish to plan a specially designed program 
of study that does not duplicate significantly any existing major or concentration at Cal State 
Fullerton. The special major (B.A. or M.A.) provides opportunities for selected students to pursue 
individualized programs of study leading to a degree when: legitimate academic and professional 
goals can be satisfied by a judicious selection of courses from two or more fields; and these aims 
cannot be satisfied by the authorized, standard degree majors that are available on the campus. This 
major, designed for exceptional cases of individual students only, provides an opportunity to develop 
concentrations or specializations outside the framework of existing majors. (U is not intended as a 
means of bypassing normal graduation requirements or as a means by which students may graduate 
who fail to complete the degree major in which they are enrolled. ) 

The following guidelines will govern the special major B.A.: 

1 . Initial counseling, record-keeping and faculty referrals for the program will be the responsibility 
of the Office of Academic Advisement. 

2. A faculty, special major adviser will work informally with the student who desires a special 
major to develop a suitable plan of coursework for subsequent approval. 

3. A special major faculty advisory committee, appointed by the Curriculum Committee, will 
review the requests for admission and make recommendations regarding each proposed pro- 
gram to the Office of the Vice President, Academic Affairs. The formal request for admission 
to the special major pogram should include: the academic and professional reasons for wanting 
the program; a list of specific courses, which may include alternatives and electives, that has 
been developed with and approved by the faculty adviser (the relevance of each course to 
the special major should be explained); and justification that the program of courses being 
proposed does not significantly duplicate any existing degree programs. 

Programs which give indication of a jurisdictional conflict, whether by virtue of their title or 
course content, shall require consultation of concerned departments. Evidence of such ap- 
proval shall be attached to the proposal. In case of disagreement, the dispute will be resolved 
in accordance with University Policy Statement (UPS) 411.102. 

4. Final approval for a student to be admitted to the sp)ecial major will rest with the Office of the 
Vice President, Academic Affairs. 

5. Following approval of the special major plan, the faculty adviser will be responsible for 
subsequent counseling and graduation certification. 

6. EntrarKe to the special major is normally at the beginning of the junior year (60 units remaining 
for graduation). Under no conditions may a student enter the sp>ecial major with less than 30 
units remaining for graduation. 

7. The minimum requirements for a special major degree should be a program of at least 24 
semester units of upper division work recommended by the student's faculty adviser. 

8. Neither lower division nor upper division courses applied to general education-breadth require- 


945-04 5 215 


1 60 Technological Studies 

ments will be applicable toward the minimum, special major degree requirements. 

The following guidelines will govern the special major, M.A.: 

1 . A graduate student desiring to work for a master's degree with a special major will prepare a 
proposal in writing including justification for the request. Special major application forms are 
available in the University Graduate Office. 

2. This proposal, accompanied by statements from three professors who agree to serve on the 
student's graduate advisement committee, will be submitted for approval to the Special Major 
Advisory Committee, to the appropriate academic officers in the areas where coursework will 
be taken and to the dean of graduate studies (representing the vice president, academic 
affairs). 

Programs which give indication of a jurisdictional conflict, whether by virtue of their title or 
course content, shall require consultation of concerned departments. Evidence of such ap- 
proval shall be attached to the proposal. In case of disagreement, the dispute will be resolved 
in accordance with UPS 411.102. 

3. Upon approval of the general plan, the student and the committee will develop a formal and 
detailed program of study, which may include prerequisites. The study plan must conform to 
all university regulations governing graduate work. 

4. The dean of graduate studies then will approve the program of study and grant classified status 
in accordance with existing policies. 

5. After admission (classified status), the student will follow all university policies and procedures 
for graduate work as outlined in the Graduate Bulletin and this catalog. 

6. Upon completion of requirements for the master's degree (including a thesis, project or 
comprehensive examination), the master's degree with a sp>ecial major may be awarded in 
conformity with university policy. 

TECHNOLOGICAL STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
Barry Gerber 

Acting Director 

Roger Dittman (Physics), Christopher Hulse (Anthropology), Michael Lee (Art), Edward Sowell 
(Engineering), Imre Sutton (Geography), Michael Tang (Liberal Studies), James Woodward 
(History) 

The technological studies program was established to conduct special programs of studies and to 
provide course offerings which cut across related disciplines. Activities of the technological studies 
program are interdisciplinary and include a reference center and curriculum in technological studies 
as well as special activities such as the construction of the technological studies geodesic dome. 
This program brings together courses from several disciplines on the nature and impacts of technol- 
ogy and methods of analysis. The general focus of the program is on study of interdisciplinary 
methods and techniques for analyzing technological change; techrwiogy transfer and applications; 
and analysis of the impacts of technological change on society. 

The program provides an area for special study within recognized major fields of studies. Students 
may take separate courses or develop an individualized program of studies based on courses, 
directed readings and research participation. Wherever p>ossible courses are conducted as seminars 
and bring together lecturers from relevant disciplines included in the scierKes and humanities. 
Through independent studies students are encouraged to pursue topics or problems of special 
interest beyond the scope of regular courses under the supervision of a faculty adviser. The techno- 
logical studies program is directly coordinated with the activities of departments and other programs 
of the university. 

The Man and Technology Program 

Man and Technolr^y, a program developed jointly between the techrwiogical studies program and 
the Division of Engineering, directed to the study of man in the man-made world, the relationship 
between technology and the human condition. The program (1) enables engineering students to 
meet social science and general education requirements of the Division of Engineering by engaging 
in studies closely akin to their major studies; (2) provides a general course of study for students of 
other technologically oriented disciplines of the university; (3) makes available to nonengineering 


951-04 5 245 


Technological Studies 1 61 

students a set of general education courses in the analysis and solution of engineering problems; and 
(4) provides a meeting ground for faculty and students concentrating in different fields of study 
through participation in interdisciplinary studies of technology. 


TECHNOLOGICAL STUDIES COURSES 

100 Introduction to Technological Studies (3) 

An examination, in survey form, of questions about the development of human technologies. 
Examination of the various theories and methodologies which can be applied to the study of the 
role of technology in the process of cultural and social development. 

211 Technology for Man (3) 

An assessment of the special requirements of human beings in relation to technological develop- 
ment. Explores, in various ways, the natural and cultural human needs which a technologist might 
consider when he creates a piece of technology. 

300 Culture and Technology (3) 

A survey of the impacts of technology on culture in general and of culture in general on technology. 
410 Society and Technology (3) 

The analysis of the relationship between technological development and various aspects of social 
reality. 

420 Theories of Technological Change (3) 

An examination of normative and fact-oriented theories concerning technological development. 
430 Ideology and Technology (3) 

An examination of the development and meaning of contemporary technological society: technoc- 
racy, technostructure, cybernetics and cyberculture, and associated changes in ideology. 

499 Indeperulent Study (1-3) 

Students can pursue topics of special interest beyond the scope of regular courses under the 
supervision of a faculty adviser. The work is of a research or creative nature, and normally 
culminates in a paper, project, comprehensive examination or performance. May be rep)eated; 
however, consent of supervising instructor is required. 

(Sponsored by the Technological Studies Program) 

Economics 

370 Economics of Research and Development and Technological Change (3) 
Engineering 

417 Engineering Economy (2) 

423 Engineering Probability and Statistics (3) 

History 

491 Proseminar in Special Historical Topics (3) 

Topic: The American Response to Technological Development. Examination of the historical 
consequences of technological change for American society including the reception of techno- 
logical images, symbols, and myths into the culture; the adaptation of institutions to imperative 
needs for technological innovation; and the changing status of technologists. 

Management 

545 Research and Development Project Management (3) 

Science Education 

461 Development of Science and Technology (3) 

Science and Mathematics Education 
470 Evolution of Scientific Ideas (3) 


956—34 5 270 


• I 


V . 





EDUCATION 



164 


SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 

Dean: Robert T, Stout 


RESEARCH PROGRAMS IN EDUCA TION 

510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: bachelor's degree, Teacher Education 509 or equivalent. Elements of design, in- 
strumentation, treatment of data, hypothesis testing and inference and analysis of educational 
data. Develop a research proposal. Practice in analyzing and evaluating research reports. 

DIVISION OF SPECIAL PROGRAMS 

Chair: William L. Callison 

PROGRAMS IN COUNSEUNG/PSYCHOMETRY/SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY 

FACULTY 
Marilyn Bates 
Program Coordinator 

Clarence johnson, David Keirsey, Michael Parker, Alice Pitman 
PART-TIME 

DeWitt Bogue, Edwin Carrigan, LeRoy Cordrey, Lang Dana, Jacqueline Davie, Vicki Dendinger, Keith 
Colay, Barbara Griffin, Ski Harrison, Eleanor Hicks, Albert Peraza, Donald Ridge, Richard Rogal, 
Roger Rossier, John Seeland 

PROGRAMS IN READING 

FACULTY 

Hazel Croy 

Program Coordinator; Director, Institute for Reading 
Natalie Babcock, Norma Bartin, Adelina Gutweiler, Ruth May, Deborah Osen, George Schick, Juan 
Vazquez, Richard Windmiller 

PART-TIME 

Sue Britton, Clayton Credell, Helen Herold, Dorothy Klausner 

PROGRAMS IN SCHOOL ADMINISTRA TION 

FACULTY 

Program Coordinator 

Walter Beckman, Gerhard Ehmann, Tracy Caffey, Robert Jenkins, Ernest Lake (Emeritus), Kenneth 
Preble, Stanley Rothstein 

PART-TIME 

Herman Anderson, Emmell Beech, Spencer Covert, Duncan Johnson, Charles Kenney, John Nicoll, 
Ernest Norton, John Rajcic 

PROGRAMS IN SPECIAL EDUCA TION 

FACULTY 
Robert Lemmon 
Program Coordinator 
Calvin Nelson 

Program Coordinator 
Lester March, Leo Schmidt, Shirl Stark 


959—34 5 285 


Education 165 


PART-TIME 

Joan Ell, Ted Hawthorne, Thalia Larson, Allan Lifson, Marion Parson, Elaine Rowen, Glenn Smith 

OBJECTIVES OF THE DIVISION 

The courses, programs, and services of the Division of Special Programs are directed toward the 
following objectives of students: 

1 . Master of Science in Education with a concentration in reading, school administration or special 
education. 

2. Master of Science in Counseling. 

3. Preservice education leading to the standard designated services credentials with specializa- 
tions in pupil personnel services. 

4. Preservice teacher education leading to the specialist instruction credentials in reading and 
special education (physically handicapped, learning handicapped, severely handicapped and 
gifted). 

5. Professional training for staff serving in counseling, reading, school administration and special 
education positions. 

6. In-service programs for special services personnel. 

PUBLICATIONS AVAILABLE FROM THE DIVISION 

1. Graduate Programs in Counseling/ Psychometry /School Psychology 

2. Graduate Programs in Special Education 

3. Master of Science in Education, Reading 

4. Master of Science in Education, School Administration 

PROGRAMS IN COUNSELING/PSYCHOMETRY/SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY 

The counseling/psychometry/school psychology program is focused on the competencies which 
students acquire. Students who exit from the program as graduates will be certified by the faculty 
as having demonstrated to a specified degree, a specified set of competencies. Curricula are offered 
leading to (1) the degree of Master of Science in Counseling and (2) credentials in counseling, 
F)sychonnetry and school psychology. 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN COUNSELING 
Prerequisites 

1 . Baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution 

2. Teaching experience or other approved experience 

3. An approved major 

4. A grade-point average of 2.5 overall 

5. Specified course prerequisites completed or in progress: 

Coun 452 (3 units); Coun 550 (3 units) 

6. Satisfactory interview, references and autobiography 

Study Plan 

The following information is provided to assist students in planning programs and in seeking admis- 
sion to classified graduate status. Students should consult the Graduate Bulletin for information 
concerning standards for graduate study, steps in the master's degree program, and graduate policies 
and procedures. Thirty semester units of graduate work, specified on a formal study plan approved 
by the graduate adviser, must be completed within five years. The units are to be distributed as 
follows: 

Units 


Master's degree studies, supporting courses 9 

Educ 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Adviser-approved courses (6) 

Courses for the concentration in counseling 21 


Coun 551 Educational and Career Orientation (3) 

Coun 552 Group Leadership (3) 

Coun 553 Organization and Management of a Counseling Delivery System (3) 


965—34 5 315 


166 


Education 


Coun 555 Diagnosis of Symptomatic Behavior I (3) 

Coun 559A Internship, Field Experience and Certification of Competencies (3) * 

Coun 559B. Internship, Field Experience and Certification of Competencies (3) * 

Coun 598 Thesis, or Coun 597 Project, or Coun 595 Advanced Studies (Includes 

Comprehensive Examination) (3) 

Total 30 

For advisement and further information, consult the program graduate adviser 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 

INTERNSHIP IN SCHOOL COUNSELING 

The program offers an internship program for bilingual/bicultural counselors in cooperation with 
sponsoring school districts. 

ADVANCED CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

The program offers work toward the basic pupil personnel credentials with authorization for counsel- 
psychometry and psychology. Students are asked to check with an adviser to plan a program 
of study. 


COUNSELING/PSYCHOMETRY/SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY 
COURSES 

452 Principles of Guidance (3) 

A didactic and experiential approach to intervention work in the helping professions. This screening 
course is designed to give class members opportunity to "sample" the field of counseling before 
making further career commitment. 

500 Survey of Collegiate Student Personnel Services (3) 

History, philosophy, objectives, organization and administration of collegiate student personnel 
services. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

540 Seminar in Counseling in Normal and Deviant Human Sexuality (3) 

Learning and assessment opportunities leading to competencies in treating problems of a sexual 
nature using interaction methods of empathy, confrontation, sanction and didactic methods of 
assignment, explanation; comp)etencies in diagnosing type, trait, defense, communication symp- 
toms of a sexual nature. 

543 Individual Mental Tests Proseminar; Metric Methods (3) 

Student will have opportunity to learn and demonstrate competencies in administration, scoring and 
explaining of samples of cognitive behavior using the Stanford-Binet Scale, Wechsler, Illinois Test 
of Psycholinguistic Ability and the Leiter International Scale. 

544 Individual Mental Tests Proseminar: Projective Methods (3) 

Students will have opportunities to learn and demonstrate competencies in administration, scoring 
and explanation of samples of projective behavior using the Thematic Apperception Test, Family 
Drawings Tests, Draw a Man Test, House-Tree-Person Test, Bender Gestalt Test and a Sentence 
Completion Test. 

545 Diagnostic Interview, Inventory, and Observation I (3) 

Prerequisite: Coun 555 or consent of instructor. In this seminar student will have opportunity to learn 
and demonstrate comp>etencies in eliciting, describing and explaining diagnostic information in 
the framework of alternative theories of personality and symptoms, using a variety of interview, 
inventory, and observation techniques. 

546 Diagposis of Symptomatic Behavior II (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 555, 545 and consent of instructor. In this seminar the student will have opportu- 
nity to learn and demonstrate competencies in the detection of intrapsychic trait, trait configura- 
tion and defense abnormalities. 

• Admission to fieldwork should be requested on appropriate form at least or>e semester before a student expects to efKoM (in both 
A and B) . Students must have completed a minimum of six program ur>its at Cal State Fullerton and obtain adviser's approval, 
which involves a competerKy progress report. 


970-34 5 340 


Education 167 


547 Diagnosis of Symptomatic Behavior III (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 546 and consent of instructor. In this seminar student will have opportunity to 
learn and demonstrate competencies in describing and explaining symptomatic behaviors in the 
framework of three alternatives — game theory, role theory, cybernetic theory. 

548 Individual and Group Treatment Proseminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 550, 552 and consent of instructor. In this competency-based course the student 
will learn methods of individual and group treatment including confrontation, sanction, assign- 
ment, desensitization, staging, modeling and contingency management methods. 

549 Conjoint Consultation Proseminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 556 and consent of instructor. Student will have the opportunity to learn and 
demonstrate competencies in applying the basic counseling repertoire in the setting of a related 
group comprising the identified patient and his significant others. 

550 Counseling Theories and Processes (3) 

Prerequisite: Coun 452 or consent of instructors. Team-taught seminar in the dynamics of 16 coun- 
selor-client relationships, addressing competencies in both theory and practice of counseling, 
therapy and consulting. Large and small group instructional formats include lectures, demonstra- 
tions, coaching, discussions, experiential, multimedia and autoinstructional modules. 

551 Educational and Career Orientation (3) 

Prerequisite: Coun 550 or consent of instructors. Team-taught seminar in the theory and practice of 
career and educational development, with emphasis on a systems and self-study approach. 
Curriculum implications of group test data, development of educational and occupational re- 
sources, and educational and career counseling competencies are emphasized. 

552 Group Leadership (3) 

Prerequisite: Coun 550 or consent of instructors. Team-taught seminar in intensive study of groups 
emphasizing clinical group leadership training. Lecture, demonstration, coaching and experiential 
learning opp>ortunities are offered toward competencies in interactive and didactic group proc- 
esses originating from a variety of theoretical orientations appropriate to child and family coun- 
seling. 

553 Administration and Management of a Counseling Delivery System (3) 

Prerequisite: Coun 551 or consent of instructor. Seminar in the management of human and informa- 
tion systems. Competencies in research, program development and management of public and 
private counseling services. Includes laws relating to family and child welfare. 

555 Diagnosis of Symptomatic Behavior I (3) 

Prerequisite: Coun 452 or consent of instructor. Seminar in clinical study of techniques of diagnosis 
and detection of abnormal and normal traits, types, interpersonal dyads and membership groups. 
Psychodiagnostic work with tests, inventories, observations and interviews appropriate to child 
and family counselir^. 

556 Advanced Individual and Group Treatment Proseminar (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 550, 552 or consent of instructor. An advanced team-taught seminar in individual 
and group intervention techniques stemming from a variety of theoretical orientations. Members 
will acquire high level competencies appropriate for therapy (counseling and consulting) with 
children, marriages, and families. 

557 Research and Development of Pupil Personnel Services (3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 510, 553 and consent of instructor. A proseminar in the techniques in the 
development of programs, projects, models and sampling devices including design and construc- 
tion methodology. 

558A Personality Study: Diagnostic Interview, Inventory and Observation (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Seminar in personality assessment. Advanced experience in the 
clinical case study, application of the structures and dynamics of individuals and groups to 
symptomatic behavior. 

558B Personality Study: Projectives (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Seminar in problems of learning and metalearning. Advanced 
work in diagnostic testing, clinical interview and interpretation of data, diagnosis and remediation 
of learning, effort, interpersonal and personal problems, advanced work in dysfunctional com- 
munication. 


991--34 5 445 


168 


Education 


559A,B Internship, Field Experience and Certification of Competencies (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Coun 551, 552, 555 and consent of instructor. Student will work in his local school 
and/or other institutional setting under supervision of a local coordinator and university staff. 
Assignments are on an individual basis. Students will also meet in weekly seminar. May be 
repeated for credit up to a maximum of 12 units. 

559C Fieldwork in Psychometry (3) 

Prerequisites; Coun 559 A, B and consent of instructor. Students will participate in psychometry 
activities in their local setting under the sup>ervision of a local coordinator and university staff. 
Work assignments are made on an individual basis. May be repeated for credit. 

559D Fieldwork in School Psychology (3-6) 

Prerequisites: Coun 559A.B,C and consent of instructor. Fieldwork in psychological services in the 
school and/or other institutional settings under the supervision of a local coordinator and 
university staff. Assignments are made on an individual basis. 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars designed to develop professional competencies in such areas as behavior, 
teaching strategies, educational technology, program development, communication theory and 
interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

5% Graduate Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conduct at a graduate level an educational practicum experierKe 
with an individual under the direction of a faculty member. May be repeated for a maximum 
of six units. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independ- 
ent inquiry. 

PROGRAMS IN READING 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 
Reading 

A program of graduate studies leading to the degree of Master of ScierKe in Education, Reading, 
is authorized by The California State University and Colleges Board of Trustees. The program is 
designed to help qualified individuals gain the technical knowledge and scholarship requisite to 
becoming reading specialists. This professional program is based on and combined with sound 
preparation in the liberal arts and sciences. The curriculum proposes an interdisciplinary approach 
to the preparation of the professional specialist in the area of reading. 

Prerequisites 

Upon application to the university, the student must complete an application for admission to the 
reading program. He must then confer with the program graduate adviser to discuss the following 
prerequisites which should be fulfilled for classified status in the program: 

1 . A baccalaureate degree from an accredited college or university 

2. Successful teaching experience or other approved experience 

3. An approved major 

4. A grade-point average of 2.5 or better in academic and related work 

5. Sufficient background in reading 

6. A satisfactory interview. 

7. Four references from school administrators, school supervisors or professors. 


994-^ 5 460 


Education 169 


study Plan 

The final adviser-approved program of coursework for the degree must include: 

Master's degree studies Units 

Educ 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Courses for the concentration in reading 
Educ 507 Current Trends in Secondary and College Reading Programs {3) or 
Educ 508 Teaching Reading in Today's Elementary School (3) 

Educ 516 Etiology of Reading Difficulties (3) 

Educ 517 Educational Testing and Reading Instruction (3) 

Educ 581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties (4) 

Educ 583A Remedial Reading Casework (3) 

Educ 583B Remedial Reading Casework (3) 

Educ 584 Linguistics and Reading (4) 

Elective (s) Adviser-approved course (s) in reading (3) 

Educ 595 Advanced Studies (includes comprehensive examination) (1) or 

Educ 597 Project {}) or Educ 598 Thesis ( 1 ) 

Total 30 

For advisement and further information, consult the program graduate adviser. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 

Lower division courses in reading (Education 101, 201 and 202) and an upper division course 
(Education 320) are designed to assist students in developing the critical and creative reading skills 
required for efficient university learning. Education 480 presents an overview of reading education 
(K-adult) and prepares teachers to assess reading skills and build a curriculum based on the results 
of continuing assessment. 

ADVANCED CREDENTIAL PROGRAM 

A reading specialist credential will be offered by the Institute for Reading. For advisement and further 
information, consult the program graduate adviser. 


READING COURSES 

101 Reading Development (1) 

An elective course for students who wish to improve their reading efficiency. May be repeated for 
a maximum of three units of credit. 

201 Critical Reading Skills (3) 

Development of study-skills including textbook analysis, note-taking and study techniques, prepara- 
tion for examinations and written reports. Close critical reading of selected writings for thorough 
understanding of general meaning. 

202 Vocabulary Building (3) 

Development of individual vocabulary through study of characteristics of the language usage, word 
formation exercises, dictionary practice. Selected reading. 

320 Power Reading (3) 

Intensive approach to reading improvement intended for the upper division student, with particular 
emphasis on improvement of rate and comprehension, study skills and critical analysis. Not 
intended for student who has taken Educ 201 or has more than one unit of credit for Educ 101. 

480 The Teaching of Reading (3) 

Curriculum and methods in the teaching of reading in the elementary and secondary schools. 
Examination and analysis of the approaches to reading in teachers' manuals and guides. Practical 
experience in preparing lessons in classroom teaching of reading. 

506 Curriculum and Research in Reading (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of curriculum and research in reading, including materials, 
organization and methods of instruction. 

507 Current Trends in Secondary and College Reading Programs (3) 

Prerequisite, graduate status. Recent research findings on the learner, the teacher, approaches, 
materials ar>d facilities in the teaching of reading at secondary and college levels. 


1000—34 5 490 


170 


Education 


508 Teaching Reading in Today's Elementary School (3) 

Prerequisite; upper division or graduate status. Current trends in the teaching of elementary reading, 
focusing on the teacher as diagnostician and the reading process as continuous and developmen- 
tal for all learners. 

516 Etiology of Reading Difficulties (3) 

Prerequisites: teaching experience, Educ 506 or consent of instructor. Studies of the factors underly- 
ing learning disabilities in reading in children, adolescents and young adults. 

517 Educational Testing and Reading Instruction (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. Survey of individual and group intelligence, 
achievement, interest, aptitude, vocational and personality tests. Theory and practical application 
of individual and group tests used with students having learning problems. 

518 Behavioral Problems in Teaching Reading (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. Practical application of psychological princi- 
ples to the diagnosis and management of behavioral problems in elementary and secondary 
reading classrooms. 

519 The Principal's Role in the Effective School Reading Program (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing — preservice or inservice principal. Includes techniques for develop- 
ing the philosophy, goals and objectives of the school reading program consistent with the PPBS 
format procedures for assessing and developing students' reading ability and methods for provid- 
ing faculty inservice experiences in reading. 

581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties (4) 

Prerequisites: bachelor's degree, teaching experience or consent of instructor. Analysis and diagnosis 
of reading difficulties. Techniques and methods of prevention and treatment. Individual remedia- 
tion of student. Primary through secondary. 

582 Analysis of Reading Practices (2) 

Critical evaluation of reading and remedial reading practices. Selected graduate seminars with focus 
in particular areas of demand. 

582A Analysis of Reading Practices: The ITPA and Reading (1) 

Study and application of the Illinois Test of Psycholinguistic Ability to reading development. Course 
will include theoretical background, administration. Interpretation and application of the instru- 
ment. 

582B Analysis of Reading Practices: Cloze Technique — Its Uses in Teaching Reading (1) 

Study of the classroom uses of the Cloze Technique in assessing readability difficulties of material 
and comprehension of specific material by the learner. Practical application of Cloze principles 
in teaching specific reading skills. 

582C Analysis of Reading Practices: Individualized Reading (1) 

Goals and objectives of the individualized program. Assessment, selection and organization of 
materials. Management of the teacher student conferences, skill development, and a variety of 
learning opp>ortunities. Evaluation procedures. 

582D Analysis of Reading Practices: Instructional Technology and Reading (1) 

Overview of instructional technology used in reading such as tachistoscopes, reading pacers, mech- 
anized programmed material. Demonstration and practice in using these materials. Application 
of instruction technology to planning individual and group reading instruction. 

582E Analysis of Reading Practices: Research in Reading (1) 

Participation in seminars related to student and/or instructor-sponsored research. Involvement in 
action-research projects, including development and evaluation of research procedures. 

582F Analysis of Reading Practices: Writing for Publication — Reading (1) 

Consideration in depth of the selection, organization, and production of publishable materials 
concerning problems, strategies, techniques of the teaching of reading improvement. 

582G Analysis of Reading Practices: Establishing Reading Laboratories and Learning Centers 
( 1 ) 

Consideration in depth of the necessities and optional features of a reading center deemed appropri- 
ate to a specific situation within a particular community. 

582H Analysis of Reading Practices: Reading and the Gifted (1) 

Techniques of teaching reading to the underachieving and achieving academically gifted child in 
grades 1-12. Methods of planning and implementing instruction to meet the unique learning 
abilities and needs of the gifted and to develop higher level thinking skills. 


1005-34 5 515 


Education 171 


5821 Analysis of Reading Practices: Assessment in Reading (1) 

Assessment of competencies of the experienced Reading Specialist in preparation for the Reading 
SF>ecialist credential. 

582J Analysis of Reading Practices: Teaching Reading to Adults (1) 

Analysis and evaluation of current methods of teaching reading to adults including diagnostic and 
corrective techniques. Analysis of current research and evaluation of materials, with emphasis 
on understanding special needs of the adult learner. 

582K Analysis of Reading Practices: Reading and the Ethnically Different Child (1) 
Graduate seminar designed to survey the affective side of teaching reading to ethnically different 
children. 

582L Analysis of Reading Practices: Reading in Early Childhood (1) 

An overview of basic readiness needs and evaluative instruments with emphasis on techniques and 
materials for increasing concentration, positive socialization, creativity and learning skills of 
preschool children. 

582M Analysis of Reading Practices: The Exceptional Child in Reading (1) 

Survey of the methods and materials to be effectively used in reading instruction with the physically 
handicapped, emotionally disturbed, learning disabled and slow learner in the regular classroom. 
582N Analysis of Reading Practices: Vision and Reading (1) 

Study of the relationship between vision factors and reading. Course will include screening tech- 
niques, behavioral symptoms and classroom and instructional accommodations to meet vision 
needs. 

5820 Analysis of Reading Practices: Comparative Reading (1) 

Study of general trends in reading improvement in the United States and in other countries. Emphasis 
on developmental reading programs. 

583A,B Remedial Reading Casework (3,3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Fieldwork in diagnosis and remediation in reading through case- 
work technique. Conferences with teachers, parents, consultants, and administrators. 

584 Linguistics and Reading (4) 

A study of linguistics and its influence on reading materials and instruction. An analysis of trends 
in reading and changes affected by the science of linguistics. 

585 Word Perception Skills in Reading (3) 

Study of word perception skills in the process of learning to read. A developmental hygiene of child 
vision. Visual anomalies and their applications to reading disorders. 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars designed to develop professional competencies in such areas as behavior, 
teaching strategies, educational technology, program development, communication theory and 
interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor, individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

59» Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independ- 
ent inquiry. 

PROGRAMS IN SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 
School Administration 

A program of graduate studies leading to the degree of Master of Science in Education with a 
concentration in school administration has been authorized by the California State University and 
Colleges Board of Trustees. The principal objective of the curriculum is to prepare carefully selected 
individuals for certain leadership positions in school administration. 


1019—34 5 585 


172 


Education 


The program is designed to help these individuals gain the technical knowledge and scholarship 
requisite to high achievement in these positions. This professional program is based on and com- 
bined with sound preparation in the liberal arts and sciences. The curriculum proposes an interdisci- 
plinary approach to the preparation of the professional sp)ecialist in public education. Thus, those 
who qualify for the degree should have completed coursework in such fields as philosophy, public 
administration, psychology, p>olitical science, biology, English, sociology, economics, anthropology 
or history. 

Prerequisites 

A student desiring to enter the program should complete the following requirements: 

1 . A baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution. 

2. A successful teaching experience in an elementary or secondary school, or community college. 
Is desirable. If such experience is not available, other experience in related fields is a recom- 
mended alternative, which must be approved by a graduate adviser before starting the pro- 
gram. 

3. At least 2.5 grade-point average in previous academic and related work. 

Programs of Study 

The degree study plan must include 30 units of committee-approved coursework, of which 25 must 
be at the 500 level. A minimum of 22 units must be in school administration; five units may be 
assigned on an interdisciplinary basis from courses related to the needs of individual students. Course 
requirements include field experience and a project. 

No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken prior to classified status may be applied to a 
student's master's degree program. 

Students concentrating in school administration will take Education 503, Foundations for Administra- 
tive Leadership, as soon as they identify their interest In this M.S. degree. To continue in the program 
beyond this course, the student must be granted a "letter of admission to the program" and possess 
an official Cal State Fullerton program evaluation. Students who desire only isolated courses from 
the program are normally denied admission to such courses. The adviser-approved 30 units (mini- 
mum) on the study plan will include: 

Units 


Master's degree studies, supporting courses 8 

Educ 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Adviser-approved courses (5) 

Courses for the concentration in school administration 22 

All of the following (No grade below C): 

Educ 505 Supervision of Curriculum (3) 

Educ 561 Organization of School Systems (3) 


Educ 563 Principles of School Personnel Administration (2) 

Educ 564 Seminar in School Law (2) 

Educ 565 Seminar in School Finance, Business Administration and Buildings (2) 

Educ 588 Organization Management Systems in Education (3) 

Educ 567A Fieldwork and Seminar In School Administration (includes Project or 
Thesis) (2) 

Educ 567B Fieldwork and Seminar in School Administration (Includes Project or 
Thesis) (2) 

One of the following: 

Educ 566 The Elementary School Principal and Supervisor (3) 

Educ 586 The Secondary School Principal, Community College Administrator and 
Supervisor (3) 

For advisement and further information, consult the Division of Special Programs. See also "The 
Program of Master's Degrees," in this catalog and the Graduate Bulletin. 


1023—34 5 605 


Education 1 73 


INTERNSHIP IN SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION 

A selected number of teachers will be offered the opportunity to study and to practice school 
administration as school interns in administration. A candidate must obtain admission to the pro- 
gram, and agreement must be reached with a sponsoring school or college district to employ the 
candidate as a full-time administrator during the school year. The concept of the internship in 
educational administration is similar to that found in other professional fields. Its basic function is 
to enable the intern to gain the necessary experience in the performance of the critical tasks of his 
profession while under the close supervision of a fully-trained and experienced practitioner. It is an 
opportunity for the university and local school and college systems to work together in training 
well-qualified school administrators. The internship in educational administration is but one phase 
of the program for preparing supervisory and administrative personnel for community college, high 
school, intermediate school, and elementary school positions of leadership. It is an investment in 
training supervisory leadership from which the cooperating school district, the university and the 
intern will derive benefit and in which all three have responsibilities. Cooperation among all three 
is essential to the success of the program. 

Internships are for a full academic year and require of all students the completion of a minimum 
of 21 graduate credits. During the p)eriod of the internship the student is required to be a registered 
graduate student at Cal State Fullerton. 

All candidates will be given a temporary credential for supervision and administration according to 
the regulations of the California Administrative Code, Title V, Section 6555. Such candidates should 
register in two courses; Education 561, Organization of School Systems, Education 563, Principles 
of School Personnel Administration. 

Both courses must be completed in the summer session if the student is to do his internship beginning 
in the fall semester. Applications for admission to the program should be sent to the chair. Internship 
Program in School Administration, by June 1 . Careful planning of electives will enable candidates 
to receive the Master of Science in Education with a concentration in school administration upon 
further study, after completing the requirements for the internship. 

ADVANCED CREDENTIAL PROGRAM 

School Administration 

Candidates in administration, upon completion of the degree requirements for a Master of Science 
in Education, should qualify for certification as a school administrator at any level providing they 
have taught three years. As certification requirements change yearly, candidates are urged to have 
their adviser check their study program against current requirements. 

Candidates in administration accepted in the administrator internship program will be issued the 
standard supervision credential conditionally upon partial fulfillment of requirements according to 
the California Administrative Code, Title V, Section 6555. 

OTHER STUDENTS IN SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION 

Experienced school administrators, holding a California administrative credential or a supervision 
credential and exempt from degree requirements, may register for any course in the school adminis- 
tration concentration. Teachers wishing to take courses in school administration directed at helping 
them to understand administration problems are welcome to take selected courses. 


SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION COURSES 

481 Issues in Higher Education (3) 

Seminar in structure, governance, administration and challenges of American higher education. 

483 The American College and University (3) 

Seminar in the development of higher education in the United States with special emphasis on 
purposes, functions, curriculum, and governance. 

485 Introduction to Educational Administration (3) 

Introduction to educational administration. Course directed toward better understanding of adminis- 
trative tasks, processes, and skills involved in the various roles of school personnel in administra- 
tion. Special attention to the role of the teacher in school administration. 


1029—34 5 635 


174 


Education 


503 Foundations for Administrative Leadership (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Seminar on cultures and values to which schools must contribute. 
Introduction to community s<xiology, tax systems, and public administration; the literature of 
leadership. Screening for admission to program. Course required of all students during their first 
registration in school administration. 

505 The Supervision of Curriculum (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 566 or 586. Seminar on development of a quality program of instruction in both 
elementary and secondary schools; appraisal of programs of instruction; advanced principles of 
curricular review and modification. Evaluation of subject matter comp)etence in area of supervi- 
sory specialization. 

560 Contemporary Problems in School Administration (3) 

Seminar on contemporary problems in school organization and administration with particular em- 
phasis on collective bargaining, the computer as a business and educational tool and the needs 
of urban schooling including the problem of racial isolation. 

561 Organization of School Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 503 or concurrent enrollment. Structure, functions, trends, fiscal responsibilities 
and issues in respect to the government of education at federal, state, county, and local school 
district levels. Basic principles in school organization and administration. Special emphasis on 
intergovernmental relations and impact at local level. 

563 Principles of School Personnel Administration (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 503 or concurrent enrollment. Seminar on principles of organizational behavior, 
social processes inherent in effective leadership, and techniques of school personnel manage- 
ment. 

564 Seminar in School Law (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. School law as a reflection of public policy. California Education 
Code and the California Administrative Code, Title 5, and county counsel opinions as they affect 
administration, instruction, and financial management of public schools. Legal basis for public 
education in California. 

565 Seminar in School Finance, Business Administration and Buildings (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Emphasis on school finance, business administration and buildings 

as they implement an effective educational program. A study of financial principles. School 
revenues and expenditures, budgetary procedures and processes, cost analysis, business man- 
agement and salary policies. 

566 The Elementary School Principal and Supervisor (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 561 and 563. Seminar on leadership roles of elementary school principal and 
supervisor. Pupil personnel and instructional program in elementary school; working relations 
and morale among staff, community and pupils; parent education; relations with central district 
staff; management and recordkeeping functions; teacher evaluation. 

567A,B Fieldwork and Seminar in School Administration (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Educ 566 or 586 or concurrent registration, and consent of instructor. Two-semester 
terminal sequence required for the M.S. in Education with a concentration in school administra- 
tion. Includes directed fieldwork in selected public schools and district offices. Supervised project 
or thesis required for degree. (4 hours fieldwork, 2 hours conference) 

568 Seminar for Administrative Trainees (3) 

Provides a behavioral analysis approach in the establishment 6f a sound foundation for educational 
administrators. The culminating offering of the administrator internship program. Objectives 
include (1 ) study of the behavior of human beings and (2) understanding how theory contrib- 
utes to effective administrative practice. 

569 The School in the Community (3) 

Seminar on the changing school in the changing community. The school and the community power 
structure; community involvement and school-community participation; communication be- 
tween school and community; the power of community education and the community school. 

586 The Secondary School Principal, Community College Administrator and Supervisor 
(3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 561 and 563. Seminar on leadership roles of the secondary school principal and 
supervisor, pupil personnel and instructional program in secondary schools; development and 
administration of vocational education; morale among staff, community and pupils; relations with 
central district staff; management functions; teacher evaluation. 


1035—34 6 25 


Education 175 


587 Seminar in Financial Resource Allocation (PPBS) (3) 

Advanced finance, program budgeting, quality controls, expenditure progams, state-county-local- 
federal financing. Decision making in assigning financial resources. Financial accountability. 

588 Organization Management Systems in Education (3) 

Seminar in advanced management and decision systems, such as systems analysis, decision tree 
analysis, net work analysis and including an analysis of the structures of contemporary organiza- 
tions. 

589 Staff Evaluation — Supervision (3) 

Seminar in group work supervision techniques as they apply to improvement of teaching process; 
analyzing and focusing role relationships between supervisors, students, teachers, parents; class- 
room dynamics and role of supervisor in planning and developing educational programs. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified students desiring to pursue indep>endent inquiry. 

PROGRAMS IN SPECIAL EDUCATION 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 

Special Education 

Prerequisites 

1. A baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution 

2. A grade-point average of 2.5 or better in previous academic and related work 

3. An approved major 

4. Satisfactory interview, references and autobiography 

Study Plan 

Students should consult the Graduate Bulletin for information concerning standards for graduate 
study, steps in the master's degree program, and graduate policies and procedures. 

Units 


Master's degree studies, supporting courses 9 

Educ 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Adviser-approved courses outside special education (6) 

Courses for the concentration in special education 21 

Adviser-approved courses in special education (18) 

Educ 595 Advanced Studies including comprehensive examination (3) or Educ 597 

Project (3) or Educ 598 Thesis (3) 

Total 30 


For advisement and further information, consult the program graduate adviser. See also "The 
Program of Master's Degrees" in this catalog, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

ADVANCED CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

The curriculum in specialist preparation which appears in this section of the catalog is designed to 
meet the requirements of Teacher Preparation and Licensing Act of 1970 effective in September, 
1974. The curricula are subject to change pending approval by the Commission for Teacher Prepara- 
tion and Licensing. Students are advised to contact the special education office for appropriate 
publications in the event curricular modifications are Introduced by commission action. 

Specialist Credentials 

Programs leading to four specialist credentials are available. They are: 

1. Specialist credential to teach the physically handicapped (including the blind and partially 
seeing and orthopedically handicap>ped) 

2. SF>ecialist credential to teach the learning handicapp>ed (including the learning disabilities, 
behavior disorders and educationally retarded) 

3. Specialist credential to teach the severely handicapped (including the trainable mentally re- 
tarded, severely multiply handicapped, seriously emotionally disturbed and the autistic) 

4. Specialist credential to teach the gifted 


1039—34 6 45 


176 Education 


All specialist training programs include a generic component and advanced specialist component, 
both of which must be completed in order that a student be credentialed. Completion of the generic 
component is prerequisite to admission to advanced specialist component training. 
Undergraduates wishing to earn an advanced specialist credential can meet the requirements of the 
generic component of the credential by (a) completing a bachelor's degree with a major in human 
services with a teaching-learning practicum thrust, and/or completing a bachelor's degree with 
another major and electing six units of approved coursework in human services (electives in 
exceptionality), (b) completing the preservice professional training program for a multiple subject 
credential with student teaching divided between the regular classroom and the special classroom. 
For details regarding admission to and completion of the multiple subject credential, consult the 
Division of Teacher Education. 

Graduate students entering the advanced specialist program who have completed multiple or single 
subject preservice training programs with majors other than human services must complete six units 
of courses in human services (electives in exceptionality) and six units of student teaching with 
exceptional children. This requirement may be waived upon submission of satisfactory evidence of 
broad training and experience with exceptional children. 

Advanced specialist programs include coursework specific to the master's degree and the several 
advanced specialist credentials; students may, therefore, elect one of two options upon entry to the 
program. These are: 

1. Advanced specialist credential program 

2. Master's degree program. 

The advanced specialist program for each credential requires the same course sequence. However, 
different practicum activity sections are designed to meet the specific needs of each credential. 
Students seeking recommendation for any of the four credentials listed must satisfactorily complete 
the following: 

Prerequisites 

1 . Bachelor's degree 

2. A multiple subject or single subject credential 

3. The specialist generic component of the program, irKluding student teaching with exceptional 
children (12 units) 

Advanced Specialist Credential Requirements Units 

Educ 463 Exceptionality: Cognitive-Affective Characteristics (3) or 
Educ 464 Exceptionality: Physical-Sensory Charateristkrs (3) 

Educ 465 A, B, C or D • Educational Practices in Exceptionality (4) 

Educ 573 A, B, C or D * AdvarKed Practices in Exceptionality (4) 

Educ 574 Exceptionality: Noneducational Implications (3) 

Educ 575 Exceptionality: Theory, Philosophy and Research (4) 

Total (including 12 prerequisite units) 30 

Advisement is available to any student seeking a credential under the special education program. 
During registration, the student should consult an adviser in the area in which he expects to major, 
as well as an adviser in special education, for assistance in selecting courses in his program. A student 
from another institution should bring transcripts of previous work and a tentative selection of 
courses. Transferred education courses must be of upper-divison level and taken within the past 15 
years to be applicable to upper division credential requirements. 


SPECIAL EDUCATION COURSES 

370 The Personal Quest (3) (Formerly 295) 

An experierKe-based course exploring the factors contributing to personality. Consideration will be 
made concerning individual needs, how they are met by the individual, other individuals, society 
and society's institutions. One objective will be to explore the demands of a rapidly changing 
technology. 

* Se« program pubitcatiom regarding which sections apply to specific credeniiaK. 


1045—34 6 75 


Education 1 77 


371 Exceptional Individual (3) (Formerly 471) 

The study of children who deviate from the average in the elementary and the secondary schools; 
physically handicapped, mentally retarded, gifted, socially maladjusted, emotionally disturbed, 
and delinquent. Special educational services, curriculum, procedures, and materials necessary 
to promote their maximum development. 

463 Exceptionality: Cognitive-Affective Characteristics (3) 

Seminar in the study of individuals who deviate from the norm with respect to cognitive and 
emotional functioning including the educable mentally retarded, gifted, slow learner, behavioral- 
ly disordered and emotionally disturbed. 

464 Exceptionality: Physical-Sensory Characteristics (3) 

Seminar in the study of individuals who deviate from the norm with respect to physical-sensory 
functioning including the visually handicapped, multiply handicapped, physically handicapped, 
and trainable mentally retarded. 

465A Exceptionality Educational Practices with the Learning Handicapped (4) 

Corequisite: Educ 464. Curriculum development, methods and materials for teaching the learning 
handicapped. Lectures, demonstrations and practicum relative to the credential requirements. 

465B Exceptionality: Educational Practices for the Severely Handicapped (4) 

Corequisite: 464. Curriculum development, methods and materials for teaching the severely hand- 
icapped. Lectures, demonstrations and practicum relative to the credential requirements. 

465C Exceptionality: Educational Practices for the Physically Handicapped (4) 

Corequisite: Educ 464. Curriculum development, methods and materials for teaching the physically 
handicapped. Lectures, demonstrations and practicum relative to the credential requirements. 

465D Exceptionality: Educational Practices for the Gifted (4) 

Corequisite: Educ 463. Curriculum developnwnt, methods and materials for teaching the gifted. 
Lectures, demonstrations and practicum relative to the credential requirements. 

472 Gifted Children (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 371. Identification, prirKiples of instruction, grouping, individualized instruction, 
classroom enrichment. Problem solving and research experiences in science, social studies, and 
mathematics, reading programs and literature, creative writing, oral language. 

473 Mental Retardation and Brain Injury (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 371. Organic and cultural basis of mental retardation and brain injury, including 
social, psychological, and vocational problems. Child growth, sensory development, learning 
characteristics of mentally retarded and brain injured children, and techniques of working with 
parents will be considered. 

474 Curriculum and Methods for Teaching the Mentally Retarded (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 473. Curriculum development, nr>ethods, and materials for teaching the educable 
and trainable mentally retarded at the elementary and secondary levels. 

475 Observation and Individual Instruction with the Mentally Retarded (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 474. Supervised observation and participation with the educable and the trainable 

mentally retarded at both the elementary and secondary levels of education. (4 hours activity, 
1 hour lecture arid discussion) 

477 The Educationally Handicapped Child (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 371. Behavioral characteristics of the educationally handicapped child, the child 
with a neurological har>dicap or a behavioral disorder as defined by the California Education 
Code. Educational procedures, perceptual and motor training, evaluation, parent guidance. 

478 Innovations in Special Education (3-6) 

Acquaints teachers and administrators with recent, dynamic and innovative methodologies and 
concepts related to the atypical child. Emphasis on assisting participants to update their present 
knowledge and skills through implementing new thought as it relates to special education. 

479 Seminar and Practicum in Education of the Trainable Mentally Retarded (6) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Curriculum, methods, and materials for children having severe 

intellectual, nrK>tor, sensory and language impairment. Emphasis will be placed on the educational 
management of children exhibiting handicappir)g conditions. (3 hours seminar and 9 hours 
practicum in special school facilities) 

489 Fieldwork in Exceptional Children (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 371 or consent of instructor. Direct supervised exp)erience with educationally 
handicapped children. 


I 


1060-34 6 150 


178 Education 


4% Senior Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Conduct at an advanced level an educational practicum experience with educationally handicapped 
children. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing and consent of instructor. Student will complete individual 
studies under the direction of faculty member. Studies include experimental, library, or creative 
projects. Only students of demonstrated capacity and maturity will be approved. 

514 Graduate Seminar: Behavioral Research on Children with Learning Disorders (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 510 or 511. Critical analysis of behavioral research on children with learning 
disorders. Resources, criteria for evaluation of studies with exceptional children, historical view 
of research. Research relating to learning, handicapping conditions, and efficacy of special 
methods. 

521 Croup Processes in the Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 371 or consent of instructor. Exploration of group interaction, teacher sensitivity, 
and their relevance to educational planning and management. Emphasis: emotionally disturbed, 
educationally handicapped. 

522 Behavior Problems in the Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 371 or consent of instructor. Identification and mangagement of social and 
affective disturbances related to school performance. Emphasis: early detection, behavioral 
modification techniques, parent counseling, interagency cooperation. 

523 Learning Problems in the Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 371 or consent of instructor. Identification and educational management of 
learning problems. Emphasis: developmental sequences, related prescriptive teaching and 
remediation techniques. 

570 Graduate Seminar in Educational Psychology: Advanced Developmental 
Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Research, theory and practice in the physical-motor develop- 
ment, cognitive-intellectual growth and affective-personality organization of children and adoles- 
cents. Focus is given to educational interventions as a means of problem solving. 

571 Graduate Seminar in Educational Psychology: Advanced Psychology of Learning (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Research, theory and practice in the psychology of learning and 

motivation: motoric, cognitive and affective. Focus on problem-solving situations in which edu- 
cational intervention is designed to facilitiate learning in each domain. 

572 Psycho-Educational Clinic (2) 

Prerequisites: Educ 475 or 477, 523, 570, 571 concurrently with 572, and consent of instructor. 
Clinical practicum to develop teaching skills in dealing with learning problems of exceptional 
children, practice in working with formal and informal information-gathering devices, special 
teaching instruments, teaching systems, teaching strategies. May be repeated orKe with consent 
of instructor. (6 hours laboratory) 

573A Exceptionality: Advanced Practices for the Learning Handicapped (4) 

Prerequisites: Educ 463 and 465A. Advanced instruction in the application of educational practices 
working with the learning handicapped. Seminar and fieldwork practicum will be undertaken at 
selected sites in the community at large. 

573B Exceptionality: Advanced Practices for the Severely Handicapped (4) 

Prerequisites: Educ 464 and 465B. Advanced instruction in the a|:>plication of educational practices 
working with the severely handicapped. Seminar and field work practicum will be undertaken 
at selected sites in the community at large. 

573C Exceptionality: Advanced Practices for the Physically Handicapped (4) 

Prerequisites: Educ 464 and 465C. Advanced instruction in the application of educational practices 
working with the physically handicapped. Seminar and fieldwork practicum will be undertaken 
at selected sites in the community at large. 

573D Exceptionality: Advanced Practices for the Gifted (4) 

Prerequisites: Educ 463 and 465D. Advanced instruction in the application of educational practices 
working with the gifted. Seminar and fieldwork practicum will be undertaken at selected sites 
in the community at large. 

574 Exceptionality: Noneducational Implications (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to graduate status. Consideration of economic and social implications of 
exceptionality. Advanced investigations regarding different aspects of the adjustment of the 
exceptional individual to society and of society's accommodation to the individual. 


1067 -^ 6 185 


Education 1 79 


575 Exceptionality: Theory, Philosophy and Research (4) 

Prerequisites: admission to graduate status and consent of instructor. A consideration of theories, 
philosophies and evaluation strategies dealing with exceptional individuals, critical evaluation of 
research on exceptionality and the consideration of investigatory models for studying exception- 
ality. 

577 Seminar in Program Trends in Special Education (3) 

Prerequisites: recommendation of adviser and consent of instructor. A seminar designed for the 
study of historical development of educational programs for exceptional children. A critical 
analysis of issues and trends in special education. 

578 Administration and Supervision of Special Education (12) 

Prerequisite: Educ 577 or consent of instructor. Problems of organization, administration, and super- 
vision of special education programs: finance and attendance, physical facilities, budgeting, 
needed equipment, community agencies and curriculum development. 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars designed to develop professional competencies in such areas as behavior, 
teaching strategies, educational technology, program development, communication theory and 
interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

5% Graduate Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conduct at a graduate level an educational practicum experience 
with an individual under the direction of a faculty member. May be repeated for a maximum 
of six units. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independ- 
ent inquiry. 

779 Student Teaching with Exceptional Children (5-6) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Participation in a class for exceptional children for greater part 
of every school day. Includes a two-hour seminar each week in problems and procedures for 
teaching exceptional children. Students doing student teaching in conjunction with multiple 
subject student teaching will take student teaching for five units. Students entering with multiple 
subject or single subject student teaching completed will enroll for six units which includes one 
unit generic competencies assessment seminar. 

DIVISION OF TEACHER EDUCATION 

Chair: Paul Kane 

FACULTY 

Betty Barnes, Ida Coppolino, James Cusick (coordinator of secondary education), Kenneth Doane,* 
Mildred DorK)ghue, Stephanie Edwards-Evans, James Gilnwre, Barbara Hartsig, Shirley Hill (coor- 
dinator of elementary education), Emma Holmes, Bernard Kravitz, Edith McCullough, Eugene 
McGarry,* Robert McLaren, Bryan Moffet, Donald Pease, Nancy Reckinger, Osvaldo Romero, 
Morris Sica, Robert Simpson, Jane Wilhour 

SECONDARY EDUCATION TEACHING METHODS FACULTY 

James Alexander (Journalism Education), Jean Barrett (Physical Education), Arthur Bell (English 
Education), Carol Chadwick (Music Education), Francis Collea (ScierKe Education), Jerry Can- 
non (Mathematics Education), Kaye Good (Speech Education), Donald Henry (Theatre Educa- 
tion), Carolyn Johnson (Journalism Education), Jacqueline Kiraithe (Foreign Language 
Education), Joseph Landon (Music Education), L. Clark Lay (Mathematics Education), Benton 
Minor (Music Education), David Pagni (Mathematics Education), Albert Porter (Art Education), 

• UniversitY administrative o#ficef 


1071—34 6 205 


180 


Education 


Eula Stovall (Physical Education), H. Eric Streitberger (Science Education), Howard Warner (Art 
Education), John White (English Education), Charles Williams (Science Education), George 
Williams (Art Education), Jon Zimmerman (Foreign Language Education) 

PART-TIME 

Marlita Bellot, William Burns, Marcia Cook, Margot Coons, Margaret Kelley, Lois Lytle, Russell Parks, 
Nelson Rowen, Julian Scherer, Carolyn Shultz, Virginia Strain, Shirley Sulack, Michael Trapp 
The courses, programs and services of the division are directed toward the following objectives of 
students: 

1 . Master of Science in Education with concentration in elementary curriculum and instruction. 

2. Preservice teacher education (elementary school, secondary school, community college). 

3. In-service teacher education. 

Instruction concentrates on the central principles of the school as a basic institution of our culture, 
the methods and materials associated with effective teaching, and the current and persistent prob- 
lems that confront teachers, and other professional workers in educational institutions. In addition 
to using published source materials and attending class sessions for presentations and discussions, 
many courses require fieldwork In schools, laboratories, clinics and other educational agencies. 

PUBLICATIONS AVAILABLE FROM THE DIVISION OF TEACHER EDUCATION 

1. Master of Science in Education, Elementary Curriculum and Instruction 

2. Admission to Teacher Education Policies 

3. Multiple Subject Instruction (elen>entary teacher education programs) 

4. Early Childhood Education Specialist's Credential 

5. Single Subject Instruction (secondary teacher education programs) 

PERSONNEL SERVICES FOR TEACHER EDUCATION STUDENTS 

Advisement concerning teacher education is available in the Division of Teacher Education for 
programs In multiple subject instruction, single subject instruction, the specialist in early childhood, 
and the Master of Science in Education with concentration in Elementary Curriculum and Instruction. 
Students should consult with the coordinators of elementary or secondary teacher education and 
other faculty members in selecting courses for the basic teaching credential and the specialist 
credential in early childhood education. Graduate students interested in the master's degree program 
should consult with the graduate coordinator. Transfer students should have transcripts of previous 
work available. 

Students seeking the basic teaching credential in single subject Instruction should also consult with 
teacher education advisers in the departments of their major. Departments having these advisers are 
Art, Communications, English, Foreign Languages and Literatures, Physical Education, Music, 
Science and Mathematics Education, Speech Communication and Theatre. Advisement for the social 
sciences and business education is available in the Division of Teacher Education. 

APPLICATION FOR CREDENTIALS FOR TEACHING 

The teacher education programs meet the requirenients of the State of California for the basic 
teaching credential. Upon completion of these requirements, the candidate for the credential can 
submit his application to the Commission for Teacher Preparation arnJ Licensing with the credential 
analyst the university office of Admissions and Records. On those applications, the student is asked 
about his citizenship status, his professional conduct, and is asked to sign an oath of allegiance. He 
must also submit a statement of his physical and mental corKlition signed by a qualified physician, 
one fingerprint-identification card and the legal fee, which is currently $20. 


1075—34 6 225 


Education 181 


CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

MULTIPLE SUBJECTS INSTRUCTION (ELEMENTARY) 

ADMISSION TO THE MULTIPLE SUBJECT PROGRAM 

Before being permitted to enorll in a credential program, the student must have made formal 
application, been screened and been formally admitted to teacher education through the School of 
Education. The student will be permitted to apply for admission to teacher education in the semester 
previous to beginning his professional program. Students interested in the Track I program of the 
multiple subject credential will submit their application in the second semester of the junior year. 
Students who want the Track II program of the multiple subject credential will submit their applica- 
tions in the first semester of the junior year. A fac ulty committee will review information concerning 
the applicant's intellectual resources, command of fundamental skills of communication, scholar- 
ship, personality and character, interest in teaching and health. When more qualified students apply 
for admission to teacher education than can be accommodated during a given semester, applicants 
will be ranked and those with the highest rank selected. Qualified candidates who are not admitted 
may reapply during subsequent semesters. Information concerning the criteria and the procedures 
for admission to teacher education may be obtained in the Office of Teacher Education. 

CURRICULUM IN ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHER EDUCATION • 

The program leading to the recommendation for the multiple subject credential includes the follow- 
ing: 

1. A bachelor's degree from an approved institution. 

2. A fifth year of college or university postgraduate education taken at the upper division or 
graduate level. (If the student does not complete all requirements, the credential may be 
awarded on the basis of partial fulfillment at the end of four or more years of work if he has 
a bachelor's degree from an approved institution and has completed the student teaching 
requirement.) 

3. A breadth of knowledge in subject matter to help in teaching and to assist in passing the state 
examination for the multiple subject credential. Students who plan to secure the multiple 
subject credential should acquire breadth of knowledge by taking coursework In each of the 
following areas: 

A. English, irKluding grammar, literature, composition and speech 

B. humanities and the fine arts 

C. mathematics 

D. physical education 

E. science, including life and physical sciences 

F. social sciences. 

Because schools exist in a culturally pluralistic society, teacher candidates are also encouraged 
to take courses in the Chicano studies, Afro-ethnic studies and Indian studies programs. 

4. Professional education requirements which are currently met by the following programs: 
Track I — Two-semester sequence (See note below) 

First Semester 

Ed-TE 430A Foundations in Elementary School Teaching (3) 

Ed-TE 430B Curriculum and Methods in Elementary School Teaching (3) 

Ed-TE 430C Supervised Fieldwork in Elementary School Teaching (3) 

Ed-TE 433 Reading Instruction in the Public Schools (3) 

The first semester of Track I entails an all-day commitment, from 8:30 a.m. to 3 p.m. daily. 
Second Semester 

t Ed-TE 439A Student Teaching in the Elementary School (10) 

Ed-TE 439B Seminar in Elementary School Student Teaching (2) 

The second semester of Track I entails an all-day commitment of time. 

• Regulations for the credential are subfeci to change by the state; any curricular changes will be available in later university 
publications. 

t Note; Admission to the university does not include admission to the mutliple subject credential program. Admission to teacher 
education does ikn irKkide admission to student teaching 


1095-^ 6 325 


182 


Education 


Track II — Three-semester sequence (See note below) 

First Semester 

Ed-TE 407 Principles of Teaching and Learning in the Elementary School (3) 

Ed-TE 433 Reading Instruction in the Public Schools (3) 

The first semester of Track II entails a commitment during the morning hours. 

Sec'Ofid Semester 

Ed-TE 435A Strategies of Teaching (4) 

Ed-TE 435B Supervised Fieldwork in Elementary Teacher Education (2) 

The second semester of Track II entails a commitment during the morning hours. 

Third Semester 

•Ed-TE 439A Student Teaching in the Elementary School (10) 

Ed-TE 439B Seminar in Elementary School Student Teaching (2) 

The third semester of Track II entails an all-day commitment of time. 

ADMISSION TO STUDENT TEACHING 

The credential candidate must submit his application for student teaching by October 1 5 or March 
1 of the semester preceding the semester in which the student expects a student teaching assignment. 
The application for admission is submitted to either the coordinator of elementary or secondary 
teacher education. 

The application for student teaching is part of the continuous process of evaluating credential 
candidates on their suitability for elementary and secondary school teaching. Information concern- 
ing the criteria and procedures for admission to student teaching, along with the application, may 
be obtained from the Office of Teacher Education. Admission to teacher education does not include 
admission to student teaching. Each student is responsible for meeting the requirements and follow- 
ing the procedures for admission. 

INTERIM PROGRAM FOR THE EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION 
SPECIALISTS CREDENTIAL 

The university expects to have an approved early childhood specialist credential under the Teacher 
Preparation and Licensing Law of 1970 (Ryan Act) during the academic year 1974-75. This approval 
is currently pending. 

Contact the Office of Teacher Education for additional information. 

SINGLE SUBJECT INSTRUCTION X (Secondary Cooperative Teacher Education Program) 

1. Admission To The Program 

The application forms for admission to the program are available in the Division of Teacher 
Education. To become a candidate for the secondary school teacher education program the 
student must be enrolled in good standing in the university and must be admitted to teacher 
education through the Office of Admission to Teacher Education. The student may apply for 
admission to teacher education in the semester previous to the semester in which he is within 
six units of completing his major (usually as a second semester junior). Admission to teacher 
education is for the semester in which the student begins his professional coursework. If the 
student is admitted and does not enroll in the program, he must reapply in a future semester. 
If the student is not admitted, he may reapply in a future semester. A faculty committee, including 
faculty in the major department, will review information concerning the applicant's intellectual 
resources, command of fundamental skills of communication, scholarship, personality and char- 
acter, interest in teaching, and health. The minimum overall grade-fxjint average and the mini- 
mum grade-point average in the major is 2.5. 

When more qualified students apply for admission to the program than can be accommodated 
during a given semester, a|:>piicants will be ranked and those with the highest rank selected. 
Students should consult with advisers prior to making application to the program usually by the 
beginning of the junior year for the purpose of establishing competency in the fundamental skills. 
Courses or examinations are available in the areas of English and speech that will assist in meeting 

• Note: Admissloo to the university does not include Admission to the multiple subject credential program. Admission to teacher 
education does not include admission to student teaching. 

t Regulations governing the credential are subject to change by the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing, changes will 
be available in later university publications. 


1101—34 6 355 


Education 183 

specific competencies in fundamental skills. It is also important that credential candidates for 
single subject instruction in majors that are subsumed in the single subjects listed in the basic 
teaching credential (See requirements for the credential listed below) seek advisement on 
coursework outside of their major from teacher education advisers. This coursework can be 
planned in conjunction with meeting general education requirements or planning for completing 
a minor listed in this catalog. o k b 

Because schools exist in a culturally pluralistic society, teacher candidates are also encouraged 
to take courses in the Chicano studies, Afro-ethnic studies and Indian studies programs. 

2 Requirements and Curriculum in the Secondary Cooperative Teacher Education Program 
The Basic Teaching Credential Under the Ryan Act 

The Ryan Act will be completely operative by September 15, 1974. Therefore, students admitted 
to teacher education at Cal State Fullerton after September 15, 1973, will complete their creden- 
tials in the university program under the Ryan Act. 

The full implementation of the Ryan Act by the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licens- 
ing (hereinafter referred to in this document as the commission) the governmental agency in 
Sacramento responsible for teaching credentials, is not complete at the time this catalog is being 
prepared. Further information when received from the commission will be available in later 
publications in the Division of Teacher Education. 

The minimum requirements of this new credential are as follows: 

A. A baccalaureate degree or higher degree, except in professional education from an ap- 
proved institution. 

B. A fifth yearofstudyxo be completed within five years of the first employment. A preliminary 
credential can be granted upon the completion of the baccalaureate degree and student 
teaching. 

C. An approved program of professional preparation. This refers to the completion of the 
professional program at Cal State Fullerton described in this document. 

D. Passage of a subject matter examination or its waiver. The Ryan Act does not specify majors 
and minors, nor does it specify levels of teaching. Authorization for teaching is specified 
under only one teaching credential in either multiple subject or in single subject instruction. 
Multiple subject instruction means the practice of assignment of teachers and students as 
is commonly practiced in California elementary schools. 

Single subject instruction means the practice of assignment of teachers and students to 
specified subject matter courses as is commonly practiced in California senior high schools 
and most California junior high schools. 

Although this program is described here as a program in secondary school teacher education, 
it is in fact, the program of preparation for the teaching of single subjects as defined by the Ryan 
Act. Single subjects categories provided for in the Ryan Act related to this university's offerings 
are: English, physical science, life science, mathematics, social science, history, government, 
physical education, business, music, art, and languages including but not limited to French! 
Spanish, Russian and German. Other single subjects included in the Ryan Act but not offered at 
this university are industrial arts and home economics. Other subject matter areas are subsumed, 
as directed by the commission in the above categories. 

Subject matter examinations in the above categories will be available after August, 1974. Waivers 
of examinations will be given for graduates of accredited public and private institutions who hold 
subject matter degrees specified by the commission. At the time of the preparation of this catalog, 
the commission has not specified these subject matter degrees. It can be expected that this 
specification will be done by the operative date of the Ryan Act. If a candidate seeks authorization 
to teach in more than one area, he could do so by taking subject matter examinations in fields 
other than that of his degree. It Is not known at the time of the preparation of this catalog whether 
preparation in the minor as described in the catalog will be sufficient for the purpose of passing 
the subject matter examination in that field. In any case, this examination cannot be waived on 
the basis of having a minor since waiver is dependent upon having a degree in a subject matter 
For subject matter areas subsumed in the above categories, the commission may have special 
examinations within the subject category for candidates with degrees in subjects that are sub- 
sumed in the category, e.g. an English examination with an emphasis in theatre. Further, the 
commission may grant waivers for degrees in subject areas subsumed if they can meet the scope 
and content of the sp>eciai examination. 


1107—34 6 385 


184 


Education 


E. Demonstration of a knowledge of the various methods of teaching reading to a level 
deemed adequate by the commission, by successful completion of a program of study 
approved by the commission or passage of commission-approved reading examination. 
The course in instruction in reading for secondary school teaching meets this requirement. This 
requirement is optional for candidates in art, music and physical education. It is recommended 
especially for candidates in these fields who seek authorization to teach in other subject fields 

3. Curriculum in Secondary School Teacher Education (Prerequisite — Admission to Teacher 

Education) 

This is a two-semester program designed around extensive fieldwork in secondary schools. In the 
first semester the candidate for the credential is assigned to a learning center (a cooperating 
secondary school) daily from 8:30 a.m. to 12 noon. He meets in seminars and workshops on the 
university campus daily from 1 p.m. to 3 p.m. For this semester he is registered in: 

Ed-TE 440F Supervised Fieldwork in Secondary Schools (2) 

Ed-TE 440R Instruction in Reading for Secondary School Teaching (3) 

Ed-TE 440S Foundations of Secondary School Teaching (4) 

Ed-TE 442 Teaching — in the Secondary School (3) (methods class in the major offered by 
either the major depaament or the School of Education) 

This is a block program integrating field experience and subject matters to meet specific compe- 
tencies required of a secondary school teacher. The entire block must be taken in one semester. 
In the second semester the student registers for full-time student teaching, and in most cases does 
his student teaching in the same learning center to which he was assigned in the first semester. 
Student teaching should be completed in the semester following the block program. Courses in 
the second semester of the two semester program: 

Ed-TE 449A Student Teaching in the Secondary Scliool (10) 

Ed-TE 449B Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

4 . Admission to Student Teaching 

The credential candidate submits a formal application for student teaching by October 15 or 
March 1 in the first semester of the two-semester program. This application is part of the 
continuous process of evaluating credential candidates and their suitability for teaching in the 
secondary schools and their progress in acquiring competencies necessary for single subject 
instruction. These evaluations will come from cooperating teachers and faculty working with the 
candidates in the program. Further information concerning the criteria and procedures for admis- 
sion to student teaching, along with the application, will be available in the Division of Teacher 
Education. Since student teaching is done on a full-time basis, student teachers will be limited to 
one additional course for that semester. Students may take this course only in the late afternoon 
or evening. 

GRADUATE PROGRAMS 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 

This degree is reserved for professionally qualified graduate students who desire to prepare for or 
advance their careers in elementary curriculum and instruction. 

Prerequisites 

To be classified in the program, students must have a basic teaching credential or equivalent 
experiences, an approved major (minimum of 24 units upper division or graduate), a 2.5 grade-p>oint 
average on previous academic and related work, satisfactory interview, references and autobiogra- 
phy. Credit will be given for previous postbaccalaureate studies when possible. Otherwise well- 
qualified students may be admitted with limited subject or grade deficiences, but these deficierKes 
must be removed. Grade-point average deficiences may be removed by a demonstration of compe- 
tency in the graduate program. 

Programs of Study 

The adviser-approved 30 units (minimum) on the study plan will irKlude the following; Units 

Coursework outside elementary education 9 

Two of the following; 

Ed-TE 402 Comparative Education (3) 

Ed-TE 403 History of Education (3) 

Ed-TE 406 Educational Sociology (3) 

Ed-TE 436 Child Study Techniques for Teachers (3) 


1123—34 6 455 


Education 185 


Ed-TE 501 Philosophy of Education (3) 

Ed-TE 509 Theory and Practice in Educational Measurement (3) 

Ed-TE 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Ed-TE 511 Survey of Educational Research (3) 

Ed-TE 526 Differentiated Staffing in Public Schools (3) 

Ed-TE 527 Graduate Seminar in Developmental Psychology (3) 

Ed-TE 538 Graduate Studies: Early Childhood Education (3) 

Other adviser-approved courses (3) 

Coursework in elementary education 

Ed-TE 536 Curriculum Theory and Development (3) 

Three of the following: 

Ed-TE 530 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Second Languages (3) 
Ed-TE 531 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Language Arts (3) 

Ed-TE 532 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Mathematics 
Ed-TE 533 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Science (3) 

Ed-TE 534 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Social Studies 
Ed-TE 535 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Reading (3) 

Ed-TE 537 Seminar for Elementary Education (3) 

One of the following: 

Ed-TE 597 Graduate Project (1-3; total of 3) 

Ed-TE 598 Thesis (1-3; total of 3) 

Electives selected with approval of the adviser 

For further information, consult the chair. 

See also 'The Program of Master's Degrees/' page 59, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


(3) 


(3) 


15 


6 


TEACHER EDUCATION COURSES 

210 The Teaching Experience: Exploration (3) 

Exploration of one's self in relation to other people in the schools and an encounter with the teaching 
experience, through fieldwork. Accompanying seminar to help students extend their observa- 
tions and explore relevant issues. (4 hours fieldwork, 1 hour seminar) 

301 The Educated Man (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing or consent of instructor. Various conceptions of the nature, concerns 
and activities of a truly educated person are studied: the humanitarian ideal; aspects of human 
freedom; and the relation of science to culture. 

302 The Campus in Transition (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing or consent of instructor. Study of the history and development of 
Anr>efican higher education. The roots of change and campus unrest are examined. 

303 Education and Its Critics (3) 

Examination of the criticisms of contemporary education and of proposals for reform. Includes visits 
to a variety of schools. Designed for all students. Not a part of the credential program. 

304 Contemporary Educational Change (3) 

Emphasis on the changing educational scene in elementary and secondary levels. The quest for 
greater flexibility, better methods of teaching, improved staffing patterns and accountability serve 
as the course foundation. 

305 School and Society (3) 

Stability and change in contemporary society viewed in terms of the decline of traditional values 
and culture and the rise of legal-rational institutions. Urban life, social class, race relations and 
family organization will be examined. 

308 Education of Various Cultural Groups: Early Childhood (3) 

Designed for Head Start personnel and others engaged in the early education of culturally different 
children. Focus will be on development of learning, curriculum content, and methodology. (2 
hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

309 Fieldwork in the Education of Various Cultural Groups (3) 

Observation and participation in classes for various cultural groups. Integrated with coursework in 
Education of Various Cultural Groups. Must be taken concurrently with Educ 308. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

7 - 86012 


1127—34 6 475 


186 Education 


310 The Teaching Experience: Participation (3) 

Active participation in school classrooms and analysis of the experience. Accompanying seminar 
will help students to analyze their fieldwork experiences. (4 hours fieldwork, 1 hour seminar) 

312 Human Growth and Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. A comprehensive study of human growth and development with emphasis 
on childhood, adolescence and middle and old age. Includes mental, social, emotional and 
physical development. 

340 Principles and Curriculum Secondary Education (3) 

Principles of secondary education in the United States; organization, curriculum, and teaching 
practices. Two hours of observation per week in selected junior and senior high school classes. 
(2 hours lecture, 2 hours fieldwork) 

385 Infancy and Early Childhood (3) 

The physical growth and social and personality development of the human through the sixth year 
of life. 

386 Adolescence (3) 

A study of the physical, social and cultural development of human adolescence and youth. Particular 
attention is given to contemporary factors producing change. 

401 Social Foundations of Education (4) 

Seminar in philosophical, historical and sociological foundations of education, considered in the light 
of their influence on contemporary educational theory and practice in the United States. 

402 Comparative Education (3) 

A seminar centered in study of the various countries' education patterns, as part of the cultural setting 
in which found; designed to deep>en insight into our own culture's educational program and offer 
bases for comparative evaluation with other systems. 

403 History of Education (3) 

The main streams of educational history in Europe and America, with particular emphasis on the 
ways these main streams have affected the current scene in the United States. 

406 Educational Sociology (3) 

The school in the social order; the school as a social system; analysis of cultural factors affecting 
the school; the special culture of the school; roles and role conflicts in the school; policy 
questions flowing from social issues and school-cultural relationships. 

407 Principles of Teaching and Learning in the Elementary School (3) 

Prerequisites; admission to the Teacher Education Program (Elementary). The course relates theo- 
ries of learning and theories of child growth and development to effective teaching in elementary 
schools. The appropriate foundations of instructional practices are examined. Fieldwork in the 
public schools is part of the course. 

408 Ghetto Schools (3) 

A study of the schools in the inner city, including educational issues related to or stemming from 
poverty, cultural differences, often inappropriate curricula, limited communication between 
parents and the system, and other problems. 

411 Psychological Foundations of Education (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 101, concurrent enrollment in upper division practicum or fieldwork, and 
previous admission to teacher education program. Learning theory, thinking processes, and 
human growth and development. Students who have completed Psych 31 1 must have consent 
of instructor to enroll. 

430A Foundations in Elementary School Teaching (3) 

Prerequisite, admission to teacher education. A study of children's learning styles, and their overall 
growth and development with the aim of helping future elementary teachers acquire the behav- 
iors necessary for effective teaching. To be taken concurrently with Education 430B,C and 433. 

430B Curriculum and Methods in Elementary School Teaching (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. A study of elementary school curricula, instructional 
materials, and teaching techniques with the aim of helping future elementary teachers acquire 
the behaviors necessary for effective teaching. To be taken concurrently with Education 430A,C, 
and 433. 

430C Supervised Fieldwork in Elementary Teacher Education (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Students will serve as teacher participants in an 
assigned elementary school classroom to apply information learned in the following courses 
which must be taken concurrently: Educ 430A,B and 433. 


1131-^ 6 495 


Education 187 


431 Principles and Curricula of Ihe Elementary School (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An introductory course in elementary education. Stress on major 
principles and basic curricular considerations. lmp)ortance of the elementary school system to 
society 

433 Reading Instruction in Public Schools (3) 

Prerequisite; admission to teacher education. Exp)erience in the teaching of reading which students 
will demonstrate the behavior necessary to work with children in public school. 

435A Strategies of Teaching (4) 

Prerequisites: Educ 407 and 433. A course dealing with implementation of principles of learning and 
teaching in the subject areas taught in the elementary schools. The approach is to focus on 
teacher tasks rather than on subject areas. Examples from the subject areas will be used in the 
examination of teacher tasks. 

435B Supervised Fieldwork in Elementary Teacher Education (2) 

Prerequisites: admission to teacher education, Educ 407 and 433; Educ 435A is to be taken concur- 
rently. Students will serve as teacher aids in an assigned elementary school classroom to apply 
information learned in Ed-TE 407, 433 and 435A. 

436 Child Study Techniques for Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Techniques the classroom teacher may use in understanding 
indvidual children within his classroom who do not respond to the teacher and his peers in 
typical ways. 

437 Early Childhood Education (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of current literature and recent research in the area of 
education of young children through individual and group study. Emphasis will be placed on 
problems centered in cognitive processes, content, structure and instruction at this level. 

439A Student Teaching in the Elementary School (10) 

Prerequisites: Educ 430A,B,C, 433 and admission to student teaching. Participation in a regular 
elementary school teaching program for the full school day. Concurrent enrollment in Educ 439B 
is required. 

439B Seminar in Elementary Student Teaching (2) 

Prerequisites: Educ 430A,B,C, 433 and admission to student teaching. Seminar in problems and 
procedures of elementary school teaching. CorKurrent enrollment in Educ 439A is required. 

440F Supervised Fieldwork in Secondary Schools (2) 

Prerequisites: admission to teacher education. Observation and participation in instruction in sec- 
ondary school learning centers 3 hours daily. Fieldwork associated with Ed-TE 440R, 440S and 
442. Taken corKurrently with these courses. Replaces Ed-TE 340, 4%, and 449. 

440R Instruction in Reading for Secondary School Teaching (3) 

Prerequisites: admission to teacher education. Instruction in developmental reading for prospective 
teachers in single subjects. Taken concurrently with Ed-TE 440F, 440S and 442. 

440S Foundations Secondary School Teaching (4) 

Prerequisites: admission to teacher education. Includes development of teaching competencies 
related to adolescent development, the learning process and diagnosis of learning problems, 
evaluation of pupil achievement, and cultural differences in secondary school youth. Taken 
corKurrently with Ed-TE 440F, 440R and 442. Replaces Ed-TE 411. 

442 Teaching — in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Required before student teaching of students present- 
ing major in following areas or subjects. 

Art Ed 442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (3) 

Educ 442 Teaching Business in the Secondary School (3) 

Educ 442 Teaching Social Science in the Secondary School (3) 

Engl Ed 442 Teaching English in the Secondary School (3) 

For Lang Ed 442 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (3) 
lourn Ed 442 Teaching Journalism in the Secondary School (3) 

Math Ed 442 Teaching Mathematics in the Secondary School (3) 

Mu Ed 442 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public Schools (3) 

PE 442 Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School (3) 

Sci Ed 442 Teaching Science in the Secondary School (3) 

Speech Ed 442 Teaching Speech in the Secondary School (3) 

Theatre Ed 442 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School (3) 


1137-^ 6 525 


188 


Education 


445 Junior High School Education (3) 

Prerequisite; Educ 442 or 331. Seminar on principles of junior high education. Purposes, curriculum, 
and organization of the junior high school including examination of recent innovations and 
proposals. For students with elementary or secondary backgrounds interested in this level. 

446 Secondary School Curriculum (3) 

Prerequisite: student teaching or teaching experience or consent of instructor. Fundamentals of 
curriculum development. Seminar on current issues within secondary education. Curricular 
organization and current practices. Survey and evaluation of newer curricular programs. 

448 Social Studies Simulation Games (2) 

A discussion-laboratory course in which students will study simulations, get acquainted with and play 
a number of commercially available simulations, and design and play their own. For teachers 
and prospective teachers of the social studies elementary and secondary schools. 

449A,B Student Teaching in the Secondary School and Seminar (12) 

Prerequisite; admission to student teaching. Full-time student teaching. 

451 Principles of Educational Measurement (3) 

Development, validation, and application of the principles of educational measurement. Construc- 
tion and use of informal and standardized achievement tests. Summary and interpretation of 
results of measurement. 

454 Bilingual Education in the United States (3) 

Prerequisites: Some knowledge of bilingual education. Helpful, but not necessary ability to converse 
in another language (preferably Spanish). Study of bilingual education in the United States; the 
literature, the laws, the history and the impact such educational programs have had on the 
speaker of the foreign languages in the United States. 

491 Audiovisual Education (2) 

Media in communication, psychological bases, development, curricular function, evaluation. Survey 
of equipment and materials available, preparation of instructional materials for classroom use. 
(1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

492 Television in the Classroom (2) 

Television as a vehicle for instruction, information and enrichment. General theory of media in 
classroom, psychological bases, curricular capabilities and limitations of equipment. Responsibili- 
ty of the classroom teacher, practice in utilization process. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

493 Production of Audiovisual Materials (2) 

Exploration and development of audiovisual materials. Students will participate in scriptwriting, 
story-board, photography and tape production. Experience will be provided in producing graph- 
ics, charts and bulletin boards. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

4% Senior Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Conduct at an advanced level an educational practicum experience with an individual under the 
direction of a faculty member. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites; senior or graduate standing, consent of instructor and division prior to registration. 
Individual investigation under supervision of a faculty member. Only students of demonstrated 
capacity and maturity will be approved; adequate prerequisite study necessary. May be repeated 
for credit 

501 Philosophy of Education (3) 

Prerequisites: postgraduate standing and Educ 339 or 439A, B or 749, or consent of instructor. Uses 
of theories of knowledge, value and reality in dealing with educational problems; application of 
contemporary systems of thought to education. 

509 Theory and Practice in Educational Measurement (3) 

Introduction to concepts, theory, and procedures for construction of informal and standardized tests. 
Application of measurement theory and statistical techniques toward problems of analysis, 
scaling, norming, and interpretation. Practice in item writing for tests and analysis of commercial 
standardized tests. 

511 Survey of Educational Research (3) 

Prerequisites; Educ 509, teaching experience. Review of descriptive statistics and staistical infererKe 
as applied to educational problems. Analysis of representative research papers. Principles of 
research design. Prepare a research proposal. 


1143—34 6 555 


Education 189 


525 Seminar for Secondary Education (3) (Formerly 547) 

Prerequisite; Educ 749 or consent of instructor. Persistent problems in secondary education and 
survey of related literature; causes of and solutions for these problems. Application of scientific 
method to educational problems, sources of educational researc h, and to techniques of coopera- 
tive thinking. 

526 Differentiated Staffing in Public Schools (3) 

Prerequisites: teaching credential or consent of instructor. Seminar in the study of the processes and 
techniques in working with parents, paraprofessionals, specialists and community people. In- 
cludes basic principles of supervision and interaction with adults. 

527 Graduate Seminar in Developmental Psychology: The Human from Conception Through 

Eight Years (3) 

Prerequisites; Teaching Credential or consent of instruc tor. The physical, social, cognitive-intellectual 
and emotional development of human individuals from conception to middle childhood is the 
subject of this seminar. Current problems, theories and research are given emphasis. 

530 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Second Languages (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of pertinent investigations and their applica- 
tion in the classroom together with significant curriculum developments and organization in the 
area of second language learning in the elementary school, including English as a foreign lan- 
guage. 

531 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Language Arts (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. Seminar for advanced study of trends and problems in teaching 
the fundamental skills of communication in the elementary school. Analysis of research in the 
language arts and related disciplines as background for curriculum development. 

532 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Mathematics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math Ed 103 A, Educ 439A, B, or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of 
significant research, curricular developments and materials, criteria for planning and improving 
mathematics programs and instruction. 

533 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Science (3) 

Prerequisite; Educ 439A, B or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of significant research in 
elementary school science. Criteria for planning and improving science programs and the devel- 
opment of materials. 

534 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Social Studies (3) 

Prerequisite; Educ 339 or 439A, B, or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of significant 
research developments and materials, criteria for planning and improving social studies programs 
and current techniques of teaching. 

535 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Reading (3) 

Prerequisite; Educ 339 or 439A, B, or consent of instructor. Seminar in advanced study of trends and 
issues in teaching reading in elementary schools. Analysis of research or background for cur- 
riculum development and instructional procedures. 

536 Curriculum Theory and Development in the Elementary School (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 439A, B or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of the elementary school 
curriculum irKluding the forces operating on the curriculum and the participants involved in 
curriculum building. Emphasis also placed on the process of curriculum building. 

537 Seminar for Elementary Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 439A, B or consent of instructor. A study of problems and issues in elementary 
education, their causes and possible solutions. 

538 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Early Childhood Education (3) 

Prerequisites: teaching credential or consent of instructor. Exploration of the implications of research 

for curriculum development and instructional planning. Study of the ways in which different 
views of human development and learning have affected programs in early childhood education. 

591A Fieldwork and Seminar in Early Childhood (3) 

Prerequisites; Educ 538 or consent of instructor. Provides candidates with an opportunity to demon- 
strate instructional abilities in working with children, parents, professionals, and members of the 
community. 

591 B Fieldwork and Seminar in Early Childhood (3) 

Prerequisites; Educ 538 or consent of instructor. Provides candidates with opportunities to demon- 
strate supervisory, coordinating and administrative abilities in working with children, parents, 
professionals and members of the community in the development of early childhood education 
programs. 


1149—34 6 585 


190 


Education 


595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars designed to develop professional competencies in such areas as behavior, 
teaching strategies, educational technology, program development, communication theory and 
interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor, individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independ- 
ent inquiry. 

701 Credential Studies (0) 

A course for students admitted to teacher education who find it impossible to maintain continuous 
enrollment while they are completing the 30 units beyond the baccalaureate. A student may not 
register in this course for a third consecutive semester. 

709 Supervision of Student Teaching (3) 

Prerequisites; a teaching credential and one year of teaching experience. Designed for teachers who 
supervise student teachers. Emphasis on principles and procedures of effective supervision and 
research 

721 Philosophy and Objectives of Community College Education (2) 

Prerequisite; p>ostgraduate standing. College movement in higher education in the United States. 
Socioeconomic forces creating needs for different post-high school education; community col- 
lege education objectives, relationships to secondary and higher education; curriculum develop- 
ment and organization 

744 Principles of Community College Teaching (3) 

Prerequisite; postgraduate standing. Psychological foundations of community college teaching, 
measurement and evaluation of learning. Educational and philosophical bases for instructional 
procedures in the community college. Instructional procedures including audiovisual materials, 
community college classs observations. (2 hours seminar. 3 hours fieldwork) 

749 Student Teaching in — in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

( For cjindiddtes for the Fisher sUndjird teaching credentijf in secondary teaching) 

Prerequisites; admission to student teaching. Student teaching for the standard teaching credential 
with specialization in secondary school teaching. Student teaching program for half-days for a 
full semester. Includes a 2 hour seminar each week. (Minimum of 15 hours a week) 

Art Ed 749 Student Teaching in Art in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

Educ 749 Student Teaching in Business in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

Educ 749 Student Teaching in Social Science in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Engl Ed 749 Student Teaching in English in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

For Lang Ed 749 Student Teaching in Foreign Languages in the Secondary School and 
Seminar (6) 

Journ Ed 749 Student Teaching in Journalism in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Math Ed 749 Student Teaching in Mathematics in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Mu Ed 749 Student Teaching in Music in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

PE 749 Student Teaching in Physical Education in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Sci Ed 749 Student Teaching in Science in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Speech Ed 749 Student Teaching in Speech in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Theatre Ed 749 Student Teaching in Theatre in Secondary School and Seminar (6) 


17—20 7 500 


HEALTH EDUCATION 
PHYSICAL EDUCATION 
RECREATION AND ATHLETICS 


192 


DIVISION OF HEALTH EDUCATION, PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION, RECREATION AND ATHLETICS 

Director: Paul Pastor 


ATHLETICS 

Neale Stoner, Director 

FACULTY 

Charles Boyle, Roy Caldwell, Richard Christie, Robert Dye, August Garrido, John Godden, William 
Griffin, jerry Lloyd, Donald Matson, Billie Moore, Melvin Sims, V. Richard Wolfe, Peter Yoder 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION 
Eula Stovall, Chair 

FACULTY 

C. Ian Bailey, Jean Barrett, Leslie Bleamaster, Ron Edwards, M. William Fulton, Eric Hanauer, Elmer 
Johnson, Alexander Omalev, Roberta Rikli, Iva Ross, Virginia Scheel, Carol Weinmann, Ronald 
Witchey, Michael Yessis 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

The Department of Physical Education offers the Bachelor of Science in Physical Education for 
students preparing to teach, for those preparing to pursue graduate work in physical education and 
for those preparing for careers in business, industry and government service. The degree consists 
of 1 24 units with a maximum of 1 2 lower division units and a minimum of 28 upper division units 
in physical education. 

Transfer students must request transcripts of records of all previous scholastic work from each 
university or college attended. These transcripts are in addition to those required for admission to 
the university and must be sent by the issuing institution directly to the chair. Department of Physical 
Education. 

All transfer students must have transcripts evaluated by the department undergraduate adviser prior 
to registration. 

MAJOR IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

It is strongly recommended that students take one or more of the following courses to fulfill their 
general education requirements; 

Chemistry 100 Introductory Chemistry (4) 

Physics 211 A Elementary Wiy sics (4) 

Physical Science 201 Modern Physical Science (4) 

Biological Science 201 Elements of Biology (5) 

Biological ScierKe 361 Mammalian Anatomy and Physiology (4) 

Lower Division (maximum of 12 units) 

A minimum of six classes elected from the following 6 

PE 110, 120, 130, 140, 170 and 180. (Although course number may be repeated to 
meet this requirement, a specific class may count only once.) 

Upper Division (minimum of 28 units) 

Theoretical arxJ practical bases: 

Minimum of two courses 6-7 

PE 324 Theory and PrirKiples of Human Motor Learning (3) 

PE 360 Movement Anatomy (3) 

PE 361 Biomechanics of Sport (3) 

PE 370 Physiology of Exercise (4) 

PE 418 Adapted and Corrective Activities (3) 


1158--04 6 630 


Education 


193 


Contemporary understandings: 

Minimum of two courses 6 

PE 350 History of Physical Education (3) 

PE 356 Cultural Perspectives of Physical Activity (3) 

PE 436 Sport Psychology (3) 

PE 437 Sport Sociology (3) 

Analysis: 

Minimum of three courses 6-7 

Two courses selected from; 

PE 340 series, Analysis of Individual Sports (2) 

PE 341 series. Analysis of Dual Sports (2) 

One course from; 

PE 340 Analysis of Individual Sports (2) 

PE 341 Analysis of Dual Sports (2) 

PE 342 Analysis of Team Sports (2) 

PE 482 Ethnic Dance (3) 

PE 484 Contemporary Dance Technique (3) 

PE 486 Choreography (3) 

Upper division physical education courses to complete the required 40 units for the major 

Total 40 

Proficiency Requirements for Major and Minor Students 

Activity courses should be taken to meet the prerequisite requirements for any analysis series courses 
the student plans to take. Proficiency screening tests are administered in the analysis classes at the 
beginning of the semester. 

MINOR IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

A physical education minor shall consist of 20 units of coursework in physical education with a 
minimum of 12 upper division units which must include work from each of the following areas; 
Theoretical and Practical Bases, Contemporary Understandings and Analysis series. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR PHYSICAL EDUCATION MAJORS SEEKING A 
TEACHING CREDENTIAL 

The university program for meeting the basic requirements for the teaching credential with a 
specialization in physical education (K-12) can be found elsewhere in this catalog (see School of 
Education, Division of Teacher Education). Additional requirements of the Department of Physical 
Education are as follows; 

1 Required Coursework 

In addition to, or as part of, the requirements for a major in physical education all candidates 
for the credential must complete the following with a minimum of a “C" grade; 

PE 324 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning 
PE 360 Biomechanics of Sport 

PE 420 Tests and Measurements in Physical Education 

2. Competency in Subject Matter of Physical Education 

All candidates for the credential must adequately demonstrate their competency in subject matter 
scope and content of physical education. The major areas of emphasis identified by the Physical 
Education Advisory Panel of the Commission for Teacher Preparation and Licensing include: (1) 
biological foundations, (2) sociological foundations, (3) psychological foundations, (4) histori- 
cal — philosophical foundations, (5) evaluation and measurement, (6) health and safety concepts 
relating to physical activity and (7) instructional subject matter. 

3. Instructional Subject Matter of Physical Education 

Students seeking a credential with a specialization in physical education from this institution must 
be able to demonstrate their comp)etency in instructional subject matter which is a part of the 
regular physxcdA education program of the public schools. The Department of Physical Education 
specifically requires the following: 


1163-^ 7 10 


194 HE PER A 


a. Ability to perform and analyze basic movement skills common to a large number of instruction- 
al physical activities. 

b. Adequate background and preparation to demonstrate breadth of understanding of the scope 
and content of physical education. 

c. Strong background and preparation in a minimum of three designated areas of physical 
education* to demonstrate "in-depth" understanding and ability to apply understandings to 
the teaching learning situation. At present the areas identified by the Teacher Education 
Advisory Council of the Physical Education Department include: (1 ) team sports, (2) individ- 
ual sports, (3) dual sports, (4) dance, (5) aquatics, (6) recreational (must be instructional 
in nature), (7) environmental, (8) developmental, (9) sp)ecial programs, and (10) coaching. 

4. Admission to Teacher Education 

In addition to the requirements set forth elsewhere in this catalog, the Department of Physical 
Education requires candidates to submit to an extensive review of qualifications for teaching. This 
review includes additional written documentation, and a personal evaluation by a select interview 
committee. 

Acceptance into the program allows the candidate to enroll in a two semester sequence: 

First semester Second semester 

Ed-TE 440F PE 749 (Student Teaching and Seminar) 

ED-TE 440S ED 401 

ED-TE 440R (optional) PE 449A,B 

PE 442 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

The program of studies is designed: (1) to prepare master teachers at the college level; (2) to 
improve the professional background and competence of those in the field; (3) to prepare scholars 
who wish to pursue a doctoral program in physical education; and (4) to prepare students for sports 
related careers in fields other than teaching. 

Prerequisites 

Prerequisites to the program include: 

( 1 ) completion of 24 approved upper division units in physical education; 

(2) a grade-point average of 3.0 or better, for all up>per division work taken in physical education 
and a 2.5 CPA for all previous college and/or university work. (Contingency provisions: 
grade-point deficiencies in individual courses in physical education may be met by taking 6-12 
hours of approved courses at Cal State Fullerton, and earning a 3.0 CPA in these courses. Such 
courses, while counted toward the prerequisites for the master of science program, may not 
be used to fulfill the program requirements.) 

(3) Submit three satisfactory letters of recommendations 
Study Plan: 

The degree study plan normally consists of 30 units of graduate coursework with a CPA of 3.0 or 
better. Coursework shall include a minimum of 18 units of 500-level courses of which 5-7 units are 
required. Further work includes 11 to 13 units of 500-level physical education courses and a 
maximum of 12 units of optional electives. A thesis or a project and an oral examination at the 
conclusion of the program are required; a written examination may also be required. 

Units 

Required 5-7 

PE 510 Research in HEPER (3) 

PE 598 Thesis or PE 597 Project (2-4) 

Study plans shall be developed from the following list of approved courses with adviser's 
approval. 

Approved 5(X)-level Physical Education 11-13 

PE 505 Seminar in Sports Administration (3) 

PE 515 Seminar in Physical Education (3) 

PE 516 Philosophical Bases of Physical Education (3) 

• Students are urged to consult with the teacher education adviser of the departnnent before submitting documents required for 
establishing subject matter competency. 


1170—34 7 45 


HE PER A 195 


PE 520 International Physical Education (3) 

PE 530 Administration and Supervision of HEPER (3) 

PE 532 Curriculum Design in Physical Education (3) 

PE 533 Facilities Development and Planning (2) 

PE 540 Seminar in Problems in Adapted Physical Education (3) 

PE 545 Seminar in Evaluation in Physical Education (3) 

PE 550 Internship (3-6) 

PE 551 Seminar: Advanced Study in Physiology of Exercise (3) 

PE 552 Human Bio-Kinetics (3) 

PE 555 Scientific Bases of Training (3) 

*PE 5% Advanced Studies in Physical Education (1-3) 

•PE 599 Independent Research (1-3) 

Optional Electives 12 

Twelve units of coursework are selected with adviser's approval which would be support- 
ive of the individual student's stated goals for graduate study. Coursework may be select- 
ed from the following categories in any combination: 

1. 5(X)-level coursework in physical education. 

2. 400-level coursework in physical education approved by the department's Graduate 
Studies Committee for graduate students. 

3. Graduate or upper division coursework approved for graduate students from other 
departments within the university. 

Total 30 

For further details, consult the graduate studies adviser, Division of Health Education, Physical 
Education, Recreation and Athletics. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 59, and the Graduate BuHetin. 


HEALTH EDUCATION COURSES 

101 Personal and Community Health (2) 

Meaning and significance of physical, mental and social health as related to the individual and to 
society; alcohol and narcotics education; fire prevention; public safety and accident prevention. 

102 Prevention and First Aid (2) 

Study of the hazards in man's environment and the common accidents related thereto. Emphasis 
is placed up)on both the care and prevention of accidents. Students will be certified in standard 
and advarKed American Red Cross first aid procedures. 

321 Stimulants and Depressants (3) 

Critical study of habit-forming substances such as alcohol, tobacco, narcotics and related drugs. 
Social and legal aspects of the drug problem are also considered. 

322 Man, Exercise and Leisure (2) 

A study of the effect of man's nutrition in relation to exercise. The interrelationships of activity and 
leisure in modern society and the problems that are associated with them will also be investigat- 
ed. 

410 Health Education for Teachers (3) 

Topics will include school health, drug education, family living community health teaching philoso- 
phy and strategy. For students seeking California teaching credential. 

419 The School Health Program (3) 

Prerequisite: HE 101 or equivalent. Consideration of the three classical divisions of the school health 
program: instruction, services and environment. Study will include standards, problems, and 
relationships pertaining to these areas as well as a field project. 

421 Public Health (2) 

A study of the structure, policies and practices of public health agencies in the United States. 
Emphasis on factors affecting environmental health. 

• P£ 5% and 599 may be applied to the maKX area ci cooc€?otralioo and/or the secondary area o^ optional electives. 


1175—34 7 70 


196 HE PER A 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION COURSES 

General Education Requirements: 

Health and Physical Education Electives 

There are no specific health and physical education requirements. Each student, however, must take 
a minimum of three courses (9 units) with one from each of three fields included in Category IV, 
Basic Subjects: computer science, elementary foreign languages, health education, mathematics, oral 
communications, physical education, reading, statistics or writing. See page 56. 

110 Aquatics (1) 

A physical activity experience in aquatics activities with a student in an educational setting and under 
the direction of a faculty member who directs the activity to meet the needs and interests of the 
student. Open to all students. May be repeated for credit. 

120 Group Activities (1) 

A physical activity experience in group activities with a student in an educational setting and under 
the direction of a faculty member who directs the activity to meet the needs and interests of the 
student. Open to all students. May be repeated for credit. 

130 Individual Activities (1) 

A physical activity experience in individual activities with a student in an educational setting and 
under the direction of a faculty member who directs the activity to meet the needs and interests 
of the student. Open to all students. May be repeated for credit. 

140 Dance Activities (1) 

(Same as Dance 140) 

170 Intercollegiate Sports (W) (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of coach. An intercollegiate activity experience in individual or team sfxjrts for 
women in an educational setting under the directipn of a coach who directs the activity to meet 
the needs and interests of the student. 

180 Intercollegiate Sports (M) (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of coach. An intercollegiate activity experience in individual and team s(X)rts 
for men in an educational setting under the direction of a coach who directs the activity to meet 
the needs and interests of the student. 

190 Team Management (2) 

Field experience in the management of an intercollegiate sport. May be repeated for credit. 

201 Introduction to Physical Education and Recreation (3) 

Introduction to physical education programs in public and private agencies, personal, social arxJ 
professional requirements of the physical education teacher and recreation leader, includes the 
origin and development of the professions of health education, physical education and recreation 
with emphasis upon their significance and function in contemporary American culture. 

206 Techniques of Officiating Team Sports (2) 

Analysis of officiating techniques and rules necessary for officiating team sports. May be repeated 
for various sports or combinations of sports. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

210 Water Safety Instructor (2) 

Prerequisite: PE 1 10 (Life Saving) or equivalent and consent of instructor. This course prepares the 
student to teach swimming and life saving and to supervise aquatic programs. Successful comple- 
tion of this course will qualify the student for certification as an ARC Water Safety Instructor. 
(1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

214 Skin and Scuba Diving (2) 

Prerequisites: PE 1 10 (Skin Diving), or ability to swim 400 yards, tread water one minute, and swim 
25 yards underwater and consent of instructor. The techniques of skin and scuba diving, theory 
of diving, safety procedures and applications of diving will be covered. ( 1 hour lecture, 2 hours 
activity) 

301 Prevention and Care of Athletic Injuries (3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing, successful completion of HE 102 (or equivalent) and consent 
of instructor. Designed to assist trainers, coaches, physical education instructors, health educa- 
tors, YMCA and playground personnel, and athletes in the prevention and care of athletic injuries. 
Emphasis will be on practical applications as well as theory. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 


1182--34 7 105 


HE PER A 197 


303 Conditioning for Athletes (3) 

Fundamentals of conditioning for those who plan to coach. Includes specific programs such as circuit 
training, nutrition, motivation, weight control and kinesiologic factors for women's and men's 
athletics. 

310 Applied Scuba Diving (2) 

Application of scuba diving, including spear fishing, photography, specimen collecting, night diving, 
boat diving and others. 

320 Theory of Coaching: Sports (2) 

A physical education exp)erience designed to help prepare the student to coach specific individual 
and team sports. Emphasis will include coaching techniques, conditioning of athletes, budget 
preparation, purchase and care of equipment, scheduling and design and care of facilities. May 
be repeated for credit with emphasis on a different sport. 

324 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning (3) 

An analysis of current theories of motor learning as related to human performance. Philosophical 
bases are developed from which basic principles are evolved. 

325 Organization and Administration of Physical Education (3) 

Case studies involving human physical performance. Sequence of activities, individual needs, institu- 
tional patterns of organization and programming. 

326 Organization and Administration of Intramural Sports (2) 

Organization and administration of intramural sports programs at the elementary, secondary, and 
college level. Selected fieldwork is included. 

333 Physical Education and Human Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor or department chair required for physical education majors. 
Emphasis is placed upon characteristics of the child, particularly as these relate to physical 
growth and development; basic mechanical principles underlying efficient movement; and pro- 
grams for physical needs of children in the elementary school. 

335 Afro-American Dance (2) 

(Same as Dance 335) 

340 Analysis of Individual Sports (2) 

Prerequisite: prior experience in the specific sport (s) offered. Must demonstrate adequate proficien- 
cy in each sport offered. Analysis of a specific sport(s) including game play and skill perform- 
ance. Emphasis on understanding the specific nature of the activity. May be repeated for credit 
with emphasis on a different sport. 

341 Analysis of Dual Sports (2) 

Prerequisite: prior experience in the specific sport (s) offered. Must demonstrate adequate proficien- 
cy in each sport offered. Analysis of a sp)ecific sport (s) including game play and skill perform- 
ance. Emphasis on understanding the specific nature of the activity. May be repeated for credit 
with emphasis on a different sport. 

342 Analysis of Team Sports (2) 

Prerequisite: prior experience in the specific sport offered. Must demonstrate adequate proficiency 
in each sport offered. Analysis of a specific sport (s) including game play and skill performance. 
Emphasis on understanding the specific nature of the activity. May be repeated for credit with 
emphasis on a different sport. 

350 History of Physical Education (3) 

Historical development of thought and practice in athletics and physical education in American 
education. 

356 Cultural Perspectives of Physical Activity (3) 

An interdisciplinary approach to the examination of physical activity in the cultural milieu. Study will 
cover historical and contemporary interpretations of the role of play, games and sports, dance 
and recreation in human life. 

360 Movement Anatomy (3) 

Description of human nwvement especially as witnessed in sports. Comprehension of muscle action 
and function in various sports. 

361 Biomechanics of Sport (3) 

Sports technique analysis. General techniques of motion study and application of mechanical princi- 
ples to sport. 


1186—34 7 125 


198 


HEPERA 


370 Physiology of Exercise (4) 

The study of physiological processes in physical activities and the effects of training upon perform- 
ance. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

3% Tutorial (1) 

Student aide in general education activity classes. May be repeated for credit. 

418 Adapted and Corrective Activities (3) 

The study and selection of activities and programs for students physically unable to participate in 
the regular physical education program. 

420 Tests and Measurements in Physical Education (3) 

A study of the development and use of tests and measurements in physical education in the 
evaluation of objectives, programs and student achievement. 

425 Special Programs: Physical Education (1-3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Group investigation of selected topics determined by profes- 
sionals in the field. May be repeated for credit. 

436 Sport Psychology (3) 

Discussion and analysis of literature, research and issues dealing with psychological aspects of play, 
games and sport. (Same as Psychology 436) 

437 Sport Sociology (3) 

A critical examination of the interrelationships of sport and athletics with other aspects of the culture; 

special emphasis on 20th-century America. 

442 Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Deals with objectives, methods and materials of 
teaching physical education at the secondary school level. Required before student teaching. 
Course is part of the 12-unit education block and may not be taken separately. 

449A Student Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School (10) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education, page 188. 

449B Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education, page 188. 

450A Advanced Study in Performance: Badminton and Tennis (2) (Formerly 560A) 
Prerequisites: analysis of badminton and tennis or consent of instructor. An in-depth study of skills, 
techniques and strategy of top level performance in badminton and tennis. Included is the theory 
and analysis of outstanding performance. 

450B Advanced Study in Performance: Gymnastics (2) (Formerly 560B) 

Prerequisites, analysis of gymnastics or consent of instructor. An in-depth study of skills, techniques 
and strategy of top level performance in gymnastics. IrKluded is the theory and analysis of 
outstanding performance. 

450C Advanced Study in Performance: Track and Field (2) (Formerly 560C) 

Prerequisites: analysis of track and field or consent of instructor. An in-depth study of skills, tech- 
niques and strategy of top level performance in track and field. Included is the theory and analysis 
of outstanding performance. 

482 Ethnic Dance (3) 

(Same as Dance 482) 

484 Contemporary Dance Technique (3) 

(Same as Dance 484) 

486 Choreography (3) 

(Same as Dance 486) 

4% Physical Education Practicum (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of supervisor, undergraduate adviser and department chair. Particip>ation as an 
assistant in planning, preparing, coaching, teaching in public school, college, or community 
physical education or recreation programs. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. 
Credit/No Credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of instructor supervising the study, undergraduate 
adviser and department chair. Independent inquiry into problems of topics of special interest 
beyond the scope of regular coursework. May be repeated for credit up to six units. 


1192—34 7 155 


HE PER A 199 


505 Seminar in Sports Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status. Management approaches related to the administration of commercial 
and professional sports including office management, radio and TV negotiations, public relations, 
arena and stadium management, ticket sales, the legal aspects and the supervision of the medical 
aspects of professional sports. 

510 Research in Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status. The role and functions of research in health, physical education, and 
recreation; included are the different types of research with tools of and equipment for the 
respective research. Selection and development of research problems and critique of completed 
studies are stressed. 

515 Seminar in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major or minor in physical education. A study of current 
problems and issues in physical education through a critical analysis of the literature in the field 
and research findings. 

516 Philosophical Bases of Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. Identification of philosophical 
schools of thought as related to physical education including the role of the philosophical 
process. Examination and application of the philosophical process in physical education. 

520 International Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. An in-depth study of the theory and 
practice of physical education and sports in selected foreign countries. Evaluation of foreign 
physical education programs in relation to programs witnessed in the United States. 

530 Administration and Supervision of Health Education, Physical Education and 
Recreation (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with major in physical education. An in-depth study and critical analysis 
of existing programs in health education, physical education, and recreation in terms of estab- 
lished evaluative criteria and norms of practice. 

532 Curriculum Design in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. Study in desirable practices, proce- 
dures, and factors influencing curricular development in the field of physical education. Especial- 
ly designed for the practicing teacher, supervisor of physical education, and the school 
administrator concerned with physical education in the total school program. 

533 Facilities Development and Planning (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate status and a major in physical education. Analysis of new trends and research 
in the development of indoor and outdoor facilities in planning programs in health education, 
physical education and recreation with special emphasis upon design, safety, features, site 
selection, building construction and equipment needs. 

540 Seminar in Problems in Adapted Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 418. Identification arid solutions of problems in planning, organization, administra- 
tion, and evaluation of adapted physical education programs at local, state and national levels. 

545 Seminar in Evaluation in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. The study and application of 
advanced evaluation procedures and scientific instrumentation used in the solution of current 
problems and projects in physical education. 

550 Internship (3) 

Prerequisite: advanced to candidacy status. On-the-job training experiences under the supervision 
of a fully trained practitioner in the field. Requirements include 10 hours per week of on-the-job 
training and 1 hour weekly conference with instructor. May be repeated once for credit. 

551 Seminar: Advanced Study in Physiology of Exercise (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 370 or equivalent. A study of advanced theories of exercise and physiological 
function. 

552 Human Bio-Kinetics (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 361 or equivalent background in kinesiology. A study of advanced theories and a 
detailed analysis of human movement. 

555 Scientific Bases of Training (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, coursework in kinesiology, physiology of exercise, bio-kinetics and 
consent of instructor. Detailed study of contemporary training with specific attention to the 
development of those qualities involved in various sports. Experience in evaluation of the effects 
of training. 


1207—34 7 230 


200 


HEPERA 


5% Advanced Studies: Physical Education (1-3) 

Prerequisite; graduate status. Graduate seminars designed to develop competencies in such areas 
as: historical, philosophical, sociological, psychological, scientific bases of sport and dance. 
Opportunities are provided for the individualization of instruction with appropriate experiences. 
May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (2) 

Prerequisites: PE 510 and consent of instructor. Individual work on an empirical problem. Confer- 
ences with project chair and committee, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (4) 

Prerequisites: PE 510 and consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical problem. Confer- 
ences with thesis chair and committee, culminating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status and consent of the faculty adviser and department chair. Research for 
qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

749 Student Teaching in Physical Education in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

For candidates seeking the Fisher standard credential in secondary teaching. See page 190 for 
description and prerequisites. 


RECREATION COURSES 

203 Recreation Programs and Activities (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Theory and activity course, leadership in recreation programs, 
activities in recreation agencies. Laboratory experiences and practice included. (1 hour lecture, 
2 hours activity) 

204 Camping and Camp Leadership (3) 

A study of camping designed to make a person become a more skillful camper, to understand t)etter 
the values of camping and to prepare students to organize and discuss camping activities and 
the role of the counselor. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

208 Recreational Film-Making (2) 

The theory and practice of the art of creative film-making as it pertains to the field of recreation. 

(1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

425 Special Programs in Recreation (1-3) 

Investigation and practical study of recreation programs, theory, technique and/or methodology. 
Topic varies according to current offering. May be repeated for credit with different emphasis. 


1210-34 7 245 


HUMANITIES AND 
SOCIAL SCIENCES 




202 


SCHOOL OF 

HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES 

Dean: Hazel ). Jones 


The curricula of the School of Humanities and Social Sciences are designed to provide opportunities 
for the student to expand his general knowledge, to develop a beginning specialization, to investigate 
areas of intellectual interest, and, if he chooses, to prepare himself for specialized professional 
studies. 

The School of Humanities and Social Sciences is presently comprised of 17 departments and 
programs offering undergraduate majors leading to the Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science 
degree and master's programs leading to the Master of Arts, Master of Science or Master of Public 
Administration. 

DEPARTMENT OF AFRO-ETHNIC STUDIES 

FACULTY 
Wacira Gethaiga 
Department Chair 

Cheryl Armstrong, William Coffer, Boaz Namasaka, Lance Williams 

The required minimum for the major is 36 units: Afro-Ethnic Studies 103,* 107 and 240 plus six 
additional units from lower division offerings and a minimum of 24 units in upper division courses. 
The purpose of the program is to provide a sp>ecialization in Afro-American studies within the 
framework of a more generalized and comprehensive ethnic studies perspective; to acquaint stu- 
dents with the problems, successes and failures of America's largest minority group; to help students 
understand the nature of contemp>orary ethnic and social turmoil and guide them into constructive 
modes of thought about current issues; to enable students to see the black experience in America 
in a world setting; and to enable students to lead more effective lives in a culturally pluralistic and 
rapidly changing society. 

To accomplish this, it is important that prospective majors and others interested in a minor consult 
with the Afro-Ethnic faculty for advice. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN AFRO-AMERICAN STUDIES OPTION OF ETHNIC STUDIES 
This degree program is designed to provide an effective vehicle for meeting a variety of needs in 
contemporary higher education: extending opportunities for university education to students who 
have long been under-represented due to cultural differences between their experiences and the 
cultural emphasis of higher education; providing for personal consultation between faculty and 
students of diverse cultural backgrounds; and revising curriculum and promoting research to give 
ail students and faculty an understanding of the interaction of ethnic groups in past and contempo- 
rary civilizations. 

Required 

•103 Effective Communication (3) 

107 Introduction to Afro-American Studies (3) 

240 Afro-American History (3) 

Lower division electives: (6 units required) 

101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3) 

104 Swahili (4) 

105 Swahili (4) 

230 The Native American (3) 

240A Afro-American History to 1865 (3) 

• Students can be exempted from Afro-Ethnk Studies 103 by an examination and/or consent ot department 


1213—34 7 260 


Afro-Ethnic Studies 203 

240B Afro-American History from 1865 to Present (3) 

245 Black Political History (3) 

250 Cultural Scars of Oppression (3) 

260 Cultural Identity and the Contemporary Black (3) 

270 The Amer-Asian (3) 

Upper division electives: (24 units required including at least 9 units from 309, 335, 346, 385, 
and 410) 

3(X) Black Man/Black Woman (3) 

301 Afro-American Culture (3) 

303 Ancient and Modern African Culture (3) 

304 African Religion and Philosophy (3) 

305 Community Organizations (3) 

309 The Black Family (3) 

314 Pan- African Dance and Movement (3) 

315 Pan- African Art (3) 

331 Tribalism and Reservation Life (3) 

332 American Indian Leaders (3) 

335 History of Racism (3) 

346 The African Exp)erience (3) 

300 Role of Education in Changing Attitudes (3) 

385 Schools and Minority Groups (3) 

400 The Black Man and Reconstruction (3) 

401 Black American and Contemporary Issues (3) 

402 Africa and Self-Determination (3) 

410 Afro-American Literature (3) 

411 Black Writers' Workshop (3) 

420 Philosophy of Black Radical Thought (3) 

460 Afro-American Music (3) 

495 Selected Topics (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

MINOR IN AFRO-AMERICAN STUDIES 

Students interested in the Afro-American studies minor are required to take a minimum of 21 units. 
This includes six units of lower division courses including Ethnic Studies 107 or 101 and an additional 
course. Fifteen units of upper division courses including Ethnic Studies 301 and 309 also must be 
taken. 


AFRO-ETHNIC STUDIES COURSES 

101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3) 

A survey of the basic concepts and problems involved in an examination of the perspective through 
which black and brown people have conr>e to see themselves in terms of their own heroes, 
culture, and contributions to societies in which they live and world society in general. 

103 Effective Communication (3) 

A methodical presentation of the basic skills, emphasizing writing and communication skills, stressing 
the use of idioms, proper pronunciation, intonation, and correct English patterns. 

104 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

(Same as Swahili 101) 

105 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

(Same as Swahili 102) 

107 Introduction to Afro-American Studies (3) 

Introduction to the aims and objectives of the Afro-American studies program. The course will define 
and explore the basic terms and references that give substance to Afro-American studies, it will 
provide uniform purpose arnl direction for students who seek an education in Afro-American 
studies. 


1216—34 7 275 


204 Afro-Ethnic Studies 


230 The Native American (3) 

A study of the American Indian experience in the United States as seen from the Indian's point of 
view in comparison with that of the white man. Special attention will be focused on the problems 
of American Indians today. 

240A Afro-American History to 1865 (3) 

A survey of the economic, political and social history of black Americans in the United States. African 
origins, the slave trade, slavery, religion, abolition, slavery and territory and the Civil War. 

240B Afro-American History from 1865 to Present (3) 

A survey of the social, economic, political and cultural history of black Americans. Among the topics 
will be the black reconstruction role, jim Crow, the relationship between black workers and white 
workers and labor unions, lynching, black protest. World War I, black emigration, the Harlem 
renaissance, the New Deal, World War II, the intensification of the black emigration, the civil 
rights movement, the Korean War, Vietnam War, the black power movement and cultural 
developments. 

245 Black Political History (3) 

Background in the political development of the United States and the influence of slavery there on 
to the present date. Included is a survey and analysis of the U. S. Constitution showing separate 
political development of white and black. 

250 Cultural Scars of Oppression (3) 

An examination of the process of socialization of the black man in America and its imprints upon 
his psyche. 

260 Cultural Identity of the Contemporary Black Man (3) 

An examination and study of the "identity crisis" or lack of it in young black individuals in the United 
States. An in-depth analysis of the changing points of view of the black toward acculturation. 

270 The Amer-Asian (3) 

A survey of the Asian-American experience from the early 19th century. Includes: analysis of the 
discriminatory legislation as reflected in immigration quotas; investigation of the fallacies sur- 
rounding the Asian-American experience; and study of present day attitudes in the Asian commu- 
nity. 

300 Black Man/Black Woman (3) 

A study of black value systems, double standards, machismo figure, communication barriers caused 
by predefined roles, stereotype expectations according to the traditional class status, and how 
they affect individual abilities and self-esteem. 

301 Afro-American Culture (3) 

A survey of African cultural characteristics in the New World, as they relate to contemporary events, 
including art, ideas, dance and literature. 

303 Ancient and Modern African Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: advanced sophomore or upper division standing. A survey of the African cultures 
(specifically West African contrasted with East African) before the period of exploration and 
after colonization. A look at the present-day American black culture and an estimation of the 
carry-over cultures. 

304 African Religion and Philosophy (3) 

An analysis of African life, the relationship between man. Cod and nature, the systems of African 
philosophical thought in terms of Cod, man, ethics, justice, morals, good and evil, life and death, 
and their interrelationships. 

305 Community Organizations (3) 

A study of organization agencies, such as Partners for Progress, fair housing, SER, Urban League and 
the local welfare systems and their relevancy to the mirwrity community. Students will be 
involved in field research and assess the goals and accomplishments of an organization selected 
for study. 

309 The Black Family (3) 

A study of the American social conditions that shaF>ed the black family from the African cultural 
patterns that were destroyed during slavery to the family that exists today. Special attention will 
be given to the roles of p)overty, racism and discrimination. 

314 Pan-African Dance and Movement (3) 

Theory and practice of movement of African and Haitian peoples. An investigation of how move- 
ment (dance) acts as quasi-language in perpetuating the life style of African cultures and cultures 
of African descent. 


1221-;}4 7 300 


Afro-Ethnic Studies 205 


315 Pan-African Art (3) 

A study of African and Afro-American art from prehistoric to contemp)orary times, including African 
influences in other art forms and a stylistic analysis of drawings, sculpture and paintings. 

331 Tribalism and Reservation Life (3) 

The role of tribalism in contemporary Indian affairs, with special reference to Indian self-determina- 
tion on reservations in terms of p)olitical, economic and social lifeways relative to the dominant 
society: Will include field trips to local reservations. 

332 American Indian Leaders (3) 

The diverse philosophies of American Indian leaders from various Indian nations, the political, 
sociological and religious asp)ects of their lives, and the impact on Indian-white relationships. 

335 History of Racism (3) 

An examination of the current dynamics of racism in terms of the historical roots of that racial 
phenomenon both in American society and the world setting. 

346 The African Experience (3) 

A survey of major themes of African history from the origin of the black man and traditional African 
civilization through the African diasp>ora to the institu^onal realities of Africa today. 

385 Schools and Minority Groups (3) 

A study of the prevailing educational practices in regard to minority groups in elementary school 
through college, including minority students' failure patterns, what is being done to change 
failures, and the outcomes of these practices. 

400 The Black Man and Reconstruction (3) 

An examination of the first attempt to bring about the realization of an interracial democratic 
American society. Special attention will be given to the conduct, achievements and contributions 
of those Afro-Americans who participated in that short lived experiment. 

401 Black American and Contemporary Issues (3) 

Analysis and discussion of the socioecorwmic and political problems confronting black Americans, 
with an emphasis on problem solving. Particular focus will be placed on the effects American 
social attitudes and institutions have had on the black community. Research will focus on these 
areas. 

402 Africa and Self-Determination (3) 

Prerequisite: Afro-Ethnic Studies 303. A study of the national characters of African nations, how they 
shed labels like "tribes" and united to demand the independence they had lost. 

410 Afro-American Literature (3) 

A study of the literary endeavors of Afro-Americans and their cultural impact, especially in relation- 
ship to the social and psychological evolution of the Afro-American. 

411 Black Writers' Workshop (3) 

Practice in writing prose, fiction, drama, short stories, book reviews, poetry and essays from the 
perspective of the black experience. 

420 Philosophy of Black Radical Thought (3) 

The philosophy of black radical thought as it emerged from the black exF)erience in America through 
slavery, Reconstruction, post- Reconstruction, pre-World War II and contemporary times and as 
it is expressed through music, sermons, literature, social movements, drama and p>olitical action. 

460 Afro-American Music Appreciation (3) 

A survey of black music in America; the sociological conditions that help produce various forms of 
black music; and influential black music in America. 

495 Selected Topics (3) 

Prerequisite: junior status or consent of instructor. Special seminar in selected topics in Afro- 
American studies. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior level and acceptance of the subject by department chair and the faculty 
member directing the study. 


1225—04 7 320 


206 American Studies 

AMERICAN INDIAN STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
William Coffer 

The American Indian studies program brings faculty members and students (Indian and non-Indian) 
together in a mutual effort to provide instruction on the status, condition and destiny of Indians in 
contemporary America. The program includes Indian-oriented courses dedicated to an Indian inter- 
pretation of tribal exp)erience in America as well as related courses on Indian themes. 

COURSES 

Afro-ethnic 230 The Native American (3) 

English 320 Literature of the American Indian (3) 

Anthropology 321 The American Indian (3) 

Afro-ethnic 331 Tribalism and Reservation Life (3) 

Afro-ethnic 332 American Indian Leaders (3) 

Economics 334 Economics of Poverty, Race and Discrimination (3) 

Anthropology 407 California Indian Languages (3) 

Sociology 431 Minority Croup Relations (3) 

Art 461 Art of North American Indian (3) 

DEPARTMENT OF AMERICAN STUDIES 

FACULTY 
E. lames Weaver 
Department Chair 

John Ibson, Karen Lystra, David Pivar, Robert Porfirio, Ann Untereiner 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN AMERICAN STUDIES 

The degree in American studies is an interdisciplinary program designed for students with a special 
interest in the American experience, including the overseas exp)erience. It permits, through intensive 
study of the United States, greater perception of American society, both contemporary and histori- 
cal. By providing students with an opportunity to discover the larger relationships among disciplines, 
the student may receive a better sense of the whole. 

The American studies degree prepares students for teaching either on the elementary or secondary 
level. American studies is useful for any career in which an understanding of American culture is 
important. 

Since two alternative programs are available, the student interested in becoming a major must 
consult with an American studies counselor to develop a course of study mutually satisfactory. 
The major consists of 36 units distributed as follows between the core program and either plan a 
or b: 

I. Core program (12 units) required of all majors. 

201 Introduction to American Studies (3) 

301 The American Character (3) 

350 Seminar in Theory and Method of American Studies (3) 

401 Proseminar in American Studies (3) 

II. Alternative plans (24 upper division units in either plan — electives in American studies may 
be used in conjunction with courses in other departments) 

a. The student may choose to work in two but not more than three disciplir>es related to the 
American experience; i.e.; history and literature or sociology, anthropology and political 
science. 

b. The student may choose to pursue a specialized theme or subject; i.e., mass culture, 
women in America, urbanization or ethnic groups in Amercian society, or the student may 
choose to concentrate on 20th<entury American problems. 

Students interested in the American studies major must consult with the department chair before 
establishing an individual course of study. 


1242 -^ 7 400 


American Studies 207 


AMERICAN STUDIES COURSES 

201 Introduction to American Studies (3) 

With the concept of culture as a unifying principle, this course will focus on four separate time 
periods in order to provide the framework for an understanding of American civilization. Several 
different kinds of documents will be used to illustrate the nature and advantages of an interdisci- 
plinary approach. 

301 The American Character (3) 

Prerequisite: American Studies 201 or History 170A or B or consent of instructor. Studies the 
changing national character. Reading reflects an interdisciplinary approach; from poetry to 
sociology. Some attention is paid to the American Negro and Indian in addition to the transplant- 
ed European. 

320 The Dark Age of American Film, 1944-1955 (3) 

American film prevalent in the decade following World War 11. The style and attitudes of a specific 
genre of film, involving the works of such diverse directors as Hitchcock, Nick Ray, Robert 
Siodmak and Sam Fuller within a sociocultural framework. Weekly film viewing and discussion. 

333 Visual Arts in Contemporary America (3) 

Visual phenomena in America as they reveal changes in recent American culture. Areas covered 
include the "high " arts (painting, sculpture) as contrasted with the "low" arts (advertising, 
television); the artist as innovator, alienation, the business world, and American values in art. 

350 Seminar in Theory and Method of American Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 and 301; or History 170A or B; or consent of instructor. Designed 
to provide the American studies major with an understanding and appreciation of methodology, 
theories of society and images of man as they effect American studies contributions to scholar- 
ship. 

401 Proseminar in American Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 and 301; or History 170A or B; or consent of instructor. Designed 
to permit students to examine the relationship between theory and application. Emphasis on 
analytic readings and research. Topics will be announced each semester. Check the C/dss 
Schedule for topics being considered each semester. 

402 Religion in the Development of American Society (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 or 301; or History 170A or B; or consent of instructor. An 
intensive study of the changing role of religion in shaping, reflecting, and challenging dominant 
American values and institutions. Focus is on the 19th and 20th centuries, although some 
attention will be paid to the colonial period. 

410 Irish-Americans and the Cult of Success (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 or 301; or History 170A or B; or consent of instructor. Irish- 
American subculture from the Potato Famine Emigration to the present. Focuses on the quality 
and extent of the "Americanization" process, including the retention, repression, and loss of Irish 
ethnicity. 

411 The White Ethnic in America (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 or 301; or History 170A or B. A historical and contemporary look 
at the white, but not Anglo, ethnic groups in America. Among topics will be ethnic stereotypes, 
loss and survival in America of national and religious heritages, the breadth and depth among 
these groups of prejudice against non-whites. 

412 Freedom and Repression in American Culture (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 or 301; or History 170A or B. The Puritan origins of early 
American history, arnl their consequences for the culture's later development. 

415 The Hero in American Popular Culture (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 or 301 ; or History 1 70A or B, or consent of instructor. Nineteenth 
and 20th-century materials including dime novels, pulp>s, detective fiction, comic strips, and films, 
will be utilized to examine the role of the hero in American imagination. 

425 Darwinism in American Literature (3) 

(Same as English 425) 

450 Women in American Society (3) 

An effort to explain the rise and decline of feminism in America. The first half of the course will be 
lecture. The second half will be devoted to discussion aimed at comparing and contrasting the 
contemporary woman's movement with its predecessors. 


1250-34 7 430 


208 Anthropology 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in American studies to be taken with the consent of instructor and 
department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF ANTHROPOLOGY 

FACULTY 
Judy Suchey 

Department Chair (Acting) 

Aileen Baron, Lawrence Christensen, Marlene Dobkin de Rios, David Evans, Christopher Hulse, E. 
T. jacob-Pandian, Leroy Joesink-Mandeville, Fred Katz, Hans Leder, Ngapare Mills, jean Nord- 
strom, Otto Sadovszky *, Richard See, Wayne Untereiner, Wayne Wanke, Corinne WocxJ, jack 
Zahniser 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The major in anthropology is designed for students desiring a broad generalist background, students 
preparing to become teachers of social sciences, and students preparing for graduate work in 
anthropology and in advanced specializations in particular areas (Africa, Asia, etc.) or with cross- 
cultural and international emphasis. 

The required minimum for the major is 45 semester units, in addition to those units taken for the 
general education requirement. Anthropology 201, 202 and 203 are required, and the remaining 36 
units must be in upper division courses. Of the 45 units, a minimum of 27 must be within the 
department, and a maximum of 36 within the department may be counted toward the major (any 
figure from 27 through 36 includes the nine units of introductory courses). Thus, depending on the 
variable of 27-36 units within anthropology, nine to 18 units of outside upper division courses will 
be taken to fulfill the major. A maximum of six units in directed studies (499) may be counted toward 
the major requirements, but this does not prohibit taking additional 499 units. 

The broad scope of anthropology permits a student to plan a program tailored to his goals. In 
consultation with the major adviser, each student must formalize his program with the adviser before 
the program of study is begun. Only those courses on the approved study plan will count toward 
the major. Changes in the program are permitted, but must have adviser approval. The student must 
see his adviser as soon as p>ossible in the first semester of declariing the major, but no later than the 
end of that semester. 

Students considering advanced professional careers in research, teaching, or applications of an- 
thropology are urged to explore and sample widely from course offerings in the other social sciences, 
the biological and natural sciences and the humanities and arts. Through a judicious selection of 
these courses it is hoped that anthropology majors will broaden their interests and diversify and 
develop their skills in working towards a variety of individualized career objectives. 

TEACHING MINOR IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The minor in anthropology is intended as a second field for persons completing a major in another 
discipline in preparation for a teaching credential. Twenty-one units must be taken in anthropology; 
15 of these in upper division courses. Anthropology 20i or 203, 202, arni 480 are required. Two 
additional courses must be selected from areal offerings in the field: Anthropology 303, 321, 322, 
324, 325, 326, 328, 340, 341, 345, 350, 351, 352, 360, and 361. Another course must be selected from 
theoretical /institutional courses in the field: Anthropology 313, 31 5, 403, 404, 406, 407, 408, 409, 410, 
411, 412, 413, 415, 416. 417, 418, 420, 421, 422, 423, 424, 425, 428, 429, 430, 440, 441, 450, 455. 460, 
462, 465, 466, 470, 490, and 491. A final course must be either Anthropology 401 or 481. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The program for this degree provides advanced study of general anthropology as well as research 
and other learning experiences for students with specialized areas of interest or competence. This 
program has its main emphasis on cultural anthropology. (The comparatively great number of 
linguistic offerings is due only to the purpose of cross-listing courses.) After consultation with his 
adviser, a student may, however, decide to concentrate in archaeology, linguistics or physical 
anthropology. 


• Universitv administrative officer 


1256-^ 7 455 


Anthropology 


209 


Prerequisites 

Admission to the program requires: 

1. A bachelor's degree with a minimum of 27 units in anthropology, including the following 
courses or their equivalents. 

201 Introduction to Physical Anthropology (3) 

202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

203 Introduction to Archaeology (3) 

401 Ethnographic Field Methods (3) 

406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) or 
409 Anthropological Linguistics (3) 

480 Ethnological Theory (3) 

481 Contemporary Anthropology (3) 

One areal course (e.g. Anthropology 328, Peoples of Africa) 

One theoretical or topical course (e.g. Anthropology 415, Culture and Personality; Psycho- 
logical Anthropology) 

Reading courses and special examinations may be substituted for some of these prerequisites 
by the department. 

2. A CPA of 3.0 (B) for all work taken in anthropology. 

3. Evaluation and acceptance by the graduate study committee. The applicant must submit a letter 
of intent and at least two letters of recommendation and may be required to attend a personal 
interview at the discretion of the graduate study committee. 

Students with limited subject or grade deficiencies may be considered for admission to the 
program upon completion of additional courses, selected by the graduate study committee, 
with at least a 3.0 (B) average. 


Study Plan 

The study plan for the degree must include the following: Units 

1. Anthropology 501 Methodology of Anthropological Research 3 

2. Anthropology 502 Contemporary Theory in Cultural Anthropology 3 

3. Anthropology 598 Thesis 6 

4. Two additional graduate seminars in anthropology 6 

5. Upper division or graduate work in anthropology 12 

30 


Any adviser-approved 300- or 400-level course taken as a graduate student may be used for 
requirements 5 and 6. Anthropology 599, Independent Graduate Research, may be used for require- 
ment 5. 

For continuation in the program an average of 3.0 (B) for all work in the study plan must be 
maintained. A thesis must be completed for the degree Normally a student will register for thesis 
two times, for three units each semester. Students must demonstrate reading knowledge of an 
appropriate foreign language prior to completion of the degree. 

For further information, consult the Department of Anthropology. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 59, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ANTHROPOLOGY COURSES 

201 Introduction to Physical Anthropology (3) 

Man as a biological organism and in evolutionary p»erspective. Concepts, methods, findings and 
issues in the study of the order primates, including the relationships between fossil monkeys, apes 
and man, and the significance of genetic diversity between modern populations. 

202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

The nature of culture and its significarKe for man. Uniformities and variations in human cultures. 
Cultural analyses of major institutional forms such as the family, economy, government, religion 
and art with an emphasis on preliterate peoples. A consideration of central problems of cultural 
comparison and interpretation. 


1260-^ 7 475 


210 Anthropology 

203 Introduction to Archaeology (3) 

Relationship of archaeology, culture history, and culture process, including some discussion of field 
methods and analysis of archaeological data; the uses and abuses of archaeology. A survey of 
world culture history from Pleistocene beginnings to the threshold of civilization. 

204 Man's Many Faces (3) 

The study and analysis of a broad selection of human societies, which will provide a persp)ective 
on how human problems have been solved and the possibilities for new solutions to our own 
problems. 

303 Woman in Cross-Cultural Perspective (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202. A description, analysis and survey of the influence of biological 
determinants as they are shaped by cultural factors such as beliefs, values, expectations and 
socially defined roles for women. The changing role of women in industrial society will form an 
important analytical segment. 

313 Human Genetics (3) 

(Same as Biological Science 313) 

315 Jazz: Past, Present and Future (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 315) 

321 The American Indian (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of North American Indians 
north of Mexico; origins, languages, culture areas, cultural history; the impact of European 
contacts. 

322 Peoples of Mesoamerica (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. General survey of the ethnology of the 
Mesoamerican culture-area, with treatment of various Indian societies representing the principal 
sub-areas. 

324 Ancient Mesoamerica (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A culture history survey of the principal 
cultures of pre-Columbian Mesoamerica from the dawn of incipient agriculture to the Spanish 
conquest. 

325 Peoples of South America (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of Central and South 
America. Description of selected cultures representative of different cultural areas before and 
after contacts with Western countries. 

326 Prehistory of South America (3) 

Archaeological, physical and ethnohistorical survey of the various natural zones and culture areas 
of South America, lower Central America and the West Indies. Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 
or consent of instructor. 

328 Peoples of Africa (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of Africa with special 
emphasis on social change and contemporary African problems. 

340 Aboriginal Peoples of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 of consent of instructor. Survey of cultural areas outside the centers 
of high civilizations of China and Japan. Emphasis on steppe-nomadism, Siberia, and ethnic 
splinter groups between India and the Philippines, with focus uF>on their influence on the cultural 
centers and vice versa. 

341 Peoples of China and Japan (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Description and analysis of the religious, 
social and technological systems of the civilizations of Japan and China, as well as the impact 
of nomadic herders of North and Central Asia upon those centers. Also, a comparison of 
community studies on these regions. 

345 Peoples of the Middle East (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of the Middle East with 
descriptions of selected cultures (Arab urban, nomadic, Jewish, Turic, Berber, Kurd). 

347 Peoples of the Pacific (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of the indigenous peoples 
and cultures of the Pacific Islands, including Australia. Special attention is given to the forces and 
processes contributing to social change in island communities and current problems being faced 
by them. 


1265—34 7 500 


A nthropology 211 


350 Peoples of Western Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Representative groups considered in mod- 
ern and historical perspective, stressing especially rural-urban relationships and the dynamics of 
change. 

351 Peoples of Eastern Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Peasant cultures of Russia, Southeast Europe, 
Poland, Czechoslovakia and the Baltic area, their traditional way of life and the impact of 
industrialization and Communist ideology. 

352 Peoples of Ancient Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A survey of the cultural and social institu- 
tions of the peoples of pre-Christian Europe. Particular attention will be paid to the Creek, Italic, 
Germanic and Celtic p>eoples, and readings will be drawn largely from original ancient writers. 

360 Contemporary American Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Application of anthropological methods, 
categories of analysis, and types of interpretation to American culture. Survey and critique of 
selected community studies and other kinds of relevant research. 

361 Afro-American Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of Instructor. An introduction to African culture. A survey 
of African cultural characteristics in the New World, as they relate to contemporary events, 
including art, ideas, dance and literature. 

401 Ethnographic Field Methods (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and 6 additional units of anthropology or consent of instructor. 
Anthropological field research by students on various problems using participant observation 
techniques. 

403 Archaeological Fieldwork (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 or 203 and consent of instructor. Excavation of a local archaeologi- 
cal site. Archaeological mapping, photography and recording. Laboratory methods of cataloging, 
preservation, description and interpretation of archaeological materials. Saturday field sessions, 
six fieldwork hours per week. May be repeated once for credit as an elective. 

404 Analytical Methods in Archaeology (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 203 and 403. The employment of various physical data collecting 
techniques (e.g., photographic, palaeo-magnetic, etc.) in the field and the analysis of artifact 
collections and data from previous field operations in the laboratory. May be repeated once for 
credit as an elective. 

406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 406) 

407 California Indian Languages (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 406. Survey of the Indian languages of California; descriptive analysis of 
their grammatical structure and their linguistic interrelationship. 

408 The Uralic Languages (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 406. The grammatical structure of the Uralic languages in Eastern Europe 
and Siberia and their interrelationship. 

409 Anthropological Linguistics (3) 

Nature and functions of language; language structure and change; classification of languages; use of 
linguistic evidence in anthropology. (Same as Linguistics 409) 

410 Language and Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. The study of language as a factor in culture. 
Trends in the study of language and culture. (Same as Linguistics 410) 

411 Folklore (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the study of folktales, 
myths, legends, proverbs, riddles and other forms of the verbal traditions of peoples. Major 
concepts and theories and research methods in the study of folklore. 

412 Comparative Oral Literature (3) 

A comparative survey of oral literature and its role in society. The types of oral narratives, their 
themes, meanings, and functions will be analyzed. 

413 Ethnological Music (3) 

Music, music making and musicians in various nonliterate societies. 


127(^—34 7 525 


212 Anthropology 

415 Culture and Personality: Psychological Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and Psychology 331 or 351 or Sociology 341 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Comparative study of the relationship between the individual and his culture. Child training 
in nonwestern cultures. Survey of important concepts, studies, and research techniques. 

416 The Quest for Self: East and West (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 403) 

417 Life Quests (3) 

An examination of contemporary ways to wisdom and humanness in cross-cultural and historical 
perspectives. A consideration of some new and comparative approaches to understanding the 
life cycle, development and fulfillment of individual personalities. 

418 Mental Illness in Cross-Cultural Perspective (3) 

Problems in the cross-cultural definition and treatment of mental illness. Cross-cultural p)erspectives 
on symptomatology and etiology, culture bound disorders, the folk healer, and the relationship 
between cultural change and mental disorders. 

420 Primitive Value Systems (3) 

Prerequisite; Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Study of what properly is considered 
"common sense" in the everyday life of people living within differing sociocultural environ- 
ments. 

421 Anthropology of Religion (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Examination of beliefs and practices in the 
full human variation of religious phenomena, but with an emphasis on primitive religions. The 
forms, functions, structures, symbolism, and history and evolution of man's religious systems. 

422 Jewish and Comparative Mysticism (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 422) 

423 Comparative Aesthetics and Symbolism (3) 

An analysis of the metaphysical and mystical systems underlying the "grammars" of the art, poetry, 
languages, myths, music, and rituals of various nonliterate and literate peoples and their develop- 
ment into creative experiences. 

424 Hallucinogens and Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202. A cross-cultural survey of mind-altering drugs, especially hallucino- 
gens, as they have been utilized in religion, healing, divination, witchcraft and magic. 

425 Anthropology of Law and Government (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Sources of law-government in primitive 
societies; the cultural background of law; the functions and development of law and governnnent 
in primitive politics; transitions to and comparisons with classical and modern legal and political 
systems. 

428 Social Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A study of the social organization of 
preindustrial societies; religious, (X)litical and economic institutions; status and value systems; 
conditions and theories of change. 

429 Kinship and Social Organization (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and 428 or consent of instructor. Kinship systems in primitive society 
and their significance in the organization of social life. Theories of kinship, marriage regulations, 
and kinship role patterns. 

430 Economic Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Analysis of anthropological cofKepts of 
economy, ecology, and technology; relationship between habitat, economy, and culture. A 
survey of the different types of economic systems found throughout the world; outline of the 
ecorwmic development of mankind. 

440 Human Evolution (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 201 . Biological Science 404 is suggested. Advanced primate evolution 
with emphasis on the origin of Homo sapiens as evidenced in the fossil record and through 
biochemical and molecular studies. Evolutionary theory and problems in human evolution. 

441 Human Variation (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 201. Biological Science 313 and 412 are suggested. A survey of the 
processes underlying and the theories for the existence of the present variation between and 
within human populations. The genetics of human populations and the study of the significance 
of racial classifications. 


1275-34 7 550 


A nthropology 213 


450 Culture and Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or Education 301 or consent of intructor. The transmission of values, 
implicit cultural assumptions, and the patterning of education in cross-cultural p>erspective, with 
special attention to American culture and development problems. 

455 Ethno>ecology (3) 

Prerequisites; Anthropology 202 and consent of instructor. A comparative study of culture determin- 
ing man's impact on his environment. Our factual knowledge, different major approaches, 
important research issues, and methods of study will be the subject of this survey. 

460 Culture Change (3) 

Prerequisites; Anthropology 202 and 301 or consent of instructor. Interrelations between cultural, 
social and psychological prcKesses in the dynamics of culture growth and change. Impact of 
western techrK>logy on tribal and peasant societies. Anthropological contributions to the planning 
of directed socicKultural change in selected areas. 

462 Applied Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites; Anthropology 202 plus nine other units of anthropology or consent of instructor. The 
uses of anthropological skills ar>d sensitivities in approaching contemporary human problems. 
Includes examination of issues related to directed cultural change, organizational development, 
program planning and evaluation, and professional ethics. 

465 Alternative Futures (3) 

A study of the growing literature on the future and a consideration of its implications for anthropolo- 
gy and the other scxrial sciences and humanities. 

466 Myths for Moderns (3) 

A comparative multidisciplinary exploration of the nature and needs for mythic types of belief 
systems in contemporary life. Examination and interpretation of selected myths. 

470 Philosophical and Behavioral Foundations of Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite; Anthropology 202 and open to lower division students with the consent of instructor. 
Consideration of basic assumptions and contexts of anthropological work. The synthesis of ideas 
and methods into professional skills and careers. 

430 History of Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite; Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A history of the principal contributions of 
leading anthropologists 1850-1950; review of evolutionary, diffusionist, historical, particularist, 
cotifigurationalist, arxl culture and personality approaches in anthropology. 

481 Contemporary Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites; Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A history of the prirKipal contributions of 
anthropologists from 1950 to the present; review of French structuralism, cognitive, psychologi- 
cal, ecological, neo-evolutionist, and behavioral approaches in anthropology. 

490 Senior Seminar in Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor Topics in anthropology selected by the faculty and students 
panic ipatir^g in the course. May be repeated for credit, (juniors may enroll.) 

491 Internship in Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites; 18 upper division units in anthropology and/or related fields. Career opponunities in 
anthropology. On-the-job trainirig urnfer faculty supervision will provide opportunity to translate 
theoretical corKepts into vocational activity through museum, ir>dustry or governmental service. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: at least 15 units of anthropology and consent of adviser. Student selection of an 
irnfividual research project involving either library or fieldwork. ConfererKes with the adviser as 
necessary, and the work results in one or rrKire papers. May be repeated for credit. 

501 Seminar: Methodology of Anthropological Research (3) 

Prerequisites; Anthropology 202, 401 and consent of instructor. Examination, analysis and evaluation 
of the contemporary methodological spectrum in anthropology arxl of new trends in research 
planning and implementation. Consideration and critique of specific cases involving differing 
research designs. 

502 Contemporary Theory in Cultural Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 480 or consent of instructor. Critique of the basic assumptions and 
theoretical positions of leading contemporary anthropologists. 


1281—34 7 580 


214 Chic a no Studies 


504 Seminar: Selected Topics in Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites; completion of undergraduate major in anthropology and/or graduate standing or 
consent of instructor. The topic chosen and a general outline of the seminar is circulated prior 
to registration. May be repeated. 

505 Phonetics and Phonemics (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 505) 

507 Grammatical Analysis (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 507) 

508 Modern Theories of Syntax (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 507 or Foreign Languages 507 or Linguistics 507 or consent of instructor. 
Speech 404 and Anthropology 410 recommended. Study of contemporary theories of grammar, 
with sp)ecial emphasis on transformational, generative, logical and electromechanical bases and 
techniques of utterance analysis. (Same as Linguistics 508) 

550 Seminar in Problems in the Teaching of Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Discussion of a variety of methods and materials for the teaching 
of anthropology at primary, secondary, and undergraduate college levels. 

592 Field Methods in Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisites; Anthropology 505 and 507 or consent of instructor. Methods of analysis and descrip- 
tion of language structures. Data elicited from informants will be analyzed and described. 
Controlled study of a live informant's language. (Same as Linguistics 592) 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of instructor. The writing of a thesis based on original 
field or laboratory research, library study or an educational project, and its analysis and evalua- 
tion. May be rep)eated for credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite; consent of adviser. Individual research on a field, laboratory, or library study, with 
conferences with a project adviser as necessary, and resulting in one or more papers. May be 
rep)eated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF CHICANO STUDIES 

FACULTY 
Norma Fimbres 
Department Chair 
Dagoberto Fuentes, joseph Platt 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THE CHICANO STUDIES OPTION OF ETHNIC STUDIES 
The degree program in Chicano studies is designed to provide an effective vehicle for meeting a 
variety of pressing needs in contemporary higher education. Among these needs are educating 
students to the culture, language, history and socioeconomic background of the Chicano p>op>ulation 
in California and the Southwest. This program is also designed to extern! the opportunity of a higher 
education to Chicano and minority students. 

The program is adaptable for a dual major in ethnic studies (Chicano studies op>tion) and other 
university degree programs, for joint programs in teacher preparation, and for the preparation of 
professionals and paraprofessionals in government and private agencies. 

The required minimum for the option is 36 units, 12 lower and 24 upper division. 


Students must consult with their advisers to develop an approved study plan. Units 

Lower Division 12 


Required: 

•102 Communication Skills (3) 

•103 Communication Skills (3) 

106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 
220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

Electives: 

120 Bilingual Oral Expression (3) 

* Instructor's approval required prior to enroliment. 


1296-^ 8 15 


Chic a no Studies 215 


200 Chicano Movement (3) 

213 Spanish for the Spanish Speaking (3) 

214 Spanish for the Spanish Speaking (3) 

215 Chicano Creative Writing (3) 

218A Survey of Chicano Culture (3) 

2188 Survey of Chicano Culture (3) 

237 Mexican and Chicano Literature in Translation (3) 

Upper Division 24 

Required: (6 units to be selected from the following) 

430 Canci6n de la Raza (3) 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

445 History of the ChicacK) (3) 

453 Mexico since 1906 (3) 

Electives: 

300 Barrio Conversational Spanish (3) 

302 Ancient Mexican Culture (3) 

305 The Chicano Family (3) 

306 Barrio Studies (3) 

307 Barrio Studies (3) 

320 Chicano Art (3) 

336 Main Trends in Spanish- American Literature (3) 

337 Contemporary Chicano Literature (3) 

340 Sociology of the Chicano (3) 

403 Cultural Differences in Mexico and Aztian (3) 

411 Mexican Arts and Mexican Society (3) 

415 ChicarK) Music Appreciation (3) 

420 Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher in the Barrio (3) 

421 EcorK)mics of the ChicarK) (3) 

430 CanckSn de la Raza (3) 

431 The Chicano Child (3) 

432 The Chicano Adolescent (3) 

433 Mexican Literature SirKe 1940 ( 3) 

435 Directed Research and Studies in Chicano Schools (3) 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

441 Religion in the Chicarx) Society (3) 

445 History of the Chicano (3) 

450 The Chicano ar>d Contemporary issues (3) 

452 The Chicano and Nativism (3) 

453 Mexico Since 1906 (3) 

460 The Chicano and Politics (3) 

499 Indeperxient Study (1-3) 

Total 36 

MINOR IN CHICANO STUDIES 

The mirxK in Chicarx) studies consists of 24 units in the following areas: 

Required lower division courses (6 units) 

106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

Required upper division courses (6 units) 

430 Cancidn de la Raza (3) 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

453 Mexico SirKe 1906 (3) 

Approved electives 

Twelve units of approved coursework in lower and upper division classes that are selected by the 
adviser. 


1300-;M 8 35 


216 


Chicano Studies 


TEACHER CREDENTIAL REQUIREMENTS 

The Department of Chicano Studies offers a Chicano Studies Option of the Bachelor of Arts in Ethnic 
Studies and a minor that are being accepted by the State Board of Education as concentrations in 
the bilingual-bicultural credential. Due to changes in teacher preparation and credentialing (as 
established by the Ryan Act and Assembly Bill 1117), students should consult a departmental adviser 
in order to select the proper courses. 


CHICANO STUDIES COURSES 

102 Communication Skills (3) 

A methodical presentation of the basic communication skills emphasizing oral and written expres- 
sion which shall include a unit on the mechanics of writing and reporting on a term paper. 

103 Communication Skills (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 102 or consent of department. A methodical presentation of the basic 
communication skills emphasizing writing and communication skills stressing the use of idioms, 
proper pronunciation, intonation and correct English patterns of thought. 

106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 

A study of the role of the Chicano in the United States. Special emphasis on the Chicano's cultural 
values, social organization, urbanization patterns, and the problems in the area of education, 
politics and legislation. 

120 Bilingual Oral Expression (3) 

Recommended. Chicano Studies 102 and/or 103. Designed to train the bilingual Chicarx) in the 
process of oral expression in English and barrio Spanish. Pertinent topics will t>e selected in the 
areas of education, law enforcement and contemp>orary issues for bilingual oral expression. 

200 The Chicano Movement (3) 

A survey of the history of the Chicano movement, its present activists and their intellectual philoso- 
phies. 

213 Spanish for the Spanish-Speaking (3) 

The Spanish language as it is spoken in the United States today. Designed to improve the basic 
communication skills in Spanish for students from Spanish-speaking backgrounds; emphasis on 
vocabularly building, syntactical analysis and conversation. Designed for Chicano students but 
not restricted to them. 

214 Spanish for the Spanish-Speaking (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 213. Designed to enhance further the communication skills in Spanish 
of the Spanish-speaking student. The second part of the course will emphasize written expression. 
Designed for Chicano students but not restricted to them. 

215 Chicano Creative Writing (33) 

Chicano creative writing utilizing the barrio's trilingual expressions. Student work as well as the work 
of contemporary Chicarx) writers will be analyzed. 

218A,B Survey of Chicano Culture (3) 

A survey of the Chicano's cultural heritage from the pre-Cortesian period to the present. A historical 
analysis of the music, literature, art and dance of the Chicano. A — Literature and art. B — History, 
music and dance. 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

Introduction to the basic characteristics of the Mexican, especially the Chicano society and culture 
and its ramifications in the United States today. Covers the period of 1519 to the present day. 
Emphasis is placed on the arts, literature, and history of Mexico and the Chicano in the United 
States. 

237 Mexican and Chicano Literature in Translation (3) 

A survey course in Mexican and Chicano literature in English. Special emphasis will be given to 
presenting the point of view of the Chicano. Panel discussions will emphasize the exposure of 
students to the ideas of Mexican and Chicano literature as seen through the eyes of the Chicano. 

300 Barrio Conversational Spanish (3) 

Analysis of the Calo language of the southwestern states of the United States. Students will study 
the bicultural language of the Chicanos, origin, development, and contemporary use in the 
barrios. 


1304—34 8 55 


Chicano Studies 217 


301 La Raza Unida and Third Party Politics (3) 

The role of La Raza Unida as a political instrument of the Chicano community. The party's leader- 
ship, ideologies and differing political strategies in various states and at the national level. 

302 Ancient Mexican Culture (3) 

A historical and cultural survey of the principal pre-Columbian cultures of Mexico and their signifi- 
cance for Mexican society. 

305 The Chicano Family (3) 

The Chicano family development as an American social institution. Historical and cross-cultural 
perspectives. The socio- and psychodynamics of the Chicano family. 

30b Barrio Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 200 or 220 or consent of instructor. Classroom instruction covering the 
ma)or characteristics of the barrio. Supervised fieldwork in the barrio is required. Analysis of the 
barrio or agency will be made after fieldwork is completed. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours fieldwork) 

307 Barrio Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 306. Classroom instruction covering the major characteristics of the 
barrio and supervised fieldwork in the bcal barrios. An analysis of the barrio or agency will be 
made after fieldwork is completed. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours fieldwork) 

320 Chicano Art (3) 

An overview of Mexican art forms from pre-Cortesian epochs to the contemporary artists, with 
emphasis on the use of oil painting techniques as employed by modern Mexican and Chicano 
artists 

33b Main Trends in Spanish American Literature (3) 

An introduction to the main currents of Spanish American literature emphasizing contemporary 
works. Close attention will be given to the relation between the artistic expression and the 
ideological values of the period. 

337 Contemporary Chicano Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicarw Studies 101 or 106, or 220, or 237, or consent of instructor. A study of the 
modern Chicaix) writers in the United States. Special emphasis will be given to Allurista, Corky 
Gonzales, Octavio Romano, el teatro campesino and the major Chicano magazines and newspa- 
pers 

340 Sociology of the Chicano (3) 

Prerequisites: Chicano Studies 101 or 106, 220, or consent of instructor. A general survey of the field. 
Sociological perspectives of Chicano culture arni social structure, including background, present 
nature, and char>ging patterns. 

403 Cultural OiffererKes in Mexico and Aztian (3) 

A study of the cultural conflicts in Mexico as seen by the contemporary thinkers of Mexico and the 
United States. Special emphasis will be given to the urban and rural problems. 

411 Mexican Arts and Mexican Society (3) 

Study of the ways in which Mexican artists, architects and designers have reacted to the political, 
social arKi artistic developments in Mexico and the world. 

415 Chicar>o Music Appreciation (3) 

A survey of Mexican music ranging from the pre-Cortesian period to the present in Mexico and in 
the southwestern states of the United States. The history ar>d musk are presented by lectures 
and recordings. 

420 Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher in the Barrio (3) 

Designed to improve the oral expression of teachers in the barrio elementary schools. Special 
emphasis will be given to the language patterns of the Chkano students and their parents. 

421 Economics of the ChkarH) (3) 

A study of the Chkarx) and his socioeconomic situations. Special emphasis will be placed on 
contemporary economk problems in immigration, agrkulture, business, industry, and crafts. 

430 Cancidn de la Raza (3) 

Prerequisite reading knowledge of Spanish. Survey and analysis of the Nahuatl, Mexican and 
Chkano literature from the pre-Columbian period to the present. The latter part of the course 
will focus on contemporary Chicarx) writers. 

431 The Chicano Child (3) 

Study of the Chkarx) child from preschool through grade six. The course will emphasize motor, 
physkal, social, intellectual ar»d emotional growth and development and their effect on school 
adjustment and achievement. Observation of preschool and grade school children will be 
arranged. 

8 - 86012 


1308—34 8 75 


218 Communications 


432 The Chicano Adolescent (3) 

A survey of the Chicano adolescents' social, intellectual, and emotional growth and development. 
Special emphasis will be placed on the bicultural pressures from the barrio, family structure, 
school and achievement values. 

433 Mexican Literature Since 1940 ( 3) 

An in-depth study and analysis of the literature of Mexico since 1940. Emphasis will be placed on 
the works of Carlos Puentes, Luis Spota, Rodolfo Usigli, Xavier Villaurrutia, juan jose Arreola, 
Octavio Paz, Roberto Blanco Moheno and Luis G. Basurto. 

435 Directed Research and Studies in Chicano Schools (3) 

Superivised research and study of Chicano schools. Sp>ecial emphasis will be placed on curriculum, 
library materials, and teaching techniques of the schools of the barrio and of classes with a high 
percentage of Chicano students. 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

Prerequisite; reading knowledge of Spanish and Chicano Studies 237 and 302 recommended. Study 
and discussion of the emergence of the Chicano movement dealing with political, economic, and 
sociological facets. Analyzes the writings of the Nahuatl, Spanish, Spanish-American and Chica- 
no writers with special attention on the contemporary writers. 

441 Religion in the Chicano Society (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 220, or consent of instructor. A comparative study of American 
Protestant and Mexican Catholic thought and their influence on the values held by Anglos and 
Chicanos. Special emphasis will be placed on the contemporary Issues. 

445 History of the Chicano (3) 

History of the Chicano from the pre-Columbian period to the present. Special emphasis on the 
Chicane's changing role in the United States, his cultural identity crisis, and his achievements. 
450 The Chicano and Contemporary Issues (3) 

Analysis and discussion of the socioeconomic and political problems confronting the Chicano, with 
emphasis on proposed solutions. Particular focus will be placed on the effect that social institu- 
tions have had on the Chicano community. Study and research will be made in these areas. 

452 The Chicano and Nativism (3) 

A study of nativism and the Chicano. Special emphasis is placed on Anglo-Chicano relationships as 
well as immigration law and practices. 

453 Mexico Since 1906 (3) 

Prerequisite; upper division class standing. A study of the Mexican Revolution of 1910 stressing the 
political, economic, and social features of this period. Special emphasis will be given to the 
Revolution and its contributions in the fields of art, literature and social reforms. 

460 The Chicano and Politics (3) 

Theory of urban politics and evaluation of issues that affect the Chicanos and American society. 
Evaluations and surveys will be made on p>olitical organizations In the Hispanic-surnamed com- 
munities. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior level and approval by the department chair and the instructor (s) in charge of 
directing the study. An opportunity to do independent study under the guidance of the faculty, 
of a subject of special interest to the student. 

DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS 

FACULTY 
Kenward Atkin 
Department Chair 

lames Alexander, William Berg, Fenton Calhoun, Carolyn Johnson. Raynotds Johnson, Frank Kalupa, 
Martin Klein, Mary Koehler,* George Mastroianni, J. William Maxwell, Rick Pullen, Albert Ralston, 
Marvin Rosen, Ted Smythe 

The program leading to the Bachelor of Arts in Communications emphasizes study of broad princi- 
ples of communications, functions of the mass media in a democratic society, and theories relevant 
to informing, instructing, and persuading through communications media. It may serve as pref>ara- 
tion for careers in mass media, business, industry, government and education; and as a preparation 
for graduate and professional schools. 

• Univefvfv administrative officer 


1313 -^ 8 100 


Communications 


219 


A master of arts program in communications provides advanced study in communications and 
related disciplines for those seeking professional careers in teaching, research and development, and 
mass media. 

Programs in the department are designed to provide both theory and practice in the use of print, 
broadcast and film media of communication to inform, instruct and persuade. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

A communications major is required to take IS units of core requirements in addition to 21 units 
in a chosen emphasis. The department offers six emphases to choose from; Advertising, News 
(Journalism), Photocommunications, Public Relations, Technical and Business Communications, 
and Telecommunications. Special emphases designed to meet the needs and interests of individual 
students also may be arranged. 

Collateral Requirements; Twelve units of upper division coursework in other departments approved 
by the adviser are also required. Collateral courses for each emphasis are recommended by the 
emphasis coordinator. The major totals 4B units. 


COMMUNICATIONS CORE 

Nine units of required coursework: i/n//s 

Com 333 Mass Communication in Modern Society 3 

Com 407 Communication and the Law 3 

Com 425 History and Philosophy of American Mass CommunKation 3 

p/i/s six units selected from the following; 

Com 410 Principles of Communications Research 3 

Com 426 World Communication Systems 3 

Com 427 Current Issues in Mass Communication 3 

Com 428 Communications arxi Social Change 3 

Com 431 Mass Communicatior>s in Communist Systems 3 

Com 480 Persuasive Communications 3 


COMMUNICATIONS EMPHASES 

Every communications major must select and complete 21 units of coursework in a major 
emphasis. 


ADVERTISING 

Coordinator: Fenton Calhoun Un/ff 

Com 101 Communications Writing 3 

Com 350 Introduction to Advertising 3 

Com 353 Advertising Copy arKi Layout 3 

Com 354 Retail Advertising 3 

Com 356 Advertising Production (1,1) 2 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

ptus five units selected from the following; 

Com 217A,B, 359, 361; 380; 381, 451 


ind 1 2 collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by 


the adviser. 

NEWS COMMUNICATIONS (JOURNALISM) 

Coordinator: Janies Alexander Units 

Com 101 Communications Writing 3 

Com 102 Communications Writing 3 

Com 217A,B Introduction to Black-and-White Photography 2 

Com 319 Communications Photography 2 

Com 332 Copy Editing and Makeup 3 

Com 335 Reporting of Public Affairs 3 

Com 338 Newspaper Production 3 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship 2 


And 1 2 collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education apiproved by 
the adviser. 


1317—34 8 120 


220 


Communica tions 


PHOTOCOMMUNICATIONS 

Coordinator; Marvin Rosen (Acting) 

Six units of writing courses selected from the following: Units 

Com 101, 102, 301, 334, 353, 362, 403 b 

(Note: Com 101 is a prerequisite to all the above courses except 301 and 334.) 

Com 217A,B,C Introduction to Black-and-White Photography 3 

Com 220A,B,C Introduction to Color Photography 3 

Com 319 Communications Photography 2 

Com 321 Advanced Color Photography 2 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

plus three units selected from the following: 

Com 306, 311, 338, 358, 359 


And\2 collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by 
the adviser. 


PUBLIC RELATIONS 

Coordinator: Frank Kalupa Units 

Com 101 Communications Writing 3 

Com 361 Theories and Principles of Public Relations 3 

Com 362 Public Relations Writing 3 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

Com 463 Public Relations Methods 3 

plus seven units selected from the following: 

Com 217A,B,C; 332; 338; 350; 353; 358; 359; 465 


AndM collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by 
the adviser 

TECHNICAL AND BUSINESS COMMUNICATIONS 

Coordinator: Martin Klein Units 

Com 101 Communications Writing 3 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

An additional six units from the following: 

Com 102 Communications Writing 3 

Com 301 Writing for Telecommunications 3 

Com 334 Feature Article Writing 3 

Com 358 Graphic Communications 3 

plus 10 units selected from the following: 

Com 217A,B; 303; 332; 359; 375; 380; 403 

And 1 2 collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by 
the adviser. 


•TELECOMMUNICATIONS 

Coordinator: George Mastroianni 

Com 301 Writing for Telecommunications 3 

Com 371 Radio-Television News and Public Affairs 3 

Com 380 Introduction to Radio and Television 3 

Com 390 Introduction to Telecommunications Production 3 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

plus seven units selected from the following: 


Com 217A,B; 220; 290; 311; 335; 375; 381; 411; 473; 475; 477; 479; 490 
And 1 2 collateral units of upper division courses beyond general education approved by 
the adviser. 

• TetecornmomcatiofH students who wish to emphasize film in broadcasting should take: Com 290A or 2908; 31 1; 375 411; and 439 


1334—34 8 205 


Communications 221 


SPECIAL EMPHASIS 

Coordinator: Marvin Rosen 

Students whose interests involve more than one emphasis may seek approval of a spec ial emphasis. 
Minimum requirements for the special emphasis are the same as for other emphases; 

15 units of core requirements; 21 units of coursework in communications, at least six of which will 
be in writing courses and 12 in upper division; and 12 collateral units of upper division courses in 
other departments. Approval of the special emphasis plan must be sought in advance from the 
Department of Communications. For further details, contact the special emphasis coordinator. 

MINOR IN COMMUNICATIONS 

Twenty-orte units approved by the department are required for a minor in communications. The 


following represents a basic franr>ework: 

Core (9 units to be selected from the following) 

Com 333 Mass Communication and Modern Society 3 

Com 407 Communications and the Law 3 

Com 425 History and Philosophy of American Mass Communication 3 

Com 426 World Communications Systems 3 

Com 428 Communications and Social Change 3 

Com 431 Mass Communications in Communist Systems 3 

Com 480 Persuasive Communications 3 


Emphasis (12 units) 

Twelve units of coursework required in an emphasis approved by the coordinator including three 
units of communications writing courses. 

INTERNSHIP PROGRAM 

The Department of Communications has developed an internship program designed to provide 
academic and practical experience for students in all emphases. The student must apply for work 
experiefKe orte semester in advarKe of the senior level semester in which the internship is to be 
completed. Supervision is provided by the internship coordinators and the cooperating agency. 

TEACHER CREDENTIAL REQUIREMENTS 

The department offers major and minor programs approved by the State Board of Education for 
those seeking an elementary or secorxlary teaching credential. For advisement, consult the depart- 
ment arxi an adviser in the School of Education. 

Secorulary 

Communicatiorts majors p>lanning a teaching career at the secondary level must complete the 
communkatiorts core and News Communication emphasis. 

In addition, it is recommended that a student have at least or>e semester of Communications 358 
or 359. The student must also fulfill professional education course requirements. Both Journalism 
Education 442 and 749 (Student Teaching) are offered by the department. (See ' journalism Educa- 
tion," page 227.) 

Elementary arni Intermediate 

A program of courses totaling 36 units may be designed for elementary and intermediate teacher 
carxJidates in consultation with the departnr>ent chair. 

master of arts in COMMUNICATIONS 

The Master of Arts in Communications is designed to provide advanced study in communications 
ar>d related disciplir>es and to develop a research emphasis or option related to the processes and 
effects of communications. These options are: advertising, journalism education, news, photocom- 
munication, pHjblk relations, technical communication, or telecommunication. 

Students completing the Master of Arts in Communications with an emphasis in journalism education 
research are eligible for journalism teaching positions in high school or community college. 


8 230 


222 


Communica tions 


Prerequisites 

Students must possess a baccalaureate degree and have completed a basic core of courses in 
communications as prerequisites to the M.A. program. Before admission to classified graduate status, 
students must achieve satisfactory scores on the Graduate Record Examination Aptitude Test. 

Study Plan 

Students are required to complete 30 units of approved study, including 18 units in 500-level 
communications courses and 12 units of emphasis-related courses. Six of the 18 units of graduate 
level courses are applicable to the thesis or project requirement. 

For further information, consult the Department of Communications. See also "The Program of 
Master's Degrees," page 59 and the Graduate Bulletin. 


COMMUNICATIONS COURSES 

100 Introduction to Communica tions (3) 

A survey of the mass media and their relationship to society today. 

101 Communications Writing (3) 

An introductory course covering principles of reporting and writing, with emphasis on content 
organization, conciseness, and clarity. Typing ability required. 

102 Communications Writing (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 101 or consent of instructor. Concentration on reporting ar>d writing 
of more advanced material. Typing ability required. 

103 Applied Writing (3) 

Principles and practice in organizing and preparing letters, reports, documents, and proposals 
required in most occupations. Designed especially for non-communications majors. 

217A Introduction to Black and White Photography (1) (Formerly 218) 

Camera, accessories, materials, exposure, subject treatment and composition. (No laboratory) 

217B Introduction to Black and White Photography (1) (Formerly 218) 

Prerequisite: 21 7A or concurrent enrollment. Laboratory processing, printing, finishing and studio 
techniques. 

217C Introduction to Black and White Photography (1) (Formerly 218) 

Prerequisite: 21 7B or concurrent enrollment. Intermediate composition and treatment; special photo- 
graphic techniques and applications. 

220A Introduction to Color Photography (1) * 

Prerequisite. Communications 21 7A or concurrent enrollment. Theories of light and color. Principles 
of color photography. Students use commercially processed color transparency film. (No labora- 
tory) 

220B Introduction to Color Photography (1) * 

Prerequisite; 220A or concurrent enrollment. Color slides in communication. Developing theme and 
story in slide presentations. (No laboratory) 

220C Introduction to Color Photography (1) * 

Prerequisite: 220B or concurrent enrollment. Theory and principles of color film and print processing. 
Limited laboratory practice in negative and positive film processing. 

234 Sports Writing (3) 

Preparation and writing of sports articles for specific audiences. 

280 History of Radio and Television (3) 

(Same as Theatre 280) 

290A,B History and Aesthetics of Motion Pictures (34) 

History and development of the motion picture as an art form and social force. A — the motion 
picture from its origins until 1945. B — the contemporary cinema from 1945 to present. (Same 
as Theatre 290A,B) 

301 Writing for Telecommunication (3) 

An introduction to theory and principles of writing employed in the broadcast and film media. 

* Students wishing a non-Uboratory introduction to photography may enroH in Communication 21 7A. 220A arxl 2206. 


1350—34 8 285 


Communications 223 


303 Business Communications (3) 

Design and implennentation of communications systems for various business enterprises. Utilizer 
graphK analysis and analytical techniques Includes practice in prexiucing messages and channel- 
ing them to avoid ambiguities. 

304 Communication in Information Systems (3) 

Cerwralized systems approach to the complete cycle of data flow within an information system; 
origination, recording, representation, communications, organization, storage, processing, and 
information displays. 

306 Photocommunications Production (2) 

Prerequisite; 10 units of photography or consent of instructor. Advanced production of photographs 
arid photographic communications for the mass media, business, education, government, indus- 
try and science. May be repeated for credit to a nwximum of six units. (4 hours activity for each 
2 units) 

311 Introduction to Motion Picture Production (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 217A,B or equivalent. Introduction to theory and practice of motion 
picture photography and film production. (2 hours lecture, 3 hcxirs laboratory) 

319 Communications Photography (2) (Formerly 219) 

Prerequisite; Communications 217A,B or consent of instructor. Creative aspects and techniques of 
making photographs for publication; newspaper and magazine news, advertising, feature, sports 
and women's pages. (1 hour lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

321 Advanced Color Photography (2) (Formerly 221) 

Prerequisites; Communication 217A,B,C. Positive and negative color film processir>g, sensitometry, 
ar>d color printing. 

331 Analyzing News Communications (3) 

Analyzing news arxl other informational materials to assess their influerKe on the public, especially 
children. Oriented to teachers and teacher candidates, particularly those at the intermediate or 
elementary level. 

332 Copy Editing and Makeup (3) 

Prerequisites; Communications 101 and 102, or consent of instructor. Practice and theory of editing 
informatiorul materials for publication in newspapers and magazines. (6 hours activity) 

333 Mass Communication in Modern Society (3) 

Basic structure arul interrelationships of newspapers, magazines, films, radio, and television, in terms 
of their significarKe as social instruments and economic entities in modern society. 

334 Feature Article Writing (3) 

Nonfiction writing for newspapers and magazines, including study of sources, nr>ethods arni markets. 

335 Reporting of Public Affairs (3) 

Prerequisites; Communications 101 and 102, or consent of instructor. Coverage in depth of significant 
events pertinent to operations of governmental units and related organizations. 

33B Newspaper Production (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. A lecture/activity course in which members of the class constitute 
the editorial staff of the university newspaper. The group meets four hours per week for critiques 
in news reporting, writing, editing arxi makeup, followed by production. With consent of instruc- 
tor, the course may be repeated for a maximum of nine units of credit. (More than 9 hours 
laboratory) 

350 Introduction to Advertising (3) 

Survey of advertising in America. Emphasis on the language and art of advertising and its role in 
marketing. 

353 Advertising Copy ar>d Layout (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 350 or consent of instructor. Writing of copy and layout of advertise- 
ments, based on study of sales appeals, attention factors and illustrations. (6 hodrs activity) 

354 Retail Advertising (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 350 or consent of instructor. Principles and procedures of retail 
advertising; utilization of mass media; supervised field assignments in the analysis of specific 
advertising needs. 


13S5-04 8 310 


224 


Communications 


356 Advertising Production (1) 

Prerequisite; Communications 350 or consent of instructor. Preparation of advertisements for the 
university newspaper and magazine. Advertising accounts assigned to each student. Weekly 
critique sessions. Individual consultation with instructor. (5 hours laboratory) 

358 Graphic Communications (3) 

A lecture/activity class covering basic principles of graphic communication. Areas studied include 
printing processes, publication formats, copy preparation, copy-fitting techniques, layout princi- 
ples, pap)er selection and distribution methods. (1 hour lecture, 4 hours activity) 

359 Publications Production (2) 

Prerequisite: Communications 358 or consent of instructor. A production class for development of 
student publications, including the university magazine, authorized by appropriate university 
authorities. Activities include writing articles, editing copy, taking photographs and preparing 
layouts. (More than 6 hours laboratory) 

361 Theory and Principles of Public Relations (3) 

Examination of the social, psychological, philosophical, economic and political foundations of public 
relations, as well as the theories and principles of public relations as a communications discipline. 

362 Public Relations Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 101 or consent of instructor. Analysis and preparation of news re- 
leases, newsletters, annual reports, public service announcements and other forms of public 
relations materials. 

371 RadiO'Television News and Public Affairs (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 101 or 301 and 380 (or concurrent enrollment). Theory and practice 
of covering news events and public affairs for radio and television. (6 hours activity) 

375 The Documentary Film (3) 

Purpose, development, current trends, critical analysis and production requirements of the docu- 
mentary film. Future of the medium in business, government, education ar>d television. 

380 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 

(Same as Theatre 380) 

381 Broadcast Advertising (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 350 or consent of instructor. Study of television and radio as advertis- 
ing media. Planning advertising campaigns, costs and coverage. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours labora- 
tory) 

390 Introduction to Telecommunications Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 380. Basic theory and practice of radio and television program pro- 
duction. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

401 Report Writing (3) 

Planning, organizing, and writing of reports for business, education and government. Practice will 
be given in use of graphic aids and preparation of copy for reports that are to be printed. 
Recommended for non-majors. 

403 Technical Writing (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 101 or consent of instructor. Study of uses of technical writing in 
industry, science and engineering and completion of written assignments designed to test under- 
standing of, and provide experience with, various forms. 

404 Advanced Specialized Writing and Editing Techniques (3) 

Writing and editing of material for reports, proposals, special publications and journals. 

407 Communication and the Law (3) 

The Anglo-American concept of freedom of speech and press; statutes and administrative regulations 
affecting freedom of information and publishing, advertising and telecommunication. Libel and 
slander, rights in news and advertising, contempt, copyright and invasion of privacy. 

410 Principles of Communication Research (3) 

Survey of research methods used to assess the effects of print, broadcast and film communications 
on audience attitudes, opinions, knowledge arnJ behavior. Basic concepts of research design and 
data analysis in communications research. 


1359-^ 8 330 


Communications 225 


411 Advanced Motion Picture Production (3) 

Prerequisites; Communications 217A or 218, 311, 301 or concurrent enrollment, or consent of 
instructor. Advanced theory, procedures and practice in film production; motion picture (silent 
and sound), script-writing, transfer and mixes, production, distribution and financing. 

425 History and Philosophy of American Mass Communication (3) 

American mass communication, beginning with newspapers and periodicals and continuing through 
radio and television. Includes ideological, political, social and economic aspects. 

426 World Communication Systems (3) 

Major mass communication systems, both democratic aod totalitarian, and the means by which 
news and propaganda are conveyed internationally. 

427 Current Issues in Mass Communication (3) 

Mass media regulation by the government, "objective" versus "interpretive ' news reporting and 
ethical and legal questions of particular cases. 

428 Communications and Social Change (3) 

Study of how innovations — ideas, products, and practices perceived as new— are communicated 
to members of a social system. Examines the roles of adopters, opinion leaders, change agents, 
and communications as they relate to the diffusion of innovations and consequent changes in 
social systems 

431 Mass Communications in Communist Systems (3) 

Mass media in Communist societies, particularly the U.S.S.R., the People's Republic of China, Poland 
and Yugoslavia. Emphasis on the interrelationships of the mass media, people and party. 

439 Mass Media Internship (2) 

According to his emphasis, the student serves a supervised internship with organizations such as a 
newspaper or magazine (Xjblisher, radio or television station, press association, public relations 
firm or an advertising agency. Application for internships must be made through the department 
coordinator one semester prior to entering the internship program. 

442 Film Directors and Genres (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 290A or B or consent of instructor. An examination of films of 
significant directors, specific nations, or film genres, concentrating on historical, social and 
aesthetic qualities. 

451. National Advertising Campaigns (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 350 or consent of instructor. AdvarKed study of advertising cam- 
paigns and utilization of mass media — such as television, r>ewspapers and magazines — in na- 
tional advertising programs. Design of complete campaigns from idea to production readiness. 

463 Public Relations Methods (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 361 or consent of instructor. Techniques used for effective public 
relations in both personal and mass communications. 

465 International Public Relations (3) 

Public relations prirKiples applied to international operations, both private arxJ public. 

467 Public Relations for Educational Institutions (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 361 or consent of instructor. Theory and practice of public relations 
applied to public and private schools. Methods, policies, programs and problems inherent in 
educational public relations. 

473 Telecommunications Regulation (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 380. Self-regulation, governmental regulation and international regula- 
tion of broadcast programming. 

475 Telecommunications Programming 

Prerequisite; Communications 380. Theory and practice of programming for television and radio. 

477 Telecommunications Station Management (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 380. Management functions and policies of broadcasting stations and 
networks. Effects of government, public opinion, employee groups and ownership. Technical, 
legal, financial and other obligations. 

479 Advanced Telecommunication Production (3) 

Prerequisite; Communications 380 and 390 or consent of instructor. Advanced techniques in produc- 
ing television-radio programs. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 


1364—34 8 355 


226 


Communications 


480 Persuasive Communications (3) 

Processes and effects of persuasive communications applied to mass communication. Interaction of 
the communicator, audience, message content and structure, and social context in influencing 
attitudes, beliefs, and opinions. 

485 Film Production (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 311, 375 and 411 or consent of instructor. Fundamentals of docu- 
mentary film production planning and execution. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

489 Television Production Activities (3) 

Prerequisite: six units of television courses or equivalent and/or consent of instructor. Honors couse. 
Students develop, write, produce and direct regular programs of Information, instruction or 
diversion for distribution on the campus-wide closed-circuit television system and area cable 
systems. 

490 Film Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 290A and/or 290B or equivalent or consent of instructor. Analytical 
and comparative study of theories relating to film-making; nature of the film medium. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department chair. Individually supervised mass media projects and research 
on campus and in the community. May involve newspaper and magazine publishers, radio and 
television stations and public relations agencies. May be repeated. 

500 Theories of Communication (3) 

Theoretical study of communication processes and effects in terms of source, media, message, 
audience and context variables. Review of research on the effects of communications on audi- 
ence attitudes, opinions, knowledge and behavior. 

501 Literature of Communications (3) 

Typ)es, sources and uses of communications literature; application to individual graduate studies. 

502 Instructional Communication (3) 

Theories of learning, persuasion, and communication instruction applied to the design of instruction- 
al materials and training programs. Study of human factors in the design and development media 
as of textbooks, programmed workbooks, training films and videotap>es, recordings, and audio- 
tutorial training systems. 

503 Practicum in Instructional Communication (3) 

Principles of programmed instruction applied to achieve training objectives through the use of the 
communication media. Includes development and empirical tryout of short programs in print, 
film, and/or broadcast media utilizing behavioral analysis of typical audiences to assess program 
effects. 

508 Humanistic Study of Communications (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 410 and 5(X) or concurrent enrollment. Seminar in humanistic meth- 
ods of study in communications: historical research and critical analysis applied to problems, 
issues, and creative works in communication. 

509 Seminar in Communication Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 410 and 500. Principles of social-scientific research design and 
analysis applied to the study of communication processes and effects. 

510 Advanced Seminar in Communication Research (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 508 or 509. Problems in theoretical, applied and evaluative research 
in communication. 

512 Graduate Seminar in Journalism Education (3) 

Study of selected problems in journalism education with emphasis on individual research. 

597 Project (3 or 6) 

Completion of a creative project in an emphasis beyond regularly offered coursework. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Completion of a thesis in an emphasis beyond regularly offered coursework. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department chair. Individually supervised mass media projects or research 
for graduate students. May be repeated. 


1389—34 8 380 


Compjtrative Literature 227 


JOURNALISM EDUCATION COURSES 

442 Teaching Journalism in the Secondary School (3) 

Pr*»requisile; admission to teacher education. Theory and technique of advising school newspaper 
and yearbook staffs and teaching journalism. Relation of classroom instruction to staff assign- 
ments 

449A,B Journalism Education (12) 

Prerequisite: admission to student teaching. Full-time student teaching A— Student teaching in the 
secondary school. B -Seminar. 

749 Student Teaching in Journalism in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See page 190 for description and prerequisites 

COMPARATIVE LITERATURE PROGRAM 

The program in comparative literature is an interdisciplinary program direc ted by the Committee on 
the Program in Comparative Literature. The committee is responsible for formulating curricular 
policies, approving courses and advising studies. The chair of the English Oepartment administers 
the program, and the courses are taught by faculty from the English Department and other depart- 
ments whose courses are approved by the committee. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMPARATIVE LITERATURE 

The major in comparative literature provides professional competerKe and personal enrichment for 
students with an exceptional concern and appreciation for the study of the interrelationships be- 
tween the languages and literatures of various civilizations. The program offers courses in literary 
form and content, theory and philosophy, genres and movements, providing insight into the back- 
grounds of mankind's worldwide culture and literature The comparative literature courses are 
cofKiucted in English arnJ required reading is available in English. 

Upper Division Requirements 

1. Eighteen units selected from courses listed under comparative literature. 

2. Reading competence in a foreign language, demonstrated by successfully completing an adviser- 
approved 400-level course offered by the Department of Foreign Languages ar>d LiteraturcfS, 
provided it is not taught in translation. This requirenrtent can be met through examination. 
Information on the examination is available in the Department of English office. 

3. Six units selected from literature courses listed under English and numbered 300 or above. 

4. Six units of anthropology, history, art history, music history or philosophy approved by the adviser 
aruJ aimed at enlarging total perspective. 

5. The remainder of required units selected from any 3(X)- or 4<X>-level literature course in compara- 
tive literature, English, FrerKh, German, Italian, Russian or Spanish. 

Total ^2 units 

Distribution 

1 . Of these 42 units, 1 5 must span the chronological range of the literary continuum, one in each 
of the following literary periods: Classical or Medieval; RenaissarKe; Neoclassical or Baroque; 
Romantic; Contemporary (1850- ). 

2. One course in a literary genre. 

3. Or>e course in a major figure. 

It should be noted that (2.) and (3.) can perform the dual function of also satisfying (1.) (i.e., 
a senior seminar in Hugo would satisfy both the major figure and the Romantic Period require- 
ments). 

More detailed information on the comparative literature major can be obtained from the brochure 
available in the Department of English office. The importance of close consultation with an adviser 
cannot be stressed enough for comparative literature, since the diversity of language specialties and 
other factors may necessitate individual tailoring in any given case. 

Master of arts in comparative literature 

3^ objectives of the master's degree program in comparative literature are to promote the under- 
standing of other literatures, peoples, and cultures in various historical periods, including the present. 


1374 -^ 8 405 


228 Comparative Literature 

and to prepare the student for more advanced work in comparative literature, leading to the Ph.D. 
degree. The program also prepares teachers of world literature in the high schools and community 
colleges and provides a liberal arts background preparation for library studies. In addition to fulfilling 
all general prerequisites for graduate work established at Cal State Fullerton, for unclassified status 
the applicant, in order to become classified in the program, must meet the following criteria; 

1. An undergraduate major in comparative literature, English or foreign language with a CPA of 3.0 
or better in the major courses and a CPA of 2.5 in all other college and/or university work. If 
the student's degree is in another field, he must have completed a total of 24 units of upper 
division work in comparative literature, English or foreign language, with a CPA of 3.0. 

If the student lacks the prerequisite number of courses, he must make them up before he can begin 
work in the master's degree program, and he must earn at least a 3.0 in such makeup coursework. 
In the event that the student's CPA in these probationary courses is 3.0 or better, he may be 
admitted (classified). Courses taken to remove qualitative and quantitative deficiencies may not 
be applied to the M.A. program. 

2. Satisfactory completion of a written examination in an approved foreign language, or satisfactory 
completion of an upper division course taught in an approved foreign language. 

Study Plan 

Required are 30 units of coursework completed with a minimum CPA of 3.0 to be distributed as 


follows: 

1. A minimum of 18 units in 500-series courses: Units 

Courses at the 500-level in comparative literature (one adviser-approved 5(X)-level 

course in English may help satisfy this requirement) 15 

A course at the 500 level in a related area 3 

Total 18 

2. Upper division courses: 

Comparative Literature 410 3 

Adviser-approved course in comparative literature 3 

Adviser-approved courses in a related area 6 

(At least 3 units of related coursework must be in foreign literature, read in the 

original language.) 

Total 12 


At the conclusion of his coursework, the student will take a written comprehensive examination for 
the master's degree. 

For further information, consult the Department of English. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 59, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


COMPARATIVE LITERATURE COURSES 

(Offered by the Department of English) 

202 Short Story (3) 

(Same as English 202) 

305 The Hebrew Prophets (3) 

(Same as Religious Studies 333) 

312 The Bible as Literature (3) 

A comprehensive survey of Biblical literature emphasizing intrinsic literary qualities as well as the 
influerKe of major themes of both Old and New Testament writings upon Western literary 
traditions. 

314 The Oral Tradition in Literature (3) 

A study of storytelling as an art, particularly as developed through the media of the folktale. 

315 Classical Mythology in World Literature (3) 

A basic study of those Creek and Roman myths which have been of continuing significarKe in 
Western world literature. 


1378-;)4 8 425 


Comparative Literature 229 


316 Celtic Mythology and Early Irish Literature (3) 

A survey of early Irish literature and of Irish and Welsh mythological literature, with discussion of 
comparative and archeological relationships. 

317 Indie Mythology (3) 

A survey of the mythologies embodied in the Mahabhdftitd, the Ramavana. the Vedas and the 
Sathapatha Brahamana oi India, and in the Abast, ^vesta, and Shah Namahoi Persia, and their 
relation to the principal mythologies of Europe. 

318 Baltic and Slavic Mythology (3) 

A study of the principal myths of the Balts and Slavs and their relationship to the Indo-European 
inheritance. 

319 African Mythology (3) 

A study of the principal myths of sub-Saharan Africa, together with their reflections in African art 
and custom. 

320 Greek and Roman Literature (3) 

Readings in English translation from the literature of classical Greece and Rome. 

321 Germanic Mythology and Saga Literature (3) 

A study of Germanic mythology, including comparative myth and archeological relationships, and 
an introduction to Icelandic saga. 

324 World Literature to 1650 (3) 

Selected readings in Oriental and western literature from the beginning to 1650. 

325 World Literature 1650 to Present (3) 

Selected readings in Oriental and western literature from 1650 to the present 

332 Medieval Literature of Western Europe (3) 

Selected readings in modern English translation from the medieval literature of England and the 
continent from St. Augustine to Sir Thomas Malory. 

333 Literature of the Renaissance (3) 

Major phases of the Renaissance as a literary movement, from Erasmus to Montaigne and Cervantes. 

343 The Literature of the Romantic Period (3) 

Backgrounds in romanticism and study of major figures of European and American romanticism, 
such as Pushkin, Rousseau, Leopardi, Goethe, Thoreau, Schiller, Byron, and Emily Bronte. 

352 African Literature (3) 

(Same as English 352) 

360 Irish Literature (3) 

Selected writings representative of Irish literature from the early Middle Ages to the present. 

371A,B The French Tradition (3) 

A comprehensive survey of French literature from the Renaissance to present times. The first 
semester will include the novel, short story and essay; the second semester will cover drama and 
poetry. 

373 Masters of Russian Literature (3) 

Reading, discussion, and interpretation of selected works by Pushkin, Dostoyevsky, Tolstoy, Chek- 
hov, Pasternak, and others, and their relationship to western literature. 

374 Modern Russian Literature (3) 

A study of literary trends and representative works of Russian writers from Maxim Gorky to the 
present times. Special consideration of the Soviet literary theory and its impact upon their 
literature. Lectures and readings in English. 

375 Hispanic Literature (3) 

A study of selected translations from Hispanic literature and their relations to world literature. 
Readings in the picaresque rwvel, Cervantes, Golden Age drama, Galdos, Unamuno, Lorca. 

376 Main Trends in Spanish-American Literature (3) 

An introduction to the main currents of Spanish-American literature, emphasizing contemporary 
writers, such as Alegria, Asturias, Borges, Puentes, Neruda. Close attention will be given to the 
relation between the artistic expression and the ideological values of the same period. 

^2 Art, Literature, and the Development of Consciousness (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 402) 

403 The Quest for Self: East and West (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 403) 

404 The Nature of Love: Plato to Joyce (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 404) 


1381—34 8 440 


230 Comparative Literature 

405 Psychoanalysis and Drama (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 405) 

410 Theory and Method of Comparative Literature (3) 

Introduction to the theories and methods of comparative literature and the problems of translation. 

425 Indian Literature (3) 

A study of selected works of Indian literature. 

426 Chinese and Japanese Literature (3) 

A study of selected translations of Chinese and Japanese literature. 

427 Modern Japanese Fiction (3) 

A study of major writers and literary movements in 20th-century Japanese fiction. 

430 Persian and Arabian Literature (3) 

A survey course on the nature and distribution of the classics of western Asia in English translation, 
with lectures, readings and discussion. 

445 Literature of the Americas: Contemporary Novelists (3) 

A study of the Interdependency of the contemporary fiction of North and South America. Focuses 
on direct influences, such as Hemingway's and Faulkner's on Latin American writers, and Borges' 
influence on North American writers. Examines several parallels in techniques and themes as 
they reflect relationships in and between the Northern and Southern cultures. 

450 The Naturalists (3) 

A study of naturalism in the works of Turgenev, Balzac, the brothers Goncourt, Maupassant, Zola, 
Huysmans, Ibsen, Verga; and also the works of Cissing, Moore, Hardy, Garland, Crane, Norris, 
Dreiser, London and O'Neill. 

453 The Novel in France and Germany (3) 

Reading, discussion, and interpretation of outstanding novels in translation with a view toward 
determining some principles of the narrative arts. Emphasis on Goethe, Stendhal, Flaubert, Mann, 
Kafka, Proust and others. 

454 Contemporary Movements in European Literature (3) 

A study of modern literary movements, including naturalism, realism, symbolism, expressionism and 
surrealism, with reading and discussion of selected examples. 

457 The Experimental Novel (3) 

A study of contem(X)rary novels, including examples of surrealism and the nouveau roman, as well 
as other novels not readily classified. 

458 The Spanish Novel (3) 

A study of major Spanish novels in translation. 

473 A, B World Drama (33) 

Reading, discussion ar>d interpretation of great plays of the world in translation, emphasizing them 
as literature for p)erformance. A — From ancient Greece through the mid-19th century. B — From 
Ibsen to the present. 

482 Senior Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Directed research arnf writing, group discussion, and lectures involving intensive study of major 
writers. The student should consult his adviser and the schedule of classes for the sections 
available. This course number may be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

483 Senior Seminar: Greek Tragedy (3) 

Fifth century Greek tragedy through the extant works of Aeschylus and Sophocles, and 10 plays of 
Euripides. (Same as Theatre 492) 

491 Senior Seminar: Special Studies in Comparative Literature (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures devoted to significant periods, move- 
ments, and themes in world literature. May be repeated with different content for additional 
credit. 

492 Literature of Action in 20th-Century France (3) 

(Same as French 492) 

492 German Literature in Translation (3) 

(Same as German 492) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

550 Graduate Seminar: Medieval Literature (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion and lectures, concerning special problems such as 
the development of medieval narrative, the growth and development of the Arthurian legend, 
lyric poetry, allegory and devotional literature. 


1392-34 8 495 


Criminal /ustice 231 


551 Graduate Seminar: The Renaissance and Baroque (3) 

Comparative investigation of a theme, genre, or major figures in western literature for the Renais- 
sance and Baroque Period. Directed research and writing, group discussions, incfependent study. 
Since the topic each year will vary, depending upon the sp>ecialized interests and publications 
of the instructor, this course may be repeated with different content for additional crcniit. 

552 Graduate Seminar: Neoclassicism (3) 

553 Graduate Seminar: Romanticism (3) 

554 Graduate Seminar: Studies in the Modern Period (3) 

571 Graduate Seminar: The Novel (3) 

Offers directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures concerning the genre of the 
novel. An ability to read the novels in the original language will be helpful May be repeated with 
different content for additional credit. 

572 Graduate Seminar: Poetry (3) 

573 Graduate Seminar: Drama (3) 

580 Graduate Seminar: Major Figures in World Literature (3) 

Directed study and research on a major figure in world literature. Students will write rejXKts and 
a long paper on approved topics. 

582 Graduate Seminar: Dante (3) 

591 Seminar in Comparative Literary Criticism (3) 

598 Thesis (3) 

599 Independent Study (1-3) 

CRIMINAL JUSTICE PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
W. Garrett Capune 
Coordinator 
Judi jones 

The program leading to the Bachelor of Arts in Criminal justice is designed to acquaint preservice 
and inservice students with the principles and practices of criminal justice in America. Although the 
program's curriculum allows for the development of depth in one of the subject s substantive 
subsystems (i.e., law enforcement, courts or corrections), the overriding objective is to familiarize 
students with activities in the above areas. 

The program is both academic and professional in that it is an interdisciplinary attempt to relate 
professorial and practitioner perspectives to the challenge of crime in a free society. In this regard, 
the program provides the student with preparation for employment with a related agency and/or 
further study. 

ADVISEMENT 

Students are urged to see a program adviser prior to their first semester at the university as a criminal 
justice major. This is particularly important for community college transfers. Failure to do so may 
delay graduation 

bachelor of arts in criminal justice 

Every student must complete the core courses ( 1 5 units) arni a minimum of 1 2 units in the concentra- 
tion curriculum. In addition, each student is required to complete 12 units in a corelated curriculum. 
Eor current information regarding the criminal justice program and its courses, students are advised 
to consult the program's bulletin board. 

Core Curriculum (15 units) 

Criminal Justice 300 Criminal justice in America; An Analysis 
Criminal justice 310 Criminal Law (Substantive and Procedural) 

Criminal justice 320 Criminal justice Administration: A Survey 

Criminal justice * 330 Crime and Delinquency 

Criminal justice 340 Criminal justice Research Methodology 

6 ^ soc^logy courses in sim.Ur s«b,ects (e.g.. Soc«togv 411. Cnm.no»ogv. or 5oc«*o*y 413. Juvenrfe CMmquency) w,ll 
be accepted as substitutes for this class if considered to be comparable. 


1396 -^ 8 515 


232 Criminal lustice 


Concentration Curriculum (12 units) 


Criminal justice 41 5 
Criminal justice 425 
Criminal justice 435 
Criminal justice 445 
Criminal justice 455 
Criminal justice 465 
Criminal justice 475 


The Enforcement Function 

juvenile justice Administration 

Adjudication and the judiciary 

Corrections: Institutional and Community Programs 

Comparative Criminal justice Systems 

Criminal justice Planning 

The Administration of justice: A Seminar 


Corelated Curriculum (12 units) 

Courses for the related fields shall be selected in consultation with the student's adviser. The purpose 
of this requirement is to allow for the establishment of an emphasis, such as public administration 
or counseling. Upper-division courses in the following fields can be considered in this regard: 
accounting, business administration, communications, computer studies, finance, human services, 
law, management, philosophy, political science, psychology, public administration, quantitative 
methods, social welfare, sociology, technological studies. 


CRIMINAL JUSTICE COURSES 

300 Criminal Justice in America: An Analysis (3) 

Analysis of the institutions involved in the administration of criminal justice (i.e., law enforcement, 
courts and corrections), examination of some specific agencies and a review of the system's 
problems, policies and purposes as they relate to the processes of arrest, adjudication, etc. 

310 Criminal Law (Substantive and Procedural) (3) 

The nature of law, legal institutions and the legal process; a study of present Penal Code provisions 
both substantive and procedural, with special emphasis on current case considerations and their 
constitutional consequences vis-a-vis the right to counsel, the nature of due process. 

320 Criminal Justice Administration: A Survey (3) 

An analysis of justice administration as a ' single system"; a review of modern management materials 
as applied to the involved institutions; a specific study of line, staff, and auxiliary activities both 
in principle and practice, and an examination of the associated administrative theories. 

330 Crime and Delinquency (3) 

The nature and extent of criminality; a review of traditional and topical theories regarding etiology, 
with a concern for research method as well as the contribution's content (although physiological 
causes will be considered, the emphasis will be on the sociological and psychological theories). 

340 Criminal Justice Research Methodology (3) 

An introduction to elementary statistics including descriptives, measurements and tests; a review of 
data collection methods for effort evaluation and program prediction; and a survey of systems 
analysis techniques. 

415 The Enforcement Function (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal justice 300 or comparable coursework. The historical and philosophical devel- 
opment of the enforcement function as it operates at federal, state and local levels; community 
controls, political pressures and legal limitations pertaining to law enforcement agerKies at each 
level of government; examination of police p)olicies and problems vis-a-vis the administration of 
justice as a system. 

425 Juvenile Justice Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal justice 300 or comparable coursework. Development of our definitions of 
"delinquency" and the related responses of the interested institutions (police, courts and correc- 
tion), with special reference to the juvenile court (past and present), and prevention and 
correction programs (practicing and proposed). 

435 Adjudication and the Judiciary (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal justice 300 or comparable coursework. Development of the associated soci- 
olegal doctrine and institutions at the federal, state and local levels; political controls and legal 
limitations pertaining to each; a study of the nature of the judicial process and an examination 
of the participants' roles and their relationship to the administration of justice as a system. 


1403—34 8 550 


English 233 


445 Corrections: Institutional and Community Programs (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal justice 300 or comparable coursework. The historical and philosophical devel- 
opment of our corrections concern; analysis of correctional institutions as total institutions for 
prisoners and personnel; the theory and practice of probation and parole, with a consideration 
of rehabilitation and the alternative attitudes; a review of current research and experimental 
programs. 

455 Comparative Criminal Justice Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal justice 300- or comparable coursework. Comparative analysis of criminal 
justice systems of other states and of selected other countries throughout the world. The systems, 
their theories and associated problems will be examined. 

465 Criminal Justice Planning (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal justice 300 or comparable coursework. Principles of social planning; sources 
and uses of criminal, demographic and economic data; examination of existing planning-coor- 
dinating agencies, basic research and evaluation techniques including mathematical analysis and 
model building. 

475 The Administration of Justice: A Seminar (3) 

Prerequisite: Criminal justice 300 or comparable coursework. An examination of current social, legal 
and practical problems confronting the police, the courts and corrections as segments within a 
system concerned with such matters as riots, organized crime, recidivism. An analysis of the 
associated career groups as professions with problems and prospects. 

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 

FACULTY 
Howard Seller 
Department Chair 

Don Austin, Arthur Bell, Rosemary Boston, john Brugaletta, Miriam Cox, Sherwood Cummings, 
Dorothea de France, George Friend, Cynthia Fuller, Stephen Garber, Joseph Gilde, Joan Green- 
wood, Annabelle Haaker, jean Hall, Mary Hayden, Joseph Hayes, Dennis Hengeveld, jane Hipoli- 
to, Robert Hodges, Michael Holland, Wayne Huebner, Charlotte Hughes, Helen jaskoski. Hazel 
Jones,* Dorothy Kilker, Thomas Klammer, William Koon, Joanne Lynn, Willis Me Nelly, Russell 
Miller, Keith Neilson, Priscilla Oaks, Paul Obler, Rita Oleyar, Urania Petalas, June Salz Poliak, 
Orrington Ramsay, Sally Romotsky, William Rubinstein, Joseph Sawicki, Clarence Schneider, 
Muriel Schulz, john Schwarz, Sari Scott, Alice Scoufos, Donald Sears, Som Sharma, George 
Spangler, Alexander Stupple, Irene Thomas, Elena Tumas, Martha Vogeler, M. John Wagner, john 
White, Helen Yanko 

The English Department offers courses designed to acquaint the student with the nature and develop- 
ment of our language, with the literatures of England and America, and with the disciplines involved 
in the various kinds of writing. Except for freshmen English offerings, courses in world literature in 
English translation are listed separately, under Comparative Literature. In addition the Department 
of English offers some specialized professional courses for the preparation of teachers. On the senior 
and graduate levels, various opportunities are provided for seminar work and independent study. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ENGLISH 

Requirements: A total of 42 units beyond English 100 and 103, or their equivalents, including 201, 
which should be completed before upper division courses are taken. 

Lower Division (maximum of 12 units) 

Any tower division course beyond English 1(X) and 103 or the equivalent, 

Basic Course (3 units) 

3(X) Analysis of Literary Forms 

tipper Division (minimum of 30 units) 

Language courses (minimum of 3 units), selected from the following. 

302 Introduction to the English Language 

* Univervty admimstrative otficef 


1407-;J4 8 570 


234 English 

303 The Structure of Modern English 
305 American Dialects 
490 History of the English Language 
American literature (6 units): 

321 American Literature to Whitman 

322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns 
Major author courses (6 units including English 334): 

333 Chaucer 

334 Shakespeare 
341 Milton 

Period courses (minimum of 6 units, at least 3 in a period preceding the Romantic Movement) 
selected from the following: 

332 Medieval Literature 

335 Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama 

336 Elizabethan Poetry and Prose 

337 17th-Century Poetry and Prose 

338 Drama of the Restoration and the 18th Century 

339 Restoration Literature (1 660-1 7(X)) 

340 18th-Century Poetry and Prose 

343 The Romantic Movement in English Literature 

344 Victorian Literature 

345 The Development of the English Novel through jane Austen (meets pre-Romantic 

requirement) 

346 The Development of the 19th-Century English Novel 

423 Early American Literature (meets pre-Romantic requirement) 

445 The American Tradition in Poetry 

446 The American Novel to 1914 

462 Modern British and American Novels 

463 Contemporary British and American Novels 

464 Modern British and American Drama 

465 Contemporary British and American Drama 

466 Modern British and American Poetry 

467 Contemporary British and American Poetry 

Transfer students should consult with their advisers who may recommend the granting of further 
credit for lower division work completed at other institutions. 

Electives to complete a minimum of 42 units selected from additional courses in language and 
composition, period courses, literary criticism, senior seminars, and comparative literature. Com- 
parative literature offerings are listed separately, but count toward an English major. 

A program of literary studies gains in perspective through the study of history, sociology, philosophy, 
and psychology. Students of literature are strongly advised to irKlude such courses in their program. 
English majors seeking a secondary teaching credential must either complete or be exempted from 
English 301, and complete either English 302 or 303 before student teaching. 

English majors who intend to pursue graduate study are urged to acquire proficierKy in at least one 
foreign language. Note: Freshmen intending to major in English should complete two years of course 
work in a foreign language, or denrK)nstrate equivalent accomplishment by transfer or by examina- 
tion. 

MINOR IN ENGLISH 

Requirements: a total of 21 units 

Lower Division (maximum of 9 units) 

Any lower division course beyond English 100 and 103 or the equivalent. 

Upper Division (minimum of 12 units), including: 

t 

Basic course (3 units) 

300 Analysis of Literary Forms 

American literature (minimum of 3 units), selected from the following: 

321 American Literature to Whitman 

322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns 


1412—34 8 595 


English 


235 


Language courses (minimum of 3 units), selected from the following; 

302 Introduction to the English Language 

303 The Structure of Modern English 
305 American Dialects 

490 History of the English Language 
Major author courses (minimum of 6 units) 

334 Shakespeare 
333 Chaucer or 
341 Milton 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ENGLISH 

To qualify for classified graduate status in the program for the Master of Arts in English, a student 
must hold a bachelor's degree in English from an accredited institution at which he has maintained 
at least a 3.0 grade-point average in the major courses provided that he has a minimum of 24 units 
of upper-division coursework; or if he holds a bachelor's degree in another major, he must have 
completed 24 units of upper-division coursework in English with at least a 3.0 grade-point average. 
If the student lacks the prerequisite number of English courses, he must make them up before he 
may begin work in the master's degree program, earning at least a 3.0 in such makeup coursework. 
In the event that the student's GPA in prerequisite English courses is less than 3.0, he may be allowed 
to take from six to nine units of probationary, adviser-approved coursework. If his CPA in these 
probationary courses is 3.0 or better, he may be admitted (classified). Courses taken to remove 
qualitative and quantitative deficiencies may not be applied to the M.A. program. 

A student is required to have two years of one foreign language at the college or university level 
or six units of study in comparative literature. If taken as graduate work, these six units may be 
applied to the master's degree under "units in subjects related to English" 


Study Plan: Units 

Minimum units in English courses restricted to graduate students (500 series) 18 

(with the permission of the graduate adviser, 3 of these 18 units may be taken in a 
comparative literature graduate seminar) 

Maximum units in specified upper-division courses in English 6 

Units in subjects related to English 

Total 30 


At the conclusion of his program he will take the written comprehensive examination for the master's 
degree. A student who fails the examination may retake the failed part only ocKe. 

A/o/e.- The student is strongly advised to take the steps necessary for admission to the program before 
registering for his first graduate courses. Part of the admission process is to confer with the graduate 
adviser, who will analyze prerequisites and designate those courses which will apply to the degree 
program. Courses taken by an unclassified student do not r>ecessarily apply toward a degree. At the 
time the student achieves classified status, no more than nine units of postgraduate coursework may 
be applied to the master's degree program. 

For further information, consult the Department of English. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees, ' page 59. and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ENGLISH COURSES 

For world literature in English translation see courses under comparative literature. 

100 Composition (3) 

A basic course in composition. The course carries ru) credit toward the major. 

103 Seminars in Writing (3) 

A course for the student with some proficiency in composition. Readings on a relevant topic are 
meant to rrK)tivate the student to express his thoughts in a meaningful, disciplined manner. 
105 Introduction to Creative Writing (3) 

An exploratory creative writing course in which the student is given the opportunity to write in 
various genres. The course carries no credit toward the major. 


1417-34 8 620 


236 English 

110 Literature of the Western World from Ancient through Medieval Times (3) 

The study of representative writers and works from the ancient through the medieval world. 

111 Literature of the Western World from the Renaissance through the 19th Century (3) 

The study of representative writers and works from the Renaissance through the 19th century. 

112 Modern Literature of the Western World (3) 

The study of representative writers and works of modern literature. 

202 The Short Story (3) 

A course designed to introduce the student to the study of the structure and technique of the short 
story. Emphasis on critical analysis of selected American and European short stories. (Same as 
Comparative Literature 202) 

205 Introduction to Drama (3) 

A course designed to introduce the student to the study of dramatic literature. Emphasis on close 
analysis of individual plays. 

206 Introduction to Poetry (3) 

A course designed to increase students' understanding and appreciation of the art of poetry. The 
primary activity will be close reading of poems written in English. 

300 Analysis of Literary Forms (3) (Formerly 201) 

The main literary forms — prose fiction, p>oetry, and drama — are studied and analyzed. Various 
critical methods are applied to representative works mainly from English and American literature. 
English majors should schedule this basic course as early in their programs as possible. 

301 Advanced Composition (3) 

Prerequisites: English 100, 103, or their equivalents. Exercises in creativity, analysis, and rhetoric as 
applied in exp>ository writing. Required of English majors seeking the secondary credential. 

302 Introduction to the English Language (3) 

A basic course in language emphasizing the history, structure, and dialects of American English in 
its social, cultural, and educational contexts. This course or English 303 required of English majors 
seeking a secondary credential and must be taken before student teaching. 

303 The Structure of Modern English (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing. The grammar of contemporary English. Modern English usage. This 
course or English 302 required of English majors seeking a secondary credential and must be 
taken before student teaching. 

305 American Dialects (3) 

An examination of the principles of dialectology. Emphasis will be on the description of modern 
American dialects and their role in social, cultural and educational issues of today. (Same as 
Linguistics 305) 

311 Masters of British Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of instructor. An introduction to major periods and 
movements, major authors and major forms through 1760. 

312 Masters of British Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of instructor. An introduction to major periods and 
movements, major authors and major forms from 1760 through modern times. 

320 Literature of the American Indian (3) 

A study of the prose and poetry of the American Indian, focusing on the literatures of the North 
American tribes. 

321 American Literature to Whitman (3) 

Emphasis on major writers: Hawthorne, Poe, Melville, Emerson, Thoreau, Whitman and others. 

322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns (3) 

Emphasis on Twain, James, Crane, Hemingway, Faulkner, O'Neill, Frost, Eliot. 

325 American Ballad and Folksong (3) 

A survey of Anglo-American balladry and folksong, with attention to historical development, ethnic 
background and F>oetical values. 

326 The American Frontier in Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: any courses in American literature, American studies or American history. The moving 
American frontier from the beginnings to the close of the 19th century. Accounts of explorers 
and naturalists will be examined beside artistic, literary, and popular treatments to identify the 
myths and symbols created by the fact of a frontier in American life. 


1422—34 9 5 


English 237 


332 Medieval English Literature (3) 

An introduction to the literature of medieval England exclusive of Chaucer. Readings in modern 
English versions of representative major works and genres from Beowulf to Malory. 

333 Chaucer (3) 

A study of The Canterbury Tales and of Chaucer's language, with particular emphasis upon the 
understanding of the vocabulary, pronunciation, grammar, and syntax of the East Midland dialect 
of Middle English, as indispensable to literary appreciation. 

334 Shakespeare (3) 

An introduction to Shakespeare's art through a detailed study of the more famous plays. 

335 Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama (3) 

Studies of representative English dramatists of the late 16th and early 17th centuries. Emphasis on 
the development of the dramatic traditon in the plays of Marlowe, lonson, Webster, Beaumont 
and Fletcher, and others. 

336 Elizabethan Poetry and Prose (3) 

A study of the nondramatic literature of the English Renaissance from More to Campion. Emphasis 
on Renaissance thought and the works of Spenser. 

337 17th-Century Poetry and Prose (3) 

A survey of the major writers of the period from 1603 to 1660 exclusive of Milton. 

338 The Drama of the Restoration and the 18th Century (3) 

A study of representative plays of the Restoration and the 18th century. Emphasis will be placed on 
the development of such dramatic movements as the heroic play, Restoration comedy and 
sentimental drama. 

339 Restoration Literature (1660-1700) (3) 

Butler, Rochester, Dryden, Pepys, and selected minor writers. 

340 18th-Century Poetry and Prose (3) 

Swift, Addison and Steele, Pope, Boswell, Johnson, and selected minor writers. 

341 Milton (3) 

An intensive study of the poetry and prose in the light of Milton's intellectual development. 

343 The Romantic Movement in English Literature (3) 

Burns, Blake; Wordsworth, Coleridge; Byron, Shelley, and Keats. The reaction against rationalism, 
the rise of revolutionary and liberal thought, humanitarianism, and emphasis on individual 
creativity. 

344 Victorian Literature (3) 

A study of literature in its relationship to the problems which emerge from the social, cultural, 
scientific ar>d industrial revolutions of the Victorian period. 

345 The Development of the English Novel through Jane Austen (3) 

A study of the English novel from its beginnings to the 19th century considering such novelists as 
Defoe, Richardson, Fielding, Sterne and Austen. 

346 The Development of the 19th-Century English Novel (3) 

A study of such novelists as the Brontes, Thackeray, Dickens, Eliot and Hardy. 

351 Science Fiction (3) 

The study of science fiction as a genre, including future-scene fiction, the utopian rK)vel, the 
superman novel, and short fantasy stories. 

352 African Literature (3) 

African literature written in the English language, with special emphasis on the fiction, pioetry and 
drama of the new nations. (Same as Comparative Literature 352) 

353 Black Writers in America (3) 

A study of black American writers from Frederick Douglass to the present. Concentration on 
important figures such as Wright, Ellison and Baldwin. 

355 Images of Women in Literature (3) 

Images of women in various genres, such as autobiography, poetry, drama and the novel. A 
conventional literary period (Victorian, Modern, etc.) arxi specific cultures (Great Britain or the 
United States, etc.) at the discretion of instructor. 

364 Seminar in Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: eviderKC of student's previous interest in creative writing and consent of instructor. 
Study of superior models, development of style, and group criticism and evaluation of each 
student's independent work. May be repeated for credit. (Same as Theatre 364) 


1426—34 9 25 


238 English 

391 Traditions of English Literary Criticism (3) 

The principal statements of the major English critics, from the Renaissance to the beginning of the 
20th century, studied in their relationship to the classical theories of criticism. 

392 Modern Literary Criticism (3) (Formerly 452) 

A study of the major movements in 20th-century British and American criticism. 

421 Minority Images in American Literature (3) 

An examination of 19th- and 20th-century literature written by and about racial groups in America. 
Includes l/nc/e Tom's Cabin, Soul on Ice and Laughing Boy. 

423 Early American Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: English 321 or consent of instructor. The literature of colonial and revolutionary Ameri- 
ca, including the Puritans, 18th-century deism and rationalism, and the literary antecedents of 
American democratic thought. 

425 Darwinism in American Literature (3) 

Prerequisites; junior standing and consent of instructor. An examination of selected writings of 
Darwin and of such Darwinians as Spencer and Huxley; then a study of the literary adaptations 
and assimilations of Darwinism. (Same as American Studies 425) 

433 Children's Literature (3) 

Reading and discussion of works from world literature designed primarily for children, including 
material from the oral tradition, realistic fiction, fantasy and poetry. Designed for the general 
student as well as for elementary credential candidates. 

435 Studies in Shakespeare (3) 

Prerequisite: English 334 or consent of instructor. An intensive study of selected plays with primary 
emphasis upon problems of dramatic structure and artistic meanings. 

445 The American Tradition in Poetry (3) 

A study of selected American poems from the 17th century to 1914. Emphasis on the close reading 
of individual poems. 

446 The American Novel to 1914 (3) 

A study of selected novelists from C. B. Brown, through Melville and Twain, to Dreiser. 

451 Philosophical Backgrounds of Modern Literature (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 451) 

462 Modern British and American Novels (3) 

Prerequisite; survey of English, American or world literature; an upper division literature course; or 
consent of instructor. Development of modern British and American novels from 1900 to 1950. 

463 Contemporary British and American Novels (3) 

The novel in English since World War II. 

464 Modern British and American Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature; an upp>er division literature course; or 
consent of instructor. The development of British and American drama from 1900 to 1950. 

465 Contemporary British and American Drama (3) 

British and American drama from 1950 to the present. 

466 Modern British and American Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature; an upper division literature course; or 
consent of instructor. The development of British and American poetry from 1900 to 1950. 

467 Contemporary British and American Poetry (3) 

British and American poetry from 1950 to the present. 

490 History of the English Language (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing. The historical development of English vocabulary, 
phonology, morphology and syntax from Indo-European to modern American English. 

491 Senior Seminar (3) 

Prerequisite: an undergraduate course in the area to be studied, a B average or better in English 
courses, or consent of instructor. Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures 
covering selected topics from language studies, intensive studies of major writers, criticism, and 
literary types, periods, and ideological trends. 

499 Independent Study (3) 

Open to advanced students in English with consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


1443-^ 9 no 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 239 

570 Graduate Seminar: Language Studies (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lec tures covering philology, historical develop- 
ment, and structure of English. Individual offerings under this course number may deal with only 
one aspect of language studies. May be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

571 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of instructor, this course will offer direc ted 
research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering major figures such as: Shakespeare, 
Milton, Chaucer, Melville, Twain, Hawthorne, joyce and Coleridge. May be repeated with 
different content for additional credit. (Same as Theatre 571) 

572 Graduate Seminar: Literary Genres (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of instructor, this course will offer directed 
research and writing, group discussion and lectures, covering such major literary types as; the 
epic, the novel, the short story, lyric poetry, tragedy, comedy and historical drama. May be 
repeated with different content for additional credit. (Same as Theatre 572) 

573 Graduate Seminar: Cultural Periods (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of instructor, this course will offer directed 
research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering the literature of a particular cultural 
period from the Anglo-Saxon to modern times. May be repeated with different content for 
additional credit. 

574 Graduate Seminar: Special Problems in Literature (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and pHjblication of the instructor, this course will offer 
directed research and writing, group discussion and lectures covering special problems such as; 
the detailed critical study of varying influences on literature, ifKiuding philosophical, religious, 
scientific, geographic and other ecological viewpoints. May be repeated with different content 
for additional credit. 

579 Graduate Seminar: Problems in Criticism (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering historical development and 
schools of criticism. Individual offerings within this course number may deal with only one aspect 
of critical problems. May be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) 

Research projects in areas of specialization beyond regularly offered coursework. Oral and written 
reports. May be repeated with different content for additional credit. 


ENGLISH EDUCATION COURSES 

442 Teaching English in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education. Principles, methods and materials of leachir>g English 
in the secorxJary school. 

449A English Education (10) 

Student Teaching in the Secondary School. The candidate, in the field for four and one-half days 
each week, has the same instructional hours of responsibility as the master teacher. 

449B English Education (2) 

One afternoon a week the carulidate participates in a seminar with the university supervisor. 

749 Student Teaching in English in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See page 190 for description and prerequisites. 

DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 
AND LITERATURES 

FACULTY 
Samuel Cartledge 
Department Chair 

Linda Andersen- Bensimon, Oswaldo Arana, Nancy Baden, Robert Bertalot, Gerald Boarino, Daniel 
Brondi, Gail de Mallac, Modesto Diaz, Leon Gilbert, Arturo Jasso, Jacqueline Kiraithe, Walter 
Kline, G. Bording Mathieu, Harvey Mayer, Doris Merrifield, Ervie Pena, Marcial Prado, Charles 
Shapley, Curtis Swanson, Marjorie Tussing, Eva Van Ginneken, Stephen Vasari, Jon Zimmermann 


1447—34 9 130 


240 Foreign Languages and Literatures 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN FRENCH, GERMAN OR SPANISH 

Several options are offered: 

1. French major. Requirements; French 101, 102, 203, 204, 230, 240, or their equivalents; plus a 
minimum of 27 units of upp)er division courses including 305, 315, 317, 325, 415, 425 and six units 
of 475A,B,C,D. 

2. German major. Requirements; German 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their equivalents; plus 24 
units of upper division coursework, which must include 315, 317, 375 and three of the following 
literature courses; 430, 440, 450, 460. 

3. Spanish major: Lower division requirements; Spanish 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their 
equivalents. Upper division requirements for: 

A. Standard major; Spanish 315, 316, 31 7 or 318, 375; plus 15 units of upper division Spanish 
which must include 430, 441 and 461. 

B. Bilingual emphasis major: Spanish 315 or 316, 317 or 318, 375, 400 (or its equivalent), 
466, 467, 468, plus two additional courses in Spanish at the 400 level, to be taken in 
consultation with the adviser. 

MINOR IN A FOREIGN LANGUAGE 

Requirements: CoKxxses 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their equivalents, completed satisfactorily; 
plus nine units in upp>er division courses selected in consultation with the adviser. Minor concentra- 
tions are offered in French, German, Portuguese, Russian and Spanish. 

PROGRAMMED COURSES IN UNCOMMONLY TAUGHT LANGUAGES 

The department has available a number of programmed courses in languages which cannot be 

regularly taught, such as Arabic. For details see Foreign Languages 198. 

STANDARD TEACHING CREDENTIAL, SPECIALIZATION IN SECONDARY EDUCATION 

All prospective teachers, before being admitted to a credential program, must pass a proficiency 
examination in which their skills of listening, sp>eaking, reading, writing and knowledge of linguistic 
principles will be tested. Students should make arrangements with the department to take the test 
during their junior year. 

The credential program is the same as for the liberal arts major, with the following additional 
requirements: Foreign Languages Education 442; French or German or Spanish Applied Linguistics 
466. 

INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS 

In accordance with recommendations made by the Modern Language Association of America, the 
Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures encourages all majors interested in a teaching 
career to participate in a study-abroad program. This will enable a student to perfect his mastery 
of the language and afford him additional insights into the foreign culture. To this end The California 
State University and Colleges' International Programs offer a wide variety of study opportunities on 
the junior, senior and graduate level. Language majors are, however, required to complete a mini- 
mum of three literature courses at the 400 level on the Cal State Fullerton campus. For further 
information, see page 15. 

THE LANGUAGE LABORATORY 

Students enrolling in courses 101, 102, 203, 204 are required, in addition to the regular class periods, 
to practice for the minimum of prescribed time in the language laboratory. The 30-station laboratory 
operates like a library; students may use it at a time most convenient to them preferably every day 
in sessions of 15 to 30 minutes. Further details will be announced by each instructor and by the 
supervisor of the language laboratory. 

Students are invited to make use of the collection of literary and cultural recordings in French, 
German, Portuguese, Russian and Spanish available in the language laboratory. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN FRENCH, GERMAN OR SPANISH 

The degrees of Master of Arts in French, German and Spanish require a minimum of 30 semester 
units beyond the bachelor's degree including a minimum of 1 5 units in 5(X)-level courses. A candidate 
presenting a B.A. which has fewer than 24 upper division units in the major language, or is otherwise 


1454-^ 9 165 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 241 

inadequate, normally will be required to take additional courses to build a full undergraduate major 
before beginning the graduate program. The student must also demonstrate proficiency in English, 
either by examination or a three-unit upper division course in English grammar. 

The basic study plans are as follows: 

French 

A. Core courses (6 units) 

French 500 or substitute 
French 510, 520 or 530 

B. Graduate seminars in literature (9 units) 

C. Other electives (15 units) 

May be chosen from either 400- or 500-level French courses. Up to six units may be taken, 
with approval of the adviser, in a related field. 

A biblio project is to be completed prior to classification; a reading project is to be completed prior 
to advancement to candidacy. 

German 

A. Core courses (6 units) 

German 466 or 530 
German 500 

8. Graduate seminars in literature (9-12 units) 

C. Other electives (12-15 units) 

May be chosen from either 400- or 5(X)-level German courses. Up to six units may be taken, 
with approval of the student's graduate committee, in a related field. 

Spanish 

A. Core courses (6 units) 

Spanish 500 or substitute 
Spanish 530 

B. Graduate seminars in literature (9 units) 

C. Other electives (15 units) 

May be chosen from either 400- or 500-level Spanish courses. Up to six units may be taken, 
with approval of the adviser, in a related field. 

In all the programs a student, with the approval of his graduate committee, may opt to substitute 
a thesis for a part of the units required in section C. 

A reading list must be covered by all students in alt progranns. 

In alt languages the final evaluation is by a comprehensive examination, both written and oral, 
including fluency in the language. 

The candidate for the M.A. degree must consult a graduate adviser before beginning his program. 
Before being advanced to candidacy for the degree, he must demonstrate proficiency in the language 
to a faculty committee appointed for that purpose. The terminal evaluation is by comprehensive 
written and oral examination, including fluency in the specified language. 

For further information, consult the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," F>age 59, and the Graduate Bulietin. 


FOREIGN LANGUAGES COURSES 

1% StudenMo-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

See page 77. 


1457-^ 9 180 


242 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

198 Programmed Courses in Uncommonly Taught Languages (1~3) 

Intensive individualized programmed instruction in specific languages other than those regularly 
offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, such as Arabic. Designed to 
develop the skills of auditory comprehension and speaking in the language to form a basis for 
later development of the reading and writing skills. A minimum of 3 hours per week in the learning 
laboratory as well as regular sessions with native informants, are required for each unit of credit. 
May be repeated for credit. 

4% Student-to-Stuoent Tutorials (1-3) 

See page 77. 


FOREIGN LANGUAGES EDUCATION COURSES 

442 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (3) 

Prerequisites: French, German or Spanish 466, and admission to teacher education or consent of 
instructor. The theory and practice of language learning and language teaching with special 
emphasis on the audiolingual method. Conducted in English, with practice by students in the 
language they plan to teach. Required before student teaching. (2 hours lecture, plus fieldwork) 

443 Principles of Teaching English to Speakers of Other Languages (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing or above. New and recent trends, including the expanded use of 
electromechanical aids, programmed instruction, problems of bilingualism, and selected prob- 
lems in the psychological and linguistic foundations of modern teaching of English to speakers 
of other languages. 

449A Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary SchopI (10) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education, page 188. 

4498 Student Teaching Seminar (2) 

See description under Division of Teacher Education, page 188. 

450 Spanish Classroom Vocabulary (2) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or 318 or equivalent, or consent of instructor. For the teacher or potential 
teacher in bilingual classroom situations. Provides practice in Spanish classroom vocabulary at 
the primary and secondary levels. 

542 Problems in Language Acquisition (2) 

Seminar focusing on current research into language learning. Recent developments and innovations 
in the structural approach to language behavior. 

545G German Culture in the Language Classroom (2) 

Prerequisite: German 315 or consent of instructor. A thorough review of the geography, social 
organization, political structure, contemporary patterns of culture and value systems of German 
speaking lands. Emphasis on the resources and techniques available to the teacher of German. 

749 Student Teaching in Foreign Languages in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

For candidates seeking the Fisher standard credential in secondary teaching. See page 190 for 
description and prerequisites. 


CHINESE COURSES 

101 Fundamental Chinese (3) 

Practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of the sounds 
and the basic structure of Chinese. Audiolingual assignments will be prepared in the language 
lat)oratory. Conducted in Chinese. 

102 Fundamental Chinese (3) 

Prerequisite: Chinese 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening-comprehension, speaking, reading and 
writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Chinese. Audiolin- 
gual assignments will be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in Chinese. 


1461—34 9 200 


FRENCH COURSES 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 243 


101 Fundamental French (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and structure of French. Audiolingual assignments are an integral 
part of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in French. 

102 Fundamental French (5) 

Prerequisite: French 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of French 
Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared in the language 
laboratory. Conducted in French. 

203 Intermediate French (3) 

Prerequisite: French 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading, and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence 
Conducted in French. 

204 Intermediate French (3) 

Prerequisite; French 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in French. 

230 Intermediate Diction and Phonetics (2) (Formerly 214) 

Practice in oral delivery of cultural and literary materials. Detailed analysis of individual problems 
in pronunciation followed by intensive work in class and the language laboratory. May be taken 
concurrently with French 203. Conducted in French. 

240 Intermediate Composition (2) (Formerly 213) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural arnJ literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with French 204. Conducted in French. 

300 French Conversation (3) 

Prerequisites: French 204 or equivalent. Designed to enable the student to develop further his oral 
control of the language in the context of his own or contemporary cofKerns rather than in the 
context of the subject matter of a French major. Conducted in FrerKh. 

305 Introduction to Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Examination of what is krwwn about the nature of human 
language, the literary use of language, literary creation, reading, and what critics are able to say 
about literary works. Reading and discussion of some typical, mainly contemporary, texts 
Conducted in French. 

315 Origins of Modern France (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. The social, intellectual ar>d artistic origins of French civiliza- 
tion; feudal society becoming the ancien r^ime; the medieval world-view transformed by the 
Renaissance. For direct contact with medieval arKi Renaissance sensibility, selections from 
typical works of literature will be read in modern FrerKh translation. Cor>ducted in French. 

317 Advanced Composition and Grammar (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in 
French. 

318 Advanced Composition and Grammar (3) 

Prerequisite: French 317 or equivalent. Designed to give the student special competence in the 
control of French as an instrument for free oral and written expression. Conducted in French. 

325 Contemporary French Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite; French 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Reading and discussion to develop understanding of the social and intellectual problems, trends, 
and contributions of present-day France, while at the same time strengthening facility with the 
language. Conducted in F/ench. 

399 Advanced French Phonetics (2) 

Prerequisite: French 214 or consent of instructor. Analysis of students specific problems in pronun- 
ciation, followed by work in class and the language laboratory until articulatory proficiency is 
achieved. 


1467-^34 9 230 


244 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

400 French for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: French 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of spK>ken French, while develop- 
ing the student's powers of self-expression in the s|X)ken and written language. Conducted in 
French. 

415 French Classicism (3) 

Prerequisite: French 305 and 317. The decisive moment in French experience. Focus on literature 
of the Classic period ( 1660-1685), but open to both ends to include the formation and perennial- 
ity of French Classicism. Conducted in French. 

425 French Romanticism (3) 

Prerequisite: French 305 and 317. The revolution in feeling and intellect which transformed France 
in the 1 9th century and opened the way to the 20th century. Focus on literature of the Romantic 
period (1820-1850) but open on both ends to include the formation and p>erenniality of French 
Romanticism. Conducted in French. 

466 Introduction to French Linguistics (3) 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to French, with special attention to 
structural contrasts between French and English. Emphasis on the application of linguistic analysis 
to the teaching of modern foreign languages. 

475A,B,C,D Seminar in 20th-Century French Literature (33^33) 

Prerequisite: French 305, 315 and 317. Organizes the study of 20th-century French literature around 
four major themes. Conducted in French. 

475A Exploration of the Self (3) 

Search for identity and the quest for personal authenticity. The role of the conscious and unconscious 
mind and of artistic creativity. Proust, Cide, Mauriac, Valery, etc. 

475B In Search of the Real (3) 

The surrealist revolt against bourgeois logic, mores and literature. From Dada to automatic writing 
to Revolution to ! amour fou. Includes precursors and kindred spirits (e.g. Lautr^amont, Jarry). 

475C The Individual and Society (3) 

Attitudes toward personal freedom; the existential sense of responsibility toward one's fellow man. 
Saint-Exup^ry, Malraux, Sartre, Camus, etc. 

475D Beyond Despair (3) 

Writers after World War II seeking tough-minded visions of man to replace the naive humanism of 
the '30's, new kinds of hope "beyond despair": Sartre's "la vraie vie commence au-dela du 
desespoir." 

485 Senior Seminar in French Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: French 305, 315, 317 and senior standing. Exploration of a literary current, period, 
author, genre or problem. Subject will change each time course is given and may be repeated 
for credit. Conducted in French. 

492 Literature of Action in 20th-Century France (3) 

Selected works read, discussed and analyzed in the light of current philosophical trends as well as 
historical and political developments. Readings and lectures in English. May not be counted 
toward fulfillment of the requirements for the major in French. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in French language or literature to be taken with the consent of the instructor 
and department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in FrerKh. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) 

Prerequisite; French 466 or consent of instructor. Cor»ducted in French. 

520 Graduate Seminar: Old French (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Readings in the medieval literature of northern FrarKe represent- 
ing a wide variety of dialects and centuries. Conducted in FrerKh. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: French 466 or consent of instructor. Some previous study of Latin is highly recommend- 
ed. Studies in the phonetic, morphological, syntactic and semantic changes that characterize the 
development of Latin into the FrerKh of today. Conducted in FrerKh. 

557 Graduate Seminar: French Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 


1481—34 9 300 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 245 

571 Graduate Seminar: French Prose (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

575 Graduate Seminar: French Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in French. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student's graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in French and consent of instructor. Supervised research projects in French 
language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 


GERMAN COURSES 

100A-J Personalized Instruction in Fundamental German (3-10) 

Covers the same material as Fundamental German 101 and 102. Students may enter at any level but 
must initially register for a minimum of three units. Course is divided into 10 modules of one unit 
each. A student may elect to register for additional units during the semester. There are fK) 
traditional classes; students work on their own and meet with instructors for consultation and 
tests in individual conferences. 

101 Fundamental German (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading ar>d writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and structures of German. Audiolingual assignments are an 
integral part of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Cornlucted in 
German. 

102 Fundamental German (5) 

Prerequisite: German 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading, and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of 
German. Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared in 
the language laboratory. Conducted in German. 

203 Intermediate German (3) 

Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, ur»derstar>ding, reading, and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in German. 

204 Intermediate German (3) 

Prerequisite: German 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understarxling, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in German. 

213 Intermediate Reading (2) 

Prerequisite; German 102 or equivalent. Practice in skills to develop reading comprehension. Re- 
quired for major and minor. May be taken concurrently with German 203. Corxlucted in German. 

214 Intermediate Reading (2) 

Prerequisite: German 203 or equivalent. Continuation of German 213. Practice in skills to develop 
reading comprehension. Required for major and mirKK. May be taken corKurrently with German 
204. Conducted in German. 

301 Readings in German for the Non-Major (3) 

Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. Readings reflecting a broad spectrum of writing in the 
sciences and humanities. Special attention given to rapid readir>g and recognition of structure and 
vocabulary. 

315 Introduction to German Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of Instructor. 
Readings and discussions in German literature, arts and institutions to develop insights into 
German culture, while strengthening facility with the language. Conducted in German. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in German. 


1486-^ 9 325 


246 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

318 Advanced Composition and Grammar (3) 

Prerequisite: German 317 or consent of instructor. Designed to give the student special competence 
in the control of German as an instrument for free oral and written expression. Conducted in 
German. 

325 Current Trends in Culture of German-Speaking Peoples (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Op)en to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Readings and discussion designed to acquaint the student with a broad range of German contri- 
butions to present-day civilization while strengthening facility with German language. Conducted 
in German. 

375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: German 317 or consent of instructor. Introduction to the principal literary forms, prose 
fiction, poetry, drama and the essay and to the major concepts of literary techniques and 
criticism. Close analysis and interpretation of various texts to increase the student's abilities in 
reading, language and literary criticism. Conducted in German. 

390 Group Reading and Oral Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: German through fourth semester or consent of instructor. Oral reading of Hdrspiele, 
dramatic literature and poetry in group session. Emphasis on the practice of reading aloud from 
the printed page with proper pronunciation and intonation with simultaneous discussion of 
surface, inner and personal meaning of the literary work. Conducted in German. 

399 German Phonetics (2) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and consent of instructor. Detailed analysis of individual problems in 
pronunciation followed by intensive work in class and the language laboratory. May be repeated 
for credit. Conducted in German. 

400 German for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisites: German 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of German while developing 
the student's powers of self-expression in the spoken and written language. Conducted in 
German. 

430 German Literature and Culture to the Baroque (3) 

Prerequisite: German 315, 317 and 375 or consent of instructor. Masterpieces of German literature 
from the HHdebrandsHedXo Der Abenteuerliche SimpUcissimus and their relationship to cultural, 
historical and intellectual developments between ca. 800-1670 A.D. Conducted in German. 

440 ISth-Century German Literature and Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: German 315, 317 and 375, or consent of instructor. The prirKipal authors and move- 
ments (Enlightenment, Storm and Stress, Classicism, early Romanticism) of the 18th century. 
Conducted in German. 

450 19th-Century German Literature and Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: German 315, 317 and 375, or consent of instructor. Significant impulses in 19th-century 
German literature from Romanticism to Naturalism, including examination of decisive philosoph- 
ic, political, and economic influences. Conducted in German. 

460 20th-Century German Literature and Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: German 315, 317 and 375, or consent of instructor. Major German prose, drama and 
poetry of the 20th century. Conducted in German. 

466 Introduction to German Linguistics (3) 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to German, with special attention to 
structural contrasts between German and English. Emphasis on the application of linguistic 
analysis to the teaching of modern foreign languages. 

482 German Literature and Culture in Film (3) 

Prerequisite: advanced standing in literature or consent of instructor. A critical study of literary works 
and their film adaptations. Significant works of German literature will be analyzed and compared 
in both art forms. 

485 Senior Seminar in German Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing in German and consent of instructor. Research and discussion in depth 
of a literary movement, a genre or an author. Subject will vary and will be announced in the 
Class Schedule. Topics offered in past years have included the Baroque, the Novelle, Brecht, 
Modern Drama, Keller, Poetic Realism, Romantic Period. May be repeated for credit with a 
different topic. Conducted in German. 

490 Oral Interpretation of Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Group and individual reading of various types of literature to 
develop oral and interpretative skills. Conducted in German. 


1491^34 9 350 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 247 

492 German Literature in Translation (3) 

Open to all students. Reading, discussion and interpretation of relevant German literature. Authors 
may include Goethe, Schiller, Kafka, Hesse, Mann, Brecht, Crass, Hauptmann. Readings and 
discussions in English. May not be counted toward fulfillment of the requirements for the major 
in German. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in German Language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor 
and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) 

Prerequisite: German 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: German 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

550A,B,C Interpretation of Literature (2,2,2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Interpretation of literary works in advanced language classes 
Conducted in German. A — the narrative, B— the drama, C — poetry. 

557 Graduate Seminar: German Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted m 
German. 

571 Graduate Seminar: German Prose (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Subject will vary and will be announced in the Class Schedule. 
May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in German. 

575 Graduate Seminar: German Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Subject will vary and will be anrKHirKed in the Class Schedule. 
May be rep>eated for credit with a different topic. CorxJucted in German. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Subject will vary and will be anrKXjnced in the Class Schedule 
May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Corufucted in German. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prere<^bisite: recommendation of student's graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in German and consent of instructor. Supervised research projects in German 
language or literature. May be rep>eated for credit. 


HEBREW COURSES 

101 Fundamental Hebrew (3) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic structure of Hebrew. 

102 Fundamental Hebrew (3) 

Prerequisite: Hebrew 101. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and 
writing to develop control of the sounds arwJ the basic structure of Hebrew. 

203 Intermediate Hebrew (3) 

Prerequisite: Hebrew 102 or consent of instructor. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, 
reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to 
sentence. Conducted in Hebrew. 

204 Intermediate Hebrew (3) 

Prerequisite: Hebrew 203 or consent of instructor. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, 
reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to 
sentence. Conducted in Hebrew. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Hebrew language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor and 
department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


1494-^ 9 365 


248 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

ITALIAN COURSES 


101 Fundamenal Italian (4) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking and writing to develop control of the sounds 
and the basic structure of Italian. Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and 
are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in Italian. 

102 Fundamental Italian (4) 

Prerequisite: Italian 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading and writing to develop control of sounds and the basic forms and structure of Italian. 
Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared in the language 
laboratory. Conducted in Italian. 

203 Intermediate Italian (3) 

Prerequisite: Italian 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Italian 

204 Intermediate Italian (3) 

Prerequisite: Italian 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in sp>eaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Italian. 


JAPANESE COURSES 

101 Fundamental lapanese (3) 

Practice in listening-comprehension, s|:>eaking and writing to develop control of the sounds and the 
basic structure of Japanese. Audiolingual assignments will be prepared in the language laboratory. 
Conducted in Japanese. 

102 Fundamental Japanese (3) 

Prerequisite: Japanese 101 or equivalent. Practice in listening-comprehension, speaking and writing 
to develop control of the sounds and the basic structure of Japanese. Audiolingual assignments 
will be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in Japanese. 


LATIN COURSES 

101 Fundamental Latin (3) 

Intensive practice to develop a comprehensive reading knowledge and a fundamental writing ability 
in Latin. Modern techniques of language instruction will be applied. 

102 Fundamental Latin (3) 

Prerequisite: Latin 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice to develop a comprehensive reading knowl- 
edge and a fundamental writing ability in Latin. Modern techniques of language instruction will 
be applied. 

203 Intermediate Latin (3) 

Prerequisite: Latin 102 or equivalent (two years of high school Latin). Intensive reading and writing. 
Selected prose and poetry from the Golden Age. Audiolingual techniques of language learning 
are used when applicable. 

204 Intermediate Latin (3) 

Prerequisite: Latin 203 or equivalent (three years of high school Latin) . Intensive reading and writing. 
Selected prose from the Silver and Middle Ages. Audiolingual techniques of language learning 
are used when applicable. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Latin language and Roman literature. To be taken with consent of department 
chair as a means of meeting special curricular problems. Subject matter will vary. May be 
repeated for credit. 


1499-^ 9 390 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 249 


PORTUGUESE COURSES 

101 Fundamental Portuguese (4) 

Listening comprehension, speaking, reading comprehension, and writing to develop control of the 
sounds and the basic forms and structures of Portuguese. Enrollment restricted to students with 
previous study of a Romance language. Conducted in Portuguese. 

102 Fundamental Portuguese (4) 

Prerecjuisite: Portuguese 101 or equivalent. Listening comprehension, sf)eaking, reading comprehen- 
sion, and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structures of Portu- 
guese. Enrollment restricted to students with previous study of a Romance language. Conducted 
in Portuguese. 

315 Introduction to Luso-Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) 

Prerequisites. Portuguese 102 or equivalent, reading knowledge of Portuguese or consent of instruc - 
tor. Readings and discussions to develop insights into the main currents of Portuguese culture 
and civilization, their expansion to the New World, and the intellectual and artistic development 
of Brazil from its discovery to the end of the Second Empire. Conducted in Portuguese. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 102 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instruc- 
tor. Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in Portuguese. 

318 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite; Portuguese 102 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instruc- 
tor. Designed to give the student special competence in the control of Portuguese as an instru- 
ment for free oral and written expression. Conducted in Portuguese. 

325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite. Portuguese 315 or consent of instructor. Readings and discussion toward developing 
an understanding of the scKial and intellectual problems, trends, and contributions to Brazil from 
the advent of the Republic. Major emphasis on present day Brazil Conducted in Portuguese. 

431 Portuguese Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: 315 or consent of instructor. The literature of Portugal from the Middle Ages to the 
present. The major works of Gil Vicente, Luis de Camoens, Eqa de C^u^roz and other writers will 
be examined from the point of view of their artistic structure as well as within the context of 
Portuguese culture and civilization. Conducted in Portuguese. 

441 Brazilian Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The literature of Brazil from the Colonial period to the present 
Conducted in Portuguese. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Portuguese language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor and 
department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


RUSSIAN COURSES 

101 Fundamental Russian (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Russian. Audiolingual assignments are an integral 
part of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in Russian. 

102 Fundamental Russian (5) 

Prerequisite: Russian 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structures of 
Russian. Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared in 
the language laboratory. Conducted in Russian. 

203 Intermediate Russian (3) 

Prerequisite; Russian 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading, and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Russian. 

9- 86012 


1503-^ 9 410 


250 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

204 Intermediate Russian (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Russian. 

213 Intermediate Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with Russian 203. Conducted in Russian. 

214 Intermediate Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with Russian 204. Conducted in Russian. 

315 Introduction to Russian Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Reading and discussion to develop a view of the Russian tradition (its social, intellectual and 
literary evolution) while at the same time strengthening facility with the language. Conducted 
in Russian. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in Russian. 

375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 317 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the principal literary forms, 
prose fiction, poetry, drama and the essay and to the major concepts of literary techniques and 
criticisms. Close analysis and interpretation of various texts to increase the student's abilities in 
reading, language and literary criticisms. Conducted in Russian. 

400 Russian for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 31 7 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of spoken Russian, while develop- 
ing the student's powers of self-expression in the spoken and written languge. Conducted in 
Russian. 

431 Early Russian Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or consent of instructor. Evolution of Russian literature from the medieval 
ecclesiastic traditions and transition to Baroque and Classicism. French and German influence 
on the 18th century. Transition to Romanticism and the beginnings of Realism. Conducted in 
Russian. 

441 The Works of Tolstoy and Dostoevsky (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or consent of instructor. Major works of Tolstoy and Dostoevsky in their 
intellectual and historical setting and their impact on Russian and world literature. Conducted 
in Russian. 

451 The Golden Age of Russian Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or consent of intructor. A study of major literary works of the first half of 
the 19th century which exemplify cultural and intellectual movements in Russia. Conducted in 
Russian. 

461 Russian Literature from 1917 (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or consent of instructor. Representative works of outstanding modern 
Russian writers with an emphasis on The Nobel Prize winners (M. Sholokhov and B. Pasternak) . 
Analysis and discussion of their prose and F)oetry in the light of the social problems of present-day 
Russia. Conducted in Russiari. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Russian language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor and 
department chair. May be repeated for credit. 


SPANISH COURSES 

101 Fundamental Spanish (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Spanish. Audiolingual assignments are an integral 
part of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in Spanish. 


1507—34 9 430 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 251 


102 Fundamental Spanish (5) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Spanish. 
Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared in the language 
laboratory. Conducted in Spanish. 

203 Intermediate Spanish (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Spanish. 

204 Intermediate Spanish (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Spanish. 

213 Intermediate Conversation (2) 

Practice in oral expression based on a variety of materials. May be taken concurrently with Spanish 
203. Conducted in Spanish. 

214 Intermediate Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with Spanish 204. Conducted in Spanish. 

299 Spanish Phonetics (2) 

Prerequisite: junior standing and consent of instructor. Detailed analysis of students' specific prob- 
lems in pronunciation followed by intensive work in class and the language laboratory until 
articulatory proficiency is achieved. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in Spanish. 

315 Introduction to Spanish Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Readings and discussions in Spanish literature, arts and institutions to develop insights into 
Spanish culture, while strengthening facility with the language. Conducted in Spanish. 

316 Introduction to Spanish-American Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Reading and discussion in Spanish-American literature, arts and institutions to develop insights 
into Spanish-American literature and culture while strengthening facility with the language. 
Conducted in Spanish. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in Spanish. 

318 Advanced Spanish Syntax and Composition (3) 

Emphasis on linguistic problems encountered by the Spanish/ English bilingual student in connection 
with his written expression. Conducted in Spanish. 

375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the principal literary forms, 
prose fiction, poetry, drama and the essay and to the major concepts of the literary techniques 
and criticism. Close analysis and interpretation of various texts to increase the student's abilities 
in reading, language and literary criticism. Conducted in Spanish. 

400 Spanish for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive study of spoken Spanish, while develop- 
ing the student's jxjwers of self-expression in the spoken and written language. Conducted in 
Spanish. 

415 Contemporary Spanish Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 315 or consent of instructor. An analysis and study of the cultural — social, 
economical, political — characteristics of contemporary Spanish life. Conducted in Spanish. 

430 Spanish Literature to Neoclassicism (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 315 and 375. Spanish literature from its beginnings to 1700, with special 
emphasis on the outstanding representative works of each genre. Conducted in Spanish. 


1511-^ 9 450 


252 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

440 Spanish-American Literature (3) 

Prerequisites; Spanish 316 and 375 or consent of instructor. Spanish-American Literature from The 
Conquest to 1888. Conducted in Spanish. 

441 Spanish-American Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish 316 and 375 or consent of instructor. Spanish-American Literature from 
modernismo to the present. Conducted in Spanish. 

461 Spanish Literature Since Neoclassicism (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish 315 and 375 or consent of instructor. Representative works of 19th- and 
20th-century Spain. Conducted in Spanish. 

466 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to Spanish, with special attention to 
structural contrasts between Spanish and English. Emphasis on the application of linguistic 
analysis to the teaching of modern foreign languages. 

467 Dialectology: Current Trends in Modern Spanish (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish 317 or 318; 400 or equivalent; and 466, the latter of which may be taken 
concurrently. Focuses on the differences in phonology, morphology, syntax and lexicon found 
in the linguistic patterns of all Spanish-speaking regions. Includes the influence and contribution 
of cultural and historical features, as well as the continuing interactions of Spanish and English. 

468 Spanish-English Contrastive Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites; Spanish 317 or 318; 400 or equivalent; and 466, the latter of which may be taken 
concurrently. Theory and techniques of contrasting phonological grammatical and lexical struc- 
tures of Spanish and English, with special emphasis on comparison of the two languages as related 
to the speaker of both languages. Development of specific professional means to deal with 
problems of linguistic interference encountered in multilingual classroom situations. 

475 Senior Seminar: Contemporary Literature of Spain (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in Spanish. Selected readings from the most outstanding writers of the 
Ceneracidn del 98 and of the 2C)th century. Conducted in Spanish. 

485 Senior Seminar: Hispanic Topics (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in Spanish. Exploration of literary or cultural topics of Spain or Spanish 
America. Subject matter will change in alternate semesters. May be repeated for credit. Con- 
ducted in Spanish. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in Spanish language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor 
and department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar. Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

556 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

557 Graduate Seminar: Spanish-American Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

567 Graduate Seminar: Spanish-American Novel (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

571 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Prose (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

575 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. Cornfucted in Spanish. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student's graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in Spanish and consent of instructor. Supervised research projects in Spanish 
language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 


1516—34 9 475 


SWAHILI COURSES 


Geography 253 


101 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking and writing to master the basic structure of 
Swahili and the requisite skills for both oral and written communication. Conducted in Swahili. 
(Same as Afro-Ethnic Studies 104) 

102 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

Prerequisite: Swahili 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking and 
writing to master the basic structure of Swahili and the requisite skills for both oral and written 
communication. Conducted in Swahili. (Same as Afro-Ethnic Studies 105) 


DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY 


FACULTY 

William Ketteringham 
Department Chair 

George Britton, Arthur Earick, Peter Eilers, Wayne Engstrom, Glenn George, Gary Hannes, Ronald 
Helin, Tso-Hwa Lee, Bill Puzo, Gertrude Reith, Imre Sutton, Barbara Weightman 

The major in geography provides knowledge concerning variety and change in the earth's physical 
foundation and in man's economic, cultural and political relationship to that foundation. In doing 
so it contributes to a broad, liberal education and furnishes sound preparation for employment in 
business, planning, and government service. The field also provides a foundation for teaching on the 
elementary and secondary levels and for advanced geographic study on the graduate level leading 
to university teaching and research. 

Students and counselors are advised that departmental offerings are numbered according to instruc- 
tional level and course content. These criteria are applied in the following ways: 


Instructional level 

survey courses designed primarily for non-majors 1(X)-199 

survey courses designed primarily for majors 200-299 

courses designed for students with general needs and not normally applicable to 

graduate programs in geography 3(X)-399 

courses designed for students with special needs; prerequisites cited are strictly inter- 
preted 400-499 

courses for graduate students and qualified undergraduate students 500-599 


Course content 
general courses: 00-09 

physical courses: 1 0-29 

regional courses: 30-49 

human courses: 50-79 

technical courses: 80-89 

special studies: 90-99 


(e g.. Geography 100 or 500) 
(e.g.. Geography 211 or 323) 
(e.g.. Geography 344 or 433) 
(e.g.. Geography 250 or 367) 
(e g.. Geography 280 or 381 ) 
(e.g.. Geography 499 or 599) 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY 

The major consists of at least 36 units of geography, including no more than 1 3 units of lower division 
work and excluding all work applied toward the general education requirement. To fulfill the major 
a student must complete the geography core (Geography 1(X), 211, 250 arni 280) and a 24 unit 
concentration in upper division geography; including at least one course from each of the following 
groups: Physical, Regional, Human, Technical 

No unit credit toward the major will be allowed for geography courses in which a grade of D is 
received. Content credit for such courses may be allowed by the student's adviser. 


TEACHING MINOR IN GEOGRAPHY 

The minor in geography is intended as a second field for persons completing a major in another 
discipline in preparation for a teaching credential. It is designed to give a basic understanding of earth 
science and geographic relationships helpful to the classroom teacher. The program provides a 
balance between the physical and social sciences. 


1524—34 9 515 


254 Geography 

The minor consists of at least 21 units of work in geography, including a minimum of nine units from 
the geography core (100, 211, 250 and 280) and a minimum of nine upper division units selected 
from at least three of the following groups: Physical, Regional, Human, Technical 

MASTER OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY 

This program provides advanced study in geographic concepts, techniques and methods. Through 
seminars and research it develops the analytical and interpretive abilities of the student, and provides 
requisite background for employment in teaching, government and business. 

Prerequisites 

Admission to the program (classified status) requires the equivalent of 27 semester units of study 
in geography, including the following: (1) nine units in introductory geography; (2) nine units in 
upper division physical and human geography, including at least three units in physical and three 
units in human geography; (3) 3 units in upper division techniques; and (4) three units in upper 
division regional geography. A 3.0 (B) average in all geography courses is required prior to classifica- 
tion in the program. Course or grade deficiencies may be made up with consent of the departmental 
graduate committee. After completion of all prerequisites and removal of deficiencies, if any, the 
student is reviewed for classification into the program by the departmental graduate committee, 
which then supervises the student in the formulation of an official study plan. 

Study Plan 

Requirements for the completion of the degree program include: 

1 . A technical requirement equivalent to nine units. Technical courses passed as an undergraduate 
or graduate, including the course used to gain admittance to the program, may be used to satisfy 
this requirement, as may technical courses passed by means of a proficiency examination. 

2. A minimum of 30 units of approved upper division or graduate-level work distributed as 
follows: 

Units 


Geography seminars (minimum of) 9 

Geography 597, Project, or Geography 598, Thesis 6 

Elective upper division or graduate work in geography (for which up to 6 units 

may be taken in related field) 15 

Total 30 


Candidacy is attained on the satisfactory completion of the technical requirement and attainment 
of a grade of B or better in all of 1 2 approved units of work, including at least three units in a 500-level 
geography seminar. A written or oral examination may be required for advancement to candidacy. 
Each candidate will prepare either two three-unit projects or a six-unit thesis. Students interested 
in foreign area studies are expected to demonstrate a proficiency in a suitable foreign language. 
All graduate students are to confer with the departmental graduate adviser sometime during the first 
two weeks of each semester; for further Information, consult this adviser. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 59, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


GEOGRAPHY COURSES 

100 Man and the Land (3) 

An introduction to world geography, with emphasis on the world's major regions and on their use 
and modification by man. 

150 Environment in Crisis (3) 

A geographic analysis and approach to the problems of man and his environment, dealing with man's 
interpretation of the environment and his use and misuse thereof. Factors of discussion will 
include population, nutrition, health, settlement, pollution, resource utilization and local environ- 
mental problems. 


1529-^ 9 540 


Geography 255 


211 Physical Geography (4) 

A study of the basic elements of the physical environment (e.g., weather, climate, landforms, 
vegetation and soils) and an analysis of their world distribution and interrelationships. (3 hours 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 

250 Human Geography (3) 

The man-made environment, as interpreted and explained in terms of the evolving roles of culture, 
human organization and technology. 

280 Introduction to Geographical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. Designed to help students interpret physical 
and human features and activities of the landscape. An understanding will be gained by first-hand 
field experience together with the utilization of graphics and written material. ( 1 hour lecture, 
4 hours activity, including two Saturday field trips) 

312 Geomorphology (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 21 1 or Earth Science 101 . A study of the development of landforms through 
an analysis of the processes that construct and modify them. 

323 Weather and Climate (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 21 1 or consent of instructor. A study of atmospheric elements and controls, 
and climatic classification systems. 

325 Plant Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 21 1 or consent of instructor. A geographic analysis of world distribution, 
ecology and description of vegetation patterns including reference to human influences. 

330 Geography of California (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or upp)er division standing. Description and analysis of the geographic 
regions of California — their environmental diversity, occupance patterns, and current problerns. 

332 Geography of Anglo-America (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A regional study of the United States and 
Canada emphasizing the interrelated physical and cultural features that give geographic personal- 
ity both to the individual regions as well as the individual countries. 

333 Geography of Latin America (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A systematic and regional survey of Middle 
and South America with particular emphasis on the interrelationships of the physical and social 
factors of the area. 

336 Geography of Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or upp>er division standing. A survey of the basic physical and human 
lineaments of Europe and of the elements that distinguish and give character to its major regional 
divisions. 

338 Geography of the Soviet Union (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or upper division standing. Character of and bases for the regional 
diversity of man and land in the Soviet Union. 

340A Geography of East Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A regional, study of China, Japan and Korea 
in terms of internal and external economic, social and political activities and interrelationships. 

340B Geography of Southeast Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A regional study of the diversity so characteris- 
tic of man and land in southeastern Asia, with special emphasis on the growing significance in 
economic, social and political terms — of the region's newly emergent nations. 

344 Geography of Africa (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. The physical, human and regional geography 
of Africa with emphasis on Saharan borderlands and East Africa. 

346 Australia and the Pacific Islands (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. The physical, cultural, and regional geography 
of Australia, New Zealand, Melanesia, Micronesia and Polynesia. 

350 Conservation and Ecology in Contemporary America (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. A survey of resource-use problems and the principles of 
conservation and ecology with discussions of philosophy, ethics, public policy and environmen- 
tal law. 


1534—34 9 565 


256 Geography 

355 Population Perspectives (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. A systematic approach to the geography of population within 
a regional framework. Investigation of historical and contemporary demographic patterns and 
processes in terms of cultural, economic and environmental factors of population growth, mobil- 
ity and distribution. 

360 Economic Geography (3) 

A systematic inquiry into the world distribution of economic activities: agriculture, extractive and 
manufacturing industries, and tertiary services. 

367 Political Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 250 or consent of instructor. A systematic inquiry into the geographic bases 
of political territories, from the municipal to the international level with an emphasis on sovereign 
states. Special consideration will be given to perception of political units and to relationships 
among political territories. 

370 Urban Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. The city as a geographic unit; urban settlements as regional 
centers; city-region relationships; the structure of villages, towns and cities, and their historical 
developments; case studies. 

381 Cartography (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of instructor. Compilation and construction of maps and 
graphs as geographic tools, with emphasis on the principles of effective cartographic representa- 
tion. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

386 Data Processing for Geographic Information (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of instructor. An introduction to the use of a digital computer 
in solving geographical problems. Includes the acquisition of basic computer programming skills 
and the investigation of spatially-oriented problems. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

412 Regional Geomorphology of the United States (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 312. A seminar examining the major physiographic provinces of the United 
States. Special emphasis is placed on the record that present and past geomorphic processes have 
left on the landscap>e. 

423 Physical Climatology (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 323 or consent of instructor. A study of selected topics in atmospheric 
science, including heat-transfer, atmospheric motion, synoptic and climatic analysis of weather 
data, and the effects of urban environment on the atmosphere. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

425 Cultural Ecology (3) (Formerly 453) 

Prerequisite: Geography 211 or consent of instructor. A seminar for students in geography, related 
disciplines and in environmental studies. A topical (e.g., environmental health, nutrition) or 
regional (e g., coastal, insular, desert) treatment of the ecological approach to man-land relation- 
ships. 

430 Problems of California Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 330 or consent of instructor. A seminar analyzing selected geographic 
problems of California, such as urbanization, transportation, water supply and pollution. 

431 Man's Impact on the California Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 330 or upper division standing. A seminar analyzing selected geographic 
problems which have resulted from man's impact on the land and its resources, with particular 
emphasis on southern California. 

432 Geography of Eastern America (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 332 or History 170A or consent of instructor. A seminar on the geography 
of Eastern America eastward from the Great Plains. Emphasis will be on the natural setting, 
patterns of movement and settlement, population characteristics, economic development, and 
urbanization. 

433 Man and Geographic Relationships in Latin America (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 333 or consent of instructor. A seminar for advanced students in Latin 
American studies or geography. Studies of contemporary interest dealing with man and his 
development in the area of Latin America. Specific content of the course will vary from year to 
year, but major stress will be placed upon the larger countries of the region. 

451 Geographical Change in the American West (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 332 or 350 or consent of instructor. A seminar on geographical interpreta- 
tions of cultural, historical and resource management aspects of changing Western America. 


1539-34 9 590 


Geography 257 


457 Social Geography (3) 

Prerequisite; Geography 250. An investigation of man's social milieu from a spatial perspective. 
Emphasis will be placed on the subjective spatial constructs of various social groups in order to 
illuminate extant similarities and differences in the design of earth occupance. 

464 Transportation Geography (3) 

Prerequisite; Geography 360 or 370 or consent of Instructor. An inquiry into spatial patterns of b<ith 
regionalpand urban transportation networks; use of elementary graph theory in geographic 
research; transportation planning and methodology. 

468 Law and Environment (3) 

(Same as Environmental Studies 468) 

472 Urban Growth and Planning (3) 

Prerequisite; Geography 370 or consent of Instructor. A seminar on urban development with an 
emphasis on the decentralizing forces operating in contemporary urban space; identification of 
trends in the planning process. 

482 Advanced Cartography — Thematic Mapping (3) 

Prerequisites; Geography 381 and consent of instructor. Application of photographic techniques and 
cartographic analysis to advanced problems in map compilation and design. ( 1 hour lecture, 6 
hours laboratory) 

484 Airphoto and Image Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisites; junior, senior or graduate standing and consent of instructor. Use of aerial photogra- 
phy, space photography and other remote sensors as tools and research sources. Emphasis on 
Interpretation of physical and cultural elements of the landscape. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
activity) 

485 Quantitative Geography (3) 

Prerequisite; geography core or consent of instructor. An introduction to spatial analysis and geo- 
graphic application of basic concepts of descriptive and inferential statistics. Includes some use 
of the electronic computer. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

488 Land Use Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites; geography core and consent of instructor. Analysis and interpretation of urban and 
rural land use and settlement with specific references to geographic field problems. Application 
of geographic techniques and tools to local field studies. Saturday field sessions. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students. Student must have consent of instructor under whom study will be 
undertaken before enrolling. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Seminar in the Evolution of Geographic Thought (3) 

Prerequisite; graduate standing or consent of instructor. An inquiry Into the nature, scope, and 
development of the geographic discipline. 

510 Seminar in Physical Geography (3) 

Prerequisite; graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected topics pertaining to 
physical geography. May be repeated once for credit. 

530 Seminar in Regional Geography (3) . . 

Prerequisite; graduate standing or consent of Instructor. A seminar on selected regions or selected 
topics within a regional setting. May be repeated once for credit. 

550 Seminar in Human Geography (3) . • 

Prerequisite; graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected topics pertaining to 
cultural, political or social geography. May be repeated once for credit. 

560 Seminar in Resource Geography (3) 

Prerequisites; graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected problems in resource 
utilization, land use planning and economic geography. May be repeated once for credit. 

571 Seminar in Urban Problems (3) 

Prerequisites; graduate standing and consent of instructor. An in-depth study of selected urban 
problems. Topics will vary from semester to semester and will allow for concerns of the partici- 
pants. May be rep>eated once for credit. 

580 Seminar in Geo-Techniques (3) ■ . • •• 

Prerequisite; graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected topics pertaining to 
geographic techniques. May be repeated once for credit. 


1544—34 9 615 


258 History 


597 Project (3) 

Prerequisites: advancement to candidacy and consent of adviser. May be repeated once for a 
maximum of six units of credit. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Prerequisites: advancement to candidacy and consent of adviser. May be repeated up to a maximum 
of six units of credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students by consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 

FACULTY 

George Ciacumakis 
Department Chair 

Gordon Bakken/ Warren Beck, Leland Bellot, Lauren Breese, Giles Brown,* jack Crabbs, Lawrence 
de Graaf, jack Elenbaas, George Etue, Robert Feldman, Thomas Flickema, Charles Frazee, Arthur 
Hansen, B. Carmon Hardy, Harry jeffrey, Sam Kupper, William Langsdorf {Emeritus), Sheldon 
Maram, Michael Meiselman, Frederic Miller, Mougo Nyaggah, Michael Onorato, Charles Pov- 
lovich, jackson Putnam, Ronald Rietveld, Danton Sailor, Seymour Scheinberg, Gary Shumway, 
Cameron Stewart, Ernest Toy,* David Van Deventer, Nelson Woodard, james Woodward, Kinji 
Ken Yada, Cecile Zinberg 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN HISTORY 

The undergraduate major in history is designed to provide cultural enrichment, a sense of alternative, 
and perspectives especially relevant to a society confronted with widespread institutional change. 
The department offers courses which expHDse the student to man's rich and diverse experience. In 
addition to subject matter, the department gives particular emphasis to various methodologies and 
ways of thinking about mankind's past. The major may be pursued to fulfill various professional and 
cultural objectives common to a liberal arts program. It serves, especially, as a preparation for 
teaching, law, government, and other services, and as the foundation for advanced study at the 
graduate level. 

The undergraduate program for the history major contains three well defined levels of study: 
introductory, intermediate and advanced. At the introductory level, the student has the op|X>rtunity 
to enroll in topical or survey courses in various fields. At the intermediate level, the student builds 
on the foundations he has established in early study, extending his understanding and moving toward 
greater sophistication in the use of historical materials. At the advanced level, he will devote himself 
to seminar work and independent study in his area or areas of specialization, at which time he will 
be required to apply his knowledge and training in original and challenging ways. 

The undergraduate major requires a total of 40 units: 1 3 in introductory classes and 27 in intermediate 
and advanced courses. At the primary level, each student is to enroll in History 100, Introduction 
to History. He must also complete four topical or survey offerings. At the intermediate level. History 
399, Historical Methodology, must be taken along with 18 units, six each in the three fields of United 
States history; European history; and Latin American, Asian or African history. At the advanced level 
the student will be required to enroll in a research seminar and any other elective, at the upper 
division level, which he may choose. 

Except for History 1(X), all courses offered in the department may be counted toward fulfillment of 
the general education and social science requirement for the bachelor's degree at this university. 
Beyond this, any American history class will satisfy the California State requirements in U.S. history. 
Students majoring in history are encouraged to take work in other of the social sciences and 
humanities. Those intending to do graduate work in history should commence the study of at least 
one foreign language appropriate to the pursuit of advanced study in their particular specialty. 

Program of Study for the Major 

1. Introductory requirements: 13 units 

A. History 100 (prerequisite for intermediate and advanced courses)** 

B. Four courses (100-200 level) from three of the following four fields. These may be survey 
and/or topical courses: 

• University administrative o^flcer 

• • Students transferrirrg from accredited institutions who have completed nine or more semester units of work in introductory or 

survey history courses are exempt from this requirement. 


History 


259 


1. U.S. history (170A,B and/or 270 topic courses) 

2 European and ancient Mediterranean (110 A,B and/or 220, 230 topic courses) 

3 ’ Latin America, Asian and African (100 and/or 240, 250, 260 topic courses) 

4. World or comparative history (101A,B and/or 210 topic courses) 

2. Intermediate requirements: 21 units 

A. History 399 

B. At least six units of U.S. history 

C. At least six units of European history 

D. At least six units in Latin America, Asian or African history 

3. Advanced requirements: 6 units 

A. History 490 

B. Three units of elective, upper division level 

TEACHING MINOR IN HISTORY 

The teaching minor in history is composed of units in history exclusive of the general education 
requirements: 

Recommended teaching minor: 

Introductory courses 

Electives at the intermediate and advanced levels 

Total 

MASTER OF ARTS IN HISTORY 

The Master of Arts in History is designed to improve the student's academic and j^ofessional 
competence for educational services at the elementary, secondary and comniunity cd lege levels 
and as preparation for advanced graduate work toward the doctoral degree in history. It is relevant 
to various other specialties in public or private enterprise and general cultural or cor^munity service. 
The program seeks to deepen the students understanding of man's condition through a careful study 
of human experience. 

Prerequisite 

Prerequisite to classification in this master's degree is an undergraduate major in history equivalent 
to the Cal State Fullerton major with at least a CPA of 3.0 in the upper division history courses. Each 
student's background and record are evaluated by the department graduate program advwr. Satis- 
factory scores on the aptitude test and the advanced test in history of the Graduate Record Examina- 
tion are required. 

Students with limited subject, grade, or breadth deficiencies may be considered for classifi^ status 
in the program upon completing courses approved by the graduate program adviser in history in 
addition to those required for the degree, with at least a B average. 

Study Plan 

Of the 30 units of adviser-approved graduate cour^ on the study Plf." "JpI * ^ 

in appropriate work at the 500-level, and six must be in other suppo iv 
fields. The required courses for both Plan I and Plan II are. 

History 501 Seminar in the Content and Method of History (3) 

History 590 History and Historians (3) 

Plan I: ^ . 

A primary focus in one area in which a field is intensively develo^_^'S, -n a specific topic 

of research with a written thesis as the final product (History 598, Thesis: 3-8 units). 

An oral examination on the thesis and the coursework will be required upon completion of the 
coursework but prior to the final draft of the thesis. 


Plan II: 

The focus in this plan is in two fields not found in the same general area^ There is a minimum 
requirement of one graduate research seminar besides History 501 and 590. There is also a minium 
r^uirement of one graduate reading seminar in the recent interpretations of history in the particular 

fields of interest. 


155^—34 10 15 


260 History 

A written cotnprehensive in each of the two fields will be required upon completion of the program. 
Students in the History Department's graduate program must demonstrate a broad cultural under- 
standing of one or more foreign countries relevant to the student's area of specialization prior to 
advancement to candidacy. This requirement may be met by a reading knowledge of an appropriate 
foreign language usually determined by departmental examination or an approved selection of 
comparative studies ( 1 2 units post-B. A. ) , but the method must be approved by the student's adviser. 
In certain programs, an examination in statistics may be substituted for the language requirement. 
For further information, consult the Department of History. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 59, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

HISTORY MAJOR CATEGORIES 

I. INTRODUCTORY COURSES (for undergraduate students) 

A. Survey Courses (Lower division) 
too Introduction to History (1) 

101 A World History to 1500 
101 B World History Since 1500 

IlOA Western Civilization to the 17th Century 

HOB Western Civilization from 1648 

160 Asian Civilizations 

170A United States to 1877 

170B United States Since 1877 

B. Topical Courses (Lower division) 

210 Topics in World or Comparative History 

220 Topics in European History 

230 Topics in the History of Science and Technology 

240 Topics in Latin American History 

250 Topics in African History 

260 Topics in Asian History 

270 Topics in American History 

II. INTERMEDIATE COURSES (for undergraduate and graduate students) 

A. Historical Methodology (Upper division) 

399 Historical Methodology 

B. Subject Area Courses (Upper division) 

The Ancient World 

41 2A Ancient Near East — Mesopotamia 

41 2B Ancient Near East — East Mediterranean 

41 5A Classical Greece 

41 5B Hellenistic Civilization 

417A Roman Republic 

417B Roman Empire 

Europe 

340 Ancient and Medieval Britain 

341 Tudor-Stuart England 

342 History of England and Great Britain 

400 European Social and Intellectual History to 1500 

401 European Intellectual History from 1500 to the Present 
419 The Byzantine Empire 

421 A History of the Christian Church to 1025 

421 B History of the Christian Church from 1025 to the Present 

423A Medieval Europe, 300-1 (XX) 

423B Medieval Europe, 1000-1400 
425A The Renaissance 
425B The Reformation 

426 Rise of Modern Europe, 1648-1763 

427 Europe in the Era of the French Revolution and Napoleon 

428 19th Century Europe 

429 Europe Since 1914 
432 Germany Since 1648 


1555-^ 10 30 


History 


261 


434A Russia to 1890 

434B The Russian Revolutions and the Soviet Regime 

436 Balkans Since 1453 

437 East Europe 
439 History of Spain 
Latin America 

350A Colonial Latin America 
350B Republican Latin America 

450 Change in Contemporary Latin America 

451 The Andean Nations 
452 A Brazil to 1889 
452B 20th-Century Brazil 
453A Mexico to 1910 
453B Mexico Since 1910 
Africa 

356 Africa to 1850 

357 Africa Since 1850 

455 Contemp)orary Africa 

456 History of West Africa 

458A Southern Africa to the 20th Century 
458B Southern Africa in the 20th Century 
East Asia 

460 Problems of the Contemporary Far East 

462A History of China 

462B History of China 

462C China Since 1949 

463A History of japan 

463B History of japan 

46>4A History of Southeast Asia to 1850 

46>4B History of Southeast Asia, 1850-1945 

464C History of Contemporary Southeast Asia 

465A History of India 

465B History of India 

465C History of India 

Middle East 

466A The Arab Ascendancy 
466B The Islamic Imperial Age 

467 Middle East in the 19th Century 

468 Middle East in the 20th Century 

469 Intellectual and Cultural History of the Middle East 

The United States 

383 History of California 

470 American Colonial Civilization 

471 The United States From Colony to Nation 

472 jeffersonian Themes in American Society, 1800-1861 

473 Democracy on Trial 1845-1877 

474 America in the Age of the Industrial Revolution (1876-1914) 

475 America Comes of Age, 1914-1945 

476 Age of Power, Affluence and Anxiety Since 1945 
479 The Emergence of Urban America 

481 Westward Movement in the United States 
482A Socioeconomic History of the United States 
482B Socioeconomic History of the United States 
483 American Religious History 
484A American Constitutional History to 1865 
484B American Constitutional History from 1865 
485A United States Foreign Relations to 19(X) 

485B United States Foreign Relations from 1900 
486A Social and Intellectual History of the United States 


1558—34 10 45 


262 History 

486B Social and Intellectual History of the United States 
487A History of Politics in American Society 
487B History of Politics in Amercian Society 
488A American Negro From Slavery to )im Crow 
488B American Negro Since 1890 

489 The Mexican-American in the Southwest 
Science and Technology 

430A History of Science; Ancient to Renaissance 
430B History of Science: Copernicus to the Present 
World or Comparative 
405 History of the jews 
407 War and Civilization 

III. ADVANCED COURSES (for undergraduate and graduate students) 

A. Seminars (Upper division) 

490 Senior Research Seminar 

491 Proseminar in Special Historical Topics 

492 Community History 

493 Oral History (2) 

494 Special Research Techniques 

495 Colloquium in History 

B. Individualized Study (Upper division) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

IV. GRADUATE COURSES (for graduate students) 

501 Seminar in the Content and Method of History 

505 Seminar in Recent Interpretations in History 

520 Seminar in Europ)ean History 

550 Seminar in Latin American History 

560 Seminar in Afro-Asian History 

570 Seminar in American History 

585 Seminar in the History of United States Foreign Relations 
590 History and Historians 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 


HISTORY COURSES 

100 Introduction to History (1) 

Designed to introduce the new history major to his academic discipline through exposure to the 
following topics; the uses and significance of history; the nature of history; areas and fields of 
history; the language and vocabulary of history; and methods of studying history. Required of 
all lower division majors. 

101A World History to 1500 (3) 

The history of mankind from earliest times to 1500 A.D. Special attention is given to the definition, 
evolution, and interaction of the major civilizations. 

101 B World History Since 1500 (3) 

Global history during the past four centuries, with special emphasis on the interaction between the 
expanding West and the non-Western areas of the world. 

110A Western Civilization to the 17th Century (3) 

The study of man and Western institutions from their beginnings until the middle of the 1 7th century. 

110B Western Civilizations from 1648 ( 3) 

The study of man and the modernization of Western institutions from 1648 to the present. 

160 Asian Civilizations: China and Japan (3) 

The major civilizations of East Asia from ancient times to the present with emphasis on the general 
features of the society, government, religion, philosophy, economy, and arts. 


1561—84 10 60 


History 263 


170A United States to 1877 (3) 

A survey of the political, social, economic, and cultural development of the United States to 1877. 
Attention is given to Old World background, rise of the new nation, sectional problems, the Civil 
War and Reconstruction. Satisfies the state requirement In U.S. history. 

170B United States Since 1877 (3) 

A survey of U.S. history from the late 19th century to the present. Attention is given to economic 
transformation, political reform movements, social, cultural, and intellectual changes, and the 
role of the United States In world affairs. Satisfies the state requirement in U.S. history. 

210 Topics in World or Comparative History (3) 

Introductory world or comparative history courses. 

220 Topics in European History (3) 

Introductory Europ)ean history courses. 

230 Topics in the History of Science and Technology (3) 

Introductory science and technology history courses. 

240 Topics in Latin American History (3) 

Introductory Latin American history courses. 

250 Topics in African History (3) 

Introductory African history courses. 

260 Topics in Asian History (3) 

Introductory Asian history courses. 

270 Topics in American History (3) 

Introductory American history courses. 

340 Ancient and Medieval Britain (3) 

The history of Britain from 55 B.C. to 1485. Emphasis on the constitutional, institutional and cultural 
asjjects of Roman, Celtic, Anglo-Saxon, Norman and Plantagenet Britain. 

341 Tudor-Stuart England (3) 

The history of England from the accession of Henry VII to the Glorious Revolution. Emphasis on the 
political, institutional, ecclesiastical and cultural aspects of the period of the Tudors and Stuarts. 

342 History of England and Great Britain (3) 

A study of the political, economic and social history of Great Britain from the later Stuarts to the 
present. Particular stress on the modification of the parliamentary system and the growth of 
economic and social democracy within Britain and upon the development of responsible political 
systems in the dependent territories. 

350A Colonial Latin America (3) 

A survey of the pre-Columbian cultures; the conquests by Spain and Portugal and the European 
background of these countries; the development of the socioeconomic, cultural, and governmen- 
tal institutions in colonial life; the background of revolutions and the wars for independence. 
350B Republican Latin America (3) 

A survey of the Latin American republic since 1826, emphasizing the struggle for responsible 
government, socioeconomic, and cultural changes, and the role of U.S. foreign policy. 

356 Africa to 1850 (3) (Formerly 456) 

The history of tropical Africa from earliest times to the colonial era. 

357 Africa Since 1850 ( 3) (Formerly 457) 

A study of the impact of the colonial period upon the peoples of tropical Africa including a 
comparative analysis of the varioi*s systems of colonial administration; the factors contributing 
to the rise of African nationalism and the achievement of independence; and the problems 
encountered by these new nations. 

383 History of California (3) 

A survey of the political, economic, and social history of California from the aboriginal inhabitants 
to the present, tracing the development of contemporary institutions and the historical back- 
ground of current issues. 

399 Historical Methodology (3) 

A study of historical knowledge in relation to general knowledge; an introduction to the plurality of 
approaches in the analysis of history through the social sciences and humanities. Special empha- 
sis will be placed upon the application of theory in historical investigations and upon forms of 
historical communication. Required of all majors. 


1565-34 10 80 


266 History 

453A Mexico to 1910 (3) 

^ P^^-Co'umbian period to 1910. The course stresses the Indian heritaee 

453B Mexico Since 1910 (3) 

of the Mexican Revolution of 1910 and the revolution itself from 19io 
to 1921 stressing the political, economic, and social features; special attention will he paid to the 
Revolution as the first of the great upheavals of the 20th century. ^ ^ 

455 Contemporary Africa (3) 

^^'externaToroblems Jo'' independence, postindependence, internal and 

LnTctSSers P^o Africanism, apartheid, racial 

456 History of West Africa (3) 

^"ism tron^r^' ^ 1 ’^" development of legitimate trade and states colonial- 

ism, nationalism and post independence achievements and problems 

4S8A Southerr. Africa from Earliest Times to the 20th Century (3) 

aS hlnar J ofT indigenous peoples of southern Africa; and the development 

Africa To "Je ‘ of South 

458B Southern Africa in the 20th Century (3) 

developments in the Union (Republic) of South Africa, Central Africa (the 

460 Problems of the Contemporary Far East (3) 

'emnLT'*'’ d®3'''’8 «''<>’ events in the major Far Eastern nations since World War II with 
lapat Korraltd'SIZsl Alii""''*"’' development in China, 

462A History of China (3) 

Chinese history from ancient times to the middle of the 17th century, with special attention to the 
development of society, thought, economy and political institutions 
462B History of China (3) 

century to the 1950s. A study of China's internal 
fsm an^d mtrusion. with special attention to the rise of modern Chinese national- 

Tn andTlT '' developments in the Republican period, as well as the attempts at moderniza- 
tion and the triumph of communism. 'uurmidca 

462C China Since 1949 ( 3) 

^ "‘“dy of the Communist Party, political institutions 
deology, economic modernization and foreign relations of China 
463A History of Japan (3) 

Tokug1wa*eT'''' 1868, with emphasis upon the 

463B History of Japan (3) 

A study emphasizing the rise of the modern (apanese state, (apanese imperialism and the postwar 
464A History of Southeast Asia to 1850 ( 3) 

464B History of Southeast Asia, 1850-1945 (3) 

^ Tn"lh1^^oS^m?ir1s".‘''' "" 

464C History of Contemporary Southeast Asia (3) 

^ Trohll^^Th"'* Emphasis will be placed on the 

p oblems of the area and American involvement in Southeast Asia 

465A History of India (3) 

^ *1ZTln'1nd1a 

of ° f' • *?" *° political developments, the course includes an examination 

of evolving religious and social institutions: Hinduism, Buddhism, class and caste. 


1580 -^ 10 155 


History 267 


465B History of India (3) 

A survey of the history of the Indian subcontinent from the beginning of the Mughul Empire, 1 526 
to the Indian Mutiny of 1857. The course includes an examinaion of European intrusions and the 
crystallization of British supremacy in India. 

465C History of India (3) 

A survey of the history of India from 1857 to 1947 emphasizing India's struggle for independence. 

466A The Arab Ascendancy (3) 

Events transpiring in the Middle East from the rise of Islam to the Mongol Invasions of the 1 3th 
century; the impact of Islamic civilization upon Middle East society. 

466B Islamic Imperial Age (3) 

The p)OSt-caliphal period with emphasis on the Mongol invasions of the Middle East and their effects; 
early modern Muslim empires — Ottoman, Safavid and Moghul — up to A.D. 1800. 

467 The Middle East in the 19th Century (3) 

Western penetration of the Middle East and the reaction to it, modernization, the growth of national- 
ist movements and revolutionary disturbances ending with World War I. 

468 Middle East in the 20th Century (3) 

A study of the social, political and economic changes taking place in the Middle East primarily since 
World War I. Where possible, the Middle East will be treated as a whole and viewed through 
a topic-oriented approach. 

469 Intellectual and Cultural History of the Middle East (3) 

Major Muslim achievements in the social and natural sciences, belles-lettres, theology and philoso- 
phy, art and architecture from the advent of Islam to the 20th century. 

470 American Colonial Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite; History 170A or consent of instructor. This course analyzes the creation of societies 
in English North America from 1607-1754, stressing the emergence of economic, social and 
political patterns and structures in a maturing Anglo-American culture. 

471 The United States from Colony to Nation (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. This course analyzes and describes the social, 
economic, political and intellectual developments in 18th century America, stressing the Anglo- 
American imperial problems leading to the revolution, the origins of American nationalism, the 
social structure of the new nation, the formation of the Constitution and the rise of a party system. 

472 Jeffersonian Themes in American Society, 1800-1861 (3) 

Prerequisite; History 170A or consent of instructor. Analyzes Jeffersonian values and their impact 
upion the social, political and cultural life of the nation during the era of their greatest relevance. 

473 Democracy on Trial 1845-1877 ( 3) ^ 

Prerequisite; History 170A or consent of instructor. The study of America's 'great national crisis 
and the Impact of slavery, civil war and national reconstruction upon the democratic process 
of the republic. 

474 America in the Age of the Industrial Revolution (1876-1914) <3) 

A study of the maturation of the American industrial economy and its transforming impact upon class 
structure, politics, intellectual and cultural life, and diplomacy. Special consideration is given to 
the attempts made in the Progressive years to cope with the changes wrought by the Industrial 
Revolution. 

475 America Comes of Age, 1914-1945 ( 3) , j 

A multi-topic analysis of major trends in U.S. domestic policy, foreign policy, economy and society 
from World War I through World War II. Course will concentrate on conflicting values and ideals 
of domestic policy and U.S. role in world affairs. 

476 Age of Power, Affluence and Anxiety Since 1945 (3) , . r / 

Multi-topic analysis of U.S. History from 1945 to the present stressing the interrelationship of foreign 

policy, economic prosperity, domestic tensions and protest movements. 

479 The Emergence of Urban America (3) ..... 

A study of the historical development of urban life in An>erica with special emphasis on the process 
of urbanization and the development of urban and suburban cultures. 

481 Westward Movement in the United States (3) 

Prerequisite History 1 70A,B or equivalent. A survey of the expansion of the United States population 
and sovereignty from the eastern seaboard to the Pacific, colonial times to 1900, and a history 
of regional development during the frontier period. 


1587—34 10 190 


268 History 

482A Socioeconomic History of the United States (3) 

The course explores the interaction of social and economic factors upon each other in the develop- 
ment of American society. Special attention is given to the role of business and labor in economic 
change. The first semester covers the development of a colonial economy and the early national 
economy. 

482B Socioeconomic History of the United States (3) 

The course continues to explore the interaction of social and economic factors upon each other m 
the development of American society beginning with the "takeoff stage of economic develop- 
ment" and ending with contemporary America. Special attention is given to the role of business 
and labor in economic change. 

483 American Religious History (3) 

Prerequisite; upper division standing. The vitality and creativity of American religious life and the 
proliferation of religious organizations as the result of the transplanting of European Christianity 
and its modification in the new environment. 

484A American Constitutional History to 1865 ( 3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A, English and colonial origins, the growth of democracy, the slavery 
controversy, and the sectional conflict as they reflect constitutional development. 

4848 American Constitutional History from 1865 ( 3) 

Prerequisite: History 1 70B. Constitutional problems involved In the post-Civll War era, the expansion 
of business. World War I, the New Deal, World War II, and civil rights in the postwar era. 

485A United States Foreign Relations to 1900 (3) r . 

A comprehensive survey of the foreign relations of the United States from the beginning of the nation 
until 1900. Particular attention is given to bases of |X)licy, critical evaluation of major policies and 
relationships between domestic affairs and foreign policy. 

4858 United States Foreign Relations from 1900 ( 3) 

Relations from 1900 to the present. An analysis of the rise of the United States as a world power 
In the 20th century with special emphasis on the search for world order and the diplomacy of 
the atomic age. 

486A Social and Intellectual History of the United States (3) . ^ , 

A study of the social and intellectual development of the United States from the Puritans to the Civil 

War. 

4868 Social and Intellectual History of the United States (3) 

A study of the social and intellectual development of the United States from the Civil War to the 
present. 

487A History of Politics in American Society (3) ^ , 

This course traces political developments from the Colonial Period to the end of the Civil War. Its 
primary focus is upon political patterns of behavior. Institutional development and the response 
of the American political system to changing societal demands and needs. 

4878 History of Politics in American Society (3) 

This course traces political developments from Reconstruction to Lyndon Baines johnson. Its primary 
focus is upon political patterns of behavior, institutional development and the response of the 
political system to changing societal demands and needs. 

488A American Negro From Slavery to |im Crow (3) . . ^ 

A history of black Americans from African backgrounds through the era of slavery and the Civil War 
to the post- Reconstruction era. 

4888 American Negro Since 1890 (3) . . . i j 

History of black Americans from Booker T. Washington to present, stressing both their culture and 
role in American life and the issues involved in their relations with other segments of the 
population in various regions. 

489 The Mexican-American in the Southwest (3) 

Historical role of the Mexican-American in the Southwest stressing the cultural uniqueness, contribu- 
tions, with special emphasis upon migration, education, and economic changes since 1945. 

490 Senior Research Seminar (3) . i 

Directed research seminar with class discussions applied to specific topics and areas as schedi^ 

and staff allow. Designed to give students experience in original research and writing. Required 
of all history majors. 


1592—34 10 215 


Linguistics 269 


491 Proseminar in Special Historical Topics (3) 

Intensive study of trends, phenomena, themes or periods of history involving occasional lecture, 
discussion, directed reading, and student research. 

492 Community History (3) 

A study of the historical development of communities in general, and of the Orange County area 
in particular. Special emphasis on techniques of gathering and processing local historical data, 
including oral interviews and other archival materials. 

493 Oral History (2) 

Utilization of tape recorded interviews to document significant events in 20th-century history. 
Training will be given in interviewing techniques, tape recording interviews and historical editing 
of the typed transcripts of interviews. May be repeated for a total of six units if student wishes 
to pursue a different emphasis. 

494 Special Research Techniques (3) 

Introduces student to specialized techniques applicable to a particular field of historical research, 
such as the use of nonliterary resources, quantitative methods, etc. Designed to provide experi- 
"ence in unusual kinds of original historical research. 

495 Colloquium in History (3) 

Interpretation and analysis of significant documents and works of history aimed at broad synthesis 
and mastery of major interpretations in an area. Involves extensive directed reading and dicus- 
sion. Themes will vary according to instructor. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in history with consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 
501 Seminar in the Content and Method of History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

505 Seminar in Recent Interpretations in History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

520 Seminar in European History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

550 Seminar in Latin American History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

560 Seminar in Afro-Asian History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

570 Seminar in American History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. , 

585 Seminar in the History of United States Foreign Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

590 History and Historians (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A study of the writings, personalities, and philosophies of repre- 
sentative historians from Herodotus to the present. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students in history with consent of department chair. May be repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF LINGUISTICS 

FACULTY 
David Feldman 
Department Chair 

Geraldine Anderson, Alan Kaye, james Santucci, Peter Solon 

Linguistics is the scientific study of language— its nature and development, its universal properties, 
its diversified structures and their dialectal variants, its systems of writing and transcription, its cultural 
role in the speech community, and its application to other areas of human knowledge. As such, it 
is concerned with the multiple aspects of human communicative behavior which encompass 
thought, symbolization, language, meaning, acoustics, perception and the physiological processes 
of utterance and audition. 


1599—34 10 250 


270 Linguistics 

The interdisciplinary aspects of this study are reflected in the organization of the program which 
offers a core of general linguistics courses and draws upon linguistically-related courses in other 
departments. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN LINGUISTICS 

This program is designed for students with an exceptional interest in and aptitude for the study of 
the systems of human communication. It enables the undergraduate student to understand the 
essential relationships between language and thought and language and culture; to gain familiarity 
with the structure of foreign languages as well as English; to observe several types of linguistic 
structures; and to become conversant with the historical study of language and formal techniques 
and theoretical foundations of linguistic analysis. The program will enable the student with linguistic 
and philological interests to grasp the scope of the field and to determine more accurately the most 
meaningful concentrations in graduate study. 

Lower Division Requirements 

Linguistics 106 Language and Linguistics (3) 

One year of Latin, Greek, Hebrew or Sanskrit (6) 

Anthropology 202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

Lower Division Requirements 
Linguistics 106 Language and Linguistics (3) 

One year of Latin, Greek, Hebrew or Sanskrit (6) 

Anthropology 202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

Upper Division Requirements (minimum of 30 units) 

317 Course in a modern foreign language (3) 

Linguistics 341 Introduction to Phonetics (3) 

Linguistics 406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 410 Language and Culture (3) 

English 490 History of the English Language (3) 

Linguistics 491 Linguistics in Relation to Other Disciplines (1) 

Three electives (or more) from the following: 

Education 312 Human Growth and Development (3) 

Education 380 The Teaching of Reading (3) 

English 302 Introduction to English Language (3) 

English 303 Structure of Modern English (3) 

French, German, Russian or Spanish 400 course (3) 

French, German, or Spanish 466 course (3) 

Linguistics, any undergraduate courses other than those listed as required above 
Mathematics 304 Mathematical Logic (3) 

Philosophy 368 Symbolic Logic (3) 

Philosophy 450 Seminar in Philosophy of Language (3) 

Physics 405 Acoustics (4) 

Psychology 415 Cognitive Processes (3) 

Quantitative Methods 364 Computer Logic and Programming (3) 

Speech Communication 304 Message Reception and Analysis (3) 

Speech Communication 340 Speech Science (3) 

Students must consult with an adviser in linguistics before establishing their individual programs of 
study. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN LINGUISTICS 

The M.A. In Linguistics is designed for students who have exceptional interest in and aptitude for 
the study of the systems of human communication, reinforced by undergraduate study in linguistics 
and allied areas, such as foreign languages, English language, anthropology, speech communication 
and related areas in psychology and philosophy. It enables the graduate student to study In depth 
the position and function of human communication systems in the developnr^ent of civilization; to 
understand more fully the essential relationships between thought, language and culture; to deepen 
mastery,of the structure of foreign languages as well as English; to work intensively with several types 


160S-^ 10 280 


Linguistics 271 


of linguistic structures with special attention to non -Indo-European languages; and to increase 
expertise in the historical study of language and formal techniques and theoretical foundations of 
linguistic analysis. 

The core courses of the program are devoted to an in-depth consideration of descriptive, historical 
and applied linguistics. The remainder of the program combines advanced work in the theory of 
phonological; morphological and syntactical analysis; articulatory and experimental phonetics; se- 
mantics; lexicology; dialectology; language typology; and field methods, in which the procedures 
of the linguist working under field conditions are demonstrated by the analysis of several languages 
elicited from informants. A variety of approaches to descriptive analysis and several theoretical 
points of view including generative grammar, transformational analysis and prosodies are presented. 
A series of courses on the structure of individual languages, both ancient and modern, provides 
opp)ortunities for applying the general principles of structural analysis and for establishing linguistic 
data by elicitation from informants and analysis of written records. General courses in comparative 
linguistics and comparison within individual language families review methods of establishing genetic 
relationships among languages. The geographical diffusion of linguistic features and problems of 
language contact are studied by examining areal groupings of genetically unrelated languages. The 
relationship between linguistics and other disciplines and the application of the techniques, findings, 
and insights of that science to such activities as language teaching are treated in interdisciplinary 
courses and seminars. 

The aim of the graduate program in linguistics is to provide thorough and well-balanced training for 
practice and research in the several areas of linguistic studies and to prepare qualified students for 
careers in the communication sciences and allied disciplines. 


Course requirements 

Coursework in descriptive and historical linguistics 

Linguistics 501 Research Methods and Bibliography (1) 

Linguistics 505 Phonological Analysis (3) 

Linguistics 507 Grammatical Analysis (3) 

Linguistics 508 Theories of Syntax (3) 

Linguistics 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Coursework selected from any one of the following six areas of subspecialization, includ- 
ing other courses in the department with the approval of the adviser 


Units 

13 


Applied Linguistics 

English 302 Introduction to English Language (3) 

English 303 The Structure of Modern English (3) 

English 570 Graduate Seminar: Language Studies (3) 

Foreign Languages Ed 520 Advanced Seminar in Applied Linguistics 
French 466 Introduction to French Linguistics (3) 

French 599 Independent Graduate Research f1-3) 

German 466 Introduction to German Linguistics (3) 

German 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Linguistics 305 American Dialects (3) 

Speech and Language Development (3) 
Anthropological Linguistics (3) 

Bilingualism (3) 

Sociolinguistics (3) 

Graduate Seminar Linguistic Ontogeny (3) 
Graduate Seminar: Major Language Families (3) 
Graduate Seminar: Current Issues in Linguistics (3) 
Linguistics and Reading (3) 
lndep)endent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

Dialectology: Current Trends in Modern Spanish (3) 


(3) 


Linguistics 403 
Linguistics 409 
Linguistics 411 
Linguistics 412 
Linguistics 529 
Linguistics 565 
Linguistics 575 
Linguistics 584 
Linguistics 599 
Spanish 466 
Spanish 467 


Spanish 468 Spanish-English Contrastive Analysis (3) 
Spanish 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 


Anthropological Linguistics 

Anthropology 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 


1610—34 10 305 


272 Linguistics 


Linguistics 409 
Linguistics 410 
Linguistics 411 
Linguistics 412 
Linguistics 565 
Linguistics 575 
Linguistics 592 
Linguistics 593 
Linguistics 599 


Anthropological Linguistics (3) 

Language and Culture (3) 

Bilingualism (3) 

Sociolinguistics (3) 

Graduate Seminar; Major Language Families (3) 
Graduate Seminar: Current Issues in Linguistics (3) 
Field Methods (3) 

Language Typology (3) 

Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 


Analysis of Specific Language Structures 
French 466 Introduction to French Linguistics (3) 

German 466 Introduction to German Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

French 500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

German 500 Graduate Seminar; Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Spanish 500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

French 510 Phonology (3) 

German 510 Phonology (3) 

Spanish 510 Phonology (3) 

French 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

German 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

French 520 Old French (3) 

English 570 Graduate Seminar; Language Studies (3) 

English 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Spanish 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

French 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

German 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Linguistics 565 Graduate Seminar: Major Language Families 
Linguistics 575 Graduate Seminar; Current Issues in Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Experimental Phonetics 

Linguistics 402 Phonetic Analysis of Speech (3) 

Linguistics 540 Seminar in Experimental Phonetics (3) 

Linguistics 575 Graduate Seminar: Current Issues in Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Physics 405 Acoustics (4) . o u i ^ a 

Sp^h Communication 543 Major Problems in Speech Pathology and Audiology 
Speech Communication 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Communication and Semantics 

Anthropology 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Linguistics 409 Anthropological Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 411 Bilingualism (3) 

Linguistics 412 Sociolinguistics (3) 

Linguistics 504 Graduate Seminar: Semantics (3) 

Linguistics 515 Graduate Seminar: Psycholinguistics (3) 

Linguistics 529 Graduate Seminar Linguistic Ontogeny (3) 

Linguistics 575 Graduate Seminar: Current Issues in Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 584 Linguistics and Reading (3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Philosophy 450 Seminar: Philosophy of Language (3) 

Speech Communication 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Disorders of Communication 

Linguistics 403 Speech and Language Development (3) 

Linguistics 515 Graduate Seminar: Psycholinguistics (3) 

Linguistics 529 Graduate Seminar Linguistic Ontogeny (3) 


1613—34 10 320 


Linguistics 


273 


Linguistics 540 Seminar in Experimental Phonetics (3) 

Linguistics 575 Graduate Seminar; Current Issues in Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Speech Communication 441 Speech Pathology; Nonorganic Disorders (3) 

Speech Communication 443 Speech Pathology; Organic Disorders (3) 

Speech Communication 463 Audiology (3) 

Seminar: Major Problems in Speech Pathology and Audi- 

SfJeech Communication 563 Seminar in Audiology (3) 

Speech Communication 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Coursework in a related field 

Linguistics 597 Project (2) ^ 

Total — 

A rninimum of 15 units in 500-level courses is required. Also, satisfactory completion of written and 
oral comprehensive examinations will be required at the conclusion of the program 


Admission to the Graduate Program 

In addilwn to fulfilling all general prerequisites for graduate work established by the university, for 
Classified status, a student in order to achieve classified status in this program, must hold a bachelor's 
or equivalent degree with a major in linguistics consisting of 24 upper division semester credit hours 
or equivalent, in the field, with grades testifying to above-average scholarship from an accredited 
institution. Those having degrees with other related majors may be admitted if they have completed 
the tollowing courses or their equivalents. These prerequisites may be fulfilled concurrently with 
graduate coursework in the program. 

Linguistics 406 (3) 

English 490 (3) 

Linguistics 410 (3) 

Linguistics 491 (1) 


Knowledge of one foreign language is required. Students without coursework in a foreign language 
may demonstrate proficiency by a score of "average " or better on the MLA-ETS Proficiency 
Examination for Advanced Students. Work toward fulfillment of this requirement may be taken 
concurrently with graduate coursework in linguistics. 

For further information, consult the graduate coordinator of the Department of Linguistics. 

See also "Ihe Program of Master's Degrees," page 59, arxi the Graduate Bulletin. 


LABORATORY FOR PHONETIC RESEARCH 

See description app>earing on page 20. 


linguistic courses 

106 Language and Linguistics (3) 

A general introduction to the field of human communication. Specific topics include the nature of 
language, its origin and development; language in culture; the system of language; and language 
and thought. 

301 Sanskrit (3) 

An introduction to the Sanskrit language, emphasizing the acquisition of reading fluency. The 
devanagari script, phonology, morphology and syntax will be examined along with relevant 
points on Hindu culture and on the place of Sanskrit in the development of the Indo-European 
language family. 

302 Sanskrit (3) 

Prerequisite; Linguistics 301 or equivalent. Continuation of 301, corKentrating on the intensive and 
extensive reading of Sanskrit texts. Special attention will be given to paleographic techniques and 
graphemics. 


1617—04 10 340 


274 Linguistics 

303 Sanskrit: Intensive Reading (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 302, its equivalent or consent of instructor. Designed to offer intensive 
training and experience in the reading and interpretation of classical Sanskrit and to further 
acquaint the student with the linguistic structure of the language. 

304 Sanskrit: Intensive Reading (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 303, its equivalent or consent of instructor. Continuation of 303, concentrat- 
ing on the following readings: Upsnissds, BhagBvad Cita, the Manava Dharma Sastra and 
Nahpakhyanam. 

305 American Dialects (3) 

(Same as English 305) 

341 Phonetics (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 341, Theatre 341) 

365 Introduction to Major Language Families (3) 

A general introduction to the linguistic history and present structure of the world's major language 
families. Each semester a different language family will be studied and analyzed in terms of its 
synchronic and diachronic phonology, morphology, syntax and semantics. 

375 Introduction to Philosophy of language (3) 

(Same as Philosophy 375) 

402 Phonetic Analysis of Speech (3) 

(Same as Sp>eech Communication 402) 

403 Speech and Language Development (3) 

(Same as Si^eech Communication 403) 

406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

Introduction to the nature of human linguistic behavior. Phonological, morphological, and syntactic 
structures of languages are examined through the use of techniques developed for the description 
of such structures. 

407 Introduction to Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406, it equivalent, or consent of instructor. An introduction to the compara- 
tive method in diachronic linguistic methodology and theory with a discussion of graphemics, 
glottochronology, language families, dialect geography, and internal reconstruction. 

409 Anthropological Linguistics (3) 

(Same as Anthropology 409) 

410 Language and Culture (3) 

(Same as Anthropology 410) 

411 Bilingualism (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406 or equivalent. The study of the personal and social development of 
bilingual communities as reflected in the conflict between the language of the home and the 
language of the community. 

412 Sociolinguistics (3) . . . j 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406 or equivalent. The study of social dialects in relation to the surrounding 

communities. Topics include social stratification, acculturation, language maintenance, standard- 
ization, language planning and language change. 

417 Introduction to Psycholinguistics (3) 

(Same as Psychology 417) 

475 Seminar: Current Issues in Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 406 and 410, their equivalents, or consent of instructor. An intensive 
exploration of the latest research and development in linguistic theory, technique and me- 
thodology. 

491 Linguistics in Relation to Other Disciplines (1) 

Open to all upper division students. The mutually contributing relationships between linguistics and 
the social and natural sciences, literature, music, psychology, philosophy, mathematics and 
language pedagogy. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in linguistics to be taken with consent of department chair as a means of meeting 
special curricular problems. Selection of topic to be studied varies with needs of the students 
enrolled. May be repeated for credit. 


1621—34 10 360 


Linguistics 275 


SOI Research Methods and Bibliography (1) 

Prerequisites; graduate standing and Linguistics 406, or equivalent. Introduction to principal books, 
periodicals, and collections in general linguistics, specific languages and related fields; techniques 
of preparing research paF)ers and field reports in linguistics. 

504 Graduate Seminar: Semantics (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 504) 

505 Phonological Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406 or consent of instructor. Study of various kinds of phonological systems 
that occur in languages. Emphasis on practical problems in the phonetic arnJ phonemic analysis 
of selected language data. (Same as Anthropology 505) 

507 Grammatical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406 or consent of instructor. The study of word formation and sentence 
construction in a variety of languages. Application of immediate constituent, tagmemic, and 
transformational analysis to selected linguistic data. (Same as Anthropology 507) 

508 Theories of Syntax (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 507 or consent of instructor. Intensive and practical study of contemporary 
theories of grammar, with special emphasis on transformational, generative, logical and elec- 
tromechanical bases and techniques of utterance analysis. (Same as Anthropology 508) 

515 Graduate Seminar: Psycholinguistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 406 and 417 or equivalents. An examination of the behavioral, conceptual, 
motivational and social aspects of language, emphasizing recent developments in information 
theory, behavioral theory and linguistic theory as applied to human communication. (Same as 
Psychology 515) 

529 Graduate Seminar: Linguistic Ontogeny (3) 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 406 or consent of instructor. An intensive examination of the development 
of language and linguistic systems in the human species arwJ in the individual from the viewpoint 
of contemporary linguistic analysis and theory. 


530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406, its equivalent, or consent of instructor. The history of language, also 
including principles and techniques for the historical study and classification of individual lan- 
guages and language families, writing systems, lexicostatistical methods, and linguistic geography. 

532 Indo European Linguistics (3) . . , , . 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 406 and 530, their equivalents, or consent of instructor. Linguistical analysis 
of Proto-Indo-European. Attention will be given to the later development and spread of the 
Proto-Indo-European language and the culture of the Indo-European language family. 

540 Graduate Seminar: Experimental Phonetics (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 540) 

565 Graduate Seminar: Major Language Families (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406, its equivalent, or consent of instructor. The linguistic history and present 
structure of one of the world's major language families with collateral attention given to the 
relationships between the language family and the cultures with which it is associated. 

575 Graduate Seminar: Current Issues in Linguistics (3) „ 

Prerequisite graduate standing in the Department of Linguistics or consent of instructor. An intensive 
exploration of the latest research and development in linguistic theory, technique and me- 
thodology. May be repeated for credit. 


584 Linguistics and Reading (3) 

(Same as Education 584) 

592 Field Methods (3) ^ i . 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 505 and 507 or consent of instructor Methods of analys.s ^ 

of language structures. Data elicited from informants will be analyzed and described. Controlled 
study of a live informant's language. (Same as Anthropology 592) 

593 Graduate Seminar: linguistic Typology (3) . t u .u 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 406 and 530, their equivalents, or cons^t of instr^tor. Technique, nteth- 

<5s and criteria of comparing languages, dialects, or historical stages of languages and classifying 
them in terms of the basic elements of linguistic form which they represent. 


597 Project (2) 

Preparation and completion of an approved project. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 
Prerequisites; graduate standing and consent of department 


chair. May be repeated for credit. 


1625—34 10 380 


276 


Philosophy 


METEOROLOGY 

(Offered by the DepcUtment of Earth Science and the Opartment of Geography) 

S€*e departmental descriptions for the following courses: 

Earth Science 

210 Introduction to Meteorology (3) 

330 Hydrology, Meteorology and Oceanography (4) 

430 Advanced Studies in Hydrology, Meteorology and Oceanography (2) 

Geography 

323 Weather and Climate (3) 

423 Physical Climatology (3) 

DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY 

FACULTY 
|. Michael Russell 
Department Chair 

Ernest Becker,* |ohn Cronquist, Craig lhara, Merrill Ring, Gloria Rock, Stephen Simon, Richard Smith, 
Frank Verges, Marjorie Weinzweig 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PHILOSOPHY 

The major in philosophy is designed to provide the undergraduate student with ( 1 1 information 
about the achievements of the world's outstanding philosophers in the analysis and resolution of 
philosophic issues, and ( 2 ) some measure of skill in analyzing and resolving such issues as they arise 
in his own areas of interest Course requirements in philosophy are designed to provide both breadth 
and depth in exploring and analyzing philosophic concerns. 

Requirements for the Major 

1. A minimum of 36 units in philosophy. 

2. Required Courses ( 1 5 units) : 

Philosophy 290 (3) 

Philosophy 291 (3) 

Philosophy 300 (3) 

Philosophy 301 ( 3 ) 

Philosophy 499 (3) 

3. Arej Requirements (12 units, all of which must be upper division) Nine units from areas I. 
II and III (to include courses in at least two of these areas); three units from area IV; 

Arej I — Ethics, Aesthetics, Value Theory. 310, 311, 345, 365, 444. 445 
Area II — Metaphysics. Epistemology: 370. 420, 430. 440, 470 
Area III — Logic, Philosophy of Science: 368, 369. 375. 384, 385, 435. 468, 475 
y\rea IV— History ol Contemporary Philosophy; 305. 32^. 380, 497, 498 

4. Seminsr Requirement Three units to be met by any senior seminar not used to fulfill area 
requirements. (Senior seminars in philosophy are those courses numbered between 444 and 
498.) 

5. Electives: 6 units of philosophy courses, upper- or lower -division, which have rwt been 
used to meet requirements 2-4, above. 

Recommended Work 

A program in philosophy profits greatly through the study of literature, psychology and the social 
sciences. Students of philosophy are advised to supplement their studies in philosophy w ith course- 
work offered in these fields. Philosophy majors are urged to acquire proficiency in a foreign 
language. 

* Univ^sHy administraiive crfficef 


1630—34 10 Am 


Philosophy 277 


Preparation for Graduate School 

Students who are planning to attend graduate school in philosophy are urged to include in their 
programs, besides the required courses, as many as possible of the following: 

Philosophy 310 and 444, Ethics 
Philosophy 368 and 369, Logic 
Philosophy 375, Philosophy of Language 
Philosophy 380, Analytic Philosophy 
Philosophy 420, Metaphysics 
Philosophy 430, Epistemology 
Philosophy 440, Philosophy of Mind 

Transfer Credit 

Work done at other institutions may be counted toward the major, subject to the rules of the 
university and the following departmental rules; ( 1 ) only senior seminars can fulfill the seminar 
requirement; (2) only upper-division work can fulfill upper -division requirements; (3) in no case 
can more than six units of lower-division work taken at another institution count toward the major 
requirement of 36 units. 

MINOR IN PHILOSOPHY 
Requirements for the Minor 

1. A minimum of 21 units in philosophy. 

2. A minimum of 12 upper -division units in philosophy. 

3. A minimum of nine units from among the following courses: Philosophy 290, 291, 300, 301. 


PHILOSOPHY COURSES 

100 Introduction to Philosophy (3) 

An introduction to the nature, methods and some of the main problems of philosophy. Designed 
for freshmen and sophomores. Not a prerequisite for advarKed courses. 

101 Contemporary Moral Issues (3) 

Theories and techniques of political, social and moral philosophy are brought to bear on such 
contemporary moral issues as the justification of civil disobedience, the morality of war and 
revolution, the nature ar>d justification of violence, the legal enforcement of morality, and 
women's liberation. 

110 Comparative Study of the World's Great Religions (3) 

A study of man's religious impulse as viewed from the philosophical standpoint. An attempt will be 
made to analyze and to compare religious exp>erience as expressed in Christianity, Islam, Bud- 
dhism, Hinduism, etc. 

210 Logic (3) 

Analysis of the various forms given to propositions and the basic requirements necessary for valid 
infererKe. Not recommended for philosophy majors or for students interested in mathematics 
Of sciefKe. 

250 Philosophy of Ideas (3) 

Analysis of basic ideas which have shaped modern thought. May be repeated with different content 
for additional credit. 

290 History of Philosophy: Greek Philosophy (3) 

The origins of Western philosophy in arKient Greece, and its develofxnent to the time of Socrates, 
Plato and Aristotle. 

291 History of Philosophy: Medieval Philosophy (3) 

Scholastic p>hilosophy and its precursors in ancient thought. 

300 History of Philosophy: Ratioruilism and Empiricism (3) 

The rationalism of Descartes, Spinoza and Leibniz, and the empiricism of Locke, Berkeley and Hume. 

301 History of Philosophy: Kant and the 19th Century (3) 

The empiricistic and rationalistic influences on Kant, followed by a study of the major trends in 
19th-century philosophy. 


1634—34 10 425 


278 Philosophy 

305 Contemporary Philosophy (3) 

A survey and analysis of the main trends of 20th-century philosophy. Emphasis will be placed on 
such trends as pragmatism, linguistic analysis, and existentialism 

310 Ethics (3) 

An analysis of the problems of human Conduct: motivation, valuing, norms, social demands and 
personal commitments. 

311 Aesthetics (3) 

An investigation mto the conditions and the aims of art and aesthetic experience. 

323 Existentialism (3) 

An analysis of the meaning of existentialism in modern philosophy. 

341 Assumptions of Psychotherapy (3) 

The peculiarly philosophical concepts, assumptions and alternative perspectives pertinent to the 
theory of psychotherapy (especially Freudian psychoanalysis) with emphasis on the Cartesian, 
the mechanistic, and deterministic assumptions of Freud. 

345 Political Philosophy (3) 

Selected problems in political philosophy. 

347 Selected Problems in Philosophy (3) 

An investigation into the significant contributions made to human culture through philosophic 
analysis. May be repeated with a different content for additional credit. 

350 Oriental Philosophy (3) 

A critical survey of major philosophical systems of India, China and japan, including various schools 
of Buddhism, Confucianism and Taoism. 

355 Legal Philosophy (3) 

The nature of various legal institutions and processes, and analysis of the concept of law and 
important subsidiary concepts. 

360 Philosophy of History (3) 

A study of the metaphysical and the logical problems of history. 

365 Social Philosophy (3) 

An analysis and appraisal of theories about the nature of various social, political and legal institutions, 
and of arguments about what these institutions ought to be. 

368 First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

The recognition and construction of correct deductions in the sentential logic and the first-order 
predicate calculus. 

369 Secofwl Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 368 or equivalent. Continuation of the study of the recognition and con- 
struction of correct deductions in the full first-order predicate calculus with identity and the 
calculus of descriptions. Detailed examination of axiomatized deductive systems of propositional 
calculus. 

370 Philosophy of Religion (3) 

An examination of the role of philosophy in shaping theological doctrine, in critically evaluating 
religious experience, in proving the existence of God, and in considering the issues of atheism 
and the existence of evil. 

373 Philosophy in Literature (3) 

Exploration of philosophical themes in literature. Emphasis on recent American novels, although 
British and continental authors will also be read and discussed. 

375 Introduction to the Philosophy of Language (3) 

An introduction to the major issues in semantical theory: truth, meaning, analytic-synthetic, semiot- 
ics. (Same as Linguistics 375) 

380 Analytic Philosophy (3) t i ^ 

Prerequisite: six units in philosophy or consent of instructor. A detailed investigation of selected 
works of such 20th-century analytic philosophers as Russell, Moore, Wittgenstein, Strawson, Ryle 
and Quine. 

384 Philosophy of the Natural Sciences (3) 

Space, time and relativity; quantum mechanics, causality and real existence; laws, theories and 
m^els; topics in the history of science. Some facility in either mathematics or philosophy is 
presupposed. (Same as Physics 384) 


1642—34 10 460 


Philosophy 279 


“5 . of the Social Sciences (3) 

tionist and func .^nal ' accounts sle -n explana.ion; reduc- 

(Same as Social 385) «'"h '^e social sciences is presupposed. 

420 Metaphysics (3) 

problems as fre^om'’and*determinism' m timran'd''l^'°" Philosophical 

substratum, personal identity. ^ becoming, causation, deity, 

425 Introduction to Phenomenology (3) 

.» is:rc ";r ^ 

r,r ' ? '"r '“'““O'' o' “* c-Kw oi 

435 Philosophy of Science (3) 

440 Philosophy of Mind (3) 

~ i!7or^;:Ci W.!c°ftrr', ■' ‘O"'*™ ««l -Kte 

445. Seminar in Value Theory (3) 

-o '-'“o™ 

dV? Philosophy (3) (Formerly 460) 

457 Seminar in Ancient Philosophy (3) 

405 Law and Morals (3) 

^7 Seminar in Continental Rationalism (3) 

ratmnalism. May be tepea'^^^r'dSrornTt'^adX^^^ 

468 Seminar in Advanced Symbolic Logic (3) 

S^-=~SS51SSS 


1647— ;J4 10 485 


280 


Political Science 


475. Seminar in Ihe Philosophy of Language (3) 

Prerequisite; six units in philosophy or consent of instructor. A detailed examination of problems in 
the theory of meaning and formal semantics. 

477 Seminar in British Empiricism (3) 

Prerequisite: Philosophy 300 or consent of instructor. A detailed study of some major British empiri- 
cist, such as LcKke, Berkeley, or Hume, or of some school or phase of British empiricism. May 
be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

487 Seminar in Modern Philosophy (3) 

Prerequisite; Philosophy 301 or consent of instructor. A detailed study of some major modern 
philosopher, such as Kant, Hegel, Nietzsche or Mill, or of some aspect of modern philosophy 
(before 1900). May be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

497 Seminar in Contemporary Analytic Philosophy (3) 

Prerequisite; Philosophy 305 or 380 or consent of instructor. A detailed study of some work or works 
of such 20th-century analytic philosophers as Russell, Mcx)re, Wittgenstein and C. I. Lewis. May 
be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

498 Seminar in Existentialism and Phenomenology (3) 

Prerequisite; six units of philosophy, including Philosophy 323 or 425, or consent of instructor. A 
detailed study of major contemporary continental philosophers such as Husserl, Heidegger, 
Sartre and Merleau-Ponty. May be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

PrercH^uisite; approval of the department. Such study is designed to develop greater comp>etency in 
research. May be repeated for credit. No more than three units may be taken with any one 
adviser in any one semester 

DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE 

FACULTY 
Barbara Stone 
Department Chair 

Sidney Baldwin. Charles Bell, Michael Brown. Keith Boyum. Vincent Buck, Charles Edson, Ann 
Feraru. lulian Foster, Barry Gerber, Philip Cianos. Harvey Crody. Cary Cuertner, Bernard Hyink, 
Karl Kahrs, Albert Liston, )ohn Mason {Emeritus), |ohn Purcell, Ivan Richardson,* John Shippee. 
Vera Simone, Sandra Sutphen, Bruce Wright, Jon Yinger 

ADVISEMENT 

Undergraduates 

Students are strongly urged to see one of the department's undergraduate advisers during their first 
semester at Cal State Fullerton. This is particularly important for community college transfers. Faiture 
to do so may deiay graduation. 

Graduates 

Students must see either their political science or public administration adviser during their first 
semester of study. (See section on graduate programs.) 

Prelaw 

Students who plan to go to law school should see the department's prelaw adviser. Information is 
available about various kinds of law schools, law school entrance requirements (CPA & LSAT), the 
Legal Clinic, prelaw internship and prelaw curriculum. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE 

The undergraduate major in political science prepares students for teaching, government employ- 
ment on the local, state and national level, foreign service, graduate work in political science, law 
school, or leadership in civic and political activities. Political science is also of value to prospective 
special librarians and journalists. 

• Univ^fsitv idnuntsiraiiv^ officer 


1665—34 10 575 


Political Science 281 


Students interested in public administration, and in preparing for careers in the public service, may 
concentrate in that area. In consultation with members of the public administration faculty, they may 
design study plans which include opportunities for cooperative (work-study) arrangements. 

The prelaw student may work out an individual program in consultation with his adviser to meet 
the specific requirements for admission to the law school of his choice. Generally speaking, however, 
there are no such specific requirements. 

Unit and Course Requirements 

The major consists of 30 units of political science of which at least 24 units must be in the upper 
division, plus 12 upper division units in related departments taken with the approval of the adviser. 
These 42 units are in addition to those meeting the general education requirements. Majors are 
required to take appropriate upp>er division courses in other discipline's usually in the social sciences 
(e.g., anthropology, economics, geography, history, psychology, sociology, statistics and philoso- 
phy). Related credit may be given only when specifically approved in writing by a department 
adviser. 

All majors are required to take Political Science 100, American Government, or its equivalent. This 
course does not apply toward the 30 units required of the major, but it may apply toward the 
student's general education requirements. In addition to Political ScierKe 100, there are other 
prerequisites for many of the 400-level courses offered by the department; therefore, the student 
should plan in advarKe to meet course requirements, (e.g. public administration courses require 
Political Science 320, Politics, Public Administration and Policy, as a prerequisite in addition to 
Political Science 100). 

For current information regarding the Department of Political ScierKe, the student is advised to 
consult the departmental bulletin (PS), which is issued each semester. 

INTERNSHIPS 

The department offers several internship>s designed to give the student experience in applying 
political sciefKe knowledge to specific problems. At present these are in international relations 
(Political ScierKe 495); prelaw (Political ScierKe 4%); (Political ScierKe 497) for students interest- 
ed in public administration; and politics (Political Science 498). 

For details, see page 19 of this catalog. 

INTENSIVES (RESEARCH PROSEMINARS) 

Students who want to corKentrate their study on a special topic or problem are urged to take at 
least one of the six-unit intensive classes. Combining lectures/discussion with applied research, these 
courses enable the interested student to become involved in a specific subject. See catalog descrip- 
tion of Political Science 311, 316, 321, 331, 336, 341, 346, 351 and 376 

TEACHING MINOR IN POLITICAL SCIENCE 

The teaching mirx>r is composed of 21 units of political scierKe, in addition to those meeting the 
general education requirements. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE 

This degree is planned for students interested in advarKed graduate work toward the doctoral degree 
in political scierKe, for the professional improvement of high school and community college teach- 
ers, government employees, personnel in the military services, and for individuals interested in civic 
and political leadership. 

Prerequisites 

A student desiring to be classified as candidate for the M.A. in Political ScierKe: 

1 . Must have taken the verbal and quantitative test of the Graduate Record Examination. The GRE 
Advanced Test in Political ScierKe may also be required. 

2. Must have completed an undergraduate degree with a grade-point average of 3.0 or more in 
courses in the major field. If the major field was not political scierKe or another social science, 
the student must have a GPA of 3.0 both in the major and in any upper division social science 
courses taken. 

A student whose GPA is less than 3.0 may appeal to the departmental graduate committee for 
waiver of this requirement, if his/her combined score on the GRE aptitude test is 1 ,000 or more. 
10—86012 


1670—34 10 600 


282 


Political Science 


Study PUn 

A student must design a study plan of 30 units of coursework, subject to the approval of his M.A. 
committee (as part of the requirements for admission to classified status). At least 18 of these units 
must be in political science, of which 15 units must be 500-level courses. 

Each student must take a seminar in both his/her major and minor fields and must take Political 
Science 506 during the first two semesters in the program. 

Three to six units may be a thesis or project. Students writing a thesis must take a final oral 
examination, too. All other students shall take a comprehensive final written examination and an oral 
examination. 

No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken prior to classified status may be applied to a 
student's master's degree program. 

Thesis 

A chairman and two other members of a student's thesis committee shall be selected by the student 
in consultation with the graduate advisory committee. 

A thesis shall include an oral examination which covers the subject matter of the thesis as well as 
a general knowledge of the discipline, particularly the student's major and minor fields. 

Comprehensive Examinations 

Comprehensive examinations shall include written and oral tests in a student's major area of 
concentration, minor area, and the scope and theory of the discipline. All three sections must 
successfully be passed or the entire examination must be retaken. 

A student who does not p)ass the written p>ortion is ineligible to take the oral test. 

A student is entitled to retake the examinations only once if he fails in the initial effort. 

Research Skills 

Each student in the M.A. in Political Science program must dennonstrate one of the following; 

1 . Reading knowledge of a foreign language. 

2. Proficiency in one of the following areas: (a) data analysis, (b) research design, (c) computer 
application or (d) legal research. The respective skills will be tested in examinations adminis- 
tered each semester by the departmental research committee. 

For advisement and further information, consult the M.A. in Political Science adviser. See also "The 
Program of Master's Degrees," page 59 and the Graduate Bulletin. 

MASTER OF PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 

As a major gateway to a professional career in government and public affairs, the M.P.A. degree 
is designed to serve the following purposes: 

1. To prepare students who wish to enter a "generalist career" in public administration, leadir>g 
to such positions as city manager, county administrator, and general administrative officer in 
city, county, state, and national governments; 

2. To strengthen the professional competerKe of those who are already embarked on careers in 
general or in specialized areas of public administration, such as budgeting and finance, person- 
nel development, systems analysis, and relations with the public; 

3. To assist furxrtional specialists, such as those in urban planning, public works, public welfare, 
law enforcecnent. education, community development, and other fields, who believe that they 
need a broader education in public affairs; 

4. To provide academic study for nrK>re experienced or mature persons who wish to prepare 
themselves for second careers in public service; 

5. To increase the administrative practitioner's understanding of the larger political system within 
which public administration takes place; and 

6. To provide academic preparation for those interested in proceeding to the doctoral degree in 
public administration. 


1674—34 10 620 


Political Science 283 


Prerequisites: 

A student desiring to be considered for classified status in the M.P.A. degree program must have 
satisfied the following requirements: 

1 Possession of a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution; 

2. Completion of a minimum of 12 semester units of undergraduate coursework in the social 
sciences; 

3. Attainment of a grade-point average of 3.0 or better in upper-division courses in the major field, 
or completion of nine units of adviser-approved coursework with a CPA of at least 3.0. 

4. Completion of no more than nine semester units of adviser-approved coursework in this 
program; and 

5. Satisfactory completion of the Aptitude Test of the Graduate Record Examination. 

Students with grade-point deficiencies in their baccalaureate work or students who have not satisfied 
the requirement of 1 2 units of social science coursework, but who have had extensive experience 
in public administration, may be classified in the program after they have demonstrated their 
capacity for doing advanced academic work by successfully completing nine semester units of 
approved coursework in this program with a grade-point average of at least 3.0. 

Study Plan 

The degree study plan must include a minimum o\ 30 semester units of adviser-approved coursework 
which meets the following requirements: 

1. Nine units of required core coursework in public administration as follows: 

Units 


Political ScierKe 426 Administrative Research and Analysis * 3 

Political ScierKe 521 Seminar in Public Administration Theory 3 

Political ScierKe 526 Seminar in Administrative Behavior 3 

Total 9 

2. At least 15 units must be at the 500 level. 


3. No more than six units from other institutions may be accepted for transfer credit. 

4. Candidates for the M.P.A. degree must successfully pass a comprehensive examina- 

tion in public administration, but any candidate may, with the approval of the 
M.P.A. adviser, choose either the project (Political ScierKe 597) or the thesis 
(Political Science 598) in lieu of the comprehensive examination. Both the project 
arxl the thesis earn three units of coursework each. 

5. Normally, no nKKe than nine units of postgraduate coursework taken prior to classi- 

fied status may be applied to the master's degree program. 

For further information, consult the M.P.A. adviser. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 59, and tKe Graduate Bulletin. 


POLITICAL SCIENCE COURSES t 

Political ScierKe 100 or its equivalent is the prerequisite for all upper division political scierKe 
courses; 300-level courses beginning with 310 may require coiKurrent enrollment in a research 
proseminar (See discussion of Intensives on page 281 .) . See the departmental bulletin for details not 
provided in the course descriptions below. 

100 American Government (3) 

Explores people, their politics, and power focusing on contemporary issues, changing political styles 
and processes, institutions and underlying values contributing to the stability of the American 
political system. Satisfies state requirements in U.S. Constitution and California state and local 
government. 

• Polilicai Science 426 requires a course in sUtisKs as a prerequisite or consent ot instructor, 
t Prerequrtites may be wanted only with conserx o^ mstructor. 


39—46 5 5 


284 


Political Science 


300 Contemporary Issues in California Government and Politics (3) 

Analysis of contemporary issues in California government and politics, including regional, county, 
and community subdivisions. Emphasis on decision-making and costs of democracy; crisis in the 
cities, flight to the suburbs, and race relations. Comparisons will be made with other states and 
their subdivisions. Satisfies state requirement in California state and local government. 

310 American Political Behavior (3) 

Stresses American culture, social patterns, behavior as they relate to political interaction. To be taken 
in conjunction with Political Science 311 when offered by same instructor. 

311 Research Proseminar in American Political Behavior (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in American political behavior. 
Offered only as companion course to Political Science 310. 

315 American Political Process (3) 

Stresses theoretical and analytic approaches to the study of structures, processes, and institutions 
in the American political system. To be taken in conjunction with Political Science 316 when 
offered by same instructor. 

316 Research Proseminar in American Political Process (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in American political process. 
Offered only as companion course to Political Science 315. 

320 Politics, Policy and Administration (3) 

Public administration and the roles played by administrators in the formulation and execution of 
public |X)licy. To be taken in conjunction with Political Science 321 when offered by same 
instructor. 

321 Research Proseminar in Politics, Policy and Administration (3) 

Research corKepts and techniques applied to an individual project in public administration and 
policy analysis. Offered only as companion course to Political Science 320. 

330 Comparative Political Analysis (3) 

Compares patterns of political behavior and interaction in various political systems. Also analyzes 
the basis for making such comparisons. To be taken in conjunction with Political Science 331 
when offered by same instructor. 

331 Research Proseminar in Comparative Political Analysis (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in comparative political analysis. 
Offered only as companion course to Political Science 330. 

335 Comparative Political Change (3) 

A comparative study of sources and patterns of political change. To be taken in conjurKtion with 
Political Science 336 when offered by same instructor. 

336 Research Proseminar in Comparative Political Change (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in comparative political change. 
Offered only as companion course to Political Science 335. 

340 Political Philosophy (3) 

Problems of evidence and validation in political studies. Distinction between empirical statements, 
value judgments and tautologies. Relationship of fact and value. Systematic approaches to the 
political philosophies of selected thinkers. Take in conjunction with Political Science 341 when 
offered by same instructor. 

341 Research Proseminar in Political Philosophy (3) 

Research corKepts and techniques applied to an individual project in Political Philosophy. Offered 
only as companion course to Political Science 340. 

345 Political Culture and Political Value (3) 

Political values as they relate to aspects of political culture such as perceptions, attitudes and 
participation. To be taken in conjurKtion with Political ScierKe 346 when offered by sanK 
instructor. 

346 Research Proseminar in Political Culture and Political Values (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in political culture and F>olitical 
value. Offered only as companion course to Political ScierKe 345. 

350 World Politics (3) 

The global political system; institutions and processes of interaction among states and other interna- 
tional actors. 


1685—34 11 35 


Political Science 285 


351 Research Proseminar in International Politics (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in international relations. Offered 
only as a companion course to Political Science 350. 

355 Comparative Analysis of Foreign Policies (3) 

Frameworks for analyzing the foreign policies of states, domestic and external determinants of 
foreign policy actions; foreign policy decision-making institutions and processes; foreign policy 
objectives and instruments. 

375 Public Law (3) 

Nature and function of public law particularly within the Anglo-American political tradition. To be 
taken in conjunction with Political ScierKe 376 when offered by same instructor. 

376 Research Proseminar in Public Law (3) 

Research concepts and techniques applied to an individual project in public law. Offered only as 
a companion course to Political Science 375. 

400 Problems in American Government (3) 

Examination of such problems as the role of the federal government regarding pollution, drugs and 
narcotics, (education, law enforcement). The seniority system in Congress; the role of lobbies, 
etc., using government reports, Congressional hearings, newspapers and journals of opinion. 

405 Politics of Experience (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A senior research proseminar stressing the theory and application 
of simulation models, including decision-making, game theory and group encounter techniques 
with respect to politics. Individual and group research encounter techniques will be utilized. 

406 Scope and Theory of Political Science (3) 

A senior proseminar in political science. The nature of the discipline; approaches, tods, concepts 
and theories. Highly recommended for all political scierKe majors planning to do graduate work. 

407 Quantitative Methods in Political Science (3) 

A course in statistics which are relevant to the analyzing of political data. It will be presumed that 
students have only high schod mathematics. Designed mainly for seniors who are thinking about 
going to graduate school or are graduate students. 

410 Political Parties (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The structure and methods by which the political parties operate 
in the American political system with some comparisons to their structure and operation in other 
democratic societies. 

411 Art of Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An examination of public administration as ''art" rather than 
"scierKe." Features the reading of administrative novels and other fictional literature, and the 
review of films arid other audiovisual media. 

412 The Art of Politics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An examination of politics as it is practiced and understood by 
practitioners of the art. A seminar which features guest lecturers. 

413 Pressure Groups and Public Opinion (3) 

The power and growth d farm, labor, business, and noneconomic pressure groups, interest group 
activity in Congress; administration and courts; public opinion and propaganda. 

414 The Legislative Process (3) 

The nature of the legislative process in Congress, state legislatures, city councils and county boards 
of supervisors. Stress is placed on process, policy and reform; the executive as chief legislator; 
interest groups; judicial and bureaucratic law making, and representation. 

415 Political Behavior (3) 

A behavioral approach to understanding how and why people behave politically. Topics include: 
the U.S. power elite, voting behavior, how children learn politics, an examination of the nature 
or nurture aspects of political behavior, and the role of ideology and personality. 

416 The American Presidency (3) 

A study of the growth of the office and power of the President. Emphasizing roles of the President 
as chief policy-maker, administrator, party and public opinion leader. 

418 Public Policy Process (3) 

Analysis of various public policy-making models and evaluation of their applicability to selected 
contemporary policy issues. 


1690 -^ 11 60 


286 


Political Science 


419 Administrative Organization and Process (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. For students planning to enroll in graduate-level public administra- 
tion courses, but who have not had an introductory course in public administration. Topics. as 
organizational theory and practice, decision making, systems analysis, performarKe evaluation 
and administrative improvement. 

420 Governing the Urban Community (3) 

Study of ideas, institutions, interests in the governance of urban communities, specially emphasizing 
decision-making, problem-solving, and policy-making, and administrative institutions. 

421 Public Finance Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320 or 419. Role of finance administration and budgeting in determina- 
tion of public policy. Relationship of assessment administration to governmental revenues and 
expenditures; principles and practices of cost accounting, treasury management, and capital 
budgeting. 

422 Public Personnel Administration (3) 

Prerequisite; Political Science 320 or 419. Growth and development of the civil service and the merit 
system; evaluation of recruitment procedures and examinations; analysis of such topics as 
position classification, salary structures, retirement plans, in-service training, employees organiza- 
tions, and personnel sup>ervision. 

423 Regional Planning and Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320 or consent of instructor. Governmental policies, procedures, and 
agencies involved in planning and development of regions. Survey of regional problems and 
objectives, enr>erging views of regional planning, and investment allocation during development 
process. 

424 Urban Planning and Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 320 or consent of instructor. The origins and development of city 
planning; the legal bases and fundamental concepts of planning are defined; and the organization 
and administration of the planning activity are examined. The major elements of the general plan, 
zoning laws and administration, urban renewal, and capital programming are considered. 

425 Comparative Public Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: Political Science 320 or 419. Cross cultural comparison of public administration sys- 
tems; application of different models of analysis to administrative institutions; bureaucracy; 
ecology of public administration in modernized and developing societies; and role of pKjblic 
administration in nation-building. 

426 Administrative Research and Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Political ScierKe 320 or 419. Concepts and methods employed in administrative re- 
search and analysis, with emphasis on organization and procedure surveys, performance evalua- 
tion techniques, administrative data sources and their uses, and report writing. 

427 Metropolitan Politics and Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The politics and administration of metropolitan area institutions 
of government, with emphasis upon their problems arxf alternative solutions. 

428 Administrative Systems and Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite; Political Science 320 or 419. Administrative systems and analysis in contemporary 
government, with emphasis upon systems planning and design, data processing, work flow, 
control systems, operations research, cost-benefit analysis and forms design. 

429 Public Personnel Training (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 422 or consent of instructor. Training methodology in pHjblic adminis- 
tration and affairs including exploration of the knowledge, problems, methods, and institutions 
in the training of public (personnel. 

430 Government and Politics of a Selected Nation-State (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 330 or consent of instructor. Analysis of the political institutions and 
processes of a selected nation-state. May be repeated for credit. 

431 Government and Politics of a Selected Area (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 330 or consent of instructor. Comparative analysis of the structures 
and functions of national political systems in a selected geographic area. May be repeated for 
credit. 


1694—34 11 80 


Political Science 287 


440 Political Ideologies and Attitudes (3) 

Content and appeals of contemp)orary ideologies. Social, economic and psychological bases of 
political attitudes and preferences. 

442 Problems of Democratic Political Thought (3) 

Problems relevant to philosophies and theories of democratic political systems, with emphasis on 
American political thought. 

443 The Theory and Philosophy of Marxism (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 340. An analytical study of Marxist theory and philosophy from its 
pre-Hegelian roots to the present. 

450 Conduct of American Foreign Relations (3) 

Formulation and execution of foreign policy. Powers of the President, Senate, and House. Functions 
of the State Department, U.S. Information Agency, role of the Pentagon; public opinion. Separa- 
tion of powers, checks and balances, and cooperation in the conduct of American foreign policy. 

451 Problems in International Relations (3) 

Prerequisite. Political Science 350. Examination of selected problems such as nationalism, colonial- 
ism, anticolonialism, neutralism, racism, ethnic and linguistic mirxjrities, border disputes, govern- 
mental instability, economic poverty, disease, illiteracy and overpopulation. 

452 Foreign Policy of a Selected Country or Group of Countries (3) 

Objectives, capabilities, policy-making processes, and implementation of the foreign policies of a 
particular country or group of countries. Focus may be on United States, Soviet Union, Latin 
America or other countries or areas. May be repeated for credit. 

461 The United Nations and Other Public International Organizations (2) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 350. Structure and functions of United Nations and various specialized 
and regional international organizations. 

470 Judicial Process (3) 

Prerequisite: Political ScierKe 375 or consent of instructor. The nature, functions and roles of courts 
in the Anglo-American legal system; the nature, functions and roles of major participants in the 
American legal system, including judges, attorneys and citizens. 

473 Seminar in Constitutional Law: Governmental Power (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 375 or consent of instructor. Case studies, selected problems on the 
nature, sources and extent of governmental authority, typically involving social and economic 
regulation, state-national relationships, arxJ relationships among legislative, executive and judicial 
branches of government. 

474 Seminar in Constitutional Law: Civil Rights and Civil Liberties (3) 

Prerequisite: Political Science 375 or consent of instructor. Case studies in selected constitutional 
rights and liberties, typically involving relationships between the irnlividual arni government 
which are affected in particular by the Bill of Rights ar>d the 14th Amendment. 

475 Administrative Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Political ScierKe 320 or 375 or consent of instructor. The study of law as it affects public 
officials and agerKies in their relations with private citizens arxJ the busirKSS community. Atten- 
tion is given to appropriate case materials and regulatory practices. 

476 International Law (3) . 

Prerequisite: Political Science 350 or 375 or consent of instructor. The sources and nature of 
international law; the law of war and peace; the rights and duties of nations in their international 
relationships, the World Court: purpose, problems, and prospects. 

481 Politics Through Literature (3) 

Uses the novel as a means of explicating political behavior in various nation-states. 

485 Politics of Change (3) 

Focuses on a specific cultural, religious, or ethnic interest group or on the impact of a particular 
ideology, nwvement or individual on political processes and behavior. Topics vary from semester 
to semester. May be repeated for credit. 

490 Seminar in Selected Topics (3) 

Seminar in selected topics to be announced on a semester basis. May be repeated for credit. 

495 International Internship (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Students work 10 hours per week with officials of foreign govern- 
ments located in the Los Angeles-Orange County area, usually consular officials. Individual 
supervision is provided by faculty and cooperating officials. Interns meet with instructor by 
arrangement. 


1701—34 11 107 


288 


Political Science 


4% Prelaw Internship (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Designed to acquaint students with the legal profession primarily 
in the public rather than private spheres. A supervised working commitment of 10 hours weekly 
with an assigned individual or organization. 

497 Government Internship (3) 

Prerequisites: public administration concentration and consent of instructor. Students work 15-20 
hours per week as sufjervised interns in a public agency or related organization. Supervision is 
provided by the faculty and cooperating agency. In addition to the job experience, interns meet 
in a weekly three-hour seminar. 

498 Political Internship (3) 

Prerequisites: political science concentration and consent of instructor. Students work 8-12 hours 
per week with elected officials or candidates for elective office. Individual supervision is provided 
by the faculty and cooperating individuals. Interns meet with the instructor by arrangement. May 
be repeated for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1>3) 

Open to advanced students in political science by permission of the department chair. 

501 Readings in Political Science (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A seminar surveying the major works in the discipline of political 
science; strongly recommended for all students seeking an M.A. in Political Science or an M.P.A. 

506 Seminar in the Scope and Theory of Political Science (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The nature of the discipline, approaches, tools, corKepts and 
theories. 

511 Seminar in American Politics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A comprehensive examination of the political process in the 
United States. 

515 Seminar in Political Behavior (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An intensive analysis of selected topics in political behavior. 

520 Seminar in Public Finance Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of selected topics in pniblic finance administration. 

521 Seminar in Public Administration Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of the concepts, models and ideologies of public adminis- 
tration within the larger political system. 

522 Seminar in Public Personnel Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of selected topics in pHjblic personnel administration. 

524 Seminar in Environmental Planning (3) 

Prerequisite, consent of instructor. Specialized study of problems and issues in the physical and 
human environment of the urban community. 

525 Seminar in Metropolitan Area Government (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of the different approaches to metropolitan areawide 
government, with s|:>ecial emphasis on interjurisdicitional conflict and cooperation and the roles 
of state and national governments. 

526 Seminar in Administrative Behavior (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Concepts, functions and techniques of administrative leadership; 
group dynamics; decision-making; the organization arxi the individual. 

527 Seminar in Comparative Public Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of selected topics in comp»arative public administration. 

528 Seminar in Public Administration and Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of the interplay between public policy development and 
program administration. 

529 Seminar in Administrative Management Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of selected topics in organization and management theory. 

531 Seminar in Comparative Politics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A comparative study of political systems. 

535 Comparative Political Parties (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Comparative analysis of the structure, behavior, and roles of 
political parties and party systems. An attempt to construct a theory of parties, based on the 
evidence of a number of national political parties. 


1706—34 11 130 


Psychology 289 


540 Seminar Readings in Political Philosophy (3) 

Prerequisite; Undergraduate preparation in political theory or philosophy. Readings of selected 
classics in political philosophy. Politics from the perspective of normative political theory. 

541 Seminar in Contemporary Political Theory (3) 

An analysis of non-Marxist social and political theories of the late 19th and 20th centuries with 
emphasis on the disintegration of community, alienation and boredom, the rise of irrationalism, 
and social-psychological bases of totalitarian movements. 

550 Seminar on Foreign Policy Formulation (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A study of various models of the foreign policy-making process. 
Emphasis will be on the interaction between domestic and international sources for policy 
formulation. 

551 Seminar in International Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of selected problems in international relations with empha- 
sis on individual research and contributions within the framework of a seminar. May be repeated 
for credit. 

571 Seminar in Public Law (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of select^ topics in public law. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

598 Thesis (3*6) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of departnnent chair. May be repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 

FACULTY 
David Perkins 
Department Chair 

Robert Abbott, Frank Bagrash, Christopher Cozby, Ernest Dondis, Peter Ebersole, Margaret Fitch, Jara 
Krivanek, Deanna Kuhn, Richard Lindley, William Lindner, Carol Lindquist, Richard McFarland, 
Douglas Navarick, Russell Revlis, Michael Scavio, Louis Schmidt, Don Schweitzer, William Smith, 
Edward Stearns, Joseph Thomas, Loh Seng Tsai (Emeritus), George Watson, Arthur Webber, 
Geoffrey White, Stanley Woll 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PSYCHOLOGY 

The major in psychology consists of 36 units of lower and upper division work designed for students 
(1 ) who want a sound background in psychology as a scierKe, (2) who want a basic understanding 
of human behavior as a supplement to some other major course of study, and (3) who wish to 
acquire a thorough undergraduate training in psychology in anticipation of graduate study. 

Requirements for the Major 

Lower Division 

Psychology 101 Introductory Psychology (3) 

Psychology 161 Elementary Statistics (3) 

Psychology 202 Principles of Psychology (3) 

Upper Division 

A minimum of 27 unrts of upper division work is required for a major in psychology. Fifteen units 
are required as follows: 

Psychology 302 Experimental Psychology; Learning and Motivation (3) 

Psychology 303 Experimental Psychology: Sensation Perception or 
Psychol^y 321 Physiological Psychology (3) 

Psychlogy 351 Social Psychology or 
Psychology 331 Psychology of Personality (3) 

Psychology 461 Croup Psychological Testing (3) 

Psychology 408 History of Psychology (3) 


1722—34 11 210 


290 Psychology 

A minimum of 12 additional units in psychology courses will be selected in consultation with the 
academic adviser. Not more than three units of Psychology 499, Independent Study, may be counted 
toward the major. 

Each course counted toward the major must be completed with a grade of C or higher. 
Recommended Related Courses 

Courses from each of the following areas according to the student's interests: ( 1 ) social sciences; 
(2) physical sciences; (3) biological sciences; (4) mathematics; (5) humanities. 

Students planing to do graduate work in psychology are advised to plan additional work in biological, 
physical, and computer sciences and to include at least a one-semester course in college mathemat- 
ics. Undergraduate work in foreign languages is also recommended. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN PSYCHOLOGY 

The Master of Arts in Psychology is designed to broaden the student's knowledge in the major 
content areas of psychology and to develop skills in analyzing and carrying out research. The degree 
is useful for those intending to do advanced graduate work in psychology or to teach in a community 
college and for those seeking careers in a variety of community positions. 

Prerequisites 

Students to be admitted to the program must: (1 ) meet the general prerequisites for graduate work 
formulated and recommended by the university;* (2) have completed a bachelor's degree with 
a major in psychology or 24 units in upper division psychology including a course in statistics, a 
course in the history of psychology, an upper division laboratory course in psychology, at least two 
of the following courses: physiological psychology, learning, sensation and perception, rTK>tivation, 
and at least one of the following courses: social p>sychology, personality, developmental psychology, 
psychological testing; (3) have completed a baccalaureate degree with a 2.5 general average and 
a 3.0 average in psychology; ( 4 ) show satisfactory performance on the aptitude test of the Graduate 
Record Examination. 

Study Plan 

The Master of Arts in Psychology requires a minimum of 30 units of approved graduate work in the 
major field, irKluding the completion arnl acceptance by the Psychology Department Graduate 
Studies Committee of a written thesis. 

The student, in consultation with an adviser on the staff of the Psychology Department, shall develop 
a program of studies which will be submitted to the Graduate Studies Committee of the Department 


of Psychology for approval. 

Course requirements for the M.A. in Psychology: Units 

Psychology 501 A,B Proseminar 0 

Psychology 510 Experimental Design 3 

Psychology 520 Seminar: Experimental Psychology 3 

Psychology 521 Seminar: Personality or 

Psychology 551 Seminar: Social Psychology 3 

Psychology 598 Thesis 3-6 

Elective upper division or graduate courses 9-12 

(up to 6 units may be in related areas outside psychology) 

Total 30 


Students are required to receive a grade of B or better in Psychology 501 A, B, to pass a comprehen- 
sive examination in psychology, and to complete 1 2 units of the study plan before being advanced 
to candidacy. No more than three attempts to pass the comprehensive examinations will be allowed. 
An oral defense of the thesis is required at the completion of the student's program. 

For further information ar>d a copy of the departmental questionnaire, consult the graduate office 
of the Department of Psychology. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 59, and the Graduate BuUetin. 

• Appiicjition lo ihe pfogram is not complefed until a questionnaire (obtainable by mail from the graduate olfice ol the Psychologv 
Department) is completed and refunded to that oWice. 


1727—34 11 235 


Psychology 291 


PSYCHOLOGY COURSES 

101 Introductory Psychology (3) 

General Introduction to basic corKepts and problems in psychology as a behavioral discipline. 
Emphasis on the human organism as an adapting system, with attention to genetic origins; normal 
development capacities; problem-solving and adjustment to stress. 

161 Elementary Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite; Math 120. Descriptive statistics, hypothesis testing, analysis of variance, correlation. 

202 Principals of Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite; Psych 101. A course for psychology majors stressing the fundamentals of research 
methods as they apply to basic areas in psychology. Emphasis on student participation in 
conducting experiments and analyzing data. 

302 Experimental Psychology: Learning and Motivation (3) 

Prerequisites; Psych 101, 202, 161 or consent of instructor. Selected experimental investigations in 
human and animal learning, memory, thinking, problem solving, and motivation with appropriate 
lecture and discussion. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

303 Experimental Psychology; Sensation and Perception (3) 

Prerequisites; Psych 101, 202, 161 or consent of instructor. Selected experimental investigation with 
appropriate lecture and discussion. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

304 Experimental Psychology: Comparative (3) 

Prerequisites; Psych 101, 202, 161 or consent of instructor. Comparison of species with respect to 
position on the phylogenetic scale; the relation of changes in motivation, emotionality, and 
adaptiveness of behavior to changes in sensory, motor, endocrine and neural structures as well 
as genetic and environmental factors. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

311 Educational Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite; six units in psychology. Application of psychological research and theory to the educa- 
tive process. Major attention given to the problems of learning, individual differences, child 
capacities, and behavior. 

321 Physiological Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites; Psych 202 and Bio Sci 101 or equivalent. Relation between behavioral and biological 
processes. Anatomy and physiology of the nervous system, role of neural and humoral agents 
in complex behavior and psychosomatic disorders, behavioral effects of brain lesions and drugs. 

331 Psychology of Personality (3) 

Prerequisite; Psych 202. Concepts of personality development, structure, and dynamics, with empha- 
sis upon problems, methods, and findings in the study of personality. 

341 Abnormal Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 231 or 331. Dynamics, symptoms, causes, treatment, and prevention of neuroses, 
psychoses, alcohol and drug addiction, psychosomatic illnesses, and character disorders. 

342 Mental Health (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. An analysis of the concepts of mental health with emphasis upon positive 
factors in the individual, group, and community which are conducive to improving mental health 
Credit ckR given as part of psychology major. 

351 Social Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite; Psych 101 . Study of phenomena of social interaction and the nature of group processes 
and influences. Attention paid to the intrapsychic effects of group influences on the individual's 
behavior. 

361 Developmental Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. Concepts and processes involved in the understanding of the psychological 
development of the person from infancy through adulthood Attention is given to stages in the 
development of cognition, emotion, perception, motivation, and to the interaction of these 
processes. 

391 Industrial Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 161 or 202. Study of psychological principles and techniques in industrial and 
business settings. Includes selection, placement, training, human factors, environmental influ- 
eiKes, problems of people at work, and consumer behavior. 


1732-04 11 260 


292 Psychology 

401 Behavior and Sexual Identity (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101, and 331 or 361, or consent of instructor. 

Developmental, physiological, personality and cultural approaches to sex role behavior in men and 
women. 

404 Advanced Topics in Animal Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 304, Anthro 201 or Bio Sci 466 and upper division standing, or consent of 
instructor. Advanced topics in animal behavior and comparative psychology. Emphasis on social 
behavior, organizations, and communication. Population dynamics, aggressive behavior, evolu- 
tion of behavior patterns and intelligence will be covered. Library and field work required. 

408 History of Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 302, and 303 or 321 . Survey of the development of psychology from early times 
to the present. 

411 Human Learning and Memory (3) 

Prerequisite; Psych 302. Theoretical and experimental analysis of the acquisition, retention, and 
transfer of verbal and motor responses. Consideration of single vs. multiple merrwry storage 
systems and of the role of reward, information, and motivation in human learning. 

412 Psychology of Learning (3) 

Prerequisite; Psych 302 or consent of instructor. Principles of learning according to the major 
theoretical systems. Critical evaluation of the theories and systems. 

413 Perception (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 303 or consent of instructor. Psychological problems in perception. 

415 Cognitive Processes (3) 

Prerequisite; Psych 302, 303 or 304. Consideration of theory and research with respect to problem 
solving, thinking, concept learning, language, decision making and judgment, cognitive structure, 
cognitive development. 

416 Motivation (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 302 or consent of instructor. Concepts and evidence concerning the activation 
and direction of behavior, including consideration of needs, wishes, drives, incentives and 
preferences. 

417 Introduction to Psycholinguistics (3) 

Prerequisites: six hours of upper division work in psychology or linguistics, or consent of instructor. 
Survey and analysis of psychological and linguistic approaches to the study of language. Innate 
and learned aspects of language development, motivational and social asp)ects of language, 
symbolism, language disorders arni universals. (Same as Linguistics 417) 

431 Theories of Personality (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 331 or consent of instructor. Personality structure, development, arni dynamics 
according to major theories. Research methods as they aF>ply to personality theory. 

436 Sport Psychology (3) 

Discussion and analysis of literature, research and issues dealing with psychological aspects of play, 
games and sport. Credit not given as part of psychology major. (Same as Physical Education 436) 

440 Laboratory Instrumentation in Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 302 and 303 or 321 . A laboratory course in basic instrumentation in psychology. 
Major attention given to sensory, analog, digital, ar>d electron>echanical instrumentation. (2 
hours lecture and 3 hours laboratory) 

441 Experimentation in Personality (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 331. Laboratory experience in personality structure and dynamics. Corxfucting 
an experiment and willingness to serve as an experimental subject are required. Subjects cov- 
ered, e.g., projective tests as personality nr>easures, creativity, p)ersonality structure, vary accord- 
ing to desire of instructor and students. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

451 Experimental Social Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 161 or equivalent, 202 and 351. Study of selected topics in social interaction, 
group processes and influences. Laboratory experiments in attitude formation and change; group 
processes such as communication, problem solving, and norm formation; interpersonal influerKe 
and perception. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

452 Interpersonal Processes (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 351 or Sociology 341, or consent of instructor. Theory and research on basic 
interpersonal processes (interpersonal judgment, communication, social performarKe, attraction 
and affiliation) and current models of the interaction process. 


1737—34 11 285 


Political Science 293 


453 Attitude Formation and Change (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 351 or consent of instructor. An intensive study of the theories of attitude 
development, stressing research methodologies in this area. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

455 Small Group Process (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 351 . A survey of the theories and methods of research used in the study of small 
groups with laboratory application in a small ongoing group in which the student will participate. 
(2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

459 Individual Differences (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 161. The nature, extent and correlates of human individual differences with an 
emphasis on methodology. 

461 Group Psychological Testing (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 161 or equivalent. Intelligence, aptitude, interest, and personality testing. Theory, 
construction, evaluation, interpretation, and uses of psychological tests. 

463 Experimental Child Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites. Psych 161 or equivalent, 202 and 361, plus junior-senior standing. Study in depth of 
selected methodological techniques and tactics for investigating and interpreting child and 
developmental psychological phenomena. Laboratory experience in experimental investigation 
of physiological, cognitive, social and personality development. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours labora- 
tory) 

465 Advanced Psychological Statistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 161 and Math 120 or equivalent. Statistical infererKe. 

466 Social Science Computer Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: Quantitative Methods 289 or permission of the instructor. The use of computers in 
psychology. Batch processing; interactive computing; on-line experimentation. 

467 Correlational Methods (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 161. The theory and techniques of correlational analysis. 

471 Behavior Modification (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 302 and senior standing. An exposition and evaluation of the theory, research, 
and techniques for modifying human behavior. Emphasis an operant conditioning as applied to 
retarded and psychotic behavior. 

475 Psychopharmacology (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 321 or 15 units of biological science. Basic principles underlying the use of drugs 
and related substarKes to modify experience and behavior. Historical ar»d cultural variations in 
drug usage. Psychological, nwdical arxl social potentialities and limitations of these techniques. 

476 Psychophysiology of Mental Illness (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 341 and either 475 or 321 or six units or biological science or consent of 
instructor. The genetic, biochemical and neurophysiological bases of schizophrenia, affective 
and neurotic disorders; drug therapy of mental illness; relation of somatic therapy to other forms 
of psychiatric treatrr^ent. 

481 Survey of Clinical Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites. Psych 331, 341 and 461. Development and contemporary aspects of the field. Meth- 
ods, diagrKJsis, therapeutic techniques, research, and problems. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: completion of at least one upper division laboratory course and consent of instructor. 
Iryfividual library study or experimental investigation under direction of a staff member. May be 
repeated for credit. 

501A Proseminar (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor, A course to prepare beginning graduate 
students for more advanced courses. Areas stressed are sensation and perception, physiological 
psychology and learning. 

501 B Proseminar (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A course to prepare beginning graduate 
students for more advanced courses. Areas stressed are operant conditioning, personality, social 
f>sychology, and abnormal psychology. 


1742—34 11 310 


294 Religious Studies 

510 Experimental Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 161 and 465. Principles and methods of planning and carrying out systematic 
investigations on the behavior of complex organisms, interdependence of experimental design 
and statistical evaluation of results, and the opportunity for practice in formulation of testable 
hypotheses. 

511 Seminar in Psychological Measurement (3) 

Logic and methodology of measurement in the areas of intelligence, personality, judgment, and 
attitudes: problems of test construction and validation. May be repeated for credit. 

515 Psycholinguistics (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 515) 

520 Seminar: Experimental Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing. Psych 465 and 501 A. Study in depth of the data, methods, problems 
and current developments in sensation-perception; animal learning; human motor and verbal 
learning; thinking and problem solving; and motivation. May be rep>eated for credit. 

521 Seminar: Personality (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and Psych 501 B. An intensive study of central problems in personal- 
ity. Intensive study of current problems and theories in these areas. May be repeated for credit. 
523 Seminar: Comparative Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of instructor. A study in depth of some aspect of animal 
behavior. Comparisons between species and biological determinants of behavior will be empha- 
sized. May be repeated for credit. 

531 Individual Mental Testing (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 461. Study of the major tests of intelligerKe. Emphasis on practical experience 
in administration, scoring and interpretation of these instruments. 

551 Seminar: Social Psychology (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and Psych 501 B. An intensive study of central problems and major 
theories in the field of social psychology. May be repeated for credit. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisites: formal admission to car>didacy and consent of instructor. The writing of a thesis based 
on a major study or experiment in psychology. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of instructor. Individual library study or experimental 
investigation urKler direction of a staff member. May be repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF RELIGIOUS STUDIES 

FACULTY 
Donald Card 
Department Chair 

Daniel Brown, Morton Fierman, joseph Kalir, James Santucci 
BACHELOR OF ARTS IN RELIGIOUS STUDIES 

This program is designed to encourage students to acquire the intellectual tools and scholarly 
background required for a critical urKJerstanding of the forms and traditions of religion that have 
appeared in human culture. 

Students in fields other than religion are efKouraged to ask the questions which pertain to the real 
excitement at the boundary lirws where the usual studies converge. The aim of each course is an 
open and nontraditional examination of ultimate questions as they apply to contemporary situations. 
The relevance of belief in both Eastern and Western civilizations for the cultural development of man 
is examined. An understanding of prejudice, war and other dimensions of religious value systems 
may be gained. 

Major in Religion 

Six hours of introduction to world religions and six hours of a senior seminar in two semesters on 
contemporary religious issues are required. 

In addition, the student will be asked to choose at least six hours of courses in lower or upper division 
studies from each of the following categories: 

1 . The History and Sociology of Religion: religion studied as a cultural phenomenon with the 


1746—34 11 330 


Religious Studies 295 


historical context; its development and controversies; religion and scierKe; religion and eco- 
nomics; the sociology of religion. 

Courses to be selected from: 

Art: 201 A,B 

History: 412A,B, 417A,B, 425B, 466B 
Sociology: 458 
Anthropology: 421 

Religious Studies: 330, 331, 333, 334, 345A,B, 405, 406, 415, 416, 430, 445, 476, 480. 485, 486 

2. The Phenomenology of Religion: religion as a human phenomenon; the psychology of religion; 
the philosophy of religion; religion and poetry, the arts. 

Courses to be selected from: 

Philosophy: 312, 323, 370 
Interdisciplinary Center: 402,403, 404, 451 

Religious Studies: 343, 375, 376, 377, 431, 433. 434, 450, 459, 475. 477, 480, 481, 485, 486 

3. Comparative Religion: a study of religious traditions and practices in Western and non-Western 
cultures: religious scriptures; comparative theology; major religious figures.Courses to be select- 
ed from: 

Interdisciplinary Center: 303, 422 ^ 

Religious Studies: 250, 280, 330, 331, 332, 333, 334, 360, 376, 415, 416, 430, 432, 435 
Courses in other schools and departnrwnts may be accepuble upon consulution with the chair of 
the Department of Religious Studies. 


Minor in Religion 

The minor in religious studies is composed of at least 20 upper division units in religious studies 
exclusive of the general education requirements. For further information, contact the department 
chair. 


RELIGIOUS STUDIES COURSES 

111 Problems in the History of Religious Thought (3) , . . 

Prerequisites Philosophy 110 or consent of department chairman. An examination of some of the 
perennial problems that have appeared in the religious traditions of both East and West. 

200 Introduction to Christianity (3) .u 

An examination of the Christian scriptures and their background in the light of modern exegesis with 
special emphasis on the Synoptic Gospels. The second half of the course will examine written 
creeds and liturgical formulae associated with the Orthodox, Roman, and Protestant commun- 


250 The Religion of Islam (3) . . , . . . . . . i 

The religion of Islam, its background and main teachings: the rise of Islam, the caliphate, Islamic 
theology, teachings, institutions, mysticism and philosophy. 

280 Sects and Cults (3) -ri_ j i 

Prerequisites: Philosophy 1 10 or Religious Studies 1 1 1 or consent of instructor. The origin, deyelop- 
ment, and interrelations between Apollonian (Gnostic) and Dionysian sects in Western religion. 

330 Judaism: From the Beginning to the Middle Ages (3) 

The historical role of the religion of the Jews including the Genesis and the development of Judaism. 

331 Judaism: From the Middle Ages to the Present . 

The history and contemporary social significance of the religion of the Jews from 

to the present, with emphasis upon contemporary Judaism. Special emphasis will be devoted to 
the distinctive characteristics of Orthodox, Conservative and Reform Judaism. 

332 The Land of the Bible: Everyday Life in Old Testament Times (3) 

How people lived in the Mediterranean world in the first century of the Chnstian era. To 

the understanding and kindle the imagination of the readers of the ad Testament in the ight 
of the staggering progress which has been made in Biblical archaeology during the course of the 
present century.